Professional Documents
Culture Documents
WaterGEMS V8i
1-1
DAA038650-1/0001
1-2
WaterGEMS V8i 1
Getting Started in Bentley WaterGEMS V8i 1
Municipal License Administrator Auto-Configuration 1
Starting Bentley WaterGEMS V8i 2
Working with WaterGEMS V8i Files 2
Exiting WaterGEMS V8i 4
Using Online Help 4
Software Updates via the Web and Bentley SELECT 8
Troubleshooting 8
Checking Your Current Registration Status 9
Application Window Layout 9
Standard Toolbar 10
Edit Toolbar 12
Analysis Toolbar 13
Scenarios Toolbar 15
Compute Toolbar 16
View Toolbar 18
Help Toolbar 20
Layout Toolbar 21
Tools Toolbar 25
Zoom Toolbar 28
Customizing WaterGEMS V8i Toolbars and Buttons 30
WaterGEMS V8i Dynamic Manager Display 31
1-i
1-ii
1-iii
1-iv
Pumps 402
PUMP DEFINITIONS DIALOG BOX 403
Efficiency Points Table 411
1-v
1-vi
1-vii
1-viii
1-ix
1-x
1-xi
1-xii
1-xiii
1-xiv
1-xv
1-xvi
Menus 1195
File Menu 1195
Edit Menu 1198
Analysis Menu 1200
Components Menu 1202
View Menu 1204
Tools Menu 1207
Report Menu 1210
Help Menu 1211
1212
1-xvii
1-xviii
1-xix
1291
Glossary 1299
Glossary 1299
A 1299
B 1299
C 1300
D 1301
E 1302
F 1303
G 1304
H 1304
I 1305
L 1305
M 1306
N 1307
O 1308
P 1308
R 1309
S 1310
T 1311
V 1312
W 1312
X 1313
1-xx
Getting Started in
Bentley WaterGEMS
V8i
Municipal License Administrator Auto-Configuration
Starting Bentley WaterGEMS V8i
Working with WaterGEMS V8i Files
Exiting WaterGEMS V8i
Using Online Help
Software Updates via the Web and Bentley SELECT
Troubleshooting
Checking Your Current Registration Status
Application Window Layout
1-1
The .wtg file and the drawing file (.dwh, dgn, dwg or .mdb) file contain user supplied
data that makes it easier to view the model and should also be zipped and transmitted
with the model when moving the model.
Other files found with the model are results files. These can be regenerated by running
the model again. In general these are binary files which can only be read by the model.
Saving these files makes it easy to look at results without the need to rerun the model.
Because they can be easily regenerated, these files can be deleted to save space on the
storage media.
When archiving a model at the end of the study, usually only the *.wtg.mdb, *.wtg
files, and the platform specific supporting files (*.dwh, *.dgn, *.dwg or *.mdb) need
to be saved.The file extensions are explained below:
1-2
.out - primary output file from hydraulic and water quality analyses
.xml - xml files, generally libraries, window and other settings. Some modules
like ModelBuilder also use .xml files to store settings independent of the main
model.
1-3
or
From the File menu, choose Exit.
Note:
If you have made changes to the project file without saving, the
following dialog box will open. Click Yes to save before exiting, No to
exit without saving, or Cancel to stop the operation.
1-4
Click the expand (+) icon to the left of the subtopic heading or the heading
itself.
1-5
Click the collapse (-) icon to the left of the subtopic heading or the heading
itself.
The navigation pane has the following tabs:
1. On the Contents tab, click the folder symbol next to any book folder (such
as Getting Started, Using Scenarios and Alternatives) to expand its
contents.
2. Continue expanding folders until you reach the desired topic.
3. Select a topic to display its content in the topic pane.
To display the next or previous topic according to the topic order shown in the
Contents tab
To display the next topic, click the right arrow or to display the previous topic, click
the left.
1-6
Note: If you select an entry that has subtopics, a dialog box opens
from which you can select the desired subtopic. In this case,
select the subtopic and click the Display button.
To search for text in the help content
1. Click the Search tab.
2. In the search field, type the word or phrase for which you are searching.
3. Click the List Topics button.
Results of the search display in the list box below the search field.
4. Select the desired topic and click the Display button.
or
Double-click the desired topic.
Search results vary based on the quality of the search criteria entered in the Search
field. The more specific the search criteria, the more narrow the search results. You
can improve your search results by improving the search criteria. For example, a word
is considered to be a group of contiguous alphanumeric characters. A phrase is a
group of words and their punctuation. A search string is a word or phrase on which
you search.
A search string finds any topic that contains all of the words in the string. You
can improve the search by enclosing the search string in quotation marks. This
type of search finds only topics that contain the exact string in the quotation
marks.
To add a help topic to a list of favorite help topics
1. In the Contents, Index, or Search tabs, select the desired help topic.
2. Click the Favorites tab.
The selected help topic automatically displays in the Current topic field
at the bottom of the tab.
3. Click the Add button.
To display a topic from your Favorites list
1-7
Troubleshooting
Due to the multitasking capabilities of Windows, you may have applications running
in the background that make it difficult for software setup and installations to determine the configuration of your current system.
Try these steps before contacting our technical support staff
1. Shut down and restart your computer.
2. Verify that there are no other programs running. You can see applications
currently in use by pressing Ctrl+Shift+Esc in Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
Exit any applications that are running.
3. Disable any antivirus software that you are running.
Caution:
4. Try running the installation or uninstallation again (without running any other
program first).
1-8
1-9
Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar contains controls for opening, closing, saving, and printing
WaterGEMS V8i projects.
1-10
Use
New
Open
Close
Close All
1-11
Save
Save All
Print
Preview
Edit Toolbar
The Edit toolbar contains controls for deleting, finding, undoing, and redoing actions
in WaterGEMS V8i.
1-12
Use
Undo
Redo
Delete
Clear
Highlight
Find Element
Analysis Toolbar
The Analysis toolbar contains controls for analyzing WaterGEMS V8i projects.
1-13
1-14
Use
Totalizing
Flow Meters
Hydrant Flow
Curves
System Head
Curves
Post
Calculation
Processor
Energy Costs
Darwin
Calibrator
Darwin
Designer
Darwin
Scheduler
Criticality
Pressure Zone
Scenarios Toolbar
The Scenarios toolbar contains controls for creating scenarios in WaterGEMS V8i
projects.
1-15
Use
Scenario List
Box
Scenarios
Alternatives
Calculation
Options
calculation settings.
Compute Toolbar
The Compute toolbar contains controls for computing WaterGEMS V8i projects.
1-16
Use
Validate
Compute
EPS Results
Browser
1-17
Fire Flow
Results
Browser
Flushing
Results
Browser
Calculation
Summary
User
Notifications
View Toolbar
The View toolbar contains controls for viewing WaterGEMS V8i projects.
1-18
Use
Element
Symbology
Background
Layers
Network
Navigator
Selection Sets
Queries
Prototypes
FlexTables
Graphs
1-19
Profiles
Contours
Named Views
Aerial View
Properties
Customizations
Help Toolbar
The Help toolbar provides quick access to the some of the commands that are available in the Help menu.
1-20
Use
Check for
SELECT
Updates
Bentley
Institute
Training
Bentley
SELECT
Support
Bentley.com
Help
Layout Toolbar
The Layout toolbar is used to lay out a model in the WaterGEMS V8i drawing pane.
1-21
Use
1-22
Select
Pipe
Junction
Hydrant
Tank
Reservoir
Pump
Variable Speed
Pump Battery
Valves
Isolation Valve
Spot Elevation
Turbine
Periodic HeadFlow
Air Valve
1-23
1-24
Hydropneumatic
Tank
Surge Valve
Check Valve
Rupture Disk
Discharge to
Atmosphere
Orifice Between
Pipes
Valve with
Linear Area
Change
Surge Tank
Border
Text
Line
Tools Toolbar
The Tools toolbar provides quick access to the same commands that are available in
the Tools menu.
1-25
To
1-26
Use
Active Topology
Selection
ModelBuilder
Open the TRex wizard where you can select the data
source type, set the elevation dataset, choose the model
and features.
Trex
SCADAConnect
Skelebrator
Skeletonizer
Load Builder
Thiessen Polygon
Demand Control
Center
Unit Demand
Control Center
Hyperlinks
User Data
Extensions
Compact
Database
Synchronize
Drawing
Update Database
Cache
This command copies the model result files (if any) from
the project directory (the directory where the project
.mdb file is saved) to the custom result file directory. The
custom result directory is specified in
Tools>Options>Project tab. This allows you to make a
copy of the results that may exist in the model's save
directory and replace the current results being worked on
with them.
Update Results
from Project
Directory
Copy Results to
Project Directory
1-27
Assign Isolation
Valves to Pipes
Customize
Options
Zoom Toolbar
The Zoom toolbar provides access to the zooming and panning tools.
1-28
To
Use
Zoom Extents
Zoom Window
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Zoom
Realtime
Zoom Center
Zoom
Selection
Zoom Previous
Zoom Next
Pan
Refresh
Drawing
1-29
1-30
3. Click the space to left of the toolbar button you want to add. A check mark is
visible in the submenu and the button opens in the toolbar.
or
Click the check mark next to the toolbar button you want to remove. The button
will no longer appear in the toolbar.
dynamic windows called managers. For example, the look of the elements is
controlled in the Element Symbology manager while animation is controlled in
the EPS Results Browser manager.
1-31
1-32
Keyboard
Shortcut
Manager
Scenariosbuild a model run from
alternatives.
<Alt+1>
<Alt+2>
<Alt+3>
<Alt+4>
<Alt+5>
<Alt+6>
<Ctrl+1>
<Ctrl+2>
<Ctrl+3>
<Ctrl+4>
<Ctrl+5>
Toolbar
Button
Manager
Keyboard
Shortcut
<Ctrl+6>
<Ctrl+7>
<Ctrl+8>
<Ctrl+9>
<Ctrl+0>
Propertiesdisplay properties of
individual elements or managers.
<F4>
<F5>
<F7>
<F8>
Compute.
<F9>
When you first start Bentley WaterGEMS V8i , only two managers are displayed: the
Element Symbology and Background Layers managers. This is the default workspace.
You can display as many managers as you want and move them to any location in the
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i workspace.
1-33
If you return to the default workspace, the next time you start Bentley WaterGEMS V8i , you will lose any customizations you might have made to the
dynamic manager display.
To open a manager
1. Do one of the following:
2. If the manager is not already docked, you can drag it to the top, left- or right-side,
or bottom of the WaterGEMS V8i window to dock it. For more information on
docking managers, see Customizing Managers.
Customizing Managers
When you first start Bentley WaterGEMS V8i , you will see the default workspace in
which a limited set of dock-able managers are visible. You can decide which managers
will be displayed at any time and where they will be displayed. You can also return to
the default workspace any time.
There are four states for each manager:
FloatingA floating manager sits above the Bentley WaterGEMS V8i workspace
like a dialog box. You can drag a floating manager anywhere and continue to work.
You can also:
1-34
Close a floating manager by clicking on the x in the top right-hand corner of the
title bar.
Switch between multiple floating managers in the same location by clicking the
managers tab.
Close a docked manager by left clicking on the x in the upper right corner of the
title bar.
Change a docked manager into a floating manager by double-clicking the title bar,
or by dragging the manager to the desired location (for example, away from the
side of the Bentley WaterGEMS V8i window).
Switch between multiple docked managers in the same location by clicking the
managers tab.
Docked dynamicA docked dynamic manager also docks to any of the four sides of
the Bentley WaterGEMS V8i window, but remains hidden except for a single tab.
Show a docked dynamic manager by moving the mouse over the tab, or by clicking
the tab. When the manager is showing (not hidden), a horizontal pushpin in its title bar
indicates its dynamic state.
You can also:
Close a docked manager by left-clicking on the x in the upper right corner of the
title bar.
Change a docked dynamic manager into a docked static manager by clicking the
push pin (converting it from vertical to horizontal).
Switch between multiple docked managers in the same location by moving the
mouse over the managers tab or by clicking the managers tab.
ClosedWhen a manager is closed, you cannot view it. Close a manager by clicking
the x in the right corner of the managers title bar. Open a manager by selecting the
manager from the View menu (for example, View > Element Symbology), or by
selecting the button for that manager on the appropriate toolbar.
1-35
1-36
Chapter
2-37
2-38
3. Choose Tools > Options > Units. Since you will be working in System International units, click Reset Defaults to System International.
4. Verify that the Default Unit System for New Project is set to SI. If not, select from
the menu.
5. Select the Project tab to make sure Drawing Mode is set to Scaled.
2-39
9. Choose File > Save as. In the Save File As dialog box, double-click the Lesson
folder.
10. Enter the file name MYLESSON1.WTG for your project, and click Save.
2-40
3. Verify that the Default Unit System for New Project is set to SI. If not, select from
the menu.
4. Click OK.
5. Select File > Open
6. Select the existing AutoCAD file LESSON1.DWG from the Lesson folder.
7. With the drawing open, select File > Save As. In the Save Drawing As dialog box,
double-click the Lesson folder, enter the filename as MYLESSON1.DWG and
click Save to save the file in your \Bentley WaterGEMS V8i \Lesson directory.
Now, select the Layout Elements tool in the Bentley WaterGEMS V8i toolbar.
Then, move the cursor onto the drawing pane and right-click to select Reservoir
from the shortcut menu. Click the approximate location of reservoir R-1 (see
diagram above). You will be prompted to set up the project. Click Yes to open the
Project Setup Wizard.
8. In the Project Setup Wizard, title the project Lesson 1Steady State Analysis
and click the Next button.
9. Choose your desired settings. For this lesson, use the program default values.
Click the Next button.
10. Select the Scaled button located under the Drawing Scale option. Set the horizontal scale to 1 mm = 4000 mm, and the vertical scale to 1 mm = 400 mm.
11. Click the Next button to continue.
12. The element prototype buttons allow you to set default values for each element
type. We will use the default prototype values in this lesson, so click the Finished
button.
2-41
1. Select Pipe
2. Move the cursor on the drawing pain and right click to select Reservoir from the
menu or click
2-42
10. Insert the PRV from the menu, and junction J-6 by selecting the Pipe layout tool
and placing the elements in their appropriate locations.
Be sure to lay out the pipes in numerical order (P-7 through P-9), so that their
labels correspond to the labels in the diagram. Right-click and select Done from
the menu to terminate the Pipe Layout command.
11. Insert the tank, T-1, using the Pipe layout tool. Pipe P-10 should connect the tank
to the network if you laid out the elements in the correct order.
2-43
Dialog BoxesYou can use the Select tool and double-click an element to bring
up its Properties editor. In AutoCAD, click the element once with the Select tool
to open the elements editor.
Alternative EditorsAlternatives are used to enter data for different What If?
situations used in Scenario Management.
2-44
b. Click New
c. Enter a label for the new pressure zone called Connection Zone.
d. Click Close.
e. Select the zone you just created from the Zone menu.
f.
4. Open the Tank Editor for tank T-1 and enter the following:
Elevation (Base) = 200
Elevation (Minimum) = 220
Elevation (Initial) = 225
Elevation (Maximum) = 226
Diameter (m) = 8
Section = Circular
2-45
2-46
c. Click New
Click on it and then in the Set Field Options box set the Units to L/min
.
g. Click OK.
2-47
i.
Click Close.
j.
2-48
2-49
Click to exit.
8. Specify user-defined lengths for pipes P-1, P-7, P-8, P-9 and P-10.
a. Double-click pipe P-1 to open the Pipe Editor.
b. Set Has User Defined Length? to True. Then, enter a value of 0.01 m in the
Length field. Since you are using the reservoir and pump to simulate the
connection to the main distribution system, you want headloss through this
pipe to be negligible. Therefore, the length is very small and the diameter will
be large.
c. Enter 1000 mm as the diameter of P1.
d. Repeat for pipes P-7 through P-10 using the following user-defined lengths
and diameters.
P7 = 400
2-50
2-51
1. Click FlexTables
2. Double-click Pipe Table and click OK. Fields that are white can be edited, but
yellow fields can not.
2-52
2-53
2-54
1. Click
2. Double-click or right click to open the Properties manager and make sure that the
Time Analysis Type is set to Steady State.
Click to close.
3. Click Validate
4. Click Compute
7. Click to Save
project.
2-55
5. Click OK.
Step 1: To Create Demand Patterns
2-56
2. By default, the demand pattern is set to Fixed. Enter 23 l/min for Flow. (If field
already has a number from previous lesson, type over it.)
2-57
4. Click New
to open the
2-58
f.
Time from
Start
Multiplier
.4
1.3
12
1.2
15
1.2
18
1.6
21
.8
24
.5
The Residential Patterns dialog box should look like the following:
2-59
5. Click New
2-60
Time from
Start
Multiplier
.6
.8
1.6
12
1.6
15
1.2
18
.8
21
.6
24
.4
The Commercial Patterns dialog box should look like the following:
6. Click Close.
7. In the Pattern field, select Residential from the menu.
8. In the second row, enter a flow of 15 l/min and select Commercial as the pattern
for this row.
2-61
12. Now, you will set up an additional demand pattern to simulate a three-hour fire at
node J-6.
b. Click the Pattern column for row three and select the ellipsis
the Pattern Manager.
c. Click New
to open
2-62
Time from
Start
Multiplier
18
21
24
After you have filled in the table, look at the Graph in the lower section of the
Patterns box.
The value of the multiplier is zero, except for the period between 18 and 21
hours, when it is 1.0. Since the input the demand as 2000 l/min., the result will
be a 2000 l/min. fire flow at junction J-6 between hours 18 and 21.
j.
Click Close.
13. Select the new pattern, 3-Hour Fire, from the Pattern selection box in row three
of the demands table.
2-63
2. Double-click or right click to open the properties manager and select EPS from
the Time Analysis Type menu.
Click to close.
3. Click Validate
4. Click Compute
2-64
9. Click Save
2-65
Scenario Management
Scenario Management
One of the many project tools in Bentley WaterGEMS V8i is Scenarios Management.
Scenarios allow you to calculate multiple What If? situations in a single project file.
You may wish to try several designs and compare the results, or analyze an existing
system using several different demand alternatives and compare the resulting system
pressures.
A scenario is a set of Alternatives, while alternatives are groups of actual model data.
Scenarios and alternatives are based on a parent/child relationship where a child
scenario or alternative inherits data from the parent scenario or alternative.
In Lessons 1 and 2, you constructed the water distribution network, defined the characteristics of the various elements, entered demands and demand patterns, and
performed steady-state and extended period simulations. In this lesson, you will set up
the scenarios needed to test four What If? situations for our water distribution
system. These What If? situations will involve changing demands and pipe sizes. At
the end of the lesson, you will compare all of the results using the Scenario Comparison tool.
To open the existing project
1. Open MYLESSON2.WTG.
2. After you have opened the file, choose File > Save As.
3. Enter the filename MYLESSON3 and click Save.
4. Choose File > Project Properties, and change the Project Title to Lesson 3
Scenario Management.
5. Click OK.
2-66
In this example, you need to set up a different physical or demand alternative for each
design trial you want to evaluate. Each alternative will contain different pipe size or
demand data.
In Bentley WaterGEMS V8i , you create families of alternatives from base alternatives. Base alternatives are alternatives that do not inherit data from any other alternative. Child alternatives can be created from the base alternative. A Child alternative
inherits the characteristics of its parent, but specific data can be overridden to be local
to the child. A child alternative can, in turn, be the parent of another alternative.
2. Click to open the Demand alternative. The Base-Demand alternative contains the
demands for the current distribution system.
2-67
Scenario Management
3. Change the default demand name.
a. Click Rename
b. Enter the new name, Average Daily with 2000 l/min. Fire Flow.
2-68
c. Double-click to open the Demand Alternatives editor for the new alternative
which shows the data that was inherited from the parent alternative.
If
you change any piece of data, the check box will become selected because
that record is now local to this alternative and not inherited from the parent.
2-69
Scenario Management
5. Click in the Demand Collection column for node J-6. Change the 2000 l/min. fire
demand to 4000 l/min.
2-70
to open Scenarios.
There is always a default Base Scenario that is composed of the base alternatives.
Initially, only the Base is available, because you have not created any new
scenarios.
2. Click Rename
Flow at J-6 (EPS).
2-71
Scenario Management
3. Create a child scenario from the existing base scenario to incorporate the new
demand alternative.
a. Right-click on the scenario to New > Child Scenario.
b. Enter a scenario name of 4000 l/min. Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS) and click to
open the Scenarios Properties box.
The new scenario lists the alternatives as inherited from the base scenario.
4. Your new Child Scenario initially consists of the same alternatives as its parent
scenario. To set the Demand Alternative to the new alternative you created, 4000
l/min. Fire Flow.
a. Click in the Demand Alternative field
b. From the menu, select the 4000 l/min. Fire Flow alternative.
The new alternative is no longer inherited from the parent, but is local to this
scenario.
c. Click to exit the scenario.
2-72
.
2. Select both check boxes next to the scenario names in the Batch Run dialog box.
3. Click Batch.
4. Click Yes at the prompt to run the batch for two scenarios.
5. After computing finishes, click OK.
6. To see the results for each scenario select the Scenario, right-click, and click
Report.
Step 4: To create a Physical Alternative
2-73
Scenario Management
You need to further examine what is going on in the system as a result of the fire flow,
and find solutions to any problems that might have arisen in the network as a result.
You can review output tables to quickly see what the pressures and velocities are
within the system, and create new alternatives and scenarios to capture your modifications.
1. Create a new scenario having a new physical alternative with the pipe sizes for P8 and P-9 increased to 200 mm.
a. Click
b. Select 4000 l/min. Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS) in the list of Scenarios.
c. Click New, and select Child Scenario.
d. Name the new Scenario P-8 and P-9 Set to 200 mm.
e. Click the Alternatives tab, and choose Physical Alternative > Base Physical >
New > Child Alternative.
f.
2-74
Rename the new Child Alternative P-8 and P-9 Set to 200 mm.
h. Click Close.
i.
j.
Choose Computer > Batch Run and select the check box for Pipes P-8 and P9 Set to 200 mm.
k. Click Batch and then Yes to confirm and run the Scenario.
l.
3. Click FlexTables
4. Open the Junction FlexTable and run the Report for All Time Steps.
5. Close the open boxes and save the project.
2-75
Reporting Results
Reporting Results
An important feature in all water distribution modeling software is the ability to
present results clearly. This lesson outlines several of Bentley WaterGEMS V8i
reporting features, including:
Reports, which display and print information on any or all elements in the
system.
Color Coding, which assigns colors based on ranges of values to elements in the
plan view. Color coding is useful in performing quick diagnostics on the network.
For this lesson, you will use the system from the Scenario Management lesson, saved
as MYLESSON3 in the WaterGEMS\Lesson directory. If you did not complete this
lesson, you may use the file LESSON4.WTG (LESSON4.DWG in AutoCAD).
To open the existing project
1. Open MYLESSON3.WTG.
2. Select File > Save As.
2-76
Reports
to open Scenarios.
2. Select the 2000 l/min., 3 hour fire flow at J-6 (EPS) scenario.
3. Click
2-77
Reporting Results
4. Choose Report > Scenario Summary
2-78
2-79
Reporting Results
7. You can print or copy the results to another program.
10. Click Report and select for either the Current Time Step or All Time Steps.
Every element can generate a report in the same general format, which includes
the name of the calculated scenario and information describing the elements
properties and results in detail.
You can print this report or copy it to the clipboard using these icons.
2-80
g. Click to Close.
2. Choose Report > Element Tables > Pipe.
3. Right-click the Material column and choose Filter > Custom from the menu.
2-81
Reporting Results
4. The query builder opens.
a. Double-click on Material.
b. Click the = equal sign.
c. Click
e. Click Apply
f.
5. Use the Global Edit tool to modify all of the roughness values in the table.
a. Right-click the Hazen-Williams C column and select Global Edit.
b. Select Set from the Operation list.
2-82
a. Click Edit
b. Scroll through the list on the left to view the types of data available for placement in the table. You can select an item to add or remove from the table.
2-83
Reporting Results
c. You can adjust the order which the columns will be displayed by using the
arrows below Selected Columns
d. Click Ok to save your changes or Cancel to exit the table without making
change.
8. Click to exit the table.
9. Choose Analysis > Scenarios > Compute Scenario > Batch Run.
10. Check 5-yr.-old D.I.P., and then click Batch.
11. Click to exit the table when you are finished.
Create a Print Preview and Profile
1. To create a print preview of the distribution system, choose File > Print Preview
This option will create a preview of the entire system regardless of what the
screen shows.
The print preview opens in a separate window, which can then be printed or
copied to the clipboard.
Click the Copy button to paste the view into another program.
2. Click to close.
2-84
in the
6. The Profile Setup dialog box opens with the selected elements appearing, in order,
in the list.
2-85
Reporting Results
7. After you create the profile, you can make adjustments to its appearance by
clicking Profile Series Options or Chart Options.
2-86
8. Click OK.
9. View result in the drawing pane.
2-87
Reporting Results
When you want to label network attributes use the Annotation feature. With it, you
can control which values are displayed, how they are labeled, and how units are
expressed.
1. Choose View > Element Symbology > New Annotation
.
2. Select the Field Name to annotate.
2-88
c. Click Calculate Range to get the minimum and maximum values for the variable displayed at the top of the dialog box. The maximum must be higher than
the minimum.
6. Click to Save
project.
2-89
2-90
4. Click OK.
5. Previously, you ran an analysis with a fire flow at node J-6 by manually adding a
large demand to the individual node. Before running the automated fire flow analysis, you will create a new Demand Alternative, removing that demand. In the
U.S., fire flows are generally added to max day demands.
a. Choose Scenarios > Alternatives > Demand Alternative.
b. Expand Demand Alternative and select Average Daily with 2000 l/min. Fire
Flow, right-click New > Child Alternative.
c. Double-click to open the new alternative and check J-6.
2-91
6. Click to Rename
7. You are going to analyze the fire flows by adding to the Maximum Day Demands,
which are 1.5 times the Average Day Demands.
a. Right-click on Base-Average Daily then select New > Child Alternative.
b. Double click to open the Alternative and right-click the Flow column and
select Global Edit. Set the Operation to multiply, and enter a value of 1.5.
2-92
e. Click to Rename
8. Select the Fire Flow alternative and expand to select the Base-Fire Flow Alternative.
9. Click Edit
Create a selection set to choose from the Fire Flow Nodes drop-down menu.
For this example, a fire flow analysis is only needed for the junctions at the
four street corners in our drawing.
g. The Fire Flow Alternative manager can remain open. Choose the drawing and
while pressing the <Shift> key, click nodes J-1, J-2, J-3, and J-4.
h. Right-click to Create Selection Set and then name the set FireFlowJunction14 and click OK.
2-93
2-94
2-95
c. Click Batch to run the analysis, and Yes at the confirmation prompt.
When the calculation is complete, click OK and close the Scenarios Manager.
d.
Step 3: Viewing Fire Flow Results
1. Make sure that Automated Fire Flow Analysis is selected in the Scenario list
box.
2. Click View > FlexTables > Tables - Predefined > Fire Flow Report
2-96
2-97
5. Click OK.
The water distribution system has already been set up for you. It has one reservoir and
one tank. The system serves primarily residential areas, with some commercial water
use as well. There are two pumps connected to the reservoir. However, under normal
conditions, only one pump will be in use. A background drawing has been included
for reference.
If you would like to turn off the .DXF background in the WaterGEMS V8i version,
clear the background check box in the Background Layers pane.
2-98
3. Name the new alternative Initial Age = 0. Since you are assuming an initial age of
0 everywhere in the system, you do not need to enter any initial ages.
2-99
c. Double-click on the new scenario to open the properties box. In the Age
Alternative field select Initial Age = 0, from the drop-down menu.
2-100
j.
6. Click Compute
2-101
If you get a message about Bentley WaterGEMS V8i being unable to determine
the limits for mapping, make sure that Age Analysis is selected in the Scenario
drop-down list, in the toolbar.
12. Click Apply.
15. A good way to check if your network has had sufficient time to reach an equilibrium point is to look at Age vs. Time graphs for your elements.
2-102
c. Click OK.
From the graph, you can see that once a repeating pattern is reached, the age
of the water fluctuates between approximately 34 and 49 hours in 24-hour
periods. Looking at these equilibrium ranges for various nodes can help guide
you in setting up initial water age values in subsequent runs.
d. Click to close.
Step 2: Analyzing Constituent Concentrations
2-103
La be l:
Bulk Re a ction:
W a ll Re a ction:
Diffusivity:
6. Leave the Unlimited Concentration check box selected, and click OK.
7. Click Close to exit the Constituent Library. You should now be back in the
Constituent Alternative Editor.
Tip:
8. Select Chlorine from the Constituent list box. Notice that the Bulk Reaction in
the table is automatically updated.
9. In the Pump and Valve tabs, set the pumps and valves to an initial concentration of
1 mg/l.
10. Click the Junction tab, and initialize the chlorine concentrations by entering a
value of 1 mg/l at each junction node. (Right-click the column heading and use
Global Options to Set the initial concentration.)
11. In the Reservoir tab, enter a value of 2.0 mg/l for the reservoir.
12. Set the tanks concentration to 0.5 mg/l.
13. Close the Editor and the Alternatives Manager.
14. Now, open the Scenario Control Center and set up a new Scenario in order to
run the Constituent Analysis.
a. Create a new Child off of the Age Analysis Scenario by highlighting it and
clicking Scenario Management > Add > Child Scenario.
b. Enter Chlorine Analysis as the new scenario name, and click OK.
2-104
2-105
In the Calculation tab, select the Trace button in the Analysis section, and
leave everything else set to the inherited values.
2-106
2-107
Description
Advantages
Disadvantages
Database
Connection
Create connections
to import and export
model data using
common database
and spreadsheet
formats.
Shapefile
Connection
Create connections
to import and export
model data in ESRI
shapefile format.
Polyline to
Pipe
Conversion
Convert existing
lines, polylines, and
blocks in DXF/DWG
format into pipes and
other network
elements.
Elements are
assigned default
labels as they are
created. Only
topographic data can
be imported, not
attribute values.
Requires careful
review on the part of
the modeler.
2-108
Main FileThe main file is a binary file with an extension of .SHP. It contains
the spatial attributes associated with the map features. For example, a polyline
record contains a series of points, and a point record contains x and y coordinates.
Index FileThe index file is a binary file with an extension of .SHX. It contains
the byte position of each record in the main file.
Database FileThe database file is a dBase III file with an extension of .DBF. It
contains the non-spatial data associated with the map features.
All three files must have the same file name with the exception of the extension, and
be located in the same directory.
Listed below are the files you will be importing. Only the main files are listed;
however, corresponding .SHX and .DBF are present as well.
PresJunc.shp
PresPipe.shp
PRV.shp
Pump.shp
Reservoi.shp
Tank.shp
If you have a program such as ArcView or ArcGIS that allows you to view shapefiles,
begin by setting up a view with all of the shapefiles (themes) listed above turned on. If
you completed the Water Quality Analysis lesson, you should recognize the layout
from that lesson. You can look at the data table for each of the themes to see what you
will be importing. When you have finished reviewing the shapefiles, close the application.
2-109
2-110
2-111
13. Leave the Shapefile Unit set to m, and select the check box to establish missing
connectivity data from spatial data, and click Next.
14. Click the Ellipsis () button next to the Shapefile field. Browse and select the
file PRESJUNC.SHP from the \Bentley\wtg\Lesson directory; click Open.
15. Set the Key/Label field to LABEL. This item designates the field that Bentley
WaterGEMS V8i matches with its own element labels, so that data will be
assigned to the correct place.
16. Using the Field Links table, match the data types available in Bentley WaterGEMS V8i to the data types you will be bringing in from the shapefile.
17. In row 1, select Elevation from the WaterGEMS column and ELEV from the
Database column. Set the Unit to m to set the coordinate from the shapefile to
meters. If the units in your shapefile were different than the units set up in Bentley
WaterGEMS V8i , then Bentley WaterGEMS V8i would automatically do the
necessary unit conversions.
2-112
18. Fill in the next row, so that your entries correspond to the table below. Click Next
when you are finished.
Pressure Junction Shapefile Connection
Bentley
WaterGEMS
V8i
Database
Elevation
ELEV
Base Flow
DEMAND
Unit
m
l/min
19. Set up the Pressure Pipe connections. Continue by entering the information below
for the Pressure Pipe and clicking Next to proceed to the next dialog box. The
shapefile for each type of element will be located in the \Bentley\wtg\Lesson
directory (for example, select the PRESPIPE.SHP file for the pressure pipe
connection), and the entry for the Key\Label field will always be LABEL. Your
Field Links tables should look like the tables that follow.
2-113
Database
Diameter
Hazen-Williams
C
Unit
mm
Database
Elevation
ELEV
Diameter
Initial HGL
HGL
Initial Valve
Status
INITIAL_ST
Unit
m
mm
m
Database
Elevation
ELEV
Initial Pump
Status
INIT_PUMP
Pump Definition
PUMP_DEFIN
Unit
2-114
Bentley
WaterGEMS
V8i
Database
Elevation
ELEV
Unit
Database
Unit
Tank Diameter
TANK_D
Base Elevation
BASE_ELEV
Minimum
Elevation
MIN_ELEV
Initial HGL
INITIAL_HGL
Maximum
Elevation
MAX_ELEV
m
m
m
20. When you are finished setting up the shapefile connections, click Next to proceed.
The Synchronize Now? dialog box will open.
21. Make sure the Synchronize Shapefile Connection and In check boxes are
selected because you will be reading data from the shapefiles.
22. Click Finished and Yes when prompted if you want to proceed.
23. A Status Log is generated showing the elements as data that is read into the model.
After the import is complete, you should get a yellow light in this window, indicating that the synchronization was successful but that there are warnings. If there
2-115
25. Now, examine the network that you imported. Notice that it looks like the network
from Water Quality Analysis on page 2-97, and many of the pipes have bends and
curves in them. Since you have topographic information stored in the shapefile,
these bends can be imported. Because you created a scaled drawing, the pipe
lengths will be read from the layout.
Also notice that the default scenario, Base, is currently displayed as the current
scenario. Whenever data is brought in through a database or shapefile connection,
it is automatically written into the alternatives referenced by the current scenario.
Similarly, whenever data is exported, the data associated with the current scenario
will be used.
26. To run the model, click the Compute button in the toolbar, and then click
Compute in the dialog box. Now that you have calculated data, you could export
the new data to your GIS database by going into the database and creating a new
label for it. In Part 2Importing Data from a Database on page 2-108, you will
use an almost identical procedure to export pressures using database connections.
27. After you are finished, close the Scenario Editor. Continue with Part 2
Importing Data from a Database on page 2-108 or save your file as MyLesson7
and exit Bentley WaterGEMS V8i .
2-116
2-117
2-118
11. Enter the Connection Label Lesson 7, Part 2 for this connection, and click the
Add button.
2-119
2-120
Bentley
WaterGEM
S V8i
Database
Unit
X (m)
Y (m)
Elevation
Elevation (m)
Demand
Demand (m)
Database
+Start Node
Start Node
+Stop Node
Stop Node
Unit
2-121
Database
Diameter
Diameter
Material
Material
Hazen-Williams C
Roughness
Length
Length (m)
Unit
mm
24. Repeat the above procedure to set up connections for Reservoir, Tank, and Valve
connections, using information from the following tables.
Reservoir Database Connection
Bentley WaterGEMS
V8i
Database
Unit
X (m)
Y (m)
Elevation
Elevation (m)
2-122
Bentley WaterGEMS
V8i
Database
Unit
X (m)
Y (m)
Tank Diameter
Tank Diameter
(m)
Base Elevation
Minimum Elevation
Minimum Elev#
(m)
Initial HGL
Maximum Elevation
Maximum Elev#
(m)
Note:
Bentley WaterGEMS
V8i
Database
Unit
X (m)
Y (m)
Elevation
Elevation (m)
Diameter
Diameter (mm)
Initial HGL
Initial Grade
Setting (m)
Initial Status
mm
m
25. After you finish setting up the database connections, click OK to close the Database Connection Editor.
26. Click the Synchronize In button. When the message box opens, click Yes to
proceed.
2-123
2-124
41. Finally, if you reopen the LESSON7.XLS file in Microsoft Excel, you will see
that the pressure values have now been added.
Step 3: Converting CAD Drawing Entities
The Polyline to Pipe tool lets you take existing CAD entities and use them to quickly
construct a water distribution network. Although this feature is called Polyline to Pipe,
line and block entities can be converted as well (polylines and lines can be converted
to pipes; blocks can be converted to any available node type).
Building a model based on graphical elements can be an error-prone process. Difficulties can arise due to the fact that a drawing may appear to be correct visually, but may
contain problems that are not readily apparent. For example, what appears to be a
single line in a drawing could in fact be made up of many line segments, or it could be
made up of two lines, one directly on top of another.
2-125
2-126
Discharge (l/
min.)
Shutoff:
70
Design:
50
1200
Max. Operating
35
2000
12. Create one more prototype, this time for the PRVs. They both have an elevation of
129 m and an HGL setting of 185.2 m.
13. Click OK, and then Finished. The Polyline to Pipe Wizard opens.
In the WaterGEMS V8i interface:
14. Browse to and open the file LESSON7.DXF, located in the Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson
directory.
15. Leave the .DXF unit set to meters, and click Next.
2-127
17. Select the option to join pipes at T-intersections within the specified tolerance, and
click Next.
2-128
21. You will be given the option to alter the prototype settings. This option is useful if
you want to import in multiple passes, grouping like data together to make the
data entry process more automated. For instance, you could have chosen to import
all of the 100 mm pipes, then the 150 mm pipes, etc., changing the prototype each
time. For this example, you will leave the prototypes as set in the Project Setup
Wizard. Click Next.
22. Make sure that the layers HMI_NODE and HMI_PIPE are both checked, and
click Finished to perform the conversion.
23. When it is completed, close the statistics window.
2-129
24. A Drawing Review dialog box opens with five junctions listed in it. The purpose
of the Drawing Review is to alert you to problems or assumptions made during the
import.
Find any one of these junctions by highlighting it in the list and clicking Go To.
The drawing pane will center on the junction and select it. If you have difficulty
seeing the selected element, increase the zoom factor in the Drawing Review
dialog box.
25. Open the element, and click the Messages tab. There will be a message telling you
that the node was added during the Polyline to Pipe conversion. The junction had
to be added because there was no node at that location in your .DXF drawing, but
there was a polyline endpoint. In the Polyline to Pipe Wizard, you set Bentley
WaterGEMS V8i to add junctions to endpoints.
Even though you now have your drawing converted to a pipe network, it is still
not ready to be run because you can only bring in element types and network
connectivity using this type of import. Before you could run this model, you
would have to input data for elevations, demands, pipe sizes, etc., either directly
into Bentley WaterGEMS V8i or through database connections.
In the AutoCAD interface:
The WaterGEMS elements are now on layer 0, since that layer was current when you
performed the conversion. If you turn off layers HMI_PIPE and HMI_NODE, only
the actual Bentley WaterGEMS V8i elements will be visible.
2-130
Hillview Reservoir
EL 300ft
P-1
R-1
5
P-1
J-15
J-2
P-2
Bronx
P-1 4
P-3
J-3
J-14
J-4
P-4
P-1 3
J-5
P-5
P-1 2
J-13
Man hattan
J-18
P-18
J-19
P-17
J-12
J-6
P-1 1
P-6
Queen s
J-7
J-11
P-1
0
7
P-
J-8
P1
P8
J-20
2
P1
P-2
0
P-9
J-9
Richmond
P-1
6
J-10
Brooklyn
J-16
J-17
2-131
2-132
Diameter
(in.)
Hazen
Williams
Roughness
Cost
Ductile Iron
100
0.00
Ductile Iron
60
100
176.00
Ductile Iron
72
100
221.00
Ductile Iron
84
100
267.00
Ductile Iron
96
100
316.00
Ductile Iron
108
100
365.00
Ductile Iron
120
100
417.00
Ductile Iron
132
100
469.00
2-133
g. Choose New Pipe Sizes as the option group you want to use and click OK.
20. Click the Options tab.
a. Set the GA Parameters as follows:
GA Parameters
GA Parameter
Value
150
Population Size
50
Cut Probability
1.7
Splice Probability
60.0
Mutation Probability
1.5
Random Seed
0.4
Penalty Factor
25000000
2-134
Value
Maximum Trials
50000
200
c. Set the Top Solutions, Solutions to Keep to 3. This sets how many results will
be available as results (see Step 2: Viewing Results).
21. Click Compute to calculate the optimized design.
While the calculation proceeds, Bentley WaterGEMS V8i displays the Darwin
Designer Run Progress dialog box.
22. Review the Messages tab for notes pertaining to the calculation.
23. Review the Status tab to see what are the results of your calculation.
Completed SuccessfullyIf this green bar displays, then there were no errors
encountered by the calculation. If there were errors, you would be notified
and could look on the Messages tab to see what they were.
Best FitnessIn this case, you were calculating based on cost. So, the best
fitness is the least costly solution that the GA found.
2-135
24. Click Close to close the Darwin Designer Run Progress dialog box.
Step 2: Viewing Results
After you calculate the optimized design results display. You can review results and
look for violations of parameters.
1. Click Hide Results to minimize the results area and Show Results to restore the
results area.
2. From the solutions drop-down list, select the solution you want to see: Solution 0.
Notice that each solution is color coded; use the color code as a key when viewing
graphs.
Solutions are ranked by fitness, with Solution 0 being the best.
3. In the Design Groups tab, if you scroll down, you can see there are six pipes specified. These are the pipes that Darwin added to the scenario to provide the optimal
solution (note, we are not rehabilitating pipes in this example):
New Pipes
Pipe
2-136
Diameter
(in.)
Cost
GA-P-7
96
3033600.00
GA-P-16
120
11008800.00
GA-P-17
108
11388000.00
GA-P-18
72
5304000.00
GA-P-19
72
3182400.00
GA-P-21
60
4646400.00
2-137
P-1
R-1
5
P-1
J-15
J-2
P-2
Bronx
P-1 4
P-3
J-3
J-14
J-4
P-4
P-1 3
J-5
P-5
P-1 2
J-13
Man hattan
J-18
J-19
P-18
P-17
J-12
J-6
GA-P -1 8
GA-P -17
P-1 1
P-6
Queen s
GA
J-7
J-11
P7
7
P-
GA
-
P-1
0
J-8
P1
P-
19
P8
J-20
P-9
J-9
P-2
0
2
PGA
P-
J-10
P-1
6
GA
-P
-1 6
21
Richmond
Brooklyn
J-16
J-17
2-138
New pipes to be sized are pipes 54, 68, 70, 72, 74, 76.
In green, there are older pipes, perhaps representing an old downtown section
In purple, there are newer pipes, perhaps representing newer additions to the
water supply network
3. Click Compute to calculate the system pressures and tank levels for the Existing
Condition.
If you want, you can run a simulation or inspect the pressures and tank volumes,
but the purpose for calculating this condition was for a tank level comparison
between the Existing and Future Condition scenarios in a later step.
2-139
Add subdivision
and more pipes
here
Newer pipe
section in purple
Older pipe
section in green
2-140
New subdivision
pipes display in
red
Newer pipe
section in purple
Older pipe
section in green
5. Click Compute to calculate the system pressures and tank levels for the Future
Condition.
6. In the Scenario: Future Condition dialog box, select an Extended Period simulation.
2-141
7. Click Compute.
8. Click Close to close the Scenario: Future Condition dialog box.
9. Review the color coding for pressure at junctions.
a. Click Color Coding. The Color Coding dialog box opens.
b. Select Node and set the Attribute to Pressure, if needed.
2-142
For this lesson, one objective is to keep the junction pressures above 45psi.
So, when you play the simulation, watch for red junctions which indicate
unacceptably low pressure.
c. Click OK to close the Color Coding dialog box.
10. Run an animation to see what happens in the network over the course of 24 hours.
a. If needed, set the Animation Delay to 0.25 seconds.
2-143
Click Play
c. Notice, at hour 6 there is a low pressure junction and, by hour 15, most of the
junctions are showing a low pressure.
2-144
Existing
scenario
Future Condition
scenario: tank empties
d. Notice that by hour 11, Tank 165 is empty and does not refill.
e. From the Elements drop-down list, select Tank 65.
2-145
Existing
scenario
Future Condition
scenario: tank empties
f.
2-146
Take no action
2-147
2-148
Click New to
create a new
design study
Click New to
create a new
design event
2-149
All pipes labeled in the model with a P (these are parallel pipes)
Do not include existing pipes in any of these groups, because these need to
be in a rehabilitation group.
9. Click the Rehab groups tab. Create Rehab groups containing pipes grouped as
follows:
2-150
4, 8, 30, 32, 34 36
2, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 48
6, 78
Note that there is no need to include any of the new pipes in rehab groupsin
fact, these should already have been assigned to design groups and be unavailable
for rehab groups.
You might consider grouping pipes based on size or age. To create a Rehab group:
a. Click New.
b. Name the Rehab group and click OK.
c. Use the Element Selector dialog box to choose the pipes you want to include
in the group.
10. Click the Option Groups tab. Create two design option groups and one rehabilitation option group.
2-151
Diameter
(in.)
Hazen
Williams
Roughness
Unit Cost
($/ft.)
Aluminum
structural
130
12.80
Aluminum
130
17.80
Aluminum
10
130
22.50
Aluminum
12
130
29.20
Aluminum
14
130
36.20
Aluminum
16
130
43.60
Aluminum
18
130
51.50
Aluminum
20
130
60.10
Aluminum
24
130
77.00
Aluminum
30
130
105.50
Aluminum
130
0.00
e. Create a second design costs table. (You can duplicate the table you just
created and delete the row for 0 diameter.) This table is the same as the first
one except it does not have a pipe diameter of 0 and is used for new pipes.
New pipes must have a minimum diameter because their existence is a
requirement, unlike the parallel pipes.
2-152
Diameter
(in.)
Hazen
Williams
Roughness
Unit Cost
($/ft.)
Aluminum
structural
130
12.80
Aluminum
130
17.80
Aluminum
10
130
22.50
Aluminum
12
130
29.20
Aluminum
14
130
36.20
Aluminum
16
130
43.60
Aluminum
18
130
51.50
Aluminum
20
130
60.10
Aluminum
24
130
77.00
Aluminum
30
130
105.50
11. Create a single rehab option groups table containing three actions: Clean,
Relining, and Do Nothing. A do-nothing action is necessary so Darwin Designer
can consider not rehabilitating some pipes. Each of these actions must reference
three functions, one for each column in the table.
2-153
Select three
functions for each
action
12. Select Rehab Option Groups in the tree-view and click New to create a new
rehab table.
a. Name the table and click OK.
b. Type the name of an action you want to create, such as Clean.
c. Click the cell under Pre-Rehab Diameter Vs. Post-Rehab Diameter Function
and click the Ellipsis () button to create a new function. The Function
Manager opens.
d. Click New > New Pre-Rehab Diameter Vs. Post-Rehab Diameter Function.
e. Name the function, Function - 0, and click OK.
f.
2-154
The Function Editor opens. Enter your diameter data (inside pipe diameter)
into the table. We recommend you included all the diameters of pipe in the
table. (If you do not, Darwin Designer will use interpolation to calculate the
diameters you do not include.) In this case, the function does not change the
diameter of any pipes.
Post-Rehab
Diameter (in.)
6
10
10
12
12
14
14
16
16
18
18
20
20
2-155
Unit Cost($/ft.)
6
17.00
17.00
10
17.00
12
17.00
14
18.20
16
19.80
18
21.60
20
23.50
30
25.50
Unit Cost($/ft.)
6
130
130
10
130
12
130
14
130
16
130
18
130
20
130
2-156
26.20
27.80
10
34.10
12
41.40
14
50.20
16
58.50
18
66.20
20
76.80
24
109.20
30
142.50
16. Create a final function called Do Nothing. This function is required if you need
Darwin Designer to consider not rehabilitating an existing pipe as an option.
Do Nothing Cost
Diameter (in.)
0.00
0.00
10
0.00
12
0.00
14
0.00
16
0.00
2-157
0.00
20
0.00
24
0.00
30
0.00
2-158
21. Click the Design Type tab to set the genetic algorithm parameters. Set the Objective Type to Minimize Cost. You are not considering any benefits to increasing
system flow or pressure.
22. See Create the Optimized Design Run on page 2-159.
Create the Optimized Design Run
2-159
2. Name the optimized design run as Design Run -1, and click OK.
3. In the Design Events tab, select the Active check box for the Design Event Name
Criteria Set -1. This enables the selected design event for the current run.
4. Click the Design Groups tab.
5. Activate all the design groups.
a. Right-click the Active column header.
b. Select Global Edit.
c. In the Global Edit dialog box, select the Active check box, and click OK. This
selects all the Active check boxes for all of the design groups in the tab.
2-160
2-161
Review the
solutions
2-162
c. Click OK and OK again to clear the message prompt. This exports Solution
0.
d. Select Solution 1 from the solutions drop-down list.
e. Export Solution 1.
f.
4. Click Close to exit Darwin Designer so you can review the solutions you
exported.
5. In Bentley WaterGEMS V8i , open Scenario Manager.
6. Select Future Condition from the Scenarios drop-down list.
7. Compute the scenarios you exported in a batch run. This lets you graph those
results and look at what is happening with your tank levels.
a. Click Compute Batch Run.
b. Select the Scenarios you want to run.
2-163
Select the
Scenarios you
want to run
2-164
b. Click Next.
c. Select the Scenarios you exported and the Future Condition scenario and
move them to the Selected Scenarios window.
2-165
d. Click Next.
e. Choose Tank as the Element Type. Select either tank, as youll want to look at
them both. Click Next.
f.
Set the Primary Y-Axis Attribute to Calculated Tank Level. Click Next.
g. Click Finish.
h. For tank 65, review the graph. Make sure the tank is kept full.
i.
2-166
For tank 165, review the graph. Make sure the tank is kept full.
Run 1-1
representing
Scenario 0, fails to
keep the tank full
Note that two scenarios fail to keep the tanks full. The Future Condition
scenario, which is not optimized, and Design Run 1 - 1, which corresponds to
Solution 0, or your least costly and therefore most highly optimized solution.
Since all the other runs do keep the tanks full, and since Solution 0 fails to
keep your tanks full, Solution 1 (Scenario - 1-2) is the best optimal solution
that meets your pressure and tank fill requirements.
9. Close Geographer. Save your changes if prompted.
10. In the Scenario drop-down list, choose Design Run - 1-2, which represents Solution 1 that Darwin Designer calculated. From looking at the graphing results in
GeoGrapher, you know this solution keeps your tanks full.
11. Inspect your tank pressure by animating the scenario over 24 hours.
Click Play.
Note the color coding for pressure:
2-167
In the Selection Set dialog box, select all available items (junctions), and click OK.
2-168
2-169
2-170
11. Leave the setting in the Specify the Coordinate Unit of your data source dropdown list box at its default value of ft.
12. Select the Establish connectivity using spatial data check box. This sets ModelBuilder to connect the pipes to the nodes that fall within the specified distance
from the pipe endpoints.
This distance is determined by the value in the Tolerance field. Leave this value
at the default of 1.00 ft.
13. Click the Next button.
2-171
14. For ModelBuilder, set what type of element is represented by each of the shapefiles that were specified as data sources.
a. Highlight the Junction table in the pane on the left side of the dialog box.
b. On the right side of the dialog box, change the value in the Table Type dropdown list box to Pressure Junction. This selection activates the remainder of
the controls that are applicable to the selected element type.
15. In the Key/Label field, select Label.
Since you are using shapefiles in this example, the X and Y fields are automatically set, because shapefiles inherently store spatial (coordinate) data. The bottom
half of the Settings tab contains the Field Mapping table.
As you can see, none of the data contained within the shapefile relates to Bentley
WaterGEMS V8i attributes (apart from Label, which will automatically be transferred), so no field mappings should be set.
16. Repeat the preceding steps for the Pumps, Reserv, and Tanks tables (not Pipes).
Make sure you specify the appropriate element type for each connection in the
Table Type field. Leave the Downstream Edge field for the Pump table set to
<none>.
2-172
17. Highlight Pipes in the pane on the left side of the dialog box.
18. On the right side of the dialog box, change the value in the Table Type drop-down
list to Pressure Pipe.
19. In the Key/Label field, select Label. Since you previously chose to establish
connectivity using spatial data, the Start and Stop nodes do not need to be defined.
20. In the Field Mapping table at the bottom of the dialog box, click the Diameter
field to highlight it.
21. Click the Attribute drop-down list and select Diameter. This assigns the values
contained within the Diameter column of the shapefile data source to the Diameter
attribute of the pipes that will be created in the Bentley WaterGEMS V8i model.
22. Allow the default value of in. for the Unit field.
23. Click Next.
24. Now you are ready to create the new model. Click the Yes button under Would
you like to forge a model now.
25. Click the Forge New Model button, then click the Finish button.
2-173
26. A dialog box will open, displaying ModelBuilders progress as it creates the
model. When the model is finished, a Summary dialog box opens, detailing
important statistics regarding the new model.
When you are finished reviewing the outcome of the ModelBuilder process, close
the Summary and ModelBuilder Manager dialog boxes.
2-174
30. It is a good idea to review the drawing for errors after creating a new model in
ModelBuilder. Click Edit > Review Drawing.
31. In the Drawing Review dialog box, click the Select button and choose Nodes in
Close Proximity.
32. In the dialog box that opens, accept the Tolerance default value of 3.00 ft. by
clicking the OK button. A list of three elements should open. These elements are
nodes that are 3 feet or less away from another node, which can be an indication
that these are duplicated elements.
33. Click the Zoom drop-down list and select 100%.
34. Highlight J-151 and click the Go To button. This action centers the view on the
highlighted element. As you can see, two nodes occupy nearly the same point.
2-175
37. In the Drawing Review dialog box, click the Select button and choose Orphaned
Nodes. The list will now display all of the nodes that are not connected to a pipe.
In this case, you see that J-796, J-797, and J-798 fall into this category.
38. Highlight J-796 in the Drawing Review element list and click the Go To button.
39. Click on J-796 and press the Delete key on your keyboard to remove this disconnected node. Repeat this step for J-797 and J-798.
2-176
2-177
2-178
13. In the Skelebrator Manager dialog box, click the Compute button to perform the
highlighted Residential Service Lines Smart Pipe Removal operation.
14. A message box displays to notify you that you are about to perform a process that
cannot be undone. Click Yes to continue with the operation.
2-179
2-180
2-181
2-182
2-183
4. In this step, you will specify the model attributes that will be saved in the feature
dataset, and thus will be available in ArcCatalog and ArcMap. In this project,
none of the elements contain model input data, with the exception of pipes, which
only contain Diameter data.
Junctions should already be highlighted in the element list on the left side of the
dialog box, so just click the Select Attributes button.
2-184
5. In the Select Attributes dialog box, click the double-left-arrow button (<<) to
remove all selected attributes.
6. Click OK, and repeat the removal of all selected attributes for Pumps, Tanks, and
Reservoirs.
2-185
2-186
16. You can now work on the model in ArcCatalog and ArcMap.
17. Click File > Save As.
18. Save the lesson as MyLesson 8_4.
See Step 4: Assigning Model Demands Using LoadBuilder on page 2-187.
Step 4: Assigning Model Demands Using LoadBuilder
Hydraulic demands drive a water distribution model. In this part of the lesson, you
will assign model demands with LoadBuilder, using geocoded GIS customer meter
data.
Note:
2-187
2-188
5. Leave the ID Link Field set to the default value of HMID. The ID link field must
contain a label value that is unique. Because all elements in the project possess a
unique HMID, it is the preferred ID link field.
6. Next, specify a boundary for the Thiessen polygons so that they do not extend to
infinity along the edges of the model.
In the Set Boundary by section, you have the option of using a Buffering
Percentage or a Polygon Feature Class to serve as this boundary. Leave the default
setting of Buffering Percentage and the default value of 10%. A boundary is
automatically generated by extending a buffer around the model extents (imagine
the polygon that would be created if the outermost nodes of the model were
connected by a continuous line) by the specified percentage (10%) of the area
within the model extents.
7. In the Output Feature Class section, type Service_Areas in the Specify the Class
Name field.
8. Click the Start button.
2-189
9. A progress dialog box will open, indicating that polygons are being created
around the points in the junctions layer. When the process is complete, the
Service_Areas polygon layer will appear in the Layers pane on the left side of the
ArcMap dialog box. Click and drag the Service_Areas layer to the bottom of the
list so that the network is overlaid across the service area polygons.
10. Click the Add Data button.
11. Browse to the Program Files\Haestad\wtg\Lesson\Lesson Shapefiles
folder and select the Customer_Meters.shp shapefile.
12. Click the Add button.
2-190
13. Right-click the Customer_Meters layer in the Layer pane on the left and select
Open Attribute Table. This opens a tabular view of the data that is contained
within that shapefile. Notice that the meter shapefile contains usage type and
demand data. LoadBuilder will assign the demand associated with any given
meter to the junction that corresponds with the service polygon that contains the
meter.
14. Close the Attributes dialog box.
2-191
2-192
20. Click the Ellipsis () button next to the Billing Meter Layer field.
21. Browse to the Program Files\Haestad\wtg\Lesson\Lesson Shapefiles folder.
2-193
25. A progress dialog box opens, indicating that LoadBuilder is calculating the
demand contained within each service area and assigning it to the corresponding
service area junction. When the calculations are complete, the LoadBuilder
Wizard displays a calculation summary, which shows the total demands associated with each Usage Type. Using different usage types allows you to assign
different demand multipliers and patterns to each type. Leave these values at the
default settings and click the Next button.
2-194
26. This step of the wizard displays a results preview, which outlines the demand
assigned to each junction. There is also an option to export these results as a text
file. Click the Next button.
2-195
27. In the final step of the LoadBuilder wizard, you must provide a label for the LoadBuilder run you have just completed. The settings you specified will be stored for
re-use when the Billing Meter Aggregation method is used again. Type Lesson
8_4 in the Label field.
28. Lastly, choose how to export the demands to the Bentley WaterGEMS V8i
project. The choices are to Override an existing Alternative, Append to an existing
Alternative, or to create a New Alternative. Leave the default setting of Override
an existing Alternative and the value of Base-Demand. This will replace the
models Demand Alternative, which contained no input data.
29. Click the Finish button.
2-196
30. After the results are written to the Base Demand alternative, the LoadBuilder Run
Summary will open. This summary displays statistics about the number of
demands that were exported, as well as any messages that were generated. In this
case, there should be no messages and 286 demands should have been successfully exported.
31. Click the Close button, then Close the LoadBuilder Manager.
2-197
32. You can improve the appearance of the near-finished model by adding a buildingfootprint shapefile to the map. Click the Add Data button. In the browse dialog
box, Program Files\Haestad\wtg\Lesson\Lesson Shapefiles should be the
current folder.
33. Click on the Buildings.shp polygon shapefile and click the Add button.
2-198
34. The color scheme of the various element symbology is chosen randomly by
ArcMap, so it may be difficult to distinguish some of the features in the map.
Also, the Layers list pane on the left side of the dialog box controls the order in
which the layers are displayed; the first layer on the list is the last to be displayed,
so the first layer on the list will be drawn over the top of the second, the second
layer drawn over the top of the third, and so on.
35. Remove the layers that contain no elements. To do this, hold down Ctrl on the
keyboard and click the following layers: FCVs, GPVs, PBVs, PRVs, PSVs, and
TCVs.
36. Right-click one of the highlighted layers and choose Remove.
37. Organize the remaining layers in the following order, first to last: Tanks, Reservoirs, Pumps, Junctions, Customer_Meters, Pipes, Buildings, Service_Areas.
2-199
38. To change the color and symbol size used for a layer:
a. Double-click the layer in the Layer pane (or right-click it and choose Properties).
b. Click on the Symbology tab.
c. Click the large button under Symbol, which opens the Symbol Selector dialog
box. Here, you can select the symbol that will be used to represent the features
in the layer being edited, as well as the symbol size and color.
d. Make changes as desired, then click OK.
e. Click OK in the Layer Properties dialog box.
2-200
39. Make any desired symbology changes to the other layers. When you are satisfied
with the map appearance, click the Save button.
40. The Save As dialog box opens, prompting you to name the new map.
Browse to the Program Files\Haestad\wtg\Lesson folder, type MyLessonMap, then click the Save button.
2-201
2-202
2-203
11. In the TRex Wizard, under the Bentley WaterGEMS V8i Model heading, verify
that the correct model is specified in the File field.
12. Click the Ellipsis () button next to the Spatial Reference field.
13. In the Spatial Reference Properties dialog box, click the Select button.
14. In the browse dialog box, double-click the following folders: Projected Coordinate Systems, State Plane, and Nad 1983.
15. Highlight NAD 1983 StatePlane Tennessee FIPS 4100.prj and click the Add
button This is the spatial reference used by the model, and it will be aligned with
the spatial reference used by the DEM.
16. In the Spatial Reference Properties dialog box, click OK.
2-204
17. In the TRex Wizard, click the Next button. A progress dialog box opens, indicating that TRex is calculating the elevations at each of the nodes in the model.
When the calculations are complete, the TRex Wizard displays a tabular report of
the elevation values that were assigned to each node.
18. Specify the alternative to which the results should be exported. You can export the
results to a new or existing alternative. Since there is currently no elevation data in
the Base-Physical alternative, you can export the results there. Click the Use
Existing Alternative button and verify that the field value is Base-Physical.
19. Then click the Finish button.
20. You will receive notification when TRex has completed successfully. Click OK in
the dialog box that opens.
2-205
2-206
24. Bentley WaterGEMS V8i WaterGEMS V8i will start and automatically open the
project that was highlighted in ArcCatalog. Click the Tabular Reports button.
25. Select Junction report and click the OK button.
26. Note that the elevation and base flow fields now contain input data. Close the
report.
2-207
27. Click File > Save As. In the Save File As dialog box, type MyLesson 8_5 and
click the Save button.
2-208
2-209
3. The model requires some more input data before it is ready to be calculated,
namely the pump curve information for PMP-1 and PMP-2, and tank crosssection data for T-1.
4. Create a pump definition to be used by the two identical pumps. Click the Analysis menu and select Pump Definitions.
5. In the Pump Definition Manager, click the Add button.
6. When prompted for a name, type in PMP-1 and PMP-2 and click OK.
7. Choose a Standard (3 Point) head definition and enter the pump curve information as shown in the following table:
Pump Definition for PMP-1
and PMP-2
2-210
Discharge
(gpm)
Head (ft.)
340
400
231
500
160
2-211
Elevations (ft.)
Maximum
530.13
Initial
530
Minimum
493.13
Base
493.13
18. Click the OK button in the tank element editor dialog box.
19. The model is now ready to be calculated. Click the Go button, then click Go again
from the Scenario:Base calculation dialog box to run the model using the default
calculation settings.
2-212
2-213
2-214
Click the OK button, and click OK again in the Branch Collapsing Operation
Editor.
25. Series Pipe Merging is the process of combining a series of pipes into a single,
hydraulically equivalent pipe. This is accomplished by accounting for any difference in diameter or pipe roughness with a new diameter or roughness. This creates
a new pipe that equates to the attendant behaviors of the original pipe series.
a. Click Series Pipe Merging in the operation pane on the left side of the Skelebrator dialog box, and click the New button.
b. Type Series Merge as the name of the operation and click OK.
c. In the Series Pipe Operation Editor, increase the Maximum Number of
Removal Levels to 5.
d. Keep the Dominant Pipe Criteria option of Diameter.
e. Change the Equivalent Pipe Method to Modify Roughness. This will
change the roughness of the newly created pipe to account for differences in
diameter and roughness in the series of pipes being merged.
f.
g. Leave the Apply Minor Losses and Allow Removal of TCVs options at the
default settings.
2-215
Click the Add button, leaving the default values for Attribute and Operator
at their default settings of Diameter and Tolerance, respectively.
j.
Change the Diameter value to 6.0 inches. Pipes with a difference in diameter
that is within this specified tolerance will be considered for the merging operation.
k. Click the OK button, and click OK again in the Series Pipe Operation Editor.
26. In the Skelebrator dialog box, click the Batch Run button.
2-216
30. In the Network Skeletonization Preview, the pipes that will be removed are
displayed in red and the pipes that will be merged are displayed in yellow. Close
the preview dialog box.
2-217
2-218
2-219
2-220
2-221
2. To set up a logical control to dictate pump behavior, select Analysis > Logical
Controls.
3. In the Logical Controls dialog box, click the Control Management button and
select New.
4. In the Logical Control dialog box, click the New button next to the IF
Condition list.
5. In the New Logical Condition dialog box that opens, specify the simple condition
parameters as follows:
a. The simple condition Type should remain at the default setting of Element.
b. Click the Ellipsis () button next to the Element list, and in the Select
Element dialog box change the Element Filter to Tank.
c. Choose T-1 (the only remaining element) and click OK.
d. Change the Attribute value to Level.
e. Change the Operator to <= (less-than-or-equal-to).
f.
2-222
Click OK.
8. In the Logical Control dialog box, the control statement displayed in the Summary
pane should read:
IF {C01: "T-1" Level <= 1.00 ft}
THEN {A01: "PMP-2" Status = On}
9. Click the OK button.
10. Repeat these steps to create a logical control that turns PMP-2 Off if the level in
T-1 is greater than 35 feet.
2-223
11. Close the Logical Controls dialog box. If you are prompted to Reset calculated
results to N/A?, click Yes.
12. Next, create a demand pattern for the junctions in the model. Click Analysis >
Patterns.
13. In the Patterns dialog box, the Hydraulic pattern type should already be highlighted. Click the Add button to create a new hydraulic pattern.
14. Set the pattern settings as follows:
a. Enter Base-Diurnal as the pattern Label.
b. Leave the default Start Time value of 12:00:00 AM.
c. Change the Starting Multiplier to 0.50.
d. Change the pattern Format to Continuous.
e. In the Pattern table, enter the information contained in the following table:
Time
from
Start
(hr)
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
2-224
Multiplier
0.4
1.0
1.3
1.2
1.2
1.6
0.8
0.5
Click OK.
g. Click OK.
15. Now create a new demand alternative, applying the newly created hydraulic
pattern to the junction demands. Click Analysis > Scenarios.
16. In the Scenario Control Center dialog box, click the Alternatives button.
17. In the Alteratives dialog box, click the Demand alternative in the left pane.
18. Click the Add Child button. When prompted to name the new alternative, type
Diurnal Pattern and click OK.
19. In the Demand Alternatives: Diurnal Pattern dialog box, right-click on the
Pattern heading and select Global Edit.
20. Select the Diurnal Pattern in the Pattern drop-down list and click OK.
2-225
24. In the Scenario: Base w/ Diurnal Pattern dialog box, select the Demand alternative
check box.
25. Choose the Diurnal Pattern alternative in the drop-down list, then click the
Close button.
26. In the Scenario Control Center dialog box, highlight the newly created scenario,
then click the Scenario Management button and select Make Current.
This makes the highlighted scenario the currently active one, as indicated by the
red check on the scenario folder icon. Close the Scenario Control Center.
2-226
2-227
29. Bentley WaterGEMS V8i WaterGEMS V8i has the capability to display shapefiles and DXFs as background layers. To improve the appearance of the model by
adding backgrounds, click the New button under the Background Layers section
of the layer controls area, to the left side of the main drawing view.
30. In the Select Background dialog box, browse to the Program
Files\Haestad\wtg\Lesson\Lesson Shapefiles directory.
31. Change the Files of type field to Shapefile.
32. Highlight Buildings.shp and click Open.
33. In the Shapefile Properties dialog box, change the Background Color to the
desired shade.
34. Clicking the Ellipsis () button opens a Color dialog box that provides a wider
range of color options.
35. Select the Fill Figures? check box. This option is only available for polygon
shapefiles; when it is checked, the polygons will be filled with the color selected
in the Background Color field. You can then add the shapefile again, this time in a
different color and without checking the Fill Figures option. The result will be
colored polygons with an alternately colored border.
36. Click the OK button.
2-228
37. Click the New button under the Background Layers section of the layer controls.
38. Again, highlight Buildings.shp and click Open.
39. In the Shapefile Properties dialog box, change the Background Color to the
desired outline color.
40. Leave the Fill Figures? check box deselected and click the OK button.
2-229
2-230
42. Click the New button under the Background Layers section of the layer controls
area.
43. Highlight the Customer_Meters.shp shapefile and click Open.
44. In the Shapefile Properties dialog box, change the Background Color to the
desired symbol color.
45. If you want, change the symbol that will be displayed by choosing one of the
alternatives in the Symbol list.
46. Change the value in the Size field to 0.75. Click OK.
2-231
47. Finally, add a DXF background of the branches and service connections that were
removed from the model in Step 2: Removing Unnecessary Model Elements
Using Skelebrator and Step 6: Model Reduction Using Skelebrator of this lesson.
48. Click the New button under the Background Layers section of the layer controls
area.
49. In the Select Background dialog box, change the Files of type field to DXF.
50. Highlight Removed_Pipes.shp and click Open.
51. In the DXF Properties dialog box, change the Background Color to the desired
shade, then click OK.
2-232
2-233
g. Click Next.
2-234
h. Choose the attribute to graph. Select Calculated Demand from the Primary
Y-Axis Attribute menu.
i.
2-235
Type Demand Comparison in the text field under the What do you want to
name your new graph? heading.
k. Leave the default setting of Apply Selected Graph Types User Default
format.
l.
Click Finish.
54. The graph will now be displayed. Note that J-50 does not have a demand
associated with it. To swap out this junction for another, click the Graph
Setup button.
2-236
55. In the Graph Setup dialog box, click the drop-down list under the Available
Elements heading and choose Pressure Junction.
56. Highlight J-50 in the Selected Elements pane, and click the single-left-arrow
button (<).
57. Highlight J-59 in the Available Elements pane and click the single-right-arrow
button. Click OK.
2-237
59. In this particular graph type, each junction is a series. To change the color of the
line that is used for one of these series, click on one of the five series that are listed
on the Series tab of the main Chart tab.
60. Then click the main Series tab.
61. Click the Color box to open the palette dialog box, choose a color, and click OK.
Repeat this step as desired for the other series in the graph.
2-238
2-239
70. When you are satisfied with the background appearance, click the Walls tab. The
Walls tab contains the settings that control the four walls that frame the graph
series. To remove the walls completely, deselect the Visible Walls check box.
2-240
2-241
2-242
Note that the new graph uses the settings that were specified in the previously
created graph.
84. Close the Pressure Comparison graph dialog, then close the GeoGrapher window.
85. Click File > Save As.
86. Type MyLesson 8-Final and click Save.
Energy Costs
Energy costs calculates energy usage and cost based on an extended period simulation
(EPS). It also determines a number of intermediated values such as efficiency, power,
and peak energy use.
2-243
Energy Costs
The steps in running an energy cost calculation
1. Run EPS simulation.
2. Open energy cost manager.
3. Set up energy pricing.
4. Select scenario.
5. Run energy cost calculation.
6. Review Results.
Step 1: Run EPS Model
1. Open the EngCostlessonStart.wtg file in the Lessons directory.
2-244
Notice that the pump reaches 100% full speed several times.
2-245
Energy Costs
4. Close the graph and double-click Tank Levels.
The tanks fill gradually during this run and empty slightly quicker when the main
PUMP cycles off.
2-246
You can see the relative flow of the main pump and the booster bump.
6. Click to close the graph and click to close the Graph manager.
7. Save the file as MYLESSON11.
Step 2: Setting up energy pricing
2-247
Energy Costs
3. Type the following information into the corresponding fields:
Start Energy Price = .10
Time From
Start
Energy Price
12
.15
21
.10
24
.10
4. Click to Close.
5. In the Energy Cost Manager, select EPS from the Scenario menu.
2-248
1. Click Compute
2. Review the overall summary. Select the Pump Usage item. You can see that the
efficiency of the constant speed PUMP is higher than that of the variable speed
PMP-1 and PMP=2 was not called during this run.
3. Select Cost per Unit Volume and see how the cost changes as a result of pump
status and time of day energy charges.
4. Select PMP-1 and view the Cost per Unit Volume graph.
Step 5: Making graphical comparisons between pumps
1. Close the Energy Cost manager.
2. In the drawing, select PMP-1 and then <Ctrl> + the PUMP element. Right-click
and select Graph to open the Graph Series Option manager.
3. Turn off Hydraulic Grade (Discharge) and expand the Energy Costs category.
Click the +
4. Select Wire-to-water efficiency and Cost per unit volume.
5. Click OK to open the Graph.
The efficiency of the constant speed pump is higher than the variable speed pump
whenever it is on. The cost per volume pumped is comparable since the PUMP
usually pumps against a higher head. In order to view, click on Graph Series and
check Pump Head under the Results folder.
6. Click OK.
7. PUMP pumped into a pressure zone that required a higher pump head.
8. Click to save the graph and then click to close.
2-249
2-250
2. The Near source is on the left and the Far source is on the right.
2-251
Near
Far
3. Click Scenarios
or choose Analysis > Scenarios to verify the current
scenario is SteadyNoPDD.
2-252
and make sure results are green and then close the
7. Choose Analysis > Scenario and select EPSNoPDD and make it current
and make sure results are green and then close the
2-253
2-254
2-255
2-256
2-257
6. Click Close.
2-258
2-259
2-260
2-261
This is because the lines for both scenarios are identical. Click the Data tab to see
2-262
2-263
3. Double-click on Near Tank Out and change the status of P-2 to closed. When the
status has been changed to Closed a check shows in the first column to show that
it is different from its parent.
4. Click to Close.
2-264
6. Double-click to open the Properties editor. Change the Initial Alternative to Near
Tank Out and then close the editor.
7. Make the TankOutNoPDD the current scenario and then click Compute.
2-265
2-266
12. Click the Graph Series Option to examine the effect of the drop in pressure on
Demand. In the Graph Series Option manager check Demand and then OK.
2-267
14. Save the graph as Pressure Demand J-12 and click OK.
15. Close the graph.
2-268
2-269
6. Click to compute the scenario, review the summary calculation and close it.
7. Choose View > Graphs and open the Pressure Demand J-12 graph.
8. Click Graph Series Options
and check TankOutPDD in the list of
Scenarios, turn off Hydraulic Grade in the list of Fields, and then click OK.
2-270
2-271
6. Manually edit the range and the color and size fields to look like the following
example. The colors, in order of appearance are: Red, Magenta, Gold, Green, and
Royal Blue. Change the sizes to 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3 respectively.
2-272
colors and pressures change over the course of a day. Then click Pause
9. Choose Analysis > Scenarios and select the TankOutPDD scenario. Make it
current, compute, and then close the calculation summary.
2-273
2-274
2-275
2. Use Pan
3. Choose Edit > Find Element and type J-11 in the field and then click Zoom.
2-276
b. All valves are assigned, however if the query turned up orphaned valves then
you could delete the isolation valve, leave it orphaned, or select the valve and
choose the menu from Referenced Pipe and select the pipe where the valve is
located.
6. Close the query manager.
2-277
2. Click the Options tab and verify that Consider Valves is checked and that Always
Use is selected in the Isolation Valve field.
2-278
3. Click New
2-279
5. Click Compute
Label - List of segments that were identified in the analysis. If Use Valves was not
checked, there is one pipe per segment and the label of the pipe is listed next to the
segment name. In this case, Use Valves was checked so the segments consist of a
variety of pipes and nodes.
General statistics are given for each segment.
Elements - The elements that make up or bound the segment.
2-280
2-281
The segments at the top of the list usually prove to me the most difficult to isolate
and may require investigation to make them less susceptible to issues that arise
due to an inoperative valve.
2-282
2. Right-click on Outage Set Length > Sort > Sort Descending to find out which
segments have outages that will cause significant downstream outages.
2-283
to
4. View the drawing to see that segment 30 is in yellow and the downstream outage
segments that will be out of service are in red.
2-284
2. Right-click on the System Demand Shortfall % column and then Sort > Sort
Descending.
2-285
3. Select Segment 30 from the Label column and then click zoom
4. Now run a criticality analysis that uses the hydraulic network engine to determine
the impact of segment outages. Check the Run Hydraulic Engine box and click
Compute
2-286
The System Demand Shortfall % are the same as the run without hydraulic calculations. This is because the flows are delivered to all nodes that are connected
regardless of the pressure.
Step 5: Run criticality analysis hydraulic with PDD
While other types of runs can indicate which segment outages cause the most demand
to be isolated from the system, they are not the way to determine the impact on nodes
that remain connected to the source but receive much less flow due to the outage.
2-287
3. Choose Analysis > Alternatives and expand the Pressure Dependent Demand
Alternative and select PDDfunction.
2-288
7. Click OK.
2-289
The segmentation results are the same as the first scenario because the same
valving is used.
10. Select Criticality below AveDayPDD and check Run Hydraulic Engine and click
Compute
2-290
Notice that the shortfalls have increased over the previous runs because the runs
that incorporate PDD account for the impact on nodes that receive water but at a
lower pressure than under normal circumstances.
12. Click to close.
2-291
2-292
Understanding the
Workspace
Stand-Alone
MicroStation Environment
Working in AutoCAD
Working in ArcGIS
Google Earth Export
Stand-Alone
The Stand-Alone Editor is the workspace that contains the various managers, toolbars,
and menus, along with the drawing pane, that make up the Bentley WaterGEMS V8i
interface. The Bentley WaterGEMS V8i interface uses dockable windows and toolbars, so the position of the various interface elements can be manually adjusted to suit
your preference.
Panning
You can change the position of your model in the drawing pane by using the Pan tool.
3-293
Stand-Alone
Zooming
You can enlarge or reduce your model in the drawing pane using one of the following
zoom tools:
The current zoom level is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the interface,
next to the coordinate display.
Zoom Extents
The Zoom Extents command automatically sets the zoom level such that the entire
model is displayed in the drawing pane.
To use Zoom Extents, click Zoom Extents on the Zoom toolbar. The entire model is
displayed in the drawing pane.
or
3-294
3-295
Stand-Alone
Zoom Window
The Zoom Window command is used to zoom in on an area of your model defined by
a window that you draw in the drawing pane.
To use Zoom Window, click the Zoom Window button on the Zoom toolbar, then click
and drag the mouse inside the drawing pane to draw a rectangle. The area of your
model inside the rectangle will appear enlarged.
or
Select View > Zoom > Zoom Window, then draw the zoom window in the drawing
pane.
Zoom In and Out
The Zoom In and Zoom Out commands allow you to increase or decrease, respectively, the zoom level of the current view by one step per mouse click.
To use Zoom In or Zoom Out, click either one on the Zoom toolbar, or select View >
Zoom > Zoom In or View > Zoom > Zoom In.
If your mouse is equipped with a mousewheel, you zoom in or out by simply moving
the mousewheel up or down respectively.
Zoom Realtime
The Zoom Realtime command is used to dynamically scale up and down the zoom
level. The zoom level is defined by the magnitude of mouse movement while the tool
is active.
Zoom Center
3-296
Zoom
Enables you to zoom to specific elements in the drawing. You must select the elements
to zoom to before you select the tool.
Zoom Previous and Zoom Next
3-297
Stand-Alone
Zoom Previous returns the zoom level to the most recent previous setting. To use
Zoom Previous, click View > Zoom > Zoom Previous or click the Zoom Previous icon
from the Zoom toolbar.
Zoom Next returns the zoom level to the setting that was active before a Zoom
Previous command was executed. To use Zoom Previous, click View > Zoom > Zoom
Next or click the Zoom Next icon from the Zoom toolbar.
Zoom Dependent Visibility
Available through the Properties dialog box of each layer in the Element Symbology
manager, the Zoom Dependent Visibility feature can be used to cause elements, decorations, and annotations to only appear in the drawing pane when the view is within
the zoom range specified by the Minimum and Maximum Zoom values.
3-298
Enabled
3-299
Stand-Alone
Apply to Element
Apply to Decorations
Apply to Annotations
Drawing Style
Elements can be displayed in one of two styles in the Stand-Alone version; GIS style
or CAD style.
Under GIS style, the size of element symbols in the drawing pane will remain the
same (relative to the screen) regardless of zoom level. Under CAD style, element
symbols will appear larger or smaller (relative to the drawing) depending on zoom
level.
There is a default Drawing Style that is set on the Global tab of the Options dialog.
The drawing style chosen there will be used by all elements by default. Changing the
default drawing style will only affect new projects, not existing ones.
You can change the drawing style used by all of the elements in the project, or you can
set each element individually to use either drawing style.
To change a single elements drawing style
1. Double-click the element in the Element Symbology manager dialog to open the
Properties manager.
2. In the Properties manager, change the value in the Display Style field to the
desired setting.
To change the drawing style of all elements
Click the Drawing Style button in the Element Symbology manager and select the
desired drawing style from the submenu that appears.
3-300
3-301
Stand-Alone
You can use shapefiles, AutoCAD DXF files, and raster (also called bitmap) pictures
as background images for your model. The following raster image formats are
supported: bmp, jpg, jpeg, jpe, jfif, gif, tif, tiff, png, and sid.
Using the Background Layer manager you can add, edit, delete, and manage the background layers that are associated with the project. The dialog box contains a list pane
that displays each of the layers currently contained within the project, along with a
number of button controls.
3-302
3-303
Stand-Alone
The toolbar consists of the following buttons:
New
3-304
Delete
Rename
Edit
Shift Up
Shift
Down
Expand
All
Collapse
All
Help
If you are creating a new folder within an existing folder, select the folder,
then click New > New Folder. Or right-click, then select New > Folder from
the shortcut menu.
3. Right-click the new folder and select Rename from the shortcut menu.
4. Type the name of the folder, then press <Enter>.
3-305
Stand-Alone
To delete a background layer folder
1. Click View > Background Layers to open the Background Layers manager.
2. In the Background Layers managers, select the folder you want to delete, then
click the Delete button.
You can also right-click a folder to delete, then select Delete from the shortcut
menu.
You can also right-click a folder to rename, then select Rename from the
shortcut menu.
You can also rename a background layer folder by selecting the folder, then
modifying its label in the Properties Editor.
3. Navigate to the file you want to add as a background layer and select it.
3-306
If you select a .dxf file, the DXF Properties dialog box opens.
If you select a .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jfif, .gif, .tif, .tiff, .png, or .sid file, the
Image Properties dialog box opens.
4. After you add the background layer, you might have to use the Pan button to move
the layer within the drawing area; Zoom Extents does not center a background
image.
To delete a background layer
Select the background layer you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Or, right-click the background layer, then select Delete from the shortcut
menu.
To edit the properties of a background layer
You can edit a background layer in two ways: you can edit its properties or its position
in a list of background layers displayed in the Background Layers manager.
1. Select the background layer you want to edit.
2. Click the Edit button. A Properties dialog box opens.
You can also right-click the background layer, then select Edit from the
shortcut menu.
3-307
Stand-Alone
Turn background layers on or off
Turn your background layers on or off by using the check box next to the background
layer file or folder than contains it in the Background Layers manager.
Image Properties
This dialog box opens when you are adding or editing a background-layer image other
than a .dxf or .shp.
Image Filter
3-308
Transparency
Resolution
Unit
Use Compression
3-309
Stand-Alone
Shapefile Properties
Use the Shapefile Properties dialog box to define a shapefile background layer. In
order to access the Shapefile Properties dialog box, click New File in the Background
Layers manager, then select a .shp file.
Use the following controls to define the properties of the background layer:
3-310
Filename
Browse
Label
Unit
Transparency
Line Color
Line Width
Fill Color
Fill Figure
Check to fill.
DXF Properties
The DXF Properties dialog box is where you define a .dxf file as the background
layer. In order to open the .dxf properties, click New File In the Background Layers
manager, then select a .dxf file.
Use the following controls to define the properties of the background layer:
Filename
Browse
Label
Unit
Transparency
Line Color
Default Color
3-311
MicroStation Environment
Symbol
Size
ArcGIS Mode
ArcGIS mode lets you create and model your network directly in ArcMap. Each mode
provides access to differing functionalitycertain capabilities that are available
within ArcGIS mode may not be available when working in the Bentley WaterGEMS
V8i Stand-alone Editor. All the functionality available in the Stand-alone Editor are,
however, available in ArcGIS mode.
MicroStation Environment
In the MicroStation environment you can create and model your network directly
within your primary drafting environment. This gives you access to all of MicroStations powerful drafting and presentation tools, while still enabling you to perform
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i modeling tasks like editing, solving, and data management.
This relationship between Bentley WaterGEMS V8i and MicroStation enables
extremely detailed and accurate mapping of model features, and provides the full
array of output and presentation features available in MicroStation. This facility
provides the most flexibility and the highest degree of compatibility with other CADbased applications and drawing data maintained at your organization.
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i features support for MicroStation integration. You run
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i in both MicroStation and stand-alone environment.
The MicroStation functionality has been implemented in a way that is the same as the
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i base product. Once you become familiar with the standalone environment, you will not have any difficulty using the product in the MicroStation environment.
3-312
Lay out network links and structures in fully-scaled environment in the same
design and drafting environment that you use to develop your engineering plans.
Have access to any other third party applications that you currently use, along
with any custom MDL applications.
Use native MicroStation insertion snaps to precisely position Bentley WaterGEMS V8i elements with respect to other entities in the MicroStation drawing.
Control destination levels for model elements and associated label text and annotation, giving you control over styles, line types, and visibility of model elements.
Note:
Drawing File (.DGN)The MicroStation drawing file contains the elements that
define the model, in addition to the planimetric base drawing information that
serves as the model background.
3-313
MicroStation Environment
Model File (.wtg)The model file contains model data specific to WaterGEMS
V8i, including project option settings, color-coding and annotation settings, etc.
Note that the MicroStation .dgn that is associated with a particular model may not
necessarily have the same filename as the models .wtg file.
Database File (.MDB)The model database file that contains all of the input and
output data for the model. Note that the MicroStation .dgn that is associated with a
particular model may not bave the same filename as the models .mdb file.
When you start Bentley WaterGEMS V8i for MicroStation, you will see the dialog
below. You must identify a new or existing MicroStation dgn drawing file to be associated with the model before you can open a Bentley WaterGEMS V8i model.
Either browse to an existing dgn file or create a new file using the new button on the
top toolbar. Once you have selected a file, you can pick the Open button.
Once a drawing is open, you can use the WaterGEMS V8i Project drop down menu to
create a new WaterGEMS V8i project, attach an existing project, import a project or
open a project from ProjectWise.
There are a number of options for creating a model in the MicroStation client:
3-314
Open a previously created WaterGEMS V8i projectYou can open a previously created WaterGEMS V8i model and attach it to a .dgn file. To do this, start
WaterGEMS V8i for MicroStation. Open or create a new MicroStation .dgn file
(refer to your MicroStation documentation to learn how to create a new .dgn).
Use the Project menu on the WaterGEMS V8i toolbar and click on the Project >
"Attach Existing" command, then select an existing WaterGEMS V8i.wtg file.
The model will now be attached to the .dgn file and you can edit, delete, and
modify the WaterGEMS V8i elements in the model. All MicroStation commands
can be used on WaterGEMS V8i elements.
EPANETYou can import EPANET input (.inp) files. The file will be
processed and the proper elements will be created and added to the MicroStation drawing. See Importing and Exporting Epanet Files for more details.
Bentley Water modelYou can import Bentley Water model data into your
WaterGEMS V8i model in MicroStation. See Importing a Bentley Water
Model for more details.
If you want to trace the model on top of a dgn or other background file, you would
load the background into the dgn first by using either File/Reference or File/Raster
Manager Then you start laying out elements over top of the background.
3-315
MicroStation Environment
3-316
Full element symbol editing functionality is available through the use of custom
cells. All elements and graphical decorations (flow arrows, control indicators,
etc.) are contained within a WaterGEMS V8i .cel file.To do this open the .cel file
that's in the WTRG install directory in MSTN (at the first, Open dialog), and then
using the File>models you can select each of the WTRG symbols and change
them using normal MSTN commands. Then when you create a new dgn and start
laying out the WTRG elements, the new symbols will be used.
The more powerful Selection tools are in the MicroStation select menu.
Element symbols like junction are circles that are not filled. The user must pick
the edge of the circle, not inside the circle to pick a junction.
Zooming and panning are controlled by the MicroStation zooming and panning
tools.
Depending on how MicroStation was set up, a single right click will simply clear
the last command, while holding down the right mouse button will bring up the
context sensitive menu. There are commands in that menu (e.g. rotate) that are
not available in WaterGEMS V8i stand alone.
Drawing File (.DGN)The MicroStation drawing file contains the elements that
define the model, in addition to the planimetric base drawing information that
serves as the model background.
Model File (.wtg)The model file contains model data specific to WaterGEMS
V8i, including project option settings, color-coding and annotation settings, etc.
Note that the MicroStation .dgn that is associated with a particular model may not
have the same filename as the models .wtg file.
Database File (.MDB)The model database file that contains all of the input and
output data for the model. Note that the MicroStation .dgn that is associated with a
particular model may not have the same filename as the models .mdb file.
To send the model to another user, all three files are required.
It is important to understand that archiving the drawing file is not sufficient to reproduce the model. You must also preserve the associated .wtg and .MDB files.
3-317
MicroStation Environment
Element Properties
Text Styles
Element Properties
When working in the MicroStation environment, this feature will display a dialog box
containing fields for the currently selected elements associated properties. To modify
an attribute, click each associated grid cell. To open the property grid, pick
View>Properties from the WaterGEMS V8i menu.
You can also review or modify MicroStation drawing information about an
element(s), such as its type, attributes, and geometry, by using the Element Information dialog. To access the Element Information dialog, click the Element Information
button or click the Element menu and select the Information command. This is where
the user can change the appearance for individual elements. However, in general, if
WaterGEMS V8i color coding conflicts with MicroStation element symbology, the
WaterGEMS V8i color will show.
To control display of elements in the selected levels, use the Level Display dialog box.
To access the Level Display dialog, click the Settings menu and select the Level >
Display command.
To move WaterGEMS V8i elements to levels other than the default (Active) level,
select the elements and use the Change Element Attribute command.
3-318
Text Styles
You can view, edit, and create Text Style settings in the MicroStation environment by
clicking the MicroStation Element menu and selecting the Text Styles command to
open the Text Styles dialog.
Edit Elements
Deleting Elements
Modifying Elements
3-319
MicroStation Environment
Edit Elements
Elements can be edited in one of two ways in the MicroStation environment:
Properties Editor Dialog: To access the Properties Editor dialog, click the WaterGEMS V8i View menu and select the Properties command. For more information
about the Properties Editor dialog, see Property Editor.
FlexTables: To access the FlexTables dialog, click the WaterGEMS V8i View menu
and select the FlexTables command. For more information about the FlexTables
dialog, see Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables.
Deleting Elements
In the MicroStation environment, you can delete elements by clicking on them using
the Delete Element tool, or by highlighting the element to be deleted and clicking your
keyboards Delete key.
Note:
Modifying Elements
In the MicroStation environment, these commands are selected from the shift-rightclick shortcut menu (hold down the Ctrl key while right-clicking). They are used for
scaling and rotating model entities.
Context Menu
Certain commands can be activated by using the right-click context menu. To access
the context menu, right-click and hold down the mouse button until the menu appears.
3-320
MicroStation Commands
When running in the MicroStation environment, WaterGEMS V8i makes use of all the
advantages that MicroStation has, such as plotting capabilities and snap features.
Additionally, MicroStation commands can be used as you would with any design
project. For example, our products elements and annotation can be manipulated using
common MicroStation commands. To get at the MicroStation command line (called
the "Key-In Browser, the user can pick Help>Key-In Browser or hit the Enter key.
Moving Elements
When using the MicroStation environment, the MicroStation commands Move, Scale,
Rotate, Mirror, and Array (after right clicking on the label ) can be used to move
elements.
To move a node, execute the MicroStation command by either typing it at the
command prompt or selecting it. Follow the MicroStation prompts, and the node and
its associated label will move together. The connecting pipes will shrink or stretch
depending on the new location of the node.
3-321
MicroStation Environment
Snap Menu
When using the MicroStation environment, you can enable the Snaps button bar by
clicking the Settings menu and selecting the Snaps > Button Bar command. See the
MicroStation documentation for more information about using snaps.
Background Files
Adding MicroStation Background images is different than in stand alone. You need to
go to File>References>Tools>Attach. Background files to be attached with this
command include .dgn, .dwg and .dxf files. Raster files should be attached using
File>Raster Manager. GIS files (e.g. shapefiles) may need to be converted to the
appropriate CAD or raster formats using GeoGraphics to be used as background. See
MicroStation for details about the steps involved in creating these backgrounds.
Annotation Display
Some fonts do not correctly display the full range of characters used by WaterGEMS
V8is annotation feature because of a limited character set. If you are having problems
with certain characters displaying improperly or not at all, try using another font.
3-322
Multiple models
You can have two or more WaterGEMS V8i models open in MicroStation. However,
you need to open them in MicroStation, not in wtg. In MicroStation choose File >
Open and select the .dgn file.
Working in AutoCAD
The AutoCAD environment lets you create and model your network directly within
your primary drafting environment. This gives you access to all of AutoCADs
drafting and presentation tools, while still enabling you to perform Bentley WaterGEMS V8i modeling tasks like editing, solving, and data management. This relationship between Bentley WaterGEMS V8i and AutoCAD enables extremely detailed and
accurate mapping of model features, and provides the full array of output and presentation features available in AutoCAD. This facility provides the most flexibility and
the highest degree of compatibility with other CAD-based applications and drawing
data maintained at your organization.
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i features support for AutoCAD integration. You can determine if you have purchased AutoCAD functionality for your license of Bentley WaterGEMS V8i by using the Help > About menu option. Click the Registration button
to view the feature options that have been purchased with your application license. If
AutoCAD support is enabled, then you will be able to run your Bentley WaterGEMS
V8i application in both AutoCAD and stand-alone environment.
The AutoCAD functionality has been implemented in a way that is the same as the
WaterGEMS V8i base product. Once you become familiar with the stand-alone environment, you will not have any difficulty using the product in the AutoCAD environment.
Some of the advantages of working in the AutoCAD environment include:
Control destination layers for model elements and associated label text and annotation, giving you control over styles, line types, and visibility of model elements.
3-323
Working in AutoCAD
Note:
Caution:
3-324
Menus
In the AutoCAD environment, in addition to AutoCADs menus, the following
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i menus are available:
Project
Edit
Analysis
Components
View
Tools
Report
Help
3-325
Working in AutoCAD
The Bentley WaterGEMS V8i menu commands work the same way in AutoCAD and
the Stand-Alone Editor. For complete descriptions of Bentley WaterGEMS V8i menu
commands, see Menus.
Many commands are available from the right-click context menu. To access the menu,
first highlight an element in the drawing pane, then right-click it to open the menu.
Toolbars
In the AutoCAD environment, in addition to AutoCADs toolbars, the following
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i toolbars are available:
Analysis
Components
Compute
Help
Layout
Reports
Scenarios
Tools
Valves
View
The Bentley WaterGEMS V8i toolbars work the same way in AutoCAD and the
Stand-Alone Editor.
Drawing Setup
When working in the AutoCAD environment, you may work with our products in
many different AutoCAD scales and settings. However, WaterGEMS V8i elements
can only be created and edited in model space.
Symbol Visibility
In the AutoCAD environment, you can control display of element labels using the
check box in the Drawing Options dialog box.
3-326
Drawing File (.dwg)The AutoCAD drawing file contains the custom entities
that define the model, in addition to the planimetric base drawing information that
serves as the model background.
Model File (.wtg)The native Bentley WaterGEMS V8i model database file that
contains all the element properties, along with other important model data.
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i .etc files can be loaded and run using the Stand-Alone
Editor. These files may be copied and sent to other Bentley WaterGEMS V8i
users who are interested in running your project. This is the most important file
for the Bentley WaterGEMS V8i model.
The three files have the same base name. It is important to understand that archiving
the drawing file is not sufficient to reproduce the model. You must also preserve the
associated .etc and wtg.mdb file.
Since the .etc file can be run and modified separately from the .dwg file using the
Stand-Alone Editor, it is quite possible for the two files to get out of sync. Should you
ever modify the model in the Stand-Alone Editor and then later load the AutoCAD
.dwg file, the Bentley WaterGEMS V8i program compares file dates, and automatically use the built-in AutoCAD synchronization routine.
Click one of the following links to learn more about AutoCAD project files and
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i :
3-327
Working in AutoCAD
Drawing Synchronization
Whenever you open a Bentley WaterGEMS V8i -based drawing file in AutoCAD, the
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i model server will start. The first thing that the application
will do is load the associated Bentley WaterGEMS V8i model (.wtg) file. If the time
stamps of the drawing and model file are different, Bentley WaterGEMS V8i will
automatically perform a synchronization. This protects against corruption that might
otherwise occur from separately editing the Bentley WaterGEMS V8i model file in
stand-alone environment, or editing proxy elements at an AutoCAD station where the
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i application is not loaded.
3-328
First, Bentley WaterGEMS V8i will compare the drawing model elements with
those in the server model. Any differences will be listed. Bentley WaterGEMS
V8i enforces network topological consistency between the server and the drawing
state. If model elements have been deleted or added in the .wtg file during a
WaterGEMS V8i session, or if proxy elements have been deleted, Bentley WaterGEMS V8i will force the drawing to be consistent with the native database by
restoring or removing any missing or excess drawing custom entities.
After network topology has been synchronized, Bentley WaterGEMS V8i will
compare other model and drawing states such as location, labels, and flow directions.
You can run the Synchronization check at any time using the following command:
wtgSYNCHRONIZE
3-329
Working in AutoCAD
Explode Elements
Moving Elements
Snap Menu
Undo/Redo
Contour Labeling
3-330
Explode Elements
In the AutoCAD environment, running the AutoCAD Explode command will transform all custom entities into equivalent AutoCAD native entities. When a custom
entity is exploded, all associated database information is lost. Be certain to save the
exploded drawing under a separate filename.
Use Explode to render a drawing for finalizing exhibits and publishing maps of the
model network. You can also deliver exploded drawings to clients or other individuals
who do not own a Bentley Systems Product license, since a fully exploded drawing
will not be comprised of any ObjectARX proxy objects.
Moving Elements
When using the AutoCAD environment, the AutoCAD commands Move, Scale,
Rotate, Mirror, and Array can be used to move elements.
To move a node, execute the AutoCAD command by either typing it at the command
prompt or selecting it. Follow the AutoCAD prompts, and the node and its associated
label will move together. The connecting pipes will shrink or stretch depending on the
new location of the node.
Snap Menu
When using the AutoCAD environment, the Snap menu is a standard AutoCAD menu
that provides options for picking an exact location of an object. See the Autodesk
AutoCAD documentation for more information.
3-331
Working in AutoCAD
By default, polygon elements are filled. You can make them unfilled (just borders
visible) using the AutoCAD FILL command. After turning fill environment OFF, you
must REGEN to redraw the polygons.
Undo/Redo
The menu-based undo and redo commands operate exclusively on Bentley WaterGEMS V8i elements by invoking the commands directly on the model server. The
main advantage of using the specialized command is that you will have unlimited
undo and redo levels. This is an important difference, since in layout or editing it is
quite useful to be able to safely undo and redo an arbitrary number of transactions.
Whenever you use a native AutoCAD undo, the server model will be notified when
any Bentley WaterGEMS V8i entities are affected by the operation. Bentley WaterGEMS V8i will then synchronize the model to the drawing state. Wherever possible,
the model will seek to map the undo/redo onto the model servers managed command
history. If the drawings state is not consistent with any pending undo or redo transactions held by the server, Bentley WaterGEMS V8i will delete the command history. In
this case, the model will synchronize the drawing and server models.
Note:
If you use the native AutoCAD undo, you are limited to a single
redo level. The Bentley WaterGEMS V8i undo/redo is faster than
the native AutoCAD undo/redo. If you are rolling back Bentley
WaterGEMS V8i model edits, it is recommended that you use the
menu-based Bentley WaterGEMS V8i undo/redo.
If you undo using the AutoCAD undo/redo and you restore
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i elements that have been previously
deleted, morphed, or split, some model state attributes such as
diameters or elevations may be lost, even though the locational
and topological state is fully consistent. This will only happen in
situations where the Bentley WaterGEMS V8i command history
has been deleted. In such cases, you will be warned to check
your data carefully.
Contour Labeling
You can apply contour labels after the contour plot has been exported to the AutoCAD
drawing. The labeling commands are accessed from the Tools menu. The following
options are available:
3-332
EndAllows you to apply labels to one end, both ends, or any number of
selected insertion points. After selecting this labeling option, AutoCAD will
prompt you to Select Contour to label. After selecting the contour to label,
AutoCAD prompts for an Insertion point. Click in the drawing view to place
labels at specified points along the contour. When prompted for an Insertion point,
InteriorThis option applies labels to the interior of a contour line. You will be
prompted to select the contour to be labeled, then to select the points along the
contour line where you want the label to be placed. Any number of labels can be
placed inside the contour in this way. Clicking the label grip and dragging will
move the label along the contour line.
Group EndChoosing this option opens the Elevation Increment dialog box.
The value entered in this dialog box determines which of the contours selected
will be labeled. If you enter 2, only contours representing a value that is a multiple
of 2 will be labeled, and so on. After clicking OK in this dialog box, you will be
prompted to select the Start point for a line. Contours intersected by the line drawn
thusly will have a label applied to both ends, as modified by the Elevation Increment that was selected.
Group InteriorChoosing this option opens the Elevation Increment dialog box.
The value entered in this dialog box determines which of the contours selected
will be labeled. If you enter 2, only contours representing a value that is a multiple
of 2 will be labeled, and so on. After clicking OK in this dialog box, you will be
prompted to select the Start point for a line.
Change SettingsAllows you to change the Style, Display Precision, and Font
Height of the contour labels.
Delete LabelPrompts to select the contour from which labels will be deleted,
then prompts to select the labels to be removed.
Delete All LabelsPrompts to select which contours the labels will be removed
from, then removes all labels for the specified contours.
Working in ArcGIS
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i provides three environments in which to work: Bentley
WaterGEMS V8i Stand-Alone Mode, AutoCAD Integrated Mode, and ArcMap Integrated Mode. Each mode provides access to differing functionalitycertain capabilities that are available within Bentley WaterGEMS V8i Stand-Alone mode may not be
available when working in ArcMap Integrated mode, and vice-versa. In addition, you
can use ArcCatalog to perform actions on any Bentley WaterGEMS V8i database.
Some of the advantages of working in GIS mode include:
Full functionality from within the GIS itself, without the need for data import,
export, or transformation
The ability to view and edit multiple scenarios in the same geodatabase
3-333
Working in ArcGIS
Lets you build models from scratch using practically any existing data source
A firm grasp of GIS basics will give you a clearer understanding of how Bentley
WaterGEMS V8i interacts with GIS software. Click one the following links to learn
more:
ArcGIS Integration
ArcGIS Applications
ArcGIS Integration
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i features full integration with ESRIs ArcGIS software,
including ArcView, ArcEdit, and ArcInfo. The following is a description of the functionality available with each of these packages:
Data Access
Mapping
Customization
Spatial Query
ArcView can edit shapefiles and personal geodatabases that contain simple
features such as points, lines, polygons, and static annotation. Rules and relationships can not be edited with ArcView.
ArcEditArcEdit provides all of the capabilities available with ArcView in addition to the following:
ArcInfoArcInfo provides all of the capabilities available with ArcEdit in addition to the following:
3-334
Advanced geoprocessing
Data conversion
ArcInfo Workstation
To avoid using a license of Bentley WaterGEMS V8i when you are just using
ArcMap for other reasons.
If Bentley WaterGEMS V8i and another 3rd party application are in conflict with
one another.
3-335
Working in ArcGIS
ArcGIS Applications
ArcView, ArcEdit, and ArcInfo share a common set of applications, each suited to a
different aspect of GIS data management and map presentation. These applications
include ArcCatalog and ArcMap.
3-336
A Bentley WaterGEMS V8i .mdb filethis file contains all modeling data, and
includes everything needed to perform a calculation.
A Bentley WaterGEMS V8i .wtg filethis file contains data such as annotation
and color-coding definitions.
There are a number of options for creating a model in the ArcMap client:
Create a model from scratchYou can create a model in ArcMap. Youll first
need to create a new project and attach it to a new or existing geodatabase. See
Managing Projects In ArcMap and Attach Geodatabase Dialog for further details.
You can then lay out your network using the Bentley WaterGEMS V8i toolbar.
See Laying out a Model in the ArcMap Client.
3-337
Working in ArcGIS
Warning!
3-338
3-339
Working in ArcGIS
Geodatabase FieldThis field displays the path and file name of the geodatabase that was selected to be associated with the project.
Geodatabase ButtonThis button opens an Import To or Create New Geodatabase dialog, where you specify an existing geodatabase or enter a name and directory for a new one.
Spatial Data Coordinates UnitChoose the unit system that are used by the
spatial data coordinates.
Using GeoTables
A GeoTable is a flexible table definition provided by Bentley WaterGEMS V8i .
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i creates feature classes with a very simple schema. A
geotable consists solely of the Geometry, the Bentley WaterGEMS V8i ID and
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i feature type. Bentley WaterGEMS V8i provides a dynamic
join of this data to our trademarked GeoTable. The join is then managed so that it will
be automatically updated when a change is made to the GeoTable definition for each
element type.
GeoTables allow for a dynamic view on the data. The underlying data will represent
the data for the current scenario, the current timestep and the unit definition of the
GeoTable. By using these GeoTables, Bentley WaterGEMS V8i provides ultimate
flexibility for using the viewing and rendering tools provided by the ArcMap environment.
3-340
Apply ArcMap symbology definitions to map elements based on Bentley WaterGEMS V8i data
Use the ArcMap Select By Attributes command to select map elements based on
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i data
Generate ArcMap reports and graphs that include Bentley WaterGEMS V8i data
To Edit a GeoTable
1. In the FlexTable Manager list pane, expand the GeoTables node if necessary.
Double-click the GeoTable for the desired element.
2. By default, only the ID, Label, and Notes data is included in the GeoTable. To add
attributes, click the Edit button.
3. In the Table setup dialog that opens, move attributes from the Available Columns
list to the Selected columns list to include them in the GeoTable. This can be
accomplished by double-clicking an attribute in the list, or by highlighting
attributes and using the arrow buttons (a single arrow button moves the highlighted attribute to the other list; a double arrow moves all of them).
When all of the desired attributes have been moved to the selected columns, click OK.
3-341
Working in ArcGIS
3-342
Rollbacks
WaterGEMS V8i automatically saves a backup copy of the GEMS project database
whenever a project is opened. It will update this backup every time you save the
project. In Stand-Alone mode, some session states are not saved in the GEMS database. Examples include color coding setup and label locations. These data are saved
separately from the GEMS project database. Therefore, if a user terminates a session
before saving, then all edits made subsequent to the last save will be discarded. The
restoration of the automatic project backup is termed a rollback.
However, in shared sessions such as when a user is simultaneously editing a GEMS
project file with ArcMap, ArcCatalog, or Access and WaterGEMS V8i Stand-Alone, it
is not practical to discard project database changes because each application holds a
database lock. WaterGEMS V8i automatically adapts to these situations and will not
rollback when the Stand-Alone session is ended without a prior save. When this
happens, WaterGEMS V8i will generate a message stating that there are multiple
locks on the GEMS project file, and that the other application must be closed before
the rollback can occur.
If you want the rollback to be performed, close ArcMap/ArcCatalog and then click
Yes in the Multiple Locks dialog box. WaterGEMS V8i will then ignore all changes,
and revert to the original saved data.
If you elect not to perform the rollback, WaterGEMS V8i automatically synchronizes
to reflect the current project database state, the very next time it is opened and no
project data is lost. To close WaterGEMS V8i without performing a rollback, simply
click No in the Multiple Locks dialog box. WaterGEMS V8i will then exit without
saving changes. Note that the changes made outside of WaterGEMS V8i will still be
applied to the geodatabase, and WaterGEMS V8i will synchronize the model with
the geodatabase when the project is again opened inside WaterGEMS V8i.
Therefore, even though the changes were not saved inside WaterGEMS V8i,
they will still be applied to the GEMS datastore the next time the project is
opened.
Project data is never discarded by WaterGEMS V8i without first giving you an opportunity to save.
3-343
Working in ArcGIS
3. In ArcMAP, click Add Data.
4. In the Add Data dialog that opens, browse to your models .mdb file.
5. Double click and select the feature datasets, then click Add to add them to the
map.
6. To start adding elements to the model, click Editor and select the Start Editing
command from the menu.
7. Click the Sketch Tool in the Editor toolbar, move the mouse cursor to the location
of the new element in the drawing pane, and click. The new element will open.
8. Using ArcMaps attribute tables, you can now enter data for the newly created
element.
9. When you are finished laying out elements and editing their associated data, click
Editor and select Stop Editing from the menu. A dialog will open with the
message Do you want to save your edits?. Click Yes to commit the edits to the
database, No to discard all of the edits performed during the current editing
session, and Cancel to continue editing.
Note:
When creating new elements, make sure that the Create New
Feature option is selected in the Task pulldown menu, and that
the correct layer is selected in the Target pulldown menu.
3-344
When creating new elements, make sure that the Create New
Feature option is selected in the Task pulldown menu, and that
the correct layer is selected in the Target pulldown menu.
Share data and information with non WaterGEMS V8i users in a portable open
format,
3-345
Present data along side other Google Earth data such as satellite imagery and 3D
buildings.
Steps for using the export feature in each platform are described below.
In general, the process involves creation of a Google Earth format file (called a KML
- Keyhole Markup Language - file). This file can be opened in Google Earth. Google
Earth however is not a "platform" as ArcGIS is because it is not possible to edit or run
the model in Google Earth. It is simply for display.
Once the KML file has been generated in WaterGEMS V8i it can be viewed in Google
Earth by opening Google Earth (version 3 or later) and selecting File > Open and
selecting the KML file that was created.
The layers you open in Google Earth will appear as "Temporary Places" in the Places
manager. These can be checked or unchecked to turn the layers on or off.
3-346
Q3: Have you configured the Google Earth Export settings? If yes go to step Q4,
else follow steps 1 and 2 below.
1. In Microstation choose Tools --> Geographic --> Google Earth Settings. Ensure
that the Google Earth Version is set to version 3.
2. If you have Google Earth installed on your machine you may find it convenient
for the export to open the exported Google Earth file directly. If so, ensure that the
"Open File After Export" setting is checked. If you do not have Google Earth
installed uncheck this option. Please consult the Microstation documentation for
the function of other settings. In most cases the defaults should suffice.
3-347
3-348
9. Once the model add process is complete save the map file (*.mxd).
10. Go to Q3.
Q2 Do you have a spatial reference defined in the geodatabase? If yes go to Q3,
else follow steps 1 to 9 below.
Note:
3-349
You can export all layers at once using the Map to KML tool.
3-350
2. Save the image using File > Save > Save Image and assign the image a file name.
3. Open WaterGEMS V8i and create a new project.
3-351
5. You will see the default image properties for this drawing. Write down the values
in the first two columns of the lower pane and Select OK.
3-352
7. Close the background image by selecting View > Background > Delete and Yes.
Delete the pipe and any end nodes.
8. Reopen the background image using View > Background > New > New File. This
time do not accept the default scale. Instead multiply the values in the two rightmost (image) columns by the scale factor determined in step 6 to obtain the values
3-353
3-354
10. The model is now roughly scaled. Remember that the lengths determined this way
are not survey accuracy and are as accurate as the care involved in measuring
lengths. They may be off by a few percent which may be acceptable for some
applications.
3-355
3-356
Creating Models
Starting a Project
Elements and Element Attributes
Adding Elements to Your Model
Manipulating Elements
Editing Element Attributes
Using Named Views
Using Selection Sets
Using the Network Navigator
Using Prototypes
Zones
Engineering Libraries
Hyperlinks
Using Queries
User Data Extensions
Starting a Project
When you first start Bentley WaterGEMS V8i , the Welcome dialog box opens.
The Welcome dialog box contains the following controls:
4-357
Starting a Project
Open from
ProjectWise
4-358
Creating Models
To Open an Existing Project
To open an existing project, choose File > Open or press <Ctrl+O>. A dialog box
opens allowing you to browse for the project you want to open.
To Switch Between Multiple Projects
To switch between multiple open projects, select the appropriate tab at the top of the
drawing pane. The file name of the project is displayed on the tab.
The dialog box contains the following text fields and controls:
Title
File Name
Engineer
Company
Date
Notes
4-359
Starting a Project
Setting Options
You can change global settings for WaterGEMS V8i in the Options dialog box.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box contains different tabs where you
can change settings.
Click one of the following links to learn more about the Options dialog box:
4-360
Creating Models
4-361
Starting a Project
Backup Levels
4-362
Show Recently
Used Files
Compact Database
After
Show Welcome
Page on Startup
Zoom Extents On
Open
Use accelerated
redraw
Prompts
Creating Models
Window Color
Background Color
Foreground Color
Read Only
Background Color
Read Only
Foreground Color
Selection Color
Layout
Display Inactive
Topology
Inactive Topology
Line Color
Auto Refresh
4-363
Starting a Project
4-364
Select Polygons By
Edge
Selection Handle
Size In Pixels
Selection Line
Width Multiplier
Default Drawing
Style
Creating Models
Stored Prompt Responses Dialog Box
This dialog allows you to change the behavior of command prompts back to their
default settings. Some commands trigger a command prompt that can be suppressed
by using the Do Not Prompt Again check box. You can turn the prompt back on by
accessing this dialog and unchecking the box for that prompt type.
4-365
Starting a Project
4-366
Creating Models
Spatial Reference
Element Identifier
Format
Result Files
Specify Custom
Results File Path?
Root Path
Path Format
Path
Pipe Length
Hydraulic Analysis
4-367
Starting a Project
Friction Method
Condtui Description Options
Conduit Shape
Conduit Description
Format
4-368
Drawing Mode
Horizontal Scale
Factor 1 in. =:
Creating Models
Annotation Multipliers
Text Options
Color Element
Annotations
4-369
Starting a Project
4-370
Creating Models
The Units tab contains the following controls:
Save As
Load
Reset Defaults - SI
Reset Defaults - US
4-371
Starting a Project
Units Table
4-372
Creating Models
Note:
The conversion for pressure to ft. (or m) H20 uses the specific
gravity of water at 4C (39F), or a specific gravity of 1. Hence, if
the fluid being used in the simulation uses a specific gravity
other than 1, the sum of the pressure in ft. (or m) H20 and the
node elevation will not be exactly equal to the calculated
hydraulic grade line (HGL).
Load
Reset
4-373
Starting a Project
Labeling Table
4-374
Creating Models
This tab contains the following controls:
Default Datasource
Note:
For more information about ProjectWise, see the Working with ProjectWise topic.
4-375
Starting a Project
Use the File > ProjectWise commands to perform ProjectWise file operations,
such as Save, Open, and Change Datasource. A Datasource refers to a collection
of folders and documents set up by the ProjectWise Administrator.
The first time you choose one of the File > ProjectWise menu commands in your
current WaterGEMS V8i session, you are prompted to log into a ProjectWise datasource. The datasource you log into remains the current datasource until you
change it using the File > ProjectWise > Change Datasource command. The user
needs to know the name of the Datasource, a user name and a password.
Use WaterGEMS V8is File > New command to create a new project. The project
is not stored in ProjectWise until you select File > ProjectWise > Save As.
Use WaterGEMS V8is File > ProjectWise > Open command to open a local copy
of the current project. ("Local" refers to the users own computer.)
Use WaterGEMS V8is File > Save command to save a copy of the current project
to your local computer.
When you Close a project already stored in ProjectWise using File > Close, you
are prompted to select one of the following options:
4-376
Check InUpdates the project files in ProjectWise with your latest changes
and unlocks the project so other ProjectWise users can edit it.
UnlockUnlocks the project files so other ProjectWise users can edit it but
does not update the project in ProjectWise. Note that this will abandon any
changes you have made since the last Check-in command.
Leave OutLeaves the project checked out so others cannot edit it and
retains any changes you have made since the last server update to the files on
your local computer. Select this option if you want to exit Bentley WaterGEMS V8i but continue working on the project later. The project files may
be synchronized when the files are checked in later.
In the WaterGEMS V8i Options dialog box, there is a ProjectWise tab with the
Update server on Save check box. This option, when turned on, can significantly
affect performance, especially for large, complex projects. When this is checked,
any time you save your WaterGEMS V8i project locally using the File > Save
Creating Models
menu command, the files on your ProjectWise server will also be updated and all
changes to the files will immediately become visible to other ProjectWise users.
This option is turned off by default, which means the ProjectWise server version
of the project will not be updated until the files are checked in.
In this release of WaterGEMS V8i, calculation result files are not managed inside
ProjectWise. A local copy of results is maintained on the users computer, but to
ensure accurate results the user should recalculate projects when the user first
opens them from ProjectWise.
4-377
Starting a Project
You can perform the following ProjectWise operations from within WaterGEMS V8i:
To save an open WaterGEMS V8i project to ProjectWise
3. In WaterGEMS V8i, select File > ProjectWise > Save As.
4. If you havent already logged into ProjectWise, you are prompted to do so. Select
a ProjectWise datasource, type your ProjectWise user name and password, then
click Log in.
5. In the ProjectWise Save Document dialog box, enter the following information:
a. Click Change next to the Folder field, then select a folder in the current
ProjectWise datasource in which to store your project.
b. Type the name of your WaterGEMS V8i project in the Name field. It is best to
keep the ProjectWise name the same as or as close to the WaterGEMS V8i
project name as possible.
c. Keep the default entries for the rest of the fields in the dialog box.
d. Click OK. There will be two new files in ProjectWise; a *.wtg and a
*.wtg.mdb.
4-378
Creating Models
To open a WaterGEMS V8i project from a ProjectWise datasource
1. Select File > ProjectWise > Open.
2. If you havent already logged into ProjectWise, you are prompted to do so. Select
a ProjectWise datasource, type your ProjectWise user name and password, then
click Log in.
3. In the ProjectWise Select Document dialog box, perform these steps:
a. From the Folder drop-down menu, select a folder that contains WaterGEMS
V8i projects.
b. In the Document list box, select a WaterGEMS V8i project.
c. Keep the default entries for the rest of the fields in the dialog box.
d. Click Open.
4-379
Starting a Project
To make a local copy of a WaterGEMS V8i project stored in a ProjectWise datasource
1. Select File > ProjectWise > Open.
2. If you havent already logged into ProjectWise, you are prompted to do so. Select
a ProjectWise datasource, type your ProjectWise user name and password, then
click Log in.
3. Select File > Save As.
4. Save the WaterGEMS V8i project to a folder on your local computer.
To change the default ProjectWise datasource
1. Start WaterGEMS V8i.
2. Select File > ProjectWise > Change Datasource.
3. In the ProjectWise Log in dialog box, type the name of ProjectWise datasource
you want to log into, then click Log in.
To use background layer files with ProjectWise
4-380
Using File > ProjectWise > Save AsIf there are background files assigned to the
model, the user is prompted with two options: copy the background layer files to
the project folder for use by the project, or remove the background references and
manually reassign them once the project is in ProjectWise to other existing
ProjectWise documents.
Using File > ProjectWise > OpenThis works the same as the normal ProjectWise > Open command, except that background layer files are not locked in
ProjectWise for the current user to edit. The files are intended to be shared with
other users at the same time.
Creating Models
To add a background layer file reference to a project that exists in ProjectWise
Using File > Save AsWhen you use File > Save As on a project that is already
in ProjectWise and there are background layer files, you are prompted with two
options: you can copy all the files to the local project folder for use by the project,
or you can remove the background references and manually reassign them after
you have saved the project locally.
Note:
4-381
Starting a Project
The ProjectWise administrator can assign background maps to folders, against which
the contained documents or projects will be registered and displayed. For documents
such as Municipal Products Group product projects, ProjectWise Geospatial can automatically retrieve the embedded spatial location. For documents that are nonspatial,
the document can simply inherit the location of the folder into which it is inserted, or
users can explicitly assign a location, either by typing in coordinates, or by drawing
them.
Each document is indexed to a universal coordinate system or SRS, however, the originating coordinate system of each document is also preserved. This enables search of
documents across the boundary of different geographic, coordinate, or engineering
coordinate systems.
Custom geospatial views can be defined to display documents with symbology
mapped to arbitrary document properties such as author, time, and workflow state.
For a complete description of how to work with ProjectWise Geospatial, for example
how to add background maps and coordinate systems, see the ProjectWise Geospatial
Explorer Guide and the ProjectWise Geospatial Administrator Guide.
Maintaining Project Geometry
A spatial location is comprised of an OpenGIS-format geometry plus a Spatial Reference System (SRS). For Municipal Products Group product projects, the product
attempts to automatically calculate and maintained this geometry, as the user interacts
with the model. Most transformations such as additions, moves, and deletes result in
the bounding box or drawing extents being automatically updated.
Whenever the project is saved and the ProjectWise server is updated, the stored spatial
location on the server, which is used for registration against any background map, will
be updated also. (Note the timing of this update will be affected by the "Update Server
When Saving" option on the Tools-Options-ProjectWise tab.)
Most of the time the bounding box stored in the project will be correct. However, for
performance reasons, there are some rare situations (e.g., moving the entire model)
where the geometry can become out of date with respect to the model. To guarantee
the highest accuracy, the user can always manually update the geometry by using
"Compact Database" or "Update Database Cache" as necessary, before saving to
ProjectWise.
Setting the Project Spatial Reference System
The Spatial Reference System (SRS) for a project is viewed and assigned on the
Tools-Options-Project tab in the Geospatial group.
4-382
Creating Models
The SRS is a standard textual name for a coordinate system or a projection, designated
by various national and international standards bodies. The SRS is assumed to define
the origin for the coordinates of all modeling elements in the project. It is the user's
responsibility to set the correct SRS for the project, and then use the correct coordinates for the contained modeling elements. This will result in the extents of the
modeling features being correct with respect to the spatial reference system chosen.
The SRS is stored at the project database level. Therefore, a single SRS is maintained
across all geometry alternatives. The product does not manipulate or transform geometries or SRS's - it simply stores them.
The primary use of the project's SRS is to create correct spatial locations when a
managing a project in the ProjectWise Integration Server's spatial management
system.
The SRS name comes from the internal list of spatial reference systems that ProjectWise Spatial maintains on the ProjectWise server and is also known as the "key
name." To determine the SRS key name, the administrator should browse the coordinate system dictionary in the ProjectWise administrator tool (under the Coordinate
Systems node of the datasource), and add the desired coordinate system to the datasource. For example, the key name for an SRS for latitude/longitude is LL84, and the
key name for the Maryland State Plane NAD 83 Feet SRS is MD83F.
ProjectWise Spatial uses the SRS to re-project the project's spatial location to the
coordinate system of any spatial view or background map assigned by the administrator.
If the project's SRS is left blank, then ProjectWise will simply not be updated with a
spatial location for that project.
If the project's SRS is not recognized, an error message will be shown, and ProjectWise will simply not be updated with a spatial location for that project.
Interaction with ProjectWise Explorer
Geospatial Administrators can control whether users can edit spatial locations through
the ProjectWise Explorer. This is governed by the checkbox labeled "This user is a
Geospatial Administrator" on the Geospatial tab of the User properties in the ProjectWise Administrator.
Users should decide to edit spatial locations either through the ProjectWise Explorer,
or through the Municipal application, but not both at the same time. The application
will update and overwrite the spatial location (coordinate system and geometry) in
ProjectWise as a project is saved, if the user has added a spatial reference system to
the project. This mechanism is simple and flexible for users - allowing them to choose
when and where spatial locations will be updated.
4-383
Starting a Project
Note:
4-384
Creating Models
4-385
Pipes
Pipes are link elements that connect junction nodes, pumps, valves, tanks, and reservoirs. Each pipe element must terminate in two end node elements.
4-386
Creating Models
3. The Engineering Libraries dialog box opens.
4-387
To delete a row from the table, select the row label then click Delete.
4-388
New
Delete
Report
Creating Models
Description
Quantity
K Each
K Total
4-389
The following management controls are located above the minor loss coefficient list
pane:
4-390
New
Duplicate
Creating Models
Delete
Rename
Report
Synchronization
Options
The tab section is used to define the settings for the minor loss that is currently highlighted in the minor loss list pane. The following controls are available:
Minor Loss Tab
4-391
Library Tab
Notes Tab
4-392
Creating Models
The dialog consists of the following controls:
Bulk Modulus of
Elasticity
Specific Gravity
Youngs Modulus
Poissons Ratio
Wall Thickness
4-393
Pipeline Support
All
Selection
Selection Set
Junctions
Junctions are non-storage nodes where water can leave the network to satisfy
consumer demands or enter the network as an inflow. Junctions are also where chemical constituents can enter the network. Pipes are link elements that connect junction
nodes, pumps, valves, tanks, and reservoirs. Each pipe element must terminate in two
end node elements.
4-394
Creating Models
4-395
Hydrants
Hydrants are non-storage nodes where water can leave the network to satisfy
consumer demands or enter the network as an inflow. Hydrants are also where chemical constituents can enter the network.
4-396
Creating Models
Delete
Rename
Edit
Refresh
Help
4-397
4-398
Nominal Hydrant Flow: This value should be the expected nominal flow for the
hydrant (i.e., the expected flow or desired flow when the hydrant is in use). The
value for nominal flow is used together with the number of intervals value to
determine a reasonable flow step to use when calculating the hydrant curve. A
higher nominal flow value results in a larger flow step and better performance of
the calculation. Note that if you choose a nominal hydrant flow that is too small
and not representative of the hydrant then the high flow results on the resultant
curve may not be correct since the calculation will not calculate more than 1000
points on the curve, for performance reasons.
Number of Intervals: This value is used with the nominal flow value to determine the flow step to be used with the hydrant calculation. For example, a
nominal hydrant flow of 1000gpm and number of intervals set to 10 will result in
a flow step of 1000/10 = 100gpm. This results in points on the hydrant curve
Creating Models
being calculated from 0 flow to the zero pressure point in steps of 100gpm. Note
that if you have a number of intervals value that is too high then high flow results
on the resultant curve may not be correct since the calculation will not calculate
more than 1000 points on the curve, for performance reasons.
Time: Choosing the time of the hydrant curve can affect the results of the curve.
Choose the time at which you wish to run your hydrant curve and the corresponding pattern multipliers will be used for that time. This behaves the same way
as an EPS snapshot calculation. You may also select multiple times in order to
generate multiple hydrant curves for comparison
Choose the junction or hydrant element that will be used for the hydrant flow
curve from the Hydrant/Junction pull-down menu or click the ellipsis button to
select the element from the drawing pane.
Enter values for Nominal Hydrant Flow and Number of Intervals in the corresponding fields.
Tanks
Tanks are a type of Storage Node. A Storage Node is a special type of node where a
free water surface exists, and the hydraulic head is the elevation of the water surface
above sea level. The water surface elevation of a tank will change as water flows into
or out of it during an extended period simulation.
4-399
4-400
Creating Models
Reservoirs
Reservoirs are a type of storage node. A Storage Node is a special type of node where
a free water surface exists, and the hydraulic head is the elevation of the water surface
above sea level. The water surface elevation of a reservoir does not change as water
flows into or out of it during an extended period simulation.
4-401
Pumps
Pumps are node elements that add head to the system as water passes through.
4-402
Creating Models
4. For each definition in the list, perform these steps:
a. Type a unique label for the pump definition.
b. Define a new pump definition by entering Head, Efficiency, and Motor data.
5. Click OK to close the Pump Definitions dialog box and save your data in the
Property Editor.
For more information about pump definitions, see the following topics:
Pump Definitions Dialog Box
Pump Curve Dialog Box
Flow-Efficiency Curve Dialog Box
4-403
Duplicate
Delete
Rename
Report
Synchronization
Options
Synchronize To LibraryUpdates an
existing Pump Definition Engineering
Library using current pump definition
entries that were initially imported but
have since been modified.
4-404
Creating Models
Head Tab
Pump Definition
Type
4-405
Pump Definition
Type (contd)
4-406
Creating Models
Efficiency Tab
4-407
Pump Efficiency
Constant EfficiencyThis efficiency type maintains the efficiency determined by the input value
regardless of changes in discharge. When the
Constant Efficiency type is selected, the input field
is as follows:
4-408
Creating Models
Motor Tab
Motor
Efficiency
Is Variable
Speed Drive?
Efficiency
Points Table
Transient Tab
Inertia (Pump
and Motor)
Speed (Full)
Specific Speed
Reverse Spin
Allowed?
4-409
Library Tab
Notes Tab
4-410
To delete a pump definition, select the curve label then click Delete.
Creating Models
To rename a pump definition, select the label of the pump definition you want
to rename, click Rename, then type the new name.
To view a report on a pump definition, select the label for the pump definition,
then click Report.
4-411
4-412
Creating Models
For more information about Engineering Libraries, see Engineering Libraries.
Brake Horsepower at the BEP: The brake horsepower in kilowatts at the pumps
BEP (best efficiency point).
When you click the OK button, the calculated inertia value will be automatically
populated in the Inertia (Pump and Motor) field on the WaterGEMS V8i tab of the
Pump Definition dialog.
4-413
I motor = 118 P N
: I pump
1.48
kgm
3 0.9556
= 1.5 10 P N
where:
kgm
3 0.9556
I pump = 1.5 10 P N
kgm
4-414
Creating Models
When simulating a Pump Battery in a transient analysis, the pump battery is converted
to an equivalent pump using the following conversion rules:
1. The Flow (Initial) of the equivalent pump is the total flow of all the running
pumps in the pump battery.
2. The Inertia of the Pump and Motor of the equivalent pump is the sum of all the
inertia values for all the running pumps.
3. The Specific Speed of the equivalent pump is the Specific Speed value that is
closest to the result of the following equation:
sqrt(number of running pumps) * Specific Speed of pump battery
Valves
A valve is a node element that opens, throttles, or closes to satisfy a condition you
specify. The following valve types are available in Bentley WaterGEMS V8i :
Valve Type
Description
Pressure Reducing
Valve (PRV)
Pressure Sustaining
Valve (PSV)
Pressure Breaker
Valve (PBV)
4-415
Valve Type
Description
Isolation Valves
4-416
Creating Models
To delete a row from the table, select the row label then click Delete.
4-417
The user can create a library of these curve or read them from a library. Because there
is so much variability in the equipment that can be modeled using GPVs, there is no
default library.
Once the GPV head loss curve has been created, the user can place GPV elements like
any other element. Once placed, the user assigns a head loss curve to the specific GPV
using "General Purpose Head Loss Curve" in the property grid.
A GPV can also have an additional minor loss. To specify that, the user must provide
a minor loss coefficient and the (effective) diameter of the valve.
A GPV does not act as a check valve. Flow can move in either direction through the
valve. Therefore, when modeling a device like a RPBP, it may be necessary to place a
check valve on one of the adjacent pipes to account for that behavior."
4-418
Creating Models
To Define a Headloss Curve
1. Select the GPV in the Drawing View.
2. In the Properties window, click the menu in the GPV Headloss Curve field and
select Edit GPV Headloss Curves.
3. In the GPV Headloss Curves dialog that appears, click the New button. Enter a
name for the curve, or accept the default name.
4. Define at least two points to describe a headloss curve. A point consists of a flow
value for each headloss value in the Flow vs. Headloss table. The curve will be
plotted in the curve display panel below the table.
5. Click the Close button.
To Import a Predefined Headloss Curve From an Engineering Library
1. Select the GPV in the Drawing View.
2. In the Properties window, click the menu in the GPV Headloss Curve field and
select Edit GPV Headloss Curves.
3. In the GPV Headloss Curves dialog that appears, click the New button. Enter a
name for the curve, or accept the default name.
4. Click the Synchronization Options button and select Import From Library.
5. In the Engineering Libraries dialog that appears, click the plus button to expand
the GPV Headloss Curves Libraries node, then click the plus button to expand
the node for the library you want to browse.
6. Select the headloss curve entry you want to use and click the Select button.
7. Click the Close button.
PRV
PSV
PBV
FCV
TCV
GPV
4-419
4-420
New
Duplicate
Creating Models
Delete
Rename
Report
Synchronization
Options
The tab section is used to define the settings for the minor loss that is currently highlighted in the valve characteristic list pane. The following controls are available:
Valve Characteristic
Tab
Relative Closure
Relative Discharge
Coefficient
Library Tab
4-421
Notes Tab
Relative Closure: Percent opening of the valve (100% = fully closed, 0% = fully
open).
Click New to add a new row to the table. Click Delete to remove the currently highlighted row from the table.
4-422
Creating Models
Spot Elevations
Spot elevations can be placed to better define the terrain surface throughout the
drawing. They have no effect on the calculations of the network model. Using spot
elevations, elevation contours and enhanced pressure contours can be generated with
more detail. The only input required for spot elevation elements is the elevation value.
Turbines
A turbine is a type of rotating equipment designed to remove energy from a fluid. For
a given flow rate, turbines remove a specific amount of the fluid's energy head.
4-423
Hydraulic turbines and penstocks often operate under high pressure at steady-state.
Rapid changes such as electrical load rejection, load acceptance or other emergency
operations can result in very high transient pressures that can damage the penstock or
equipment. During load rejection, for example, the wicket gates must close quickly
4-424
Creating Models
enough to control the rapid rise in rotational speed while keeping pressure variations
in the penstock and tailrace within established tolerances. Using Hammer, designers
can verify whether the conduits and flow control equipment are likely to withstand
transient pressures that may occur during an emergency.
Electrical load varies with time due to gradual variations in electricity demand in the
distribution grid. Depending on the type of turbine, different valves are used to control
flow and match the electrical load. Turbines can be classified into two broad categories: a) impulse turbine, and b) reaction turbine.
4-425
Impulse Turbine
An impulse turbine has one or more fixed nozzles through which pressure is converted
to kinetic energy as a liquid jet(s) typically the liquid is water. The jet(s) impinge on
the moving plates of the turbine runner that absorbs virtually all of the moving water's
kinetic energy. Impulse turbines are best suited to high-head applications. One definition of an impulse turbine is that there is no change in pressure across the runner.
In practice, the most common impulse turbine is the Pelton wheel shown in the figure
below. Its rotor consists of a circular disc with several buckets evenly spaced around
its periphery. The splitter ridge in the centre of each bucket divides the incoming
jet(s) into two equal parts that flow around the inner surface of the bucket. Flow partly
fills the buckets and water remains in contact with the air at ambient (or atmospheric)
pressure.
Once the free jet has been produced, the water is at atmospheric pressure throughout
the turbine. This results in two isolated hydraulic systems: the runner and everything
upstream of the nozzle (including the valve, penstock and conduit). Model the
penstock independently using regular pipe(s), valve(s) and a valve to atmosphere for
the nozzle. Transients occur whenever the valve opens or closes and the penstock
must withstand the resulting pressures.
4-426
Creating Models
Note:
Reaction Turbines
The figure below is a schematic of a typical reaction turbine. A volute casing and a
ring of guide vanes (or wicket gate around the circumference) deliver water to the
turbine runner. The wicket gate controls the flow passing through the turbine and the
power it generates. A mechanical and/or electrical governor senses gradual load variations on the generator and opens or closes the wicket gates to stabilize the system (by
matching electrical output to grid load).
Transient Tip: Hammer currently models hydraulic transients that
result from changes in variables controlled by the
governor: it does not explicitly model the governor's
internal operation or dynamics. Depending on the
Operating Case being simulated, HAMMER either
assumes the governor is disconnected or perfect.
The governor is an electro or mechanical control system
that may not be active or may not react fast enough
during the emergency conditions of primary interest to
modelers: instant load rejection or (rapid) load rejection.
Instant load rejection assumes the governor is
disconnected.
At other times, the governor will strive to match
electrical output at the synchronous or no-load speed:
e.g. during load acceptance or load variation. Given the
fact that no two governors are the same, it is useful to
assume the governor is perfect in those cases and that
it can match the synchronous speed exactly.
The runner must always be full to keep losses to a minimum, in contrast to an impulse
turbine where only a few of the runner blades are in use at any moment. Therefore,
reaction turbines can handle a larger flow for a given runner size. The number of
runner blades varies with the hydraulic headthe higher the head the more bladesReaction turbines are classified according to the direction of flow through the runner. In a
radial-flow turbine, the flow path is mainly in the plane of rotation: water enters the
rotator at one radius and leaves at a different radiusthe Francis turbine being an
example of this type. In an axial-flow turbine, the main flow direction is parallel to the
axis of rotation the Kaplan turbine being an example of this type. The term: mixed
flow turbine is used when flow is partly radial and partly axial.
Each of these categories corresponds to a range of specific speeds that can be calculated from the turbine's rated power, rotational (synchronous) speed and head.
4-427
The primary hydraulic variables used to describe a turbine in the above schematic are:
Q = Flow
H = Head
N = Rotational speed
I = Rotational Inertia
w = Wicket gate position (% open)
M = Electrical load or torque
4-428
Creating Models
4-429
Table 4-1: Load and Wicket Gate Changes for Load Rejection
Time (s)
350
100
100
50
4-430
Creating Models
During instant load rejection, the generation of electrical power by the turbine-generator unit should decrease to zero as quickly as possible to limit the speed rise of the
unit. To accomplish this, the wicket gates close gradually in order to reduce flow. The
table below shows an example of wicket gate position versus time to simulate Instant
Load Rejection. In a real turbine a governor would control the wicket gate closure
rate, however the turbine governor is not modeled explicitly in HAMMER and the
user controls the rate of wicket gate closure..
Table 4-2: Wicket Gate Changes for Instant Load Rejection
Time (s)
100
50
Load Acceptance
Full load acceptance occurs when the turbine-generator unit is connected to the electrical grid. Transient pressures generated during full load acceptance can be significant
but they are usually less severe than those resulting from full load rejection.
HAMMER assumes the turbine initially operates at no-load speed (NLS), and the
turbine generates no electrical power. When the transient simulation begins,
HAMMER assumes the electrical grid is connected to the output terminal of the
generator and wicket gates have to be open as quickly as possible to meet the power
demand - all without causing excessive pressure in the penstock.
Note that in this case, HAMMER assumes the turbine governor is 'perfect' - in other
words the power produced by the turbine always equals the electrical load. Therefore
the user doesn't need to enter an electrical load; just a curve of wicket gate position
versus time, and the turbine's rated flow and head. Under the Load Acceptance case
the turbine will always operate at its rated (or synchronous) speed. .
Table 4-3: Wicket Gate Changes for Full Load Acceptance
Time (s)
50
100
4-431
4-432
100
85
10
70
15
57
20
43
30
30
35
35
42
42
Creating Models
Table 4-4: Wicket Gate Changes for General Load Variation
Time (s)
55
57
65
70
80
85
90
100
Time (Delay until Valve Operates) is a period of time that must elapse
before the spherical valve of the turbine activates.
Time for Valve to Operate is the time required to operate the spherical valve.
By default, it is set equal to one time step.
Operating Case allows you to choose among the four possible cases: instantaneous load rejection, load rejection (requires torque/load vs time table), load
acceptance and load variation.
Moment of Inertia The moment of inertia must account for the turbine,
generator, and entrained water.
4-433
Speed (Rotational) denotes the rotation of the turbine blades per unit time,
typically as rotations per minute or rpm. The power generated by the turbine
depends on it.
Turbine Curve For a transient run, HAMMER uses a 4-quadrant curve based
on Specific Speed, Rated Head, and rated Flow. This is only used for steady
state computations.
Flow (Rated) denotes the flow for which the turbine is rated.
Head (Rated) denotes the head for which the turbine is rated.
Electrical Torque Curve defines the time vs torque response for the turbine.
Only applies to the Load Rejection operating case.
4-434
Creating Models
4-435
Air Valves
Air valves are installed at local high points to allow air to come into the system during
periods when the head drops below the pipe elevation and expels air from the system
when fluid columns begin to rejoin. The presence of air in the line limits subatmospheric pressures in the vicinity of the valve and for some distance to either side, as
seen in profiles. Air can also reduce high transient pressures if it is compressed
enough to slow the fluid columns prior to impact.
There are essentially two ways in which an active air valve can behave:
1. Pressure below atmospheric - air valve is open and acts to maintain pressure to 0
on the upstream end and maintains the same flow on the upstream and downstream side.
2. Pressure above atmospheric - air valve is closed and acts as any junction node.
When the air valve is open, the hydraulic grade on the downstream side may be less
than the pipe elevation. This can be displayed as the hydraulic grade line drawn below
the pipe. This should be interpreted as a pressure pipe that is not flowing full. Full
flow resumes at the point where the hydraulic grade line crosses back above the pipe.
Because air valves have the possibility to switch status, they can lead to instability in
the model especially if there are many air valves in the system. To improve the
stability of the model, it is desirable to force some of the valves closed. This can be
done by setting the property "Treat air valve as junction" to True for those valves that
are expected to be closed anyway.
4-436
Creating Models
If all of the pumps upstream of an air valve are off, the pressure subnetwork is disconnected in that area and the model will issue warning messages for all nodes in that
vicinity indicating that they are disconnected.
In addition, the profile between the air valve and the pumps that are Off will be inaccurate. To make the profile view accurate, you can place an imaginary tank on a short
branch with a tiny diameter pipe at an Elevation (Initial) equal to the air valve elevation. This tank (which will not contribute significant flow) can eliminate the disconnected system message and correctly represent the fluid in the upstream pipe when the
pump is off
The following attributes describe the air valve behavior:
Note:
Time to Close: For an air valve, adiabatic compression (i.e., gas law exponent
= 1.4) is assumed. The valve starts to close starts to close linearly with respect
to area only when air begins to exit from the pipe. If air subsequently reenters, then the valve opens fully when air begins to exit from the pipe. If air
subsequently re-enters, then the valve opens fully again. It is possible for
liquid to be discharged through this valve for a period after the air has been
expelled.
Diameter (Air Outflow Orifice): Diameter of the air outflow orifice (the
orifice through which air is expelled from the pipeline). Note an inlet orifice
diameter is not required for this type of air valve; the inlet orifice diameter is
assumed to be very large (i.e. there is no restriction to air inflow).
Air Volume (Initial): Volume of air near the valve at the start of the simulation. The default is zero. If volume is nonzero, the pressure must be zero.
Diameter (Air Inflow Orifice): Diameter of the air inflow orifice (the orifice
through which air enters the pipeline when the pipe internal pressure is less
than atmospheric pressure). This diameter should be large enough to allow the
free entry of air into the pipeline. By default, this diameter is considered infinite (i.e. there is no restriction to air inflow).
Diameter (Air Outflow Orifice): Diameter of the air outflow orifice (the
orifice through which air is expelled from the pipeline). By default, this diameter is considered infinite.
Air Volume (Initial): Volume of air near the valve at the start of the simulation. The default is zero. If volume is nonzero, the pressure must be zero.
4-437
Trigger to Switch Outflow Orifice Size: Select whether the transient solver
switches from the large air outflow orifice to the small air outflow orifice
based on Transition Volume or Transition Pressure.
Transition Pressure: The local internal system air pressure at the air valve
above which the transient solver switches from using the large air orifice to
the small air orifice (in order to minimize transients).
Transition Volume: The local volume of air at the air valve below which the
transient solver switches from using the large air orifice to the small air orifice
(in order to minimize transients). This volume often corresponds to the
volume of the body of the air valve.
Diameter (Small Air Outflow Orifice): ): Diameter of the air outflow orifice
(the orifice through which air is expelled from the pipeline) when the local air
volume is less than the transition volume (TV), or the air pressure is greater
than the transition pressure (TP) (depending on which trigger is used to switch
the outflow orifice size). This diameter is typically small enough for the
injected air to be compressed, which can help prevent severe transient pressures. Generally air flows out the large air outflow orifice for some time
before switching to the small air outflow orifice for the final stages of air
release.
Diameter (Large Air Outflow Orifice): Refers to the discharge of air when
the local air volume is greater than or equal to the transition volume (TV), or
the air pressure is less than or equal to the transition pressure (TP) (depending
on which trigger is used to switch the outflow orifice size). This diameter is
typically large enough that there is little or no restriction to air outflow.
Generally air flows out the large air outflow orifice for some time before
switching to the small air outflow orifice for the final stages or air release.
Diameter (Air Inflow Orifice): Diameter of the air inflow orifice (the orifice
through which air enters the pipeline when the pipe internal pressure is less
than atmospheric pressure). This diameter should be large enough to allow the
free entry of air into the pipeline. By default, this diameter is considered infinite (i.e. there is no restriction to air inflow).
4-438
Diameter (Air Inflow Orifice): Diameter of the air inflow orifice (the orifice
through which air enters the pipeline when the pipe internal pressure is less
than atmospheric pressure). This diameter should be large enough to allow the
free entry of air into the pipeline. By default, this diameter is considered infinite (i.e. there is no restriction to air inflow).
Creating Models
Hydropneumatic Tanks
A pressure vessel connected to the system and containing fluid in its lower portion and
a pressurized gas, usually air, in the top portion. A flexible and expandable bladder is
sometimes used to keep the gas and fluid separate. When the tank is being filled
(usually from a pump), the water volume increases and the air is compressed. When
the pump is turned off, the compressed air maintains pressure in the system until the
water drains and the pressure drops.
In WaterGEMS V8i there are two ways of modeling water fluctuations in hydropneumatic tanks during Steady State / EPS (initial conditions) simulations:
1. As an equivalent constant cross section area tank (Constant Area Approximation)
2. Using the ideal gas law (Gas Law Model)
When using the Constant Area Approximation method, you will need to know the
effective volume of the tank (usually between 30 and 50% of the total volume), and
the hydraulic grade line elevation corresponding to the maximum and minimum water
volumes. The values are referred to as the HGL on and HGL off values because the
feed pump turns off when the maximum effective volume is reached and turns on
when the minimum effective volume is reached. The effective cross sectional area of
an equivalent tank is given by
Area = Effective volume/(HGLoff - HGLon)
Note:
Specifying these on and off HGL levels does not mean that
logical controls have been established. You must still set up
logical controls for the pumps feeding the tank and these control
levels should not be significantly different from the HGL on and
off levels.
Using the Gas Law Model, the tank is modeled using a form of the ideal gas law for an
isothermal fluid:
(P + Patm) Vair = K
Where:
P = gauge pressure
Patm = atmospheric pressure
Vair = volume of air in tank.
When using this method, you must specify the volume of liquid in the tank, the total
volume of the tanks and the initial pressure (or HGL). You can also override the
default atmospheric pressure of 32 ft.
4-439
During a transient simulation there are two basic types of tank: (a) direct interface
between the liquid and gas, and (b) gas contained in a bladder. Both utilize the expansion/contraction of a gas according to the gas law: P Vk = constant, where P is the
absolute pressure, V is the volume and the exponent k lies between 1.0 and 1.2. In the
case of (b), the initial volume is determined from the isothermal gas law, PV =
constant, for given values of preset pressure, tank volume and initial (gauge) pipe
pressure. At the mouth of the vessel, there is a differential orifice with head loss H =
Hl - Hg = b d Q2 / (2g Aor2), where the subscripts l, g and or refer to the liquid, gas and
orifice, respectively, b is the head loss coefficient and d = di for inflow (Q > 0) and -1
for outflow (Q < 0). By definition, d asserts that head losses are di times greater for
inflow than for outflow - typical value of di is 2.5.
With respect to a bladder vessel, the pre-set pressure can range from zero gauge
(atmospheric pressure) to some higher pressure. Prior to and during a transient computation:
4-440
HAMMER assumes the bladder is at the pre-set pressure but isolated from the
system.
HAMMER assumes a (virtual) isolation valve is opened, such that the (typically
higher) system pressure is now felt by the bladder. HAMMER computes the new
(typically smaller) volume of the air inside the bladder.
When the transient occurs, HAMMER expands or contracts the volume inside the
bladder accordingly.
Creating Models
After the simulation is complete, you can look in the .RPT and/or .OUT text file(s)
to see what the preset pressure, pre-transient volume (at system pressure) and
subsequent variations in pressure and volume have occurred.
The variable level hydropneumatic tank type is for users who have detailed information about the tank's geometry and want to perform as accurate a simulation as
possible. Typically, this type of representation would be selected in the detailed
design stage. It would also be apropos in the case of low-pressure systems and/or relatively tall tanks with large movements of the interface relative to the HGL of the gas.
The initial liquid level is determined from the initial gas volume which is an input
parameter. The tank cross-sectional area at any elevation is interpolated from an
input table of the vessel's geometry spanning the range from the pipe connection at the
bottom to the top of the tank.
4-441
Surge Valves
Surge Valve elements represent a surge-anticipator valve (SAV), a surge relief valve
(SRV), or both of them combined. A SAV opens on low pressure in anticipation of a
subsequent high pressure. A SRV opens when pressure exceeds a threshold value.
The following attributes describe the surge-anticipator valve behavior:
Time for SAV to Open: Amount of time that the SAV takes to fully open after
being triggered.
Time SAV Stays Fully Open: Amount of time that the SAV remains fully open
(i.e., the time between the end of opening phase and the start of the closing phase).
Time for SAV to Close: Amount of time for the SAV to close fully, measured
from the time that it was completely open.
There are three optional valve configurations as defined by the attribute SAV/SRV
type: (1) Surge Anticipator Valve, (2) Surge Relief Valve, and (3) Surge Anticipator &
Relief Valve.
For the SAV, at full opening it's capacity is represented by the discharge coefficient
Cv, while the valve characteristics at partial openings are provided by the valve curves
discussed in Closing Characteristics of Valves (note that there is no user-specified
valve currently provided for the SAV).
The SRV is modelled as being comprised of a vertical-lift plate which is resisted by a
compressed spring. At the threshold pressure, there is an equilibrium between the
compressive force exerted by the valve's spring on the movable plate and the counter
force applied by the pressure of the liquid. For a linear spring, the lift x is given by the
equation: A (P - P0) = k x, where A is the pipe area, P is the instantaneous pressure, P0
4-442
Creating Models
is the threshold pressure, and k is the spring constant. In this formulation, the acceleration of the spring and plate system is ignored. As the plate lifts away from the pipe
due to the excess pressure, more flow can be vented to atmosphere to a maximum
value at 0.937 times the pipe diameter.
Check Valves
There are several types of check valves available for the prevention of reverse flow in
a hydraulic system. The simplest and often most reliable are the ubiquitous swing
check valves, which should be carefully selected to ensure that their operational characteristics (such as closing time) are sufficient for the transient flow reversals that can
occur in the system. Some transient flow reversal conditions can occur very rapidly;
thus, if a check valve cannot respond quickly enough, it may slam closed and cause
the valve or piping to fail.
Check valves that have moving discs and parts of significant mass have a higher
inertia and therefore tend to close more slowly upon flow reversal. Check valves with
lighter checking mechanisms have less inertia and therefore close more quickly.
External counterweights present on some check valves (such as swing check valves)
assist the valve closing following stoppage of flow. However, for systems that experience very rapid transient flow reversal, the additional inertia of the counterweight can
slow the closing time of the valve. Spring-loaded check valves can be used to reduce
closing time, but these valves have higher head loss characteristics and can induce an
oscillatory phenomenon during some flow conditions.
It is important that the modeler understand the closing characteristics of the check
valves being used. For example, ball check valves tend to close slowly, swing check
valves close somewhat faster (unless they are adjusted otherwise), and nozzle check
valves have the shortest closing times. Modeling the transient event with closing times
corresponding to different types of check valves can indicate if a more expensive
nozzle-type valve is worthwhile.
The following attributes describe the check valve behavior:
Open Time: Amount of time to open the valve, from the fully closed position,
after the specified Pressure (Threshold) value is exceeded. This establishes the
rate of opening if the valves closure is partial.
Closure Time: Amount of time to close the valve, from the fully open position,
after reverse flow is sensed. This establishes the rate of opening if the valves
closure is partial.
Pressure (Threshold): The pressure difference between the upstream and downstream side that triggers the valve to (re)open the (closed) valve. If 0 is entered,
the valve (re)opens when the upstream pressure esceeds the downstream pressure.
4-443
Rupture Disks
A rupture disk node is located between two pipes. It is designed to fail when a specified threshold pressure is reached. This creates an opening in the pipe through which
flow can exit the system to atmosphere.
If the disk is intact, then this node is represented as a typical Junction. After the
threshold pressure is exceeded, it is presumed that the disk has blown off and the
liquid rushes out of the newly-created orifice discharging to atmosphere.
4-444
Valve - discharges water from the system at a pipe end open to atmospheric pressure. It is essentially an Orifice to Atmosphere with a variable diameter which
could become zero; optionally, the valve can start the simulation in the closed
position and proceed to open after a time delay. As long as the diameter is positive, either outflow for positive pressure or injection of air for zero pressure are
possible. In the latter case, the rate of change of the air volume Xi in each branch
Creating Models
is described by the relation dXi / dt = - Qi, with the total volume X being the
summation over all branch volumes Xi. After the valve closes, it behaves like a
Junction element (and as a dead end junction if there is only a single branch
connected).
Rating Curve - releases water from the system to atmosphere based on a customizable rating curve relating head and flow. Below a certain value of head, the
discharge is zero; in stage-discharge relations, head is equivalent to level for
which the discharge increases with increasing level.
4-445
4-446
Creating Models
Surge Tanks
A surge tank (also known as a stand pipe) typically has a relatively small volume and
is located such that its normal water level is typically equal to the hydraulic grade line
at steady state. When low transient pressures occur, the tank feeds water into the
system by gravity to avoid subatmospheric pressure at the tank connection and
vicinity.
There are two different surge tank types, as defined in the attribute called Surge Tank
Type.
H = H H T = bdQ 2gA
or
4-447
4-448
Creating Models
A user can optionally choose a Section type for the Simple Surge Tank. The choices
are: a). Circular - so a tank diameter is required; b). non-circular - so an equivalent
cross-sectional area is required; or c). variable area - where the cross-sectional area is
provided in a table as a function of elevation. Note that for variable area tanks there is
4-449
4-450
Creating Models
4-451
Other Tools
Although WaterGEMS V8i is primarily a modeling application, some additional
drafting tools can be helpful for intermediate calculations and drawing annotation.
MicroStation and AutoCAD provide a tremendous number of drafting tools. Bentley
WaterGEMS V8i itself (including Stand-Alone) provides the following graphical
annotation tools:
4-452
Border tool
Text tool
Line tool.
Creating Models
You can add, move, and delete graphical annotations as you would with any network
element (see Manipulating Elements on page 4-457).
Border Tool
The Border tool adds rectangles to the drawing pane. Examples of ways to use the
Border tool include drawing property lines and defining drawing boundaries.
To Draw a Border in the Drawing View
1. Click the Border tool in the Layout toolbox.
2. Click in the drawing to define one corner of the border.
3. Drag the mouse cursor until the border is the shape and size you want, then click.
Text Tool
The text tool adds text to the drawing pane. Examples of ways to use the Text tool
include adding explanatory notes, titles, or labels for non-network elements. The size
of the text in the drawing view is the same as the size of labels and annotations. You
can define the size of text, labels, and annotation in the Drawing tab of the Tools >
Options dialog.
To Add Text to the Drawing View
1. Click the Text tool in the Layout toolbox.
2. Click in the drawing to define where the text should appear.
3. In the Text Editor dialog, type the text as it should appear in the drawing view,
then click OK. Note that text will be in a single line (no carriage returns allowed).
To add multiple lines of text, add each line separately with the Text tool.
To Rotate Existing Text in the Drawing View
1. Click the Select tool in the Layout toolbox.
2. Right-click the text and select the Rotate command.
3. Move the mouse up or down to define the angle of the text, then click when done.
To Edit Existing Text in the Drawing View
1. Click the Select tool in the Layout toolbox.
2. Right-click the text and select the Edit Text command.
3. Make the desired changes in the Text Editor dialog that appears, then click OK.
4-453
Line Tool
The Line tool is used to add lines and polylines (multi segmented lines) to the drawing
pane. Bentley WaterGEMS V8i can calculate the area inside a closed polyline. Examples of ways to use the Line tool include drawing roads or catchment outlines.
To Draw a Line or Polyline in the Drawing View
1. Click the Line tool in the Layout toolbox.
2. Click in the drawing to define where the line should begin.
3. Drag the mouse cursor and click to place the line, or to place a bend if you are
drawing a polyline.
4. Continue placing bends until the line is complete, then right-click and select
Done.
To Close an Existing Polyline in the Drawing View
1. Click the Select tool in the Layout toolbox.
2. Right-click the polyline and select the Close command.
To Calculate the Area of a Closed Polyline
1. Click the Select tool in the Layout toolbox.
2. Right-click the polyline and select the Enclosed Area command.
To Add a Bend to an Existing Line or Polyline
1. Click the Select tool in the Layout toolbox.
2. Right-click at the location along the line or polyline where the bend should be
placed and select the Bend > Add Bend command.
To Remove Bends from an Existing Line or Polyline
1. Click the Select tool in the Layout toolbox.
2. Right-click the bend to be removed and select the Bend > Remove Bend
command. To remove all of the bends from a polyline (not a closed polyline),
right-click the polyline and select the Bend > Remove All Bends command.
3.
4-454
Creating Models
Periodic Head/Flow Element using Head: A reservoir with the HGL determined
from the sinusoidal wave properties, or from the head pattern. Only the initial
(time zero) HGL is applied so that the steady state analysis will correspond to the
transient initial conditions.
Air Valve: If the "Treat Air Valve as Junction" property is set to True the Air Valve
is loaded as a junction with no demand. If the "Treat Air Valve as Junction" property is set to False, the air valve is loaded such that it opens the system to atmosphere. This is most commonly used to simulate high points in pumped sewer
systems, so the default behavior is to treat the air valve as a junction.
Check Valve: Short Pipe with a Check Valve in line with the direction of flow.
Discharge to Atmosphere: For the Orifice and Valve types this element is loaded
as a junction with emitter coefficient determined by the flow and pressure drop
properties. If either of these properties are invalid (<= 0) then no emitter coefficient is loaded. Furthermore, for the valve type if the valve is initially closed, no
emitter coefficient is loaded. For the rating curve type this element is loaded as a
reservoir connected to a GPV with rating curve used as the GPV headloss curve.
Valve with linear area change: GPV with a headloss curve based on the valve's
discharge coefficient.
Orifice: GPV with a headloss curve calculated from the nominal head/flow loss
using the orifice equation.
Surge Tank: Without a check valve, this element is loaded as a tank. With a check
valve this element is loaded as a Junction.
4-455
Layout Tool
4-456
Creating Models
5. To change the element, right-click and select a different element from the shortcut
menu.
6. To stop adding elements using the Layout tool, right-click anywhere in the
drawing pane and click Done.
Manipulating Elements
You can manipulate elements in your model in any one of the following ways:
Split pipesSplit an existing pipe into two new pipes by adding a new node
element along the existing pipe.
Select Elements
The following element selection options are available:
To manually select an element
Click the element. Selected elements appear in red.
Note:
You can change the selection color in the Options dialog box,
which is accessible by selecting Tools > Options.
4-457
Manipulating Elements
To select all elements
To select all of the elements in your model, select Edit > Select All.
To select all elements of the same type
To select all elements of the same type (for example, all junction chambers), select
Edit > Select by Element, then click the desired element type.
All elements of the selected type appear in red, including connecting pipes.
4-458
Creating Models
To clear selected elements
Select Tool
Click the Select tool then click any blank space in the drawing pane.
or
Click Edit > Clear Selection.
or
Press the Esc key.
You can also clear a selected element by clicking a different element.
To move an element in the model
1. Click the Select tool on the Layout toolbar.
2. Select the element(s) you want to move, then drag it to its new location. Pipe
connections move with the element.
To delete an element
Select the element, then press Delete.
or
Select Edit > Delete.
Splitting Pipes
You may encounter a situation in which you need to add a new element in the middle
of an existing pipe.
To split an existing pipe
1. Select the desired element symbol on the Layout toolbar.
2. In the drawing pane, place the cursor over the pipe you want to split and click.
3. You are prompted to confirm that you want to split the pipe.
4-459
Manipulating Elements
If you choose to split the pipe, the element will be inserted and two new pipes
will be created with the same characteristics as the original pipe (lengths are
split proportionally).
If you choose not to split the pipe, the new element will be placed on top of
the pipe without connecting to anything.
If you accidentally split a pipe, this action can be undone by selecting Edit > Undo.
You can also split an existing pipe with an existing element. To do this, drag the
element into position along the pipe to be split, then right-click the node and select
Split <Pipe Label> from the shortcut menu (where <Pipe Label> is the name of the
pipe to be split).
Reconnect Pipes
In certain circumstances, you may wish to disconnect a pipe from a node without
deleting and redrawing the pipe in question. For example, if the model was built from
a database and the Establish By Spatial Data option was used to determine pipe
connectivity, pipes may have been connected to the wrong nodes.
To disconnect and reconnect a pipe:
1. Right-click the pipe to be disconnected close to the end of the pipe nearest the end
that you want disconnected.
2. The pipe is now connected to the junction that it will remain connected to and
your mouse cursor. Hover the mouse cursor over the junction to which you would
like to connect the pipe and click the left mouse button. The pipe will now be
connected to this junction.
4-460
Creating Models
To model a curved pipe
1. Select the desired link element using the Layout button on the Layout toolbar.
2. Place the first segment of the curved pipe in your model, then right click and
select Bend from the shortcut menu.
3. Repeat Step 2 for each segment in the curved pipe. Be sure to insert bends to
clearly show the curved alignment.
4. When the curved pipe is complete, right click and select the next downstream
element.
Delete
4-461
Manipulating Elements
Choose Features to
Process
Allow assignment to
inactive pipes
The relationship between an isolation valve and their referenced pipe is displayed in
the drawing pane with a dashed line, like this:
4-462
Creating Models
Choose Features to
Process
All: All pipes in the model that have a neighboring node within the specified tolerance will
be split by that junction.
Tolerance
Pipes will be split by every junction that falls within the specified tolerance. To
prevent unwanted pipe splits, first use the Network Navigators Network Review >
Pipe Split Candidates query to verify that the tolerance you intend to use for the
Batch Split operation will not include nodes that you do not want involved in the pipe
split operation.
4-463
Manipulating Elements
To use the Network Navigator to assist in Batch Pipe Split operations
1. Open the Network Navigator.
2. Click the [>] button and select the Network Review...Pipe Split Candidates
query.
3. In the Query Parameters dialog box, type the tolerance you will be using in the
pipe split operation and click OK.
4. In the Network Navigator, highlight nodes in the list that you do not want to be
included in the pipe split operation and click the Remove button.
5. Open the Batch Pipe Split dialog.
6. Click the Selection button.
7. Type the tolerance you used in the Network Review query and click OK.
We provide a number of Network Navigator queries that will help you find "potential"
problems (see Using the Network Navigator).
1. Review and clean up your model as much as possible prior to running the "batch
split" operation. Run the "duplicate pipes" and "nodes in close proximity" queries
first. (Click the View menu and select Queries. In the Queries dialog expand the
Queries-Predefined tree. The Duplicate Pipes and Nodes in Close Proximity
queries are found under the Network Review folder.)
2. Next, use the network navigator tool to review "pipe split candidates" prior to
running batch split.
a. Using the network navigator tool, run the "pipe split candidates" query to get
the list of potential batch split candidate nodes. Take care to choose an appropriate tolerance (feel free to run the query multiple times to settle on a tolerance that works best; jot down the tolerance that you settle on, you will want
to use that same tolerance value later when you perform the batch split operation).
b. Manually navigate to and review each candidate node and use the "network
navigator" remove tool to remove any nodes that you do not want to process
from the list.
4-464
Creating Models
c. After reviewing the entire list, use the network navigator "select in drawing"
tool to select the elements you would like to process.
d. Run the batch split tool. Choose the "Selection" radio button to only process
the nodes that are selected in the drawing. Specify the desired tolerance, and
press OK to proceed.
To access the dialog, right-click one of the nodes to be merged and select the Merge
nodes in close proximity command.
The dialog consists of the following controls:
Node to keep: Displays the node that will be retained after the merge operation.
Tolerance: Allows you to define the tolerance for the merge operation. Nodes that fall
within this distance from the "Node to keep" will be available in the "Nodes to merge"
pane.
Refresh: Refreshes the nodes displayed in the "Nodes to merge" pane. Click this
button after making a change to the tolerance value to update the list of nodes available for the merge operation.
Select nodes to merge: Toggle this button on to select the nodes that are selected in
the "Nodes to merge" pane in the drawing pane.
4-465
Property Editor
The Property Editor is a contextual dialog box that changes depending on the status of
other dialog boxes. For example, when a network element is highlighted in the
drawing pane, the Property Editor displays the attributes and values associated with
that element. When one of the manager dialog boxes is active, the Property Editor
displays the properties pertaining to the currently highlighted manager element.
Attributes displayed in the Property Editor are grouped into categories. An expanded
category can be collapsed by clicking the minus (-) button next to the category
heading. A collapsed category can be expanded by clicking the plus (+) button next to
the category heading.
For the most efficient data entry in Text Box style fields, instead of clicking on the
Field, click on the label to the left of the field you want to edit, and start typing. Press
Enter to commit the value, then use the Up/Down keyboard arrows to navigate to the
next field you want to edit. You can then edit the field data without clicking the label
first; when you are finished editing the field data, press the Enter key, and proceed to
the next field using the arrow keys, and so on.
4-466
Creating Models
Find Element
The top section of the Property Editor contains the Find Element tool. The Find
Element tool is used to:
Find an element in your model by typing the element label or ID in the Element
menu then clicking the Find button or pressing Enter. The drawing pane centers
around the highlighted element.
Find all elements of a certain type by using an asterisk (*) as a wild-card character. For example, if you want to find all of the pipes in your model, you type co*
(this is not case-sensitive) then click the Find button. The drawing pane centers
around and highlights the first instance of a pipe in your model, and lists all pipes
in your model in the Element menu. For more information about using wildcards,
see Using the Like Operator.
* and # are wildcard characters. If the element(s) you are looking for contains one
or more of those characters, you will need to enclose the search term in brackets: [
and ].
4-467
4-468
Element
Find
Help
Zoom Level
Categorized
Alphabetic
Property Pages
Definition bar
Creating Models
Labeling Elements
When elements are placed, they are assigned a default label. You can define the
default label using the Labeling tab of the Tools > Options dialog.
You can also relabel elements that have already been placed using the Relabel
command in the element FlexTables.
Relabeling Elements
You can relabel elements from within the Property Editor.
To relabel an element
1. Select the element in the Drawing Pane then, if the Property Editor is not already
displayed, select View > Properties.
2. In the General section of the Property Editor, click in the Label field, then type a
new label for the element.
Value
Unit
Display Precision
4-469
Format
4-470
Creating Models
Choose View > Named Views to open the Named View dialog box.
Delete
Rename
4-471
Go to View
Expand All or
Collapse All
Help
4-472
From a selection of elementsYou create a new selection set in the Selection Sets
Manager, then use your mouse to select the desired elements in the drawing pane.
From a queryCreate a query in the Query Manager, then use the named query to
find elements in your model and place them in the selection set.
Creating Models
The following illustration shows the overall process.
4-473
4-474
Creating Models
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
New
Delete
Duplicate
4-475
Edit
Rename
Select In Drawing
Help
You can view the properties of a selection in the Property Editor by right-clicking the
selection set in the list pane and selecting Properties from the shortcut menu.
To view elements in a Selection Set
You use the Network Navigator to view the elements that make up a selection set.
1. Open the Network Navigator by selecting View > Network Navigator or clicking
the Network Navigator button on the View toolbar.
2. Select a selection set from the Selection Set drop-down list. The elements in the
selection set appear in the Network Navigator.
4-476
Creating Models
Tip:
You can also double-click queries on either side of the dialog box to add them
to or remove them from the selection set.
4-477
Available Queries
Selected Queries
Query Manipulation
Buttons
[ > ] Adds the selected items from the Available Queries list to the Selected Queries list.
4-478
Creating Models
To add a group of elements to a static selection set all at once
1. Select all of the elements to be added by either drawing a selection box around
them, or by holding down the Ctrl key while clicking each one in turn.
2. When all of the desired elements are highlighted, right-click and select Add to
Selection Set.
3. In the Add to Selection Set dialog box, select the selection set to which you want
to add the element.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the element to the selected selection set.
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without creating the selection set.
To Add To Selection Set Dialog Box
This dialog box opens when you select the Add to Selection Set command. It contains
the following field:
Add to:
4-479
If there is only one selection set listed in the Selection Sets manager, you
dont have to highlight it before clicking the Select In Drawing button.
4. Shift-click (hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button) any selected
elements that you do not want to delete.
5. Right-click and select Delete. The highlighted elements in the selection set are
deleted from your model.
To create a report on a group of elements in a selection set
1. Open the Selection Sets Manager by selecting View > Selection Sets or clicking
the Selection Sets button on the View toolbar.
2. In the Selection Sets Manager, highlight the selection set that contains elements
you want to report on.
3. Click the Select In Drawing button in the Selection Sets Manager to highlight all
of the selection sets elements in the drawing pane.
If there is only one selection set listed in the Selection Sets manager, you
dont have to highlight it before clicking the Select In Drawing button.
4. Shift-click (hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button) any selected
elements that you do not want to include in the report.
5. Right-click and select Report. A report window displays the report.
4-480
Creating Models
To open the Network Navigator, click the View menu and select the Network Navigator command, press <Ctrl+3>, or click the Network Navigator button
View toolbar.
on the
Execute
Previous
Zoom To
4-481
Next
Copy
Remove
Select In Drawing
Highlight
Refresh Drawing
Help
Predefined Queries
The Network Navigator provides access to a number of predefined queries grouped
categorically, accessed by clicking the [>] button. Categories and the queries
contained therein include:
Network
Network queries include All Elements queries for each element type, allowing you
to display all elements of any type in the Network Navigator.
4-482
Creating Models
Network Review
Network Review Queries include the following:
Crossing Pipes - Identifies pipes that intersect one another with no junction at the
intersection.
Orphaned Nodes - Identifies nodes that are not connected to a pipe in the model.
Orphaned Isolation Valves - Identifies isolation valves that are not connected to
a pipe in the model.
Dead End Nodes - Identifies nodes that are only connected to one pipe.
Dead End Junctions - Identifies junctions that are only connected to one pipe.
Pipe Split Candidates- Identifies nodes near a pipe that may be intended to be
nodes along the pipe. The tolerance value can be set for the maximum distance
from the pipe where the node should be considered as a pipe split candidate.
Pipes Missing Nodes - Identifies which pipes are missing either one or both end
nodes.
Duplicate Pipes - Identifies instances in the model where a pipe shares both end
nodes with another pipe.
Network Trace
Network Trace Queries include the following:
Find Connected - Locates all the connected elements to the selected element in
the network.
Find Adjacent Nodes - Locates all node elements connected upstream or downstream of the selected element or elements.
Find Adjacent Links - Locates all link elements connected upstream or downstream of the selected element or elements.
Find Shortest Path - Select a Start Node and a Stop Node. The query reports the
shortest path between the two nodes based upon the shortest number of edges.
Trace Upstream - Locates all the elements connected upstream of the selected
downstream element.
Isolate - Select an element that needs to be serviced. Run the query to locate the
nearest isolation valves. In order to service the element, this will identify where
shut off points and isolation valves are located.
4-483
Find Initially Isolated Elements - Locates elements that are not connected or
cannot be reached from any boundary condition.
Input
Input Queries include a number of queries that allow you to find elements that satisfy
various conditions based on input data specified for them. Input queries include:
4-484
Elements With SCADA Data - Locates elements that are have SCADA data
associated with them.
Pipes with Check Valves - Locates pipes that have the Has Check Valve? input
attribute set to True.
Controlled Pumps - Locates all pumps that are referenced in a control Action.
Controlled Valves - Locates all valves that are referenced in a control Action.
Controlled Pipes - Locates all pipes that are referenced in a control Action.
Initially Off Pumps - Locates all pumps whose Status (Initial) input attribute is
set to Off.
Initially Closed Control Valves - Locates all control valves whose Status (Initial)
input attribute is set to Closed.
Initially Inactive Control Valves - Locates all control valves whose Status
(Initial) input attribute is set to Inactive.
Initially Closed Pipes - Locates all pipes whose Status (Initial) input attribute is
set to Closed.
Fire Flow Nodes - Locates nodes included in the group of elements specified in
the Fire Flow Alternative's Fire Flow Nodes field.
Tanks with Local Bulk Reaction Rate Coefficient - Locates all tanks whose
Specify Local Bulk Rate? input attribute is set to True.
Pipes with Local Reaction Rate Coefficients - Locates all pipes whose Specify
Local Bulk Reaction Rate? input attribute is set to True.
Creating Models
Pipes with Hyperlinks - Locates all pipes that have one or more associated
hyperlinks.
Nodes with Hyperlinks - Locates all nodes that have one or more associated
hyperlinks.
Results
Results Queries include a number of queries that allow you to find elements that
satisfy various conditions based on output results calculated for them. Results queries
include:
Negative Pressures - Locates all nodes that have negative calculated pressure
results.
Pumps Operating Out of Range - Locates all pumps whose Pump Exceeds
Operating Range? result attribute displays True.
Pumps Cannot Deliver Flow or Head - Locates all pumps whose Cannot
Deliver Flow or Head? result attribute displays True.
Valves Cannot Deliver Flow or Head - Locates all valves whose Cannot Deliver
Flow or Head? result attribute displays True.
Empty Tanks - Locates all tanks whose Status (Calculated) result attribute
displays Empty.
Full Tanks - Locates all tanks whose Status (Calculated) result attribute displays
Full.
Off Pumps - Locates all pumps whose Status (Calculated) result attribute displays
Off.
Closed Control Valves - Locates all control valves whose Status (Calculated)
result attribute displays Closed.
Inactive Control Valves - Locates all control valves whose Status (Calculated)
result attribute displays Inactive.
Closed Pipes - Locates all pipes whose Status (Calculated) result attribute
displays Closed.
Failed Fire Flow Constraints - Locates all elements whose Satisfies Fire Flow
Constraints? result attribute displays False.
4-485
This opens the following dialog where the user can control the behavior of the query:
4-486
Creating Models
The element type parameter enables the user to search for duplicate queries across all
elements or within a specific type of element.
Spot elevations are not included as a choice because duplicate spot elevations are not
usually problematic.
The second choice in the dialog enables the user to control whether blank labels
should be considered as duplicates.
The defaults for these parameters are to consider all elements and blank labels should
be considered.
The query returns a list of elements with duplicate labels with their ID and Type. The
user can highlight those elements in the drawing, zoom to individual elements and
modify them as desired.
4-487
When the pressure zone manager opens, you will see a left pane which lists the
scenarios for which pressure zone studies have been set up. The first time, it will be
blank. In the right pane, You see the Summary tab which lists the scenarios for which
the pressure zone manager has been run and the number of pressure zones which were
identified in the run.
To begin a pressure zone study, select New from the top of the left pane, and then pick
which scenario will be used for the study. You can perform pressure zone studies for
any scenario.
4-488
Creating Models
2. Use when closed
3. Do not use
4. (Pipes Only) Use when closed/Check valve
It is also possible to specify that an individual element behave differently from the
default behaviors in the bottom right pane by clicking the Select from Drawing button
at the top of the table and picking the element from the drawing.
Zone Scope
Once the settings have been established, select the scenario to be run in the left pane.
Click the Zone Scope tab in the right pane.
The first choice in the Zone Scope tab is whether to identify pressure zones for the
entire network of a subset of the network. The default value is "Entire network".
4-489
Upon picking the green check mark, the Zone Scope dialog opens again, displaying
the elements selected.
4-490
Creating Models
column labeled Zone but you do not need to identify a representative element in each.
It is best to set up Zones before starting the pressure zone manager. In that way, the
drop down list under Representative Element on the Zone Scope tab (see below) will
be populated.
Overall Results
4-491
The options at the bottom of the dialog control whether the Zone assignments that will
be made will overwrite existing Zone assignments.
4-492
Creating Models
After selecting OK, each element in a pressure zone that has a representative element
is assigned the Zone name associated with that representative element.
4-493
For more information, see Pressure Zone Flow Balance Tool Dialog Box.
4-494
Creating Models
The sixth button color codes the drawing by pressure zone. Each zone is colored
according to the color displayed in the rightmost column of the table. In the image
below, the main zone is blue, the red zone is boosted through a pump, the magenta
zone is a reduced zone fed through a PRV and the green zone is a well.
4-495
The table of export data contains a row for each pressure zone, as well as a row for the
boundary elements. The first column specifies the pressure zone. The second column
specifies the zone, specified by you, to assign the elements of the pressure zone to.
This comun consists of pull-down menus containing all of the model's zones. Additionally, there is an ellipsis (...) button that will bring up the Zone Manager if you need
to add/remove/modify the model's zones (see Zones for more information). The third
column is informational. It lists the representative element for the selected zone,
which is specified in the Pressure Zone Manager (see Using the Pressure Zone
Manager).
The special <Boundary Elements> pressure zone contains all of the boundary
elements for every pressure zone. The other pressure zones each contain all of the
elements in that pressure zone, excluding the boundary elements that seal off that
pressure zone.
If you do not assign a zone to each pressure zone in the table before clicking the OK
button, a warning will appear prompting you to do so.
The two Options radio buttons are mutually exclusive. "Overwrite Existing Zones"
specifies that all elements in the pressure zones will be assigned to the corresponding
zone chosen in the table. "Only Update Unassigned Zones" specifies that only those
elements in the pressure zone that are not currently assigned to any zone will be
assigned to the corresponding zone in the table. The exception is the <Boundary
Elements> pressure zone, which will always be exported as if the "Overwrite Existing
Zones" option is selected.
4-496
Creating Models
The "Highlight Pressure Zone In Drawing" toolbar button causes the elements of the
pressure zone in the current row of the table to be highlighted in the drawing. This
option gives allows you to see what elements are going to be affected by the export
operation.
For each Pressure Zone, it displays the Zone (if one is associated with the pressure
zone), net inflow (flow across the boundaries but not including flow originating from
tanks and reservoirs in the pressure zone), the demand in that zone, the minimum and
maximum elevations in the pressure zone, the minimum and maximum hydraulic
grade lines in the pressure zone, and the minimum and maximum pressure in the pressure zone.
The Report button allows you to generate a preformatted report containg all of the
data displayed in the tabels.
The Copy buttons (above the Pressure Zones and Boundary Elements tables) will
copy the contents of the table to the clipboard in a format that is compatible with
spreadsheet programs like Excel.
4-497
Using Prototypes
The Highlight Pressure Zone In Drawing button will toggle on/off highlighting of the
the pressure zone for the currently active row in the Pressure Zone table.
Using Prototypes
Prototypes allow you to enter default values for elements in your network. These
values are used while laying out the network. Prototypes can reduce data entry
requirements dramatically if a group of network elements share common data.
For example, if a section of the network contains all 12-inch pipes, use the Prototype
manager to set the Pipe Diameter field to 12 inches. When you create a new pipe in
your model, its diameter attribute will default to 12 inches.
You can create prototypes in either of the following ways:
From the Prototypes manager: The Prototypes manager consists of a toolbar and a
list pane, which displays all of the elements available in WaterGEMS V8i.
From the Drawing Pane: Right-click an element to use the settings and attributes
of that element as the current prototype.
Note:
Changes to the prototypes are not retroactive and will not affect
any elements created prior to the change.
If a section of your system has distinctly different
characteristics than the rest of the system, adjust your
prototypes before laying out that section. This will save time
when you edit the properties later.
4-498
Creating Models
The Prototypes manager opens.
The list of elements in the Prototypes manager list pane is expandable and collapsible,
once youve created additional prototypes. Click on the Plus sign to expand an
element and see its associated prototypes. Click on the Minus sign to collapse the
element.
Each element in the list pane contains a default prototype; you cannot edit this default
prototype. The default prototypes contain common values for each element type; if
you add elements to your model without creating new prototypes, the data values in
the default prototypes appear in the Property Editor for that element type.
4-499
Using Prototypes
The toolbar contains the following icons:
4-500
New
Delete
Rename
Make Current
Report
Expand All
Collapse All
Help
Creating Models
To create Prototypes in the Prototypes Manager
1. Open your WaterGEMS V8i project or start a new project.
2. Choose View > Prototypes or press <Ctrl+6>.
The Prototypes Manager opens.
3. Select the element type for which you want to create a prototype, then click New.
The list expands to display all the prototypes that exist for that element type.
Each element type contains a default prototype, which is not editable, and any
prototypes that you have created. The current set of default values for each
element type is identified by the Make Current icon.
4. Double-click the prototype you just created. The Property Editor for the element
type opens.
5. Edit the attribute values in the Property Editor as required.
6. To make the new prototype the default, click the Make Current button in the
Prototypes Manager.
The icon next to the prototype changes to indicate that the values in the prototype
will be applied to all new elements of that type that you add to your current
project.
7. Perform the following optional steps:
To rename a prototype, select the prototype in the list and click the Rename
button.
4-501
Zones
To delete a prototype, select the prototype in the list and click the Delete
button.
To view a report of the default values in the prototype, select the prototype in
the list and click the Report button.
Zones
The Zones manager allows you to manipulate zones quickly and easily. Zones listed in
the Zones manager can be associated with each nodal element using the Element
Editors, Prototypes, or FlexTables. This manager includes a list of all of the available
zones and a toolbar.
To open the Zones manager
Choose Components > Zones
or
4-502
Creating Models
4-503
Engineering Libraries
Engineering Libraries
Engineering Libraries are powerful and flexible tools that you use to manage specifications of common materials, objects, or components that are shared across projects.
Some examples of objects that are specified through engineering libraries include
constituents, pipe materials, patterns, and pump definitions.
You can modify engineering libraries and the items they contain by using the Engineering Libraries command in the Components menu.
You work with engineering libraries and the items they contain in the Engineering
Libraries dialog box, which contains all of the projects engineering libraries. Individual libraries are compilations of library entries along with their attributes.
By default, each project you create in WaterGEMS V8i uses the items in the default
libraries. In special circumstances, you may wish to create custom libraries to use with
one or more projects. You can do this by copying a standard library or creating a new
library.
When you change the properties for an item in an engineering library, those changes
affect all projects that use that library item. At the time a project is loaded, all of its
engineering library items are synchronized to the current library. Items are synchronized based on their label. If the label is the same, then the items values will be made
the same.
4-504
Creating Models
The default libraries that are installed with Bentley WaterGEMS V8i are editable. In
addition, you can create a new library of any type and can then create new entries of
your own definition.
Individual library entries are contained within the categories, subcategories, and
folders in the tree view.
Libraries, categories, folders, and library entries are displayed in the tree view
with their own unique icons. You can right-click these icons to display submenus
with different commands.
Note:
ProjectWise Add
Existing Library
4-505
Engineering Libraries
Working with Categories
Right-clicking a Category icon in the tree view opens a shortcut menu containing the
following commands:
Add Item
Add Folder
Save As
ProjectWise Save As
Remove
Add Folder
Rename
Delete
4-506
Rename
Delete
Creating Models
Engineering Libraries Dialog Box
The Engineering Libraries dialog box contains an explorer tree-view pane on the left,
a library entry editor pane on the right, and the following icons above the explorer tree
view pane:
New
Delete
Rename
Hyperlinks
The Hyperlinks feature is used to associate external files, such as pictures or movie
files, with elements. You can Add, Edit, Delete, and Launch hyperlinks from the
Hyperlinks manager.
4-507
Hyperlinks
To use hyperlinks, choose Tools > Hyperlinks. The Hyperlinks dialog box opens. The
dialog box contains a toolbar and a tabular view of all your hyperlinks.
Delete
Edit
Launch
4-508
Creating Models
Element
Link
Description
Once you have created Hyperlinks, you can open the Hyperlinks dialog box from
within a Property dialog box associated with that Hyperlink.
Click the ellipsis (...) in the Hyperlinks field and the Hyperlinks dialog box opens.
Add Hyperlink Dialog Box
New hyperlinks are created in this dialog box.
4-509
Hyperlinks
Element
Link
Description
4-510
Link
Description
Creating Models
To Add a Hyperlink
1. Choose Tools > Hyperlink. The Hyperlinks dialog box opens.
2. Click New to add a hyperlink. The Add Hyperlink dialog box opens.
4-511
Hyperlinks
6. Add a description of your Hyperlink.
7. Click OK.
You can add more than one associated file to an element using the hyperlink
feature, but you must add the associations one at a time.
4-512
Creating Models
To Edit a Hyperlink
1. Choose Tools > Hyperlinks. The Hyperlinks dialog box opens.
2. Select the element to edit and click Edit. The Edit Hyperlink dialog box opens.
3. Click the ellipsis (...) to browse to a new file to associate with the hyperlink.
4. Add a description.
5. Click OK
4-513
Hyperlinks
To Delete a Hyperlink
1. Choose Tools > Hyperlinks. The Hyperlinks dialog box opens.
2. Select the element and click on the Hyperlinks icon. The hyperlink will launch.
4-514
Creating Models
Note:
Click to open the Add or Edit dialog boxes and click Launch to
open from there.
Using Queries
A query in Bentley WaterGEMS V8i is a user-defined SQL expression that applies to
a single element type. You use the Query Manager to create and store queries; you use
the Query Builder dialog box to construct the actual SQL expression.
Queries can be one of the following three types:
Project queriesQueries you define that are available only in the Bentley WaterGEMS V8i project in which you define them.
Shared queriesQueries you define that are available in all Bentley WaterGEMS V8i projects you create. You can edit shared queries.
Predefined queriesFactory-defined queries included with Bentley WaterGEMS V8i that are available in all projects you create. You cannot edit
predefined queries.
Create dynamic selection sets based on one or more queries. For more information, see To create a Selection Set from a Query.
Filter the data in a FlexTable using a query. For more information, see Sorting and
Filtering FlexTable Data.
You can use predefined queries in the Network Navigator. See Using the Network
Navigator for more details.
Queries Manager
The Queries manager is a docking manager that displays all queries in the current
project, including predefined, shared, and project queries. You can create, edit, or
delete shared and project queries from within the Queries Manager, as well as use it to
select all elements in your model that are part of the selected query.
4-515
Using Queries
To open the Queries manager, click the View menu and select the Queries command,
press <Ctrl+5>, or click the Queries button
The Queries manager consists of a toolbar and a tree view, which displays all of the
queries that are associated with the current project.
4-516
Creating Models
The toolbar contains the following icons:
New
Delete
Rename
Edit
4-517
Using Queries
Expand
All
Collapse
All
Select in
Drawing
Help
4-518
Creating Models
Creating Queries
A query is a valid SQL expression that you construct in the Query Builder dialog box.
You create and manage queries in the Query Manager. You also use queries to filter
FlexTables and as the basis for a selection set.
To create a query from the Query manager
1. Choose View > Queries or click the Queries icon on the View toolbar, or press
<CTRL+5>.
2. Perform one of the following steps:
To create a new project query, highlight Queries - Project in the list pane,
then click the New button and select Query.
To create a new shared query, highlight Queries - Shared in the list pane,
then click the New button and select Query.
Note:
You can also right-click an existing item or folder in the list pane
and select New > Query from the shortcut menu.
3. In the Select Element Type dialog box, select the desired element type from the
drop-down menu. The Query Builder dialog box opens.
4. All input and results fields for the selected element type appear in the Fields list
pane, available SQL operators and keywords are represented by buttons, and
available values for the selected field are listed in the Unique Values list pane.
Perform the following steps to construct your query:
a. Double-click the field you wish to include in your query. The database
column name of the selected field appears in the preview pane.
b. Click the desired operator or keyword button. The SQL operator or keyword
is added to the SQL expression in the preview pane.
c. Click the Refresh button above the Unique Values list pane to see a list of
unique values available for the selected field. Note that the Refresh button is
disabled after you use it for a particular field (because the unique values do
not change in a single query-building session).
d. Double-click the unique value you want to add to the query. The value is
added to the SQL expression in the preview pane.
Note:
You can also manually edit the expression in the preview pane.
e. Click the Validate button above the preview pane to validate your SQL
expression. If the expression is valid, the word VALIDATED is displayed in
the lower right corner of the dialog box.
4-519
Using Queries
f.
Click the Apply button above the preview pane to execute the query. If you
didnt validate the expression, the Apply button validates it before executing
it.
g. Click OK.
5. Perform these optional steps in the Query Manager:
To create a new folder in the tree view, highlight the existing item or folder in
which to place the new folder, then click the New button and select Folder.
You can create queries and folders within folders.
To delete an existing query or folder, click the Delete button. When you delete
a folder, you also delete all of its contents (the queries it contains).
To rename an existing query or folder, click the Rename button, then type a
new name.
To edit the SQL expression in a query, select the query in the list pane, then
click the Edit button. The Query Builder dialog box opens.
To quickly select all the elements in the drawing pane that are part of the
currently highlighted query, click the Select in Drawing button.
Example Query
To create a query that finds all pipes with a diameter greater than 8 inches and less
than or equal to 12 inches you would do the following:
1. In the Queries dialog, click the New button and select Query.
2. In the Queries - Select Element Type dialog, select Pipe and click OK.
3. In the Query Builder dialog, click the () (Parentheses) button.
4. Double-click Diameter in the Fields list.
5. Click the > (Greater Than) button.
6. Click the Refresh button above the Unique Values list. Double-click the value 8.
7. In the Preview Pane, click to the right of the closing parenthesis.
8. Click the And button.
9. Click the () (Parentheses) button.
10. Double-click Diameter in the Fields list.
11. Click the <= (Less Than or Equal To) button.
12. Double-click the value 12 in the Unique Values list.
4-520
Creating Models
The final query will look like this:
(Physical_PipeDiameter > 8) AND (Physical_PipeDiameter <= 12)
See Using the Like Operator for more examples of query usage and syntax.
The top part of the dialog box contains all the controls you need to construct your
query: a list pane displaying all available attributes for the selected element type, an
SQL control panel containing available SQL keywords and operators, and list view
that displays all the available values for the selected attribute. The bottom part of the
dialog box contains a preview pane that displays your SQL expression as you
construct it.
See Using the Like Operator for some examples of query usage and syntax.
4-521
Using Queries
All the dialog box controls are described in the following table.
4-522
Fields
SQL Controls
Unique Values
Refresh
Copy
Creating Models
Paste
Validate on OK
Apply
Preview Pane
Action
4-523
Using Queries
Note:
Part
Description
expression
pattern
You can use the Like operator to find values in a field that match the pattern you
specify. For pattern, you can specify the complete value (for example, Like
Smith), or you can use wildcard characters to find a range of values (for example,
Like Sm*).
In an expression, you can use the Like operator to compare a field value to a string
expression. For example, if you enter Like C* in an SQL query, the query returns
all field values beginning with the letter C. In a parameter query, you can prompt the
user for a pattern to search for.
The following example returns data that begins with the letter P followed by any letter
between A and F and three digits:
Like P[A-F]###
4-524
Creating Models
The following table shows how you can use Like to test expressions for different
patterns.
Kind of match
Pattern
Match
(returns True)
No match
(returns False)
Multiple characters
a*a
aBC
*ab*
aZb, bac
Special character
a[*]a
a*a
aaa
Multiple characters
ab*
abcdefg, abc
cab, aab
Single character
a?a
aBBBa
Single digit
a#a
aaa, a10a
Range of characters
[a-z]
f, p, j
2, &
Outside a range
[!a-z]
9, &, %
b, a
Not a digit
[!0-9]
A, a, &, ~
0, 1, 9
Combined
a[!b-m]#
abc, aj0
Query Examples
In order to get all elements of a given type whose label starts with a given letter(s)
(e.g. J-1###), one could do a query such as:
Label LIKE 'J-1*'
In this case, the query would return elements with labels like J-1, J-100, J-101, but not
J-01, J-001.
In order to get all elements of a given type whose label ends with a given letter(s) (e.g.
###100), one could do a query such as:
Label LIKE '*100'
In this case, the query would return elements with labels like J-100, J-10100, JAA100, but not J-1000, J-100A.
In order to get all elements of a given type whose label contains a given letter(s) (e.g.
#-1#), one could do a query such as:
4-525
4-526
Creating Models
Note:
The user data does not affect the hydraulic model calculations.
However, their behavior concerning capabilities like editing,
annotating, sorting and database connections is identical to any
of the standard pre-defined attributes.
User data extensions exhibit the same characteristics as the predefined data used in
and produced by the model calculations. This means that user data extensions can be
imported or exported through database and shapefile connections, viewed and edited
in the Property Editor or in FlexTables, included in tabular reports or element detailed
reports, annotated in the drawing, color coded, and reported in the detailed element
reports.
Note:
You define user data extensions in the User Data Extensions dialog box.
To define a user data extension
1. Select Tools > User Data Extensions.
2. In the list pane on the left, select the element type for which you want to define a
new attribute field.
3. Click the New button to create a new user data extension. A user data extension
with a default name appears under the element type. You can rename the new field
if you wish.
4. In the properties pane on the right, enter the following:
Type the name of the new field. This is the unique identifier for the field. The
name field in the Property Editor is the name of the column in the data source.
Type the label for the new field. This is the label that will appear next to the
field for the user data extension in the Property Editor for the selected element
type. This is also the column heading if the data extension is selected to
appear in a FlexTable.
Click the Ellipses (...) button in the Category field, then use the drop-down
menu in the Select Category dialog box to select an existing category in which
the new field will appear in the Property Editor. To create a new category,
simply type the category name in the field.
Type a number in the Field Order Index field. This is the display order of
fields within a particular category in the Property Editor. This order also
controls the order of columns in Alternative tables. An entry of 0 means the
new field will be displayed first within the specified category.
Type a description for the field. This description will appear at the bottom of
the Property Editor when the field is selected for an element in your model.
You can use this field as a reminder about the purpose of the field.
4-527
Select an alternative from the drop-down menu in the Alternative field. This is
the alternative that you want to extend with the new field.
Select a data type from the drop-down menu in the Data Type field.
-
Enter the default value for the new field. If the data type is Enumerated, click
the Ellipses (...) button to display the Enumeration Editor dialog box, where
you define enumerated members.
To import an existing User Data Extension XML File, click the Import
button, then select the file you want to import. User Data Extension XML
Files contain the file name extension .xml or .udx.xml.
To export existing user data extensions, click the Export to XML button, then
type the name of the udx.xml file. All user data extensions for all element
types defined in the current project are exported.
To share the new field among two or more element types, select the user data
extension in the list pane, then click the Sharing button or right-click and
select Sharing. In the Shared Field Specification dialog box, select the check
box next to the element or elements that will share the user data extension.
The icon next to the user data extension changes to indicate that it is a shared
field. For more information, see Sharing User Data Extensions Among
Element Types on page 4-533.
To delete an existing user data extension, select the user data extension you
want to delete in the list pane, then click the Delete button, or right-click and
select Delete.
To rename the display label of an existing user data extension, select the user
data extension in the list pane, click the Rename button or right-click and
select Rename, then type the new display label.
To expand the list of elements and view all user data extensions, click the
Expand All button.
To collapse the list of elements so that no user data extensions are displayed,
click the Collapse All button.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box and save your user data extensions. The new
field(s) you created will appear in the Property Editor for every instance of the
specified element type in your model.
4-528
Creating Models
4-529
4-530
Import
Export to XML
Add Field
Share
Delete Field
Rename Field
Expand All
Collapse All
Creating Models
The property editor section of the dialog contains following fields, which define your
new user data extension:
Attribute
Description
General
Name
The unique identifier for the field. The name field in the
Property Editor is the name of the column in the data source.
Label
The label that will appear next to the field for the user data
extension in the Property Editor for the selected element type.
This is also the column heading if the data extension is
selected to appear in a FlexTable.
Category
Field Order
Index
Field
Description
Alternative
Referenced
By
Displays all the element types that are using the field. For
example, if you create a field called "Installation Date" and you
set it up to be shared, this field will show the element types that
share this field. So for example, if you set up a field to be
shared by junctions and catch basins, the Referenced By field
would show "Manhole, Catch Basin".
4-531
Attribute
Description
Units
Data Type
4-532
Specifies the data type for the user data extension. Click the
down arrow in the field then select one of the following data
types from the drop-down menu:
IntegerAny positive or negative whole number.
BooleanTrue or False.
Default Value
The default value for the user data extension. The default
value must be consistent with the selected data type. If you
chose Enumerated as the data type, click the Ellipses (...)
button to display the Enumeration Editor.
Dimension
Specifies the unit type. Click the drop-down arrow in the field to
see a list of all available dimensions. This field is available only
when you select Real as the Data Type.
Storage Unit
Specifies the storage units for the field. Click the drop-down
arrow in the field to see a list of all available units; the units
listed change depending on the Dimension you select. This
field is available only when you select Real as the Data Type.
Numeric
Formatter
Creating Models
Indicates a user data extension that has been saved to the data source.
You can select any number of element types with which to share the field. The list
is limited to element types that support the Alternative defined for the Field. For
example, the Physical Alternative may only apply to five of the element types. In
this case, you will only see these five items listed in the Alternative drop-down
menu.
You cannot use the sharing feature to move a field from one element type to
another. Validation is in place to ensure that only one item is selected and if it is
the same as the original, default selection. If it is not, a message appears telling
you that when sharing a field, you must select at least two element types, or select
the original element type.
To unshare a field that is shared among multiple element types, right-click the user
data extension you want to keep in the list pane, then select Sharing. Clear all the
element types that you do not want to share the field and click OK. If you leave
only one element type checked in the Shared Field Specification dialog box, it
must be the original element type for which you created the user data extension.
The fields that were located under the tank and pipe element type root nodes
will be removed completely.
You can also unshare a field by using the Delete button or right-clicking and
selecting Delete. This will unshare and delete the field.
4-533
Select element types to share the current user data extension by selecting the check
box next to the element type. Clear a selection if you no longer want that element type
to share the current field.
4-534
Creating Models
For example, suppose you want to identify pipes in a model of a new subdivision by
one of the following states: Existing, Proposed, Abandoned, Removed, and Retired.
You can define a new user data extension with the label Pipe Status for pipes, and
select Enumerated as the data type. Click the Ellipses (...) button in the Default Value
field in the Property Editor for the user data extension to display the Enumeration
Editor dialog box. Then enter five members with unique labels (one member for each
unique pipe status) and enumeration values in the table. After you close the User Data
Extensions dialog box, the new field and its members will be available in the Property
Editor for all pipes in your model. You will be able to select any of the statuses
defined as members in the new Pipe Status field.
You can specify an unlimited number of members for each user data extension, but
member labels and values must be unique. If they are not unique, an error message
appears when you try to close the dialog box.
The dialog box contains a table and the following controls:
NewAdds a new row to the table. Each row in the table represents a unique
enumerated member of the current user data extension.
DeleteDeletes the current row from the table. The enumerated member defined
in that row is deleted from the user data extension.
4-535
Customization Manager
Define enumerated members in the table, which contains the following columns:
Enumeration ValueA unique integer index associated with the member label.
WaterGEMS V8i uses this number when it performs operations such as queries.
Customization Manager
The Customization Manager allows you to create customization profiles that define
changes to the default user interface. Customization profiles allow you to turn off the
visibility of properties in the Properties Editor.
Customization Profiles can be created for a single project or shared across projects.
There are also a number of predefined profiles.
The Customization Manager consists of the following controls:
4-536
Creating Models
New
Delete
Rename
Edit
Help
4-537
Customization Manager
To turn off all of the properties under a category:
1. Select the element type from the pulldown menu.
2. Uncheck the box next to the category to be turned off.
3. Click OK.
4-538
Using ModelBuilder to
Transfer Existing Data
ModelBuilder lets you use your existing GIS asset to construct a new WaterGEMS
V8i model or update an existing WaterGEMS V8i model. ModelBuilder supports a
wide variety of data formats, from simple databases (such as Access and DBase),
spreadsheets (such as Excel or Lotus), GIS data (such as shape files), to high end data
stores (such as Oracle, and SQL Server), and more.
Using ModelBuilder, you map the tables and fields contained within your data source
to element types and attributes in your WaterGEMS V8i model. The result is that a
WaterGEMS V8i model is created. ModelBuilder can be used in any of the Bentley
WaterGEMS V8i platforms - Stand-Alone, MicroStation mode, AutoCAD mode, or
ArcGIS mode.
Note:
ModelBuilder is the first tool you will use when constructing a model from GIS data.
The steps that you take at the outset will impact how the rest of the process goes. Take
the time now to ensure that this process goes as smoothly and efficiently as possible:
Determine the purpose of your modelOnce you establish the purpose of your
model, you can start to make decisions about how detailed the model should be.
5-539
Get familiar with your dataModelBuilder supports several data source types,
including tabular and geometric. Tabular data sources include spreadsheets, databases, and other data sources without geometric information. Some supported
tabular data source types include Microsoft Excel, and Microsoft Access files.
Geometric data sources, while also internally organized by tables, include
geometric characteristics such as shape type, size, and location. Some supported
geometric data source types include the major CAD and GIS file types
If you obtained your model data from an outside source, you should take the time
to get acquainted with it in its native platform. For example, review spatial and
attribute data directly in your GIS environment. Do the nodes have coordinate
information, and do the pipes have start and stop nodes specified? If not, the best
method of specifying network connectivity must be determined.
Contact those involved in the development of the GIS to learn more about the GIS
tables and associated attributes. Find out the purpose of any fields that may be of
interest, ensure that data is of an acceptable accuracy, and determine units associated with fields containing numeric data.
Ideally, there will be one source data table for each WaterGEMS V8i element
type. This isnt always the case, and there are two other possible scenarios:
Many tables for one element typeIn this case, there may be several tables in
the datasource corresponding to a single GEMS modeling element, component, or
collection. In this case each data source table must be individually mapped to the
WaterGEMS V8i table type, or the tables must be combined into a single table
from within its native platform before running ModelBuilder.
One table containing many element typesIn this case, there may be entries
that correspond to several WaterGEMS V8i table types in one datasource table.
You should separate these into individual tables before running ModelBuilder.
The one case where a single table can work is when the features in the table are
ArcGIS subtypes. ModelBuilder handles these subtypes by treating them as separate tables when setting up mappings. See Subtypes for more information.
Note:
5-540
Preparing your dataWhen using ModelBuilder to get data from your data
source into your model, you will be associating rows in your data source to
elements in WaterGEMS V8i. Your data source needs to contain a Key/Label field
that can be used to uniquely identify every element in your model. The data
source tables should have identifying column labels, or ModelBuilder will interpret the first row of data in the table as the column labels. Be sure data is in a
format suited for use in ModelBuilder. Where applicable, use powerful GIS and
Database tools to perform Database Joins, Spatial Joins, and Update Joins to get
data into the appropriate table, and in the desired format.
Preparing your CAD DataIn previous versions of WaterGEMS V8i, the Polyline-to-Pipe feature was used to import CAD data into a WaterGEMS V8i model.
In v8, CAD data is imported using ModelBuilder. When using ModelBuilder to
import data from your CAD file into your model, you will be associating cells in
your CAD drawing with elements in WaterGEMS V8i.
Different CAD cells will be recognized as different element types and presented
as tables existing in your CAD data source. It is recommended that you natively
export your AutoCAD .dwg or MicroStation .dgn files first as a .dxf file, then
select this .dxf as the data source in ModelBuilder. Your data source will most
likely not contain a Key/Label field that can be used to uniquely identify every
element in your model, so ModelBuilder will automatically generate one for you
using the default "<label>". This "<label>" field is a combination of an element's
cell type label, its shape type, and a numeric ID that represents the order in which
it was created.
5-541
5-542
At the center of this window is the Connections List which displays the list of
connections that you have defined.
There is a toolbar located along the top of the Connections list.
5-543
5-544
New
Edit
Rename
Duplicate
Delete
Build Model
Sync Out
Help
5-545
ModelBuilder Wizard
After initiating a Build or Sync command, ModelBuilder will perform the selected
operation. During the process, a progress-bar will be displayed indicating the step that
ModelBuilder is currently working on.
When ModelBuilder completes, you will be presented with a summary window that
outlines important information about the build process. We recommend that you save
this summary so that you can refer to it later.
Note:
ModelBuilder Wizard
The ModelBuilder Wizard assists in the creation of ModelBuilder connections. The
Wizard will guide you through the process of selecting your data source and mapping
that data to the desired input of your model.
Tip:
5-546
Data Source type (drop-down list)This field allows you to specify the type of
data you would like to work with.
Note:
If your specific data source type is not listed in the Data Source
type field, try using the OLE DB data source type. OLE DB can be
used to access many database systems (including ORACLE, and
SQL Server, to name a few).
Data Source (text field)This read-only field displays the path to your data
source.
Browse (button)This button opens a browse dialog box that allows you to interactively select your data source.
5-547
ModelBuilder Wizard
Note:
Some Data Source types expect you to choose more than one
item in the Browse dialog box. For more information, see Multiselect Data Source Types.
Table/Feature Class (list)This pane is located along the left side of the form
and lists the tables/feature classes that are contained within the data source. Use
the check boxes (along the left side of the list) to specify the tables you would like
to include.
Tip:
The list can be resized using the split bar (located on the right
side of the list).
Right-click to Select All or Clear the current selection in the list.
ModelBuilder has built in support for ArcGIS Subtypes. For more
information, see ESRI ArcGIS Geodatabase Support.
WHERE Clause (field)Allows you to create a SQL query to filter the tables.
When the box is checked, only tables that meet the criteria specified by the
5-548
Specify the Coordinate Unit of your data source (drop-down list)This field
allows you to specify the coordinate unit of the spatial data in your data source.
The default unit is the unit used for coordinates.
5-549
ModelBuilder Wizard
Create nodes if none found at pipe endpoint (check box)When this box is
checked, ModelBuilder will create a pressure junction at any pipe endpoint that:
a) doesnt have a connected node, and b) is not within the specified tolerance of an
existing node. This field is only active when the Establish connectivity using
spatial data box is checked. (This option is not available if the connection is
bringing in only point type geometric data.)
ModelBuilder will not create pipes unless a valid start/stop node exists. Choose
this option if you know that there are nodes missing from your source data. If you
expect your data to be complete, then leave this option off and if this situation is
detected ModelBuilder will report errors for your review. For more information
see Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder.
Tolerance (numeric field)This field dictates how close a node must be to a pipe
endpoint in order for connectivity to be established. The Tolerance field is only
available when the Establish connectivity using spatial data box is checked. (This
option is available if the connection is bringing in only polyline type geometric
data.) Tolerances should be set as low as possible so that unintended connections
are not made. If you are not sure what tolerance to use, try doing some test runs.
Use the Network Review queries to evaluate the success of each trial import.
Note:
5-550
How would you like to handle synchronization between source and destination?:
5-551
ModelBuilder Wizard
If an imported object refers to another object that does not yet exist in the model,
should ModelBuilder:
5-552
How would you like to import incoming data? (drop-down list) - This refers to
the scenario (and associated alternatives) into which the data will be imported.
The user can import the data into the Current Scenario or a new child scenario. If
the latter is selected, a new child scenario (and child alternatives) will be created
for any data difference between the source and the active scenario.
5-553
ModelBuilder Wizard
Note:
Specify key field used during object mapping (drop-down list) - The key field
represents the field in the model and data source that contains the unique identifier
for associating domain elements in your model to records in your data source.
Refer to the "Key Field (Model)" topic in the next section for additional guidance
on how this setting applies to ModelBuilder. ModelBuilder provides three
choices for Key Field:
Label - The element "Label" will be used as the key for associating model
elements with data source records. Label is a good choice if the identifier
field in your data-source is unique and represents the identifier you commonly
use to refer to the record in your GIS.
<custom> - Any editable text field in your model can be used as the key for
associating model elements with data source records. This is a good choice if
you perhaps don't use labels on every element, or if perhaps there are duplicate labels in your data source.
GIS-ID - The element "GIS-ID" field will be used as the key for associating
model elements with data source elements. The GIS-ID field offers a number
of advanced capabilities, and is the preferred choice for models that you plan
to keep in sync with your GIS over a period of time.
Refer to the section The GIS-ID Property for more information.
The following options only apply when using the advanced GIS-ID key field option.
If several elements share the same GIS-ID, then apply updates to all of them?
(check box) - When using the GIS-ID option, ModelBuilder allows you to maintain one-to-many, and many-to-one relationships between records in your GIS and
elements in your Model.
For example, you may have a single pipe in your GIS that you want to maintain as
multiple elements in your Model because you have split that pipe into two pipes
elements in the model. You may accomplish this using the native WaterGEMS
V8i layout tools to split the pipe with a node; the newly created pipe segment will
be assigned the same GIS-ID as the original pipe (establishing a one-to-many relationship). By using this option, when you later synchronize from the GIS into
your model, any data changes to the single pipe record in your GIS can be
cascaded to both pipes elements in your model (e.g. so a diameter change to a
single record in the GIS would be reflected in both elements in the model).
5-554
Prompt before cascading updates (check box) - When this box is checked,
ModelBuilder will pause during model generation to present a confirmation
message box to the user each time a cascading update is about to be applied.
5-555
ModelBuilder Wizard
Note:
Tables (list)-This pane, located along the left side of the dialog box, lists the data
source Tables/Feature Classes to be used in the ModelBuilder process. Select an
item in the list to specify the settings for that item.
Note:
There are two toolbar buttons located directly above Tables list (these buttons can
be a great time saver when setting up multiple mappings with similar settings).
5-556
Settings Tab-The Settings tab allows you to specify mappings for the selected
item in the Tables list.
The top section of the Settings tab allows you to specify the common data
mappings:
Table Type (drop-down list)-This field, which contains a list of all of the
WaterGEMS V8i/Hammer element types, allows you to specify the target
modeling element type that the source table/feature class represents. For
example, a source table that contains pipe data should be associated with the
Pressure Pipe element type.
There are three categories of Table Types: Element Types, Components, and
Collections. For geometric data sources, only Element Types are available.
However with tabular data sources all table types can be used. The categorized menu accessed by the [>] button assists in quicker selection of the
desired table type.
Key Fields - This pair of key fields allows you to control how records in your
data source are associated with elements in the model. The Key Fields
element mapping consists of two parts, a data-source part and a model part:
-
Key Field (Data Source) (drop-down list)-Choose the field in your data
source that contains the unique identifier for each record.
5-557
ModelBuilder Wizard
Note:
Note:
You can define a text User Data Extensions property for use as
your <custom> model key field.
The <custom> key field list is limited to read-write text fields.
This is because during import, the value of this field will be
assigned as new elements in your model are created. Therefore,
the models internal (read-only) element ID field cannot be used
for this purpose.
The following optional fields are available for Pipe element types:
-
Note:
Start/Stop - Select the fields in a pipe table that contain the identifier of
the start and stop nodes. Specify <none> if you are using the spatial
connectivity support in ModelBuilder (or if you want to keep connectivity
unchanged on update). For more information, see Specifying Network
Connectivity in ModelBuilder.
When working with an ArcGIS Geometric Network data source,
these fields will be set to <auto> (indicating that ModelBuilder
will automatically determine connectivity from the geometric
network).
5-558
X/Y Field - These fields are used to specify the node X and Y coordinate
data. This field only applies to point table types.
The bottom section of the Settings tab allows you to specify additional data
mappings for each field in the source.
Field - Field refers to a field in the selected data source. The Field list
displays the associations between fields in the database to properties in
the model.
Unit (drop-down list)-This field allows you to specify the units of the
values in the database (no conversion on your part is required). This field
only applies if the selected model property is unitized.
Preview Tab-The Preview tab displays a tabular preview of the currently highlighted source data table when the Show Preview check box is checked.
5-559
ModelBuilder Wizard
To build a new model, click the Yes radio button under Would you like to build the
model now?.
If you choose No, you will be returned to the ModelBuilder Manager dialog. The
connection you defined will appear in the list pane. To build the model from the
ModelBuilder Manager, highlight the connection and click the Build Model button.
Create Selection Set options: Often a user wants to view the elements that have been
affected by a ModelBuilder operation. To do this, ModelBuilder can create selection
sets which the user can view and use within the application.
5-560
To create a selection set containing the elements added during the ModelBuilder,
check the box next to "Create selection set with elements added."
To create a selection set containing the elements for which the properties or geometry were modified during the ModelBuilder, check the box next to "Create selection set with elements modified."
Refer to the Using the Network Navigator and Manipulating Elements topics for
information about reviewing and correcting model connectivity issues.
Shape files
5-561
Warnings
Error Messages
Warnings
Warning messages include:
1. Some rows were ignored due to missing key-field values.
ModelBuilder encountered missing data (e.g., null or blank) in the specified Key/
Label field for rows in your data source table. Without a key, ModelBuilder is
unable to associate this source row with a target element, and must skip these
items. This can commonly occur when using a spreadsheet data source. To determine where and how often this error occurred, check the Statistics page for the
message <x> row(s) ignored due to missing key-field values.
2. Unable to create pipe <element>; start and/or stop node could not be found.
Pipes can only be created if its start and stop nodes can be established. If you are
using Explicit connectivity, a node element with the referenced start or stop label
could not be found. If you are using implicit connectivity, a node element could
not be located within the specified tolerance. For more information, see Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder.
3. Unable to update pipe <element> topology; (start or stop) node could not be
found.
This error occurs when synchronizing an existing model, and indicates that the
pipe connectivity could not be updated. For more information, see warning
message #2 (above).
4. The downstream edge for <element> could not be found.
ModelBuilder was unable to set a Pump direction because a pipe with the referenced label could not be found.
5. Directed Node <element> direction is ambiguous.
ModelBuilder was unable to set the direction of the referenced pump or valve
because direction could not be implied based on the adjacent pipes (e.g. there
should be one incoming and one outgoing pipe).
5-562
Error Messages
Note:
5-563
Geodatabase Features
Geometric Networks
Subtypes
Geodatabase Features
ModelBuilder provides direct support for working with Geodatabase features. A
feature class is much like a shapefile, but with added functionality (such as subtypes).
The geodatabase stores objects. These objects may represent nonspatial real-world
entities, such as manufacturers, or they may represent spatial objects, such as pipes in
a network. Objects in the geodatabase are stored in feature classes (spatial) and tables
(nonspatial).
5-564
Geometric Networks
ModelBuilder has support for Geometric Networks, and a new network element type
known as Complex Edge. When you specify a Geometric Network data source,
ModelBuilder automatically determines the feature classes that make up the network.
In addition, ModelBuilder can automatically establish model connectivity based on
information in the Geometric Network.
When working with a Geometric Network, you have two options for constructing your
modelif your model contains Complex Edges, then there is a distinct difference. A
Complex Edge can represent a single feature in the Geodatabase, but multiple
elements in the Geometric Network.
For example, when defining your Geometric Network, you can connect a lateral to a
main without splitting the main line. In this case, the main line will be represented as a
single feature in the Geodatabase but as multiple edges in the Geometric Network.
Depending on the data source type that you choose, ModelBuilder can see either
representation. If you want to include every element in your system, choose ArcGIS
Geometric Network as your data source type. If you want to leave out laterals and you
want your main lines to be represented by single pipes in the model, choose ArcGIS
Geodatabase Features as your data source type.
5-565
Subtypes
Tip:
If multiple types of WaterGEMS V8i elements have their data stored in a single
geodatabase table, then each element must be a separate ArcGIS subtype. For
example, in a valve table PRVs may be subtype 1, PSVs may be subtype 2, FCVs may
be subtype 3, and so on. With subtypes, it is not necessary to follow the rule that each
GIS/database feature type must be associated with a single type of GEMS model
element. Note that the subtype field must be of the integer type (e.g., 1, 2) and not an
alphanumeric field (e.g., PRV). For more information about subtypes, see ArcGIS
Help.
ModelBuilder has built in support for subtypes. After selecting your data source,
feature classes will automatically be categorized by subtype. This gives you the ability
to assign mappings at the subtype level. For example, ModelBuilder allows you to
exclude a particular subtype within a feature class, or associate each subtype with a
different element type.
Explicit connectivitybased on pipe Start node and Stop node (see Step 3 Specify Element Create/Remove/Update Options).
The method that you use will vary depending on the quality of your data. The possible
situations include (in order from best case to worst case):
5-566
You have pipe start and stop informationExplicit connectivity is definitely the
preferred option.
You have some start and stop informationUse a combination of explicit and
implicit connectivity (use the Spatial Data option, and specify pipe Start/Stop
fields). If the start or stop data is missing (blank) for a particular pipe, ModelBuilder will then attempt to use spatial data to establish connectivity.
You do not have start and stop informationImplicit connectivity is your only
option. If your spatial data is good, then you should reduce your connectivity
Tolerance accordingly.
You do not have start and stop information, and you do not have any node data
(e.g., you have GIS data that defines your pipes, but you do not have data for
nodes)Use implicit connectivity and specify the Create nodes if none found
option; otherwise, the pipes cannot be created.
Note:
Other considerations include what happens when the coordinates of the pipe ends do
not match up with the node coordinates. This problem can be one of a few different
varieties:
1. Both nodes and pipe ends have coordinates, and pipes have explicit Start/
Stop nodesIn this case, the node coordinates are used, and the pipe ends are
moved to connect with the nodes.
2. Nodes have coordinates but pipes do not have explicit Start/Stop nodesThe
nodes will be created, and the specified tolerance will be used to connect pipe
ends within this tolerance to the appropriate nodes. If a pipe end does not fall
within any nodes specified tolerance, a new node can be created using the Create
nodes if none found option.
3. Pipe ends have coordinates but there are no junctionsNew nodes must be
created using the Create nodes if none found option. Pipe ends are then
connected using the tolerance that is specified. . Subsequent pipe ends could then
connect to any newly added nodes if they fall within the specified tolerance.
Another situation of interest occurs when two pipes cross but arent connected. If, at
the point where the pipes cross, there are no pipe ends or nodes within the specified
tolerance, then the pipes will not be connected in the model. If you intend for the pipes
to connect, then pipe ends or junctions must exist within the specified tolerance.
Refer to the Using the Network Navigator and Manipulating Elements topics for
information about reviewing and correcting model connectivity issues.
5-567
Here are two examples of possible data source tables. The first represents data that is
in the correct format for an easy transition into ModelBuilder, with no modification.
The second table will require adjustments before all of the data can be used by ModelBuilder.
Roughness_C
Diam_in
Length_ft
Material_ID
Subtype
P-1
120
120
P-2
110
75
P-3
130
356
P-4
100
10
729
120
.5
120
PVC
Phase2
P-2
110
.66
75
DuctIron
Lateral
P-3
130
.5
356
PVC
Phase1
P-4
100
.83
729
DuctIron
Main
P-5
100
1029
DuctIron
Main
In Data Format Needs Editing for ModelBuilder, no column labels have been specified. ModelBuilder will interpret the first row of data in the table as the column labels,
which can make the attribute mapping step of the ModelBuilder Wizard more difficult
unless you are very familiar with your data source setup.
Correct Data Format for ModelBuilder is also superior to Data Format Needs Editing
for ModelBuilder in that it clearly identifies the units that are used for unitized
attribute values, such as length and diameter. Again, unless you are very familiar with
your data source, unspecified units can lead to errors and confusion.
5-568
When an element with one or more GIS-IDs is deleted, ModelBuilder will not
recreate it the next time a synchronization from your GIS occurs if the "Recreate
elements associated with a GIS-ID that was previously deleted from the model"
option is left unchecked.
When an element with one or more GIS-IDs is morphed, the new element will
preserve those GIS-IDs. The original element will be considered as "deleted with
GIS-IDs", which means that it will not be recreated by default (see above).
When a link is split, the two links will preserve the same GIS-IDs the original pipe
had. On subsequent ModelBuilder synchronizations, any data-change occurring
for the associated record in the GIS can be cascaded into all the split link segments
(see ModelBuilder - additional options).
When nodes in close proximity are merged, the resulting node will preserve the
GIS-IDs of all the nodes that were removed. On subsequent ModelBuilder
synchronizations into the model, if there are data-update conflicts between the
records in the GIS associated with the merged node in the model, updates from the
first GIS-ID listed for the merged node will be preserved in the model. Note that
in this case, the geometry of the merged node can't be updated in the model. For
synchronizations going from the model to the GIS, data-updates affecting
merged-nodes can be cascaded into all the associated records in the GIS (see
ModelBuilder - additional options).
5-569
If the GIS-ID collection is empty, there is no association between the GIS and this
element.
If there is a single entry, this element is associated with one record in the GIS.
If there are multiple entries, this element is associated with multiple records in the
GIS.
More than one element in the model can have the same GIS-ID, meaning multiple
records on the model are associated with a single record in the GIS.
Note:
5-570
5-571
5-572
BEP Efficiency
BEP Flow
Design Flow
Design Head
GemsID (imported)
Motor Efficiency
Notes
Pump Efficiency
Pump Power
Shutoff Head
5-573
H (red)
H (green)
H (blue)
180
200
160
200
120
120
120
400
40
20
BEPe
70
69
65
All three pumps have 95% motor efficiency and a BEP flow of 200.
The data source is created in an Excel spreadsheet.
5-574
Type
Motor
Eff
Desig
nQ
Desig
nH
Shutof
f Head
Max Q
H@
Max Q
BEP
Eff
BEP
Q
Eff
Type
Variab
le
Speed
Red
Stand
ard (3
Point)
95
200
120
180
400
40
70
200
Best
Efficie
ncy
Point
FALS
E
Green
Stand
ard (3
Point)
95
200
120
200
400
69
200
Best
Efficie
ncy
Point
FALS
E
Blue
Stand
ard (3
Point)
95
200
120
160
400
20
65
200
Best
Efficie
ncy
Point
FALS
E
5-575
5-576
5-577
The example below shows an example of importing a Pump Head Curve. The process
and format are analogous for flow-efficiency and speed-efficiency curves.
5-578
Flow (gpm)
Head (ft)
M5
350
M5
5000
348
M5
10000
344
M5
15000
323
M5
20000
288
M5
25000
250
M5
30000
200
H2
312
H2
2000
304
5-579
5-580
H2
4000
294
H2
6000
280
H2
8000
262
H2
10000
241
H2
12000
211
H2
14000
172
Small
293
Small
1000
291
Small
2000
288
Small
3000
276
Small
4000
259
Small
5000
235
Small
6000
206
Label
5-581
Start Time
Starting Multiplier
The month and day are the actual month or day of week, not the word "MONTH".
Labels must be spelled correctly.
To import patterns, start ModelBuilder, create a new set of instructions, pick the file
type, browse to the data file and pick the tables in that file to be imported. Checking
the Show Preview button enables you to view the data before importing.
5-582
And the actual Pattern Curve in the Pattern Curve table type.
5-583
Category
Format
StartTime
StartMult
Residential
Hydraulic
Stepwise
12:00 PM
0.7
Commercial
Hydraulic
Stepwise
12:00 PM
0.8
5-584
PatternLabel
TimeFromStart
Multiplier
Residential
0.65
Residential
0.8
Residential
1.3
Residential
12
1.6
Residential
15
1.4
Residential
18
1.2
Residential
21
0.9
Residential
24
0.7
Commercial
0.8
Commercial
0.85
Commercial
1.4
Commercial
12
1.6
Commercial
15
1.3
Commercial
18
0.9
Commercial
21
0.8
Commercial
24
0.8
5-585
Time Series: This is the more difficult of the two Excel sheets we need to set up. To
determine the columns to define in Excel, create a temporary ModelBuilder connection and get to the "Specify Field Mappings" step (you won't be saving this connection, so to get past Step 1 of the Wizard, just pick any data source). Navigate to this
step, choose the Time Series table type, and click on the "Property" drop-down field:
5-586
5-587
Navigate through the next few steps, just use the defaults there.
5-588
5-589
5-590
5-591
Oracle/ArcSDE Behavior
If creating a ModelBuilder connection to an ArcSDE data source, you can always use
the Geodatabase and/or Geometric Network connection types when running in the
ArcGIS platform. If the ArcSDE has an Oracle database as the back end data store,
and ArcSDE has been configured to use Oracles native geometry type (i.e.
SDO_GEOMETRY), you can also use the Oracle connection in ModelBuilder to
interact directly with the Oracle data, which has the benefit of being an option in any
platform, such as Microstation. However you should not synchronize data from the
model out to the Oracle connection if its the back end of an ArcSDE data source, as
that may cause problems for the ArcSDE.
5-592
Applying Elevation
Data with TRex
p = HGL - z g
Where:
6-593
HGL
If the modeler is only interested in calculating flows, velocities, and HGL values, then
elevation need not be specified. In this case, the pressures at the nodes will be
computed assuming an elevation of zero, thus resulting in pressures relative to a zero
elevation.
If the modeler specifies pump controls or pressure valve settings in pressure units,
then the model needs to compute pressures relative to the elevation of the nodes being
tested. In this case, the elevation at the control node or valve would need to be specified (or else the model will assume zero elevation). Therefore, an accurate elevation
value is required at each key node where pressure is of importance.
Notice that an HGL of 400 ft. calculated at the hydrant is independent of elevation.
However, depending on which elevation the modeler entered for that node, the pressure can vary as shown. Usually modelers use ground elevation as the elevation for the
node.
6-594
As-built Plans
The data type used by the Elevation Extractor is Digital Elevation Models (DEMs).
Digital Elevation Models, available from the USGS, are computer files that contain
elevation data and routines for interpolating that data to arrive at elevations at nearby
points. DEM data are recorded in a raster format, which means that they are represented by a uniform grid of cells of a specified resolution (typically 100 ft.). The accuracy of points interpolated from the grid depends on the distance from known
6-595
6-596
Record Types
USGS DEM files are organized into these record types:
Type A records contain information about the DEM, including name, boundaries,
and units of measure.
Type B records contain elevation data arranged in profiles from south to north,
with the profiles organized from west to east.
There is one Type A and one Type C record for each DEM. There is one Type B
record for each south-north profile.
DEMs are classified by the method with which they were prepared and the corresponding accuracy standard. Accuracy is measured as the root mean square error
(RMSE) of linearly interpolated elevations from the DEM compared to known elevations. The levels of accuracy, from least accurate to most accurate, are described as
follows:
Level One DEMs are based on high altitude photography and have a vertical
RMSE of 7 meters and a maximum permitted RMSE of 15 meters.
Level Two DEMs are based on hypsographic and hydrographic digitizing with
editing to remove identifiable errors. The maximum permitted RMSE is one-half
of the contour interval.
Level Three DEMs are based on digital line graphs (DLG) and have a maximum
RMSE of one-third of the contour interval.
DEMs will not replace elevation data obtained from field-run surveys, high-quality
global positioning systems, or even well-calibrated altimeters. They can be used to
avoid potential for error which can be involved in manually interpolating points.
6-597
Calibration Nodes
Calibration Nodes
An elevation accuracy of 5 ft. is adequate for most nodes; therefore, a USGS topographic map is typically acceptable. However, for nodes to be used for model calibration, a higher level of accuracy is desirable. Consider a situation where both the model
and the actual system have exactly the same HGL of 800 ft. at a node (see figure
below). The elevation of the ground (and model node) is 661.2 ft. while the elevation
of the pressure gage used in calibration is 667.1 ft. The model would predict a pressure of 60.1 psi while the gage would read 57.5 psi even though the model is correct.
800 ft.
HGL
667.1 ft.
661.2 ft.
Model Pressure = 60 psi
A similar error could occur in the opposite direction with an incorrect pressure
appearing accurate because an incorrect elevation is used. This is one reason why
model calibration should be done by comparing modeled and observed HGL values
and not pressures.
6-598
6-599
TRex Wizard
TRex Wizard
The TRex Wizard steps you through the process of automatically assigning elevations
to specified nodes based on data from a Digital Elevation Model or a Digital Terrain
Model.
TRex can load elevation data into model point features (nodes) from a variety of file
types including both vector and raster files. To use raster files as the data source, the
ArcGIS platform must be used. With a vector data source, it is possible to use any
platform. Vector data must consist of either points with an elevation or contours with
an elevation.
It is important to understand the resolution, projection, datum, units and accuracy of
any source file that will be used to load elevation data for nodes.
In the United States, elevation data can be obtained at the USGS National Map Seamless Server. The vertical accuracy may only be +/- 7 to 15 m.
6-600
6-601
TRex Wizard
6-602
Data Source TypeThis menu allows you to choose the type of file that contains
the input data you will use.
FileThis field displays the path where the DXF, XML, or SHP file is located.
Use the browse button to find and select the desired file.
Spatial Reference (ArcGIS Mode Only)Click the Ellipsis (...) next to this
field to open the Spatial Reference Properties dialog box, allowing you to specify
the spatial reference being used by the elevation data file.
X-Y UnitsThis menu allows the selection of the measurement unit type associated with the X and Y coordinates of the elevation data file.
Z UnitsThis menu allows the selection of the measurement unit type associated
with the Z coordinates of the elevation data file.
Clip Dataset to ModelIn some cases, the data source contains elevation data
for an area that exceeds the dimensions of the area being modeled. When this box
is checked, TRex will calculate the models bounding box, find the larger dimension (width or height), calculate the Buffering Percentage of that dimension, and
increase both the width and height of the model bounding box by that amount.
Buffering PercentageThis field is only active when the Clip Dataset to Model
box is checked. The percentage entered here is the percentage of the larger dimension (width or height) of the models bounding box that will be added to both the
bounding box width and height to find the area within which the source data
points will be used to build the elevation mesh.
Spatial Reference (ArcGIS Mode Only)Click the Ellipsis (...) next to this
field to open the Spatial Reference Properties dialog box, allowing you to specify
the spatial reference being used by the WaterGEMS V8i model file.
AllWhen this button is selected, TRex will attempt to assign elevations to all
nodes within the WaterGEMS V8i model.
Selection SetWhen this is selected, the Selection Set menu is activated. When
the Selection Set button is selected, TRex will assign elevations to all nodes
within the selection set that is specified in this menu.
Note:
6-603
TRex Wizard
Step 2: Completing the TRex Wizard
The results of the elevation extraction process are displayed and the results can be
applied to a new or existing physical alternative.
6-604
Results Preview PaneThis tabular pane displays the elevations that were
calculated by TRex. The table can be sorted by label by clicking the Label column
heading and by elevation by clicking the Elevation column heading. You can filter
the table by right-clicking a column in the table and selecting the Filter...Custom
command. You can also right-click any of the values in the elevation column to
change the display options.
New Alternative When this is selected, the results will be applied to a new
physical alternative. First, the currently active physical alternative will be duplicated, then the results generated by TRex will be applied to the newly created
alternative. The name of this new alternative must be supplied in the New Alternative text field.
Export ResultsThis exports the results generated by TRex to a tab or commadelimited text file (.TXT). These files can then be re-used by WaterGEMS V8i or
imported into other programs.
Click Finish when complete, or Cancel to close without making any changes.
6-605
TRex Wizard
6-606
Allocating Demands
using LoadBuilder
7-607
Allocation
This uses the spatial analysis capabilities of GIS to assign geocoded (possessing coordinate data based on physical location, such as an x-y coordinate) customer meters to
the nearest demand node or pipe. Assigning metered demands to nodes is a point-topoint demand allocation technique, meaning that known point demands (customer
meters) are assigned to network demand points (demand nodes). Assigning metered
demands to pipes is also a point-to-point assignment technique, since demands must
still be assigned to node elements, but there is an additional step involved. When using
the Nearest Pipe meter assignment strategy, the demands at a meter are assigned to the
7-608
Meter assignment can prove less accurate than the more complex allocation strategies
because the nearest node is determined by straight-line proximity between the demand
node and the consumption meter. Piping routes are not considered, so the nearest
demand node may not be the location from which the meter actually receives its flow.
In addition, the actual location of the service meter may not be known.
The geographic location of the meter in the GIS is not necessarily the point from
which water is taken from the system, but may be the centroid of the land parcel, the
centroid of building footprint, or a point along the frontage of the building. Ideally,
these meter points should be placed at the location of the tap, but the centroid of the
building or land parcel may be all that is known about a customer account.
7-609
7-610
Distribution
This strategy involves distributing lump-sum area water use data among a number of
service polygons (service areas) and, by extension, their associated demand nodes.
The lump-sum area is a polygon for which the total (lump-sum) water use of all of the
service areas (and their demand nodes) within it is known (metered), but the distribution of the total water use among the individual nodes is not. The water use data for
these lump-sum areas can be based on system meter data from pump stations, treatment plants or flow control valves, meter routes, pressure zones, and traffic analysis
zones (TAZ). The lump sum area for which a flow is known must be a GIS polygon.
There is one flow rate per polygon, and there can be no overlap of or open space
between the polygons.
The known flow within the lump-sum area is generally divided among the service
polygons within the area using one of two techniques: equal distribution or proportional distribution:
The equal flow distribution option simply divides the known flow evenly
between the demand nodes. The equal flow distribution strategy is illustrated in
the diagram below. The lump-sum area in this case is a polygon layer that represents meter route areas. For each of these meter route polygons, the total flow is
known. The total flow is then equally divided among the demand nodes within
each of the meter route polygons (See Figure).
Each service polygon has an associated demand node, and the flow that is calculated
for each service polygon is assigned to this demand node. For example, if a service
polygon consists of 50 percent of the lump-sum polygons area, then 50 percent of the
flow associated with the lump-sum polygon will be assigned to the demand node associated with that service polygon. This strategy requires the definition of lump-sum
area or population polygons in the GIS, service polygons in the model, and their
related demand nodes. Sometimes the flow distribution technique must be used to
7-611
In the following figure, the total demand in meter route A may be 55 gpm (3.48 L/s)
while in meter route B the demand is 72 gpm (4.55 L/s). Since there are 11 nodes in
meter route A, if equal distribution is used, the demand at each node would be 5 gpm
(0.32 L/s), while in meter route B, with 8 nodes, the demand at each node would be 9
gpm (0.57 L/s).
7-612
Projection
Automated techniques have also been developed to assist in the estimation of
demands using land use and population density data. These are similar to the Flow
Distribution allocation methods except that the type of base layer that is used to intersect with the service layer may contain information other than flow, such as land use
or population.
This type of demand estimation can be used in the projection of future demands; in
this case, the demand allocation relies on a polygon layer that contains data regarding
expected future conditions. A variety of data types can be used with this technique,
including future land use, projected population, or demand density (in polygon form),
with the polygons based upon traffic analysis zones, census tracts, planning districts,
or another classification. Note that these data sources can also be used to assign
current demands; the difference between the two being the data that is contained
within the source. If the data relates to projected values, it can be used for demand
projections.
Many of these data types do not include demand information, so further data conversion is required to translate the information contained in the future condition polygons
into projected demand values. This entails translating the data contained within your
data source to flow, which can then be applied using LoadBuilder.
After an appropriate conversion method is in place, the service layer containing the
service areas and demand nodes is overlaid with the future condition polygon layer(s).
A projected demand for each of the service areas can then be determined and assigned
to the demand nodes associated with each service polygon. The conversion that is
required will depend on the source data that is being used. It could be a matter of
translating the data contained within the source, such as population, land area, etc. to
flow, which can then be used by LoadBuilder to assign demands.
Depending on how the layers intersect, service areas may contain multiple demand
types (land uses) that are added and applied to the demand node for that service
polygon.
7-613
LoadBuilder Manager
The LoadBuilder manager provides a central location for the creation, storage, and
management of Load Build templates.
7-614
Delete
Rename
Edit
Help
LoadBuilder Wizard
The LoadBuilder wizard assists you in the creation of a new load build template by
stepping you through the procedure of creating a new load build template. Depending
on the load build method you choose, the specific steps presented in the wizard will
vary.
Note:
7-615
7-616
Distribution
Equal Flow DistributionThis loading method equally divides the total flow
contained in a flow boundary polygon and assigns it to the nodes that fall within
the flow boundary polygon.
Proportional Distribution by AreaThis load method proportionally distributes a lump-sum flow among a number of demand nodes based upon the ratio of
total service area to the area of the nodes corresponding service polygon.
7-617
Unit LineThis load method divides the total demand in the system (or in a
section of the system) into 2 parts: known demand (metered) and unknown
demand (leakage and unmeasured user demand).
7-618
Projection by Land UseThis method allocates demand based upon the density
per land use type of each service polygon.
Note:
Load Type FieldSpecify the source database field that contains load type
data. Load Type is an optional classification that can be used to assign
composite loads to nodes, which enables different behaviors, multipliers, and
patterns to be applied in various situations. For example, possible load types
may include Residential, Commercial, Industrial, etc. To make use of the
Load Type classification, your source database must include a column that
contains this data.
Usage FieldSpecify the source database field that contains usage data. The
usage field in the source database must contain flow data. Also, use to select
the unit associated with the usage field value.
Node LayerSpecify the feature class or shapefile that contains the nodes
that the loads will be assigned to.
Node ID FieldSpecify the feature class database field that contains the
unique identifying label data.
Note:
Billing Meter LayerSpecify the feature class or shapefile that contains the
geocoded billing meter data.
7-619
Load Type FieldSpecify the source database field that contains load type
data. Load Type is an optional classification that can be used to assign
composite loads to nodes, which enables different behaviors, multipliers, and
patterns to be applied in various situations. For example, possible load types
may include Residential, Commercial, Industrial, etc. To make use of the
Load Type classification, your source database must include a column that
contains this data.
Usage FieldSpecify the source database field that contains usage data. The
usage field in the source database must contain flow data. Also, use to select
the unit associated with the usage field value.
Pipe LayerSpecify the line feature class or shapefile that contains the pipes
that will be used to determine meter-to-pipe proximity. Note that the pipes in
this layer must connect to the nodes contained in the Node Layer.
Pipe ID FieldSpecify the source database field that contains the unique
identifying label data.
Note:
7-620
Closest NodeThis method assigns the entire total load assigned to the
pipe end node that is closest to the meter.
Farthest NodeThis method assigns the entire total load assigned to the
pipe end node that is farthest from the meter.
Node LayerSpecify the point feature class or shapefile that contains the
nodes that will be used to determine node-to-pipe proximity. Note that the
nodes in this layer must connect to the pipes contained in the Pipes Layer.
Node ID FieldSpecify the source database field that contains the unique
identifying label data.
Note:
Load Type FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field
that contains load type data. Load Type is an optional classification that can
be used to assign composite loads to nodes, which enables different behaviors,
multipliers, and patterns to be applied in various situations. For example,
possible load types may include Residential, Commercial, Industrial, etc. To
make use of the Load Type classification, your source database must include a
column that contains this data.
Proportional DistributionThis option will divide the load proportionally according to the ratio of the length of pipe that is associated with
(overlapping) the meter to the total length of the meter.
Usage FieldSpecify the source database field that contains usage data. The
usage field in the source database must contain flow data. Also, use to select
the unit associated with the usage field value.
7-621
Node LayerSpecify the point feature class or shapefile that contains the
nodes that the flow will be assigned to.
Note:
Flow Boundary LayerSpecify the polygon feature class that contains the
flow monitoring meter data.
Flow FieldSpecify the source database field that contains usage data. The
usage field in the source database must contain flow data. Also, use to select
the unit associated with the usage field value.
Node ID FieldSpecify the source database field that contains the unique
identifying label data.
Note:
7-622
Flow FieldSpecify the source database field that contains usage data. The
usage field in the source database must contain flow data. Also, use to select
the unit associated with the usage field value.
Node ID FieldSpecify the source database field that contains the unique
identifying label data.
Flow FieldSpecify the source database field that contains usage data. The
usage field in the source database must contain flow data. Also, use to select
the unit associated with the usage field value.
Land Type FieldSpecify the source database field that contains land use
type.
K Factor FieldSpecify the user-defined attribute field that contains KFactor data. You can add the user-defined field to the project by clicking the
ellipsis button and specifying a default K-Factor.
IncludeCheck the box next to each element type (junctions, tanks, and
hydrants) you want included in the calculation.
Node ID FieldSpecify the source database field that contains the unique
identifying label data.
7-623
Land Type FieldSpecify the source database field that contains land use
type.
Load Type and Load DensityUse this table to assign load density values
to the various load types contained within your land use layer.
Note:
Load Type and Load DensityUse this table to assign load density values
to the various load types contained within your population density layer.
7-624
Load TypeThis column contains an entry for each load type contained within
the database column specified in step one. (Examples include Residential,
Commercial, Industrial, etc.)
ConsumptionThis column displays the total load associated with each load
type entry.
MultiplierThis column displays the multiplier that is applied to each load type
entry. Multipliers can be used to account for peak loads, expected future loads, or
to reflect unaccounted-for-loads. This field can be edited.
In addition to the functionality provided by the tabular summary pane, the following
controls are also available in this step:
Total LoadThis field displays an updated total of all of the entries contained
within the Results Summary Pane, as modified by the local and global multipliers
that are in effect.
Load TypeAn optional classification that can be used to assign different behaviors, multipliers, and patterns in various situations. For example, possible load
types may include Residential, Commercial, Industrial, etc. To make use of the
Load Type classification, your source database must include a column that
contains this data.
PatternThe type of pattern assigned to the node. The source database must
include a column that contains this data.
7-625
7-626
LabelThis field allows a unique label to be assigned to the load build template.
Override an Existing AlternativeChoosing this option will cause the calculated loads to overwrite the loads contained within the existing load alternative
that is selected.
Append to an Existing AlternativeChoosing this option will cause the calculated loads to be appended to the loads contained within the existing load alternative that is selected. Loads within the existing alternative that are assigned to a
specific node will not be overwritten by newly generated loads assigned to the
same node; the new loads will be added to them.
7-627
1 Q totalunknown
Ki li
Q a = q + --- -----------------------------------
a
2 n
i=1
K j l j
j = 1
1 Q totalunknown
Ki li
Q b = q + --- -----------------------------------
b
2 n
i=1
K j l j
j = 1
Where
Qa = the total demand at node a
Qb = the total demand at node b
qa = The known demand at node a
qb = The known demand at node b
Qtotal unknown = Total real demand minus total known demand(for the network or
selection set)
n = number of pipes in network (or selection set)
m = the number of pipes connected to node a or b
7-628
7-629
In the third diagram, bisector lines are added by drawing a line where the circles interjoin.
7-630
In the final diagram, the network is overlaid with the polygons that are created by
connecting the bisector lines.
7-631
7-632
The Thiessen Polygon Creator dialog box consists of the following controls:
Node LayerThis lists the valid point feature classes and shapefiles that
Thiessen Polygon Creator can use.
SelectionThis option allows you to create a selection on the fly for use with
the Thiessen Polygon Creator. To use this option, use the ArcMap Select
Features tool to select the point features that you want before opening the
Thiessen Polygon Creator.
Polygon Boundary LayerSelect the boundary polygon feature class or shapefile, if one has already been created. A boundary is specified so that the outermost
polygons do not extend to infinity.
7-633
7-634
and filter elements based on selection set, attribute, predefined query, or zone.
In order to access the Demand Control Center go to Tools > Demand Control Center
or click Demand Control. The Demand Control Center opens.
7-635
7-636
Delete
Report
Create or
Add to a
Selection
Set
7-637
Zoom
Find
Options
Query
Note:
7-638
7-639
A unit demand consists of a unit (person, area) multiplied by a unit demand (gal/
capita/day, liters/sq m/day, cfs/acre). The units are assigned to node elements (like
junctions) while the unit demands are created using the Unit Demands dialog box. If
the unit demands are not assigned to nodes but to polygons in a GIS, then it is best to
use LoadBuilder to import the loads.
7-640
Duplicate
Delete
Rename
Report
Synchronization
Options
The tab section is used to define the settings for the unit demand that is currently highlighted in the unit demands list pane.
7-641
Population Unit
Demand
7-642
Library Tab
Notes Tab
7-643
7-644
New
Delete
Report
Create or
Add to a
Selection
Set
Zoom
Find
Options
Query
Note:
Calculate the actual supplied demand at a PDD node and demand shortfall
Present the calculated PDD and the associated results in a table and graph.
7-645
7-646
New
Duplicate
Delete
Rename
Report
Synchroniza
tion Options
7-647
Function Type - Either Power Function or Piecewise Linear. Power Function is used to
define the exponential relationship between the nodal pressure and demand. The ratio
of actual supplied demand to reference demand is defined as a power function of the
ratio of actual pressure to reference pressure.
Power Function Exponent - The coefficient that defines the power function relationship between the demand ratio and pressure ratio.
Has Threshold Pressure? - Turn on to specify if a threshold pressure is to be input.
Pressure Threshold is the maximum pressure above which the demand is kept
constant.
7-648
If the function type chosen is Piecewise Linear then the following opens.
7-649
In some cases, there is an upper limit to the amount of water that will be used as pressure increases (users will throttle back their faucets). In this case the pressure at which
demand is no longer a function of pressure is called the Pressure Threshold. In the
graph below the pressure threshold is 50 psi.
The pressure threshold must be equal to or greater than the reference pressure. A reference pressure must be specified to use pressure dependent demand. The threshold
pressure is optional. The user can optionally set the reference pressure to the threshold
pressure. These values can be set globally or the global value can be overridden on a
node by node basis.
7-650
Reducing Model
Complexity with
Skelebrator
Skeletonization
Skeletonization Example
Common Automated Skeletonization Techniques
Skeletonization Using Skelebrator
Using the Skelebrator Software
Backing Up Your Model
8-651
Skeletonization
Skeletonization
Skeletonization is the process of selecting only the parts of the hydraulic network that
have a significant impact on the behavior of the system for inclusion in a water distribution model. For example, including each individual service connection, valve, and
every one of the numerous other elements that make up the actual network would be a
huge undertaking for larger systems. The portions of the network that are not modeled
are not ignored; rather, the effects of these elements are accounted for within the parts
of the system that are included in the model.
A fully realized water distribution model can be an enormously complex network
consisting of thousands of discrete elements, and not all of these elements are necessary for every application of the model. When elements that are extraneous to the
desired purpose are present, the efficiency, usability, and focus of the model can be
substantially affected, and calculation and display refresh times can be seriously
impaired. In addition to the logistics of creating and maintaining a model that employs
little or no skeletonization, a high level of detail might be unnecessary when incorporating all of these elements in the model and has no significant effect on the accuracy
of the results that are generated.
Different levels of skeletonization are appropriate depending on the intended use of
the model. For an energy cost analysis, a higher degree of skeletonization is preferable
and for fire flow and water quality analysis, minimal skeletonization is necessary. This
means that multiple models are required for different applications. Due to this necessity, various automated skeletonization techniques have been developed to assist with
the skeletonization process.
Automated Skeletonization includes:
8-652
Skeletonization Example
The following series of diagrams illustrate various levels of skeletonization that can
be applied. The diagram below shows a network subdivision before any skeletonization has been performed.
There is a junction at each service tap and a pipe and node at each house for a total of
48 junctions and 47 pipes within this subdivision.
To perform a low level of skeletonization, the nodes at each house could be removed
along with the connecting pipes that tie in to the service line. The demands at each
house would be moved to the corresponding service tap. The resulting network would
now look like this:
There are now 19 junctions and 18 pipes in the subdivision. The demands that were
assigned to the junctions that were removed are moved to the nearest upstream junction. The only information that has been lost is the data at the service connections that
were removed.
A further level of skeletonization is possible if you remove the service taps and model
only the ends and intersections of the main pipes. In this case, re-allocating the
demands is a bit more complex. The most accurate approximation can be obtained by
associating the demands with the junction that is closest to the original demand junction (as determined by following the service pipe). In the following diagram, these
service areas are marked with a dotted line.
8-653
Skeletonization
To fully skeletonize this subdivision, the pipes and junctions that serve the subdivision
can be removed, and the demands can be assigned to the point where the branch
connects to the rest of the network, as shown in the following diagram:
8-654
GenericData Scrubbing
Data scrubbing is usually the first step of the skeletonization process. Some automated
skeletonizers rely entirely on this reduction technique. (Data scrubbing is called Smart
Pipe Removal in Skelebrator.) Data scrubbing consists of removing all pipes that meet
user-specified criteria, such as diameter, roughness, or other attributes. Criteria combinations can also be applied, for example: Remove all 2-inch pipes that are less than
200 feet in length.
This step of skeletonization is especially useful when the model has been created from
GIS data, since GIS maps generally contain much more information than is necessary
for the hydraulic model. Examples of elements that are commonly included in GIS
maps, but not necessarily in the distribution model, are service connections and isolation valves. Removing these elements generally has a negligible impact on the accuracy of the model, depending on the application for which the model is being used.
The primary drawback of this type of skeletonization is that there is generally no
network awareness involved. No consideration of the hydraulic effects of a pipes
removal is taken into account, so there is a large potential for errors to be made by
inadvertent pipe removal or by causing network disconnections. (Bentley Systems
Skelebrator does account for hydraulic effect.)
GenericBranch Trimming
Branch trimming, also referred to as Branch Collapsing, is the process of removing
short dead-end links and their corresponding junctions. Since pipes and junctions are
removed by this process, you specify the criteria for both types of element. An important element of this skeletonization type is the reallocation of demands that are associated with junctions that are removed. The demand associated with a dead-end junction
is assigned to the junction at the beginning of the branch.
Branch trimming is a recursive process; as dead-end pipes and junctions are removed,
other junctions and pipes can become the new dead-endsif they meet the trimming
criteria, these elements may also be removed. You specify whether this process
continues until all applicable branches have been trimmed or if the process should
stop after a specified number of trimming levels.
8-655
8-656
This added intelligence protects the models integrity by eliminating the possibility of
inadvertently introducing catastrophic errors during the model reduction process.
This innovation is not available in other automated skeletonization applications; a
likely result of performing skeletonization without this intelligent safety net is the
invalidation of the network caused by the removal of elements that are critical to the
performance and accuracy of the model. At the very least, verifying that no important
elements have been removed during this skeletonization step and re-creating any
elements that have been erroneously removed can be a lengthy and error-prone
process. These considerations are addressed automatically and transparently by the
Skelebrators advanced network traversal algorithm.
8-657
SkelebratorBranch Collapsing
Branch Collapsing is a fundamental skeletonization technique; the improvements over
the branch trimming that Skelebrator brings to the table are primarily a matter of flexibility, efficiency, and usability. The branch trimming method utilized by other automated skeletonization applications allows a limited range of removal criteria; in some
cases, just elevation and length. Workarounds are required if another removal criteria
is desired, resulting in more steps to obtain the desired results.
Conversely, Skelebrator innately provides a wide range of removal criteria, increasing
the scope of this skeletonization step and eliminating the need for inefficient manual
workarounds.
The following diagrams illustrate the results of Branch Collapsing.
8-658
8-659
J1
J2
J3
P1
P2
Diameter: 8 in.
Diameter: 8 in.
Roughness: 120
Roughness: 120
J1
P1
J3
8-660
J1
J2
J3
P1
P2
Diameter: 8 in.
Diameter: 6 in.
Roughness: 120
Roughness: 120
J1
P1
J3
Diameter: 8 in.
Diameter: 6 in.
Roughness: 77
Roughness: 163
Tip:
8-661
8-662
SkelebratorConclusion
With the overwhelming amount of data now available to the water distribution
modeler, some degree of skeletonization is appropriate for practically every model,
although the extent of the skeletonization varies widely depending on the intended
purpose of the model. In light of this, it has become desirable to maintain multiple
models of the same system, each for use in different types of analysis and design.
A model that has been minimally skeletonized serves as a water quality and fire flow
analysis model, while energy cost estimating is performed using a model with a higher
degree of skeletonization.
Creating a number of reduced models with varying levels of skeletonization can be a
lengthy and tedious process, which is where the automated techniques described
above demonstrate their value. To ensure that the skeletonization process produces a
reduced model with the minimum number of elements necessary for the intended
application while simultaneously maintaining an accurate simulation of network
behavior, the automated skeletonization routine must be flexible enough to accommodate a wide variety of conditions.
Skelebrator provides an unmatched level of flexibility, providing numerous demand
reallocation and element removal strategies. It alone, amongst automated skeletonizers, maximizes the potential level of skeletonization by introducing the concept of
Hydraulic Equivalence, eliminating the limitation posed by exact attribute matching
requirements. Another distinction is the advanced network walking algorithm
employed by Skelebrator, which ensures that your model remains connected and
valid, thereby greatly reducing the possibility for inadvertent element removal errors.
8-663
8-664
We strongly recommended that you first make a copy of your model as a safe
guard before proceeding with Skelebration. In ArcGIS (ArcCatalog or ArcMap),
there is no ability to undo your changes after they have been made.
We strongly recommended that you eliminate all scenarios other than the one to
be skeletonized from a model prior to skeletonization.
Skelebrator reduces a WaterGEMS V8i model and applies its changes to the
models WaterGEMS V8i datastore, which is contained within an .MDB file.
Skelebrator cannot view or make changes to a standard GIS geodatabase.
To use Skelebrator with a GIS geodatabase, you must first use ModelBuilder to
create a WaterGEMS V8i datastore from the GIS data.
To use Skelebrator with a CAD drawing, you must first perform a Polyline-toPipe conversion to create a WaterGEMS V8i datastore from the CAD file.
Skeletonizer Manager
Use Skelebrators skeletonization manager to define how you are going to skeletonize
your network. The basic unit in Skelebrator is an operation. An operation defines and
Branch Collapsing
8-665
8-666
New
Click New to add a skeletonization operation. This adds an operation for the option that is currently selected: Smart Pipe
Removal, Branch Collapsing, Series Pipe Merging, or Parallel
Pipe Merging. Skelebrator performs a single operation at a time.
An operation consists of the strategy to use (Smart Pipe
Removal, Branch Collapsing, etc.) and the settings and conditions specific to that operation.
Rename
Duplicate
Click Duplicate to create a copy of the currently selected operation. You can rename and edit the copy as needed.
Delete
Automatic
Manual
Print
Preview
8-667
8-668
Batch Run
When Default Skelebrator Group is highlighted, the Batch Run tab is opened with the
Batch Run Manager in view. Use the Batch Run Manager to select the skeletonization
strategies you want to use and the order to run them.
Operations appearing in the top window are the operations you have defined and
which are available for use in a batch run. Any operations in this window may be
selected for a batch run. The same operation can be selected multiple times.
To Use Batch Run
1. Select Default Skelebrator Group.
2. Select the Skeletonization strategies.
3. Click Add to add selected operations to the lower window. Any operations in the
lower window are selected as part of the batch run. Use Remove, Move Up, and
Move Down to manage the makeup and order of the operations in the batch run
list.
8-669
8-670
The batch run manager does not become available until at least
one Skelebrator operation is added.
All operations selected into the lower window of the batch run
manager dialog box will be executed during a batch run. There is
no need to select (highlight) the operations before running them.
Conversely, selecting only some operations in this window does
not mean only those operations will be run.
8-671
Done
Add
Remove
8-672
Select By
Polygon
Query
Find
Clear
The first item listed is a selection set which is automatically created by Skelebrator. When you select a selection set menu item, the IDs are retrieved and
applied to the selection. Only valid elements are selected.
The Custom Queries menu will contain menu items that allow you to create
custom, non-persisting queries for the valid elements.
8-673
Since this menu only contains custom queries for valid elements, any results
passed back from the query execution will be applied to the selection. In this
example only junctions and pipes can be selected so you can only create custom
queries for junctions and pipes.
The next set of menus are for the available queries. The queries are processed in
the following order: Project, Shared, and Predefined. Each menu item for the
queries represents the equivalent folder in the query manager View > Queries.
Manual Skeletonization
If you click the Manual Skeletonization button, the Manual Skeletonization Review
dialog box opens. The manual skeletonization review dialog box lists the proposed
skeletonization actions for the particular skeletonization process selected. The
contents of the action list window (to the left of the buttons) will vary depending on
the type of operation being run. For Smart Pipe Removal and Branch Collapsing, each
Skelebrator action will have one pipe associated with it, whereas Series and Parallel
Pipe Merging will have two pipes associated with each action. For Smart Pipe
Removal, when network integrity is enforced, the contents of the action list are
updated, after every executed action, to reflect only valid actions, after each action is
performed.
8-674
PreviousClick Previous to preview the previous element to the one you have
selected in the Manual Skeletonization Review dialog box.
Auto Next?Select this check box if you wish for Skelebrator to immediately
advance to the next pipe element in the action list. This is the equivalent of
clicking Execute then clicking Next immediately afterwards.
CloseClick Close to exit the Manual Skeletonization Review dialog box. Any
remaining actions listed will not be executed.
ZoomSelect a Zoom at which you want to display elements you preview using
Go To, Previous, and Next.
8-675
8-676
3. Click Add to add conditions. You can add pipe and/or junction conditions. You
can add more than one condition.
4. Or, select an existing condition and click Edit to modify a selected condition. You
can add and edit Junction and Pipe Conditions.
You can set select parameters that determine which pipes are included in the skeletonizing process in the Conditions tab. In Branch Collapsing, the junctions
referred to (in junction conditions) are the two end junctions of the pipe being
trimmed. Tolerances can also be defined for junctions. Tolerances work by
limiting the pipes skeletonized only to the ones that have the specified attribute
within the specified tolerance. For example, in Branch Collapsing a tolerance on
junction elevation of 3 feet would limit skeletonization to pipes that had both end
junctions with an elevation within three feet of each other.
8-677
When you add or edit a Parallel Pipe Merging operation, the Parallel Pipe Merging
Operation Editor controls become active in the control pane on the right.
8-678
Modify Diameter
Modify Roughness.
If modify diameter is selected, the new pipes roughness is kept constant and the diameter adjusted such that the head loss through the pipe remains constant. Conversely, if
modify roughness is selected, the new pipes diameter is kept constant and the roughness adjusted such that the head loss through the pipe remains constant.
Note:
Minor Loss StrategyIf your network models minor losses, select what you want
Skelebrator to do with them.
Use Ignore Minor Losses if you want to ignore any minor losses in parallel pipes.
Resulting merged pipes will have a minor loss of 0.
Use Skip Pipe if Minor Loss > Max to protect from skeletonization any pipes
that have a higher minor loss than a value you set for the Maximum Minor Loss.
Use 50/50 Split to apply 50% of the sum of the minor losses from the parallel
pipes to the replacement pipe that Skeletonizer uses.
8-679
When you add or edit a Series Pipe Merging operation, the Series Pipe Merging Operation Editor dialog box opens. Operations have two sets of parameters, Settings and
Conditions.
1. Click the Settings tab to edit settings.
8-680
Dominant Pipe CriteriaSelect the criteria by which Skelebrator determines the dominant pipe. The dominant pipe is the pipe whose properties are
retained as appropriate. For example, when merging a 6-in. pipe and an 8-in.
pipe, if diameter is selected as the dominant pipe criteria then the larger diameter pipe (e.g., 8-in.) will provide the properties for the new pipe. That is, the
8-in. pipes diameter, roughness, bulk reaction rate, etc. will be used for the
new pipe.
Modify Diameter
Modify Roughness.
If modify diameter is selected, the new pipes roughness is kept constant and
the diameter adjusted such that the head loss through the pipe remains
constant. Conversely, if modify roughness is selected the new pipes diameter
is kept constant and the roughness adjusted such that the head loss through the
pipe remains constant.
Note:
Load Distribution StrategySelect how you want the load distributed from
junctions that are removed.
-
Equally Distributed puts 50% of the load on the starting and ending
junctions of the post-skeletonized pipe.
8-681
Note:
Apply Minor LossesSelect Apply Minor Losses if you wish for Skelebrator to preserve any minor losses attached to the pipes in your network. For
Series Pipe Merging the minor losses for the original pipes are summed and
added to the resulting pipe. If this option is not selected then the minor loss of
the resulting pipe will be set to zero.
Tip:
Note:
8-682
a. Click Add to add conditions. You can add pipe and/or junction conditions.
You can add more than one condition.
b. Or, select an existing condition and click Edit to modify a selected condition.
You can add and edit Junction and Pipe Conditions.
Note:
In the case where not all nodes connected to the two pipes are
junctions, tolerances are only evaluated based upon the junction
type nodes. For example, if a tolerance of 5gpm was defined this
would not invalidate the merging of two pipes that had one
uncommon node that was a pump, for example. The tolerance
condition would be evaluated based only upon the two junction
type nodes.
The Pipe Condition Editor allows you to set select parameters that determine which
pipes are included in the skeletonizing process. Tolerances can also be specified for
both pipe and junction conditions.
In the context of series pipe merging, pipe tolerances are calculated between the specified attribute of the two pipes to be merged. For example, a tolerance on diameter of
2-in. means that only pipes within a range of 2-in. diameter of each other will be
merged (i.e., a 6-in. and an 8-in. pipe would be merged, an 8-in. and a 12-in. pipe
would not).
8-683
8-684
2. Click Conditions to edit or create pipe conditions. You can add more than one
condition.
3. Click Add to add pipe conditions. You can add more than one condition.
4. Or, select an existing condition and click Edit to modify a selected condition.
The condition editor allows you to define pipe conditions that determine which pipes
are included in the Smart Pipe Removal process. It is acceptable to define an operation
that has no conditions (the default). In this case no pipes will be excluded from the
skeletonization based on any of their physical attributes alone.
8-685
8-686
Be valid in terms of the network topology with respect to the particular skeletonization operation. That is, during Branch Reduction the pipe has to be part of a
branch. Any pipes whose topology dictates they are not part of a branch will not
be skeletonized.
Must not be connected to a VSP control node or the trace node for WQ analysis.
Diameter
Installation Year
Length
Material
Roughness
OperatorSelect an operator that defines the relationship between the attribute you
select and the value you select for that attribute. For example, if you select an attribute
of Diameter, an operator of Less Than, and a value of 6 in., then any pipes with less
than a 6-in. diameter are valid for skeletonization. Depending on operation type,
Tolerance may also be an option for operator. When using a tolerance, a tolerance (as
opposed to a condition) is defined. For example, in the context of Series Pipe Merging
where two pipes are being merged, a tolerance of 2-in. diameter means that those
pipes will only be merged if their diameters are within 2-in. of each other.
ValueThe label, units, and appropriate value range depend on the attribute you
select.
Base Flow
Elevation
Emitter Coefficient.
8-687
Click the Save Statistics button on the Statistics tab to save the summary to a text file.
Click the Copy Statistics button to copy the summary to the Windows clipboard. The
Messages tab displays warning, error, and success messages as applicable.
8-688
8-689
The scenario being selected for skeletonization must contain only parent (base)
alternatives
All elements that reference local records in any child alternative are protected
from skeletonization.
As a simple example, consider a model with two scenarios, Base and Fire Flow. The
Base scenario references a set of parent (base) alternatives, and the Fire Flow scenario
references all the same alternatives, except for the demand alternative, where it references a child alternative of the Base scenario demand alternative, with local records at
junctions A-90 and A-100 which are to model the additional flow at the fire flow junctions. This model meets all of the above 3 conditions and thus skeletonization of this
model can be conducted successfully for all scenarios in the model, but only if all of
the following skeletonization rules are adhered to:
The elements associated with local demand records (i.e., junctions A-90 and A100 in our example) are protected from skeletonization using the Skelebrator
element protection feature.
The reason the base scenario (a) must be selected for skeletonization is so that only
parent (base) alternatives are modified by skeletonization. This is so that changes
made to alternatives propagate down the parent-child hierarchy. If skeletonization was
to occur on a scenario that referenced child alternatives, then the changes made to the
scenario will not propagate back up the parent-child hierarchy and would result in
incorrect results.
The reason for the element protections (b) is to limit the scope of skeletonization to
the data common to both scenarios. That is, any model elements that possess any local
records in any referenced child alternative are excluded from the skeletonization since
the differences in properties between the child and parent alternatives cannot be
resolved in a skeletonization process that acts for all intents and purposes on a single
scenario. This idiom can be extended to other alternative types besides the demand
alternative.
Note:
8-690
8-691
Meet topological criteria (e.g., that the two pipes are in series and have a common
node that is legal to remove, i.e., not a tank, reservoir, valve or pump)
Have no calibration references including to the junctions they are routed between
Are routed between nodes that are free of references from variable speed pumps
(VSPs)
Are routed between nodes that are free from Water Quality (WQ) trace analysis
references
Are routed between nodes that represent at least one junction, if the common node
is a loaded junction (so the load can be distributed)
The two series pipes still may not be skeletonized if any inactive topology could be
affected by the execution of the skeletonization action. For example, if the two series
pipes have an additional but inactive pipe connected to their common node, and if the
series pipe removal action was allowed to proceed, the common node would be
removed from the model, and the inactive topology would become invalid. This is
prevented from occurring in Skelebrator.
8-692
Scenarios and
Alternatives
The software maintains the data for all the scenarios in a single project so it can
provide you with powerful automated tools for directly comparing scenario results
where any set is available at any time.
9-693
Distributed Scenarios
Traditionally, there have only been two possible ways of analyzing the effects of
change on a software model:
Create a copy of the model, edit that copy, calculate, and review the results.
Although either of these methods may be adequate for a relatively small system, the
data duplication, editing, and re-editing become very time-consuming and error-prone
as the size of the system and the number of possible conditions increase. Also,
comparing conditions requires manual data manipulation, because all output must be
stored in physically separate data files.
9-694
Self-Contained Scenarios
Effective scenario management tools need to meet these objectives:
9-695
The scenario management feature in WaterGEMS V8i successfully meets all of these
objectives. A single project file enables you to generate an unlimited number of What
If? conditions; edit only the data that needs to be changed and quickly generate direct
comparisons of input and results for desired scenarios.
9-696
A Familiar Parallel
Although the structure of scenarios may seem a bit difficult at first, if you have ever
eaten at a restaurant, you should be able to understand the concept. A meal (scenario)
is comprised of several courses (alternatives), which might include a salad, an entre,
and a dessert. Each course has its own attributes. For example, the entre may have a
meat, a vegetable, and a starch. Examining the choices, we could present a menu as in
the following figure:
The restaurant does not have to create a new recipe for every possible meal (combination of courses) that could be ordered. They can just assemble any meal based on what
the customer orders for each alternative course. Salad 1, Entre 1, and Dessert 2 might
then be combined to define a complete meal.
9-697
Inheritance
The separation of scenarios into distinct alternatives (groups of data) meets one of the
basic goals of scenario management: maximizing the number of scenarios you can
develop by mixing and matching existing alternatives. Two other primary goals have
also been addressed: a single project file is used, and easy access to input data and
calculated results is provided in numerous formats through the intuitive graphical
interface.
In order to meet the objective of minimizing the amount of data that needs to be duplicated, and in order to consider conditions that have a lot of common input, you use
inheritance.
In the natural world, a child inherits characteristics from a parent. This may include
such traits as eye-color, hair color, and bone structure.
9-698
Overriding Inheritance
A child can override inherited characteristics by specifying a new value for that characteristic. These overriding values do not affect the parent and are therefore considered local to the child. Local values can also be removed at any time, reverting the
characteristic to its inherited state. The child has no choice in the value of his inherited
Dynamic Inheritance
Dynamic inheritance does not have a parallel in the genetic world. When a parent's
characteristic is changed, existing children also reflect the change. Using the eye-color
example, this would be the equivalent of the parent changing eye color from blue to
brown and the children's eyes instantly inheriting the brown color also. Of course, if
the child has already overridden a characteristic locally, as with the green lenses, his
eyes will remain green until the lenses are removed. At this point, his eye color will
revert to the inherited color, now brown.
This dynamic inheritance has remarkable benefits for applying wide-scale changes to
a model, fixing an error, and so on. If rippling changes are not desired, the child can
override all of the parent's values, or a copy of the parent can be made instead of a
child.
9-699
9-700
"Entre 2 is just like Entre 1, except for the meat and the starch."
"Meal 2 is just like Meal 1, except for the dessert." The salad and entre alternatives are inherited from Meal 1.
"Meal 3 is nothing like Meal 1 or Meal 2." A new base or root is created.
9-701
"Meal 4 is just like Meal 3, except for the salad." The entre and dessert alternatives are inherited from Meal 3.
Although true water distribution scenarios include such alternative categories as initial
settings, operational controls, water quality, and fire flow, the focus here is on the two
most commonly changed sets of alternatives: demands and physical properties. Within
these alternatives, the concentration will be on junction baseline demands and pipe
diameters.
9-702
Now we can create a child scenario from Average Day that inherits the physical alternative but overrides the selected demand alternative. As a result, we get the following
scenario hierarchy:
Since no physical data (pipe diameters) have been changed, the physical alternative
hierarchy remains the same as before.
9-703
Another scenario is also created to reference these new demands, as shown below:
No physical data was changed, so the physical alternatives remain the same.
Correcting an Error
This analysis results in acceptable pressures until it is discovered that the industrial
demand is not actually 500 gpmit is 1,500 gpm. However, due to the inheritance
within the demand alternatives, only the Average Day demand for J-2 needs to be
updated. The changes effect the children. After the single change is made, the demand
hierarchy is as follows:
Notice that no changes need to be made to the scenarios to reflect these corrections.
The three scenarios can now be calculated as a batch to update the results.
When these results are reviewed, it is determined that the system does not have the
ability to adequately supply the system as it was originally thought. The pressure at J2 is too low under peak hour demand conditions.
9-704
A much larger diameter is proposed for P-1 (the pipe from the reservoir). This
physical alternative is created as a child of the Preliminary Pipes alternative,
inheriting all the diameters except P-1s, which is overridden.
Slightly larger diameters are proposed for all pipes. Since there are no commonalities between this recommendation and either of the other physical alternatives,
this can be created as a base (root) alternative.
This time the demand alternative hierarchy remains the same since no demands were
changed. The two new scenarios (Peak, Big P-1, Peak, All Big Pipes) can be batch run
to provide results for these proposed improvements.
9-705
The software maintains the data for all the scenarios in a single project, so it can
provide you with powerful automated tools for directly comparing scenario
results, and any set of results is available at any time.
To learn more about using scenario management in WaterGEMS V8i, run the scenario
management lesson in the QuickStart Lessons chapter.
You can also load one of the SAMPLE projects and explore the scenarios already
defined. For context-sensitive help, press F1 or the Help button.
9-706
Scenarios
A Scenario contains all the input data (in the form of Alternatives), calculation
options, results, and notes associated with a set of calculations. Scenarios let you set
up an unlimited number of What If? situations for your model, and then modify,
compute, and review your system under those conditions.
You can create an unlimited number of scenarios that reuse or share data in existing
alternatives, submit multiple scenarios for calculation in a batch run, switch between
scenarios, and compare scenario resultsall with a few mouse clicks.
Scenarios Manager
The Scenario Manager allows you to create, edit, and manage an unlimited number of
scenarios. There is one built-in default scenariothe Base scenario. If you want, you
only have to use this one scenario. However, you can save yourself time by creating
additional scenarios that reference the alternatives needed to perform and recall the
results of each of your calculations.
The Scenario Manager consists of a hierarchical tree view and a toolbar. The tree view
displays all of the scenarios in the project. If the Property Editor is open, clicking a
scenario in the list causes the alternatives that make up the scenario to open. If the
Property Editor is not open, you can display the alternatives and scenario information
by selecting the desired scenario and right-clicking on Properties.
9-707
Scenarios
New Scenario
Delete
Rename
Compute
Scenario
Make Current
Expand All
Collapse All
Help
Note:
When you delete a scenario, you are not losing data records
because scenarios never actually hold calculation data records
(alternatives do). The alternatives and data records referenced
by that scenario exist until you explicitly delete them. By
accessing the Alternative Manager, you can delete the
referenced alternatives and data records.
9-708
Base ScenariosContain all of your working data. When you start a new project,
you begin with a default base scenario. As you enter data and calculate your
model, you are working with this default base scenario and the alternatives it
references.
Creating Scenarios
You create new scenarios in the Scenario Manager. A new scenario can be a Base
scenario or a Child scenario.
To create a new scenario
2. Click New and select whether you want to create a Base Scenario or a Child
Scenario. When creating a Child scenario, you must first select the scenario from
which the child is derived in the Scenario Manager tree view.
9-709
Scenarios
By default, a new scenario comprises the Base Alternatives associated with each
alternative type.
3. Double-click the new scenario to edit its properties in the Property Editor.
4. Close when finished.
Editing Scenarios
Scenarios can be edited in two places:
The Scenario Manager lists all of the projects scenarios in a hierarchical tree
format and displays the Base/Child relationship between them.
The Property Editor displays the alternatives that make up the scenario that is
currently selected in the Scenario Manager, along with the scenario label, any
notes associated with the scenario, and the calculation options profile that is used
when the scenario is calculated.
To edit a scenario
2. Double-click the scenario you want to edit to display its properties in the Properties Editor.
3. You can then edit the Scenario Label, Notes, Alternatives, and Calculation
Options.
4. When finished, close the editor.
9-710
2. Click to open the Compute list and then select Batch Run. This will open the
9-711
Alternatives
Note:
When the batch run is completed, the scenario that was current
stays current, even if it was not calculated.
Batch
Select
Close
Help
Alternatives
Alternatives are the building blocks behind scenarios. They are categorized data sets
that create scenarios when placed together. Alternatives hold the input data in the form
of records. A record holds the data for a particular element in your system.
Scenarios are composed of alternatives as well as other calculation options, allowing
you to compute and compare the results of various changes to your system. Alternatives can vary independently within scenarios and can be shared between scenarios.
9-712
Alternatives Manager
The Alternative Manager allows you to create, view, and edit the alternatives that
make up the project scenarios. The dialog box consists of a pane that displays folders
for each of the alternative types which can be expanded to display all of the alternatives for that type and a toolbar.
9-713
Alternatives
The toolbar consists of the following
9-714
New
Delete
Duplicate
Open
Merge Alternative
Rename
Report
Expand All
Collapse All
Help
The Alternative Editor displays all of the records held by a single alternative. These
records contain the values that are active when a scenario referencing this alternative
is active. They allow you to view all of the changes that you have made for a single
alternative. They also allow you to eliminate changes that you no longer need.
There is one editor for each alternative type. Each type of editor works similarly and
allows you to make changes to a different aspect of your system. The first column
contains check boxes, which indicate the records that have been changed in this alternative.
If the check box is selected, the record on that line has been modified and the data is
local, or specific, to this alternative.
If the check box is cleared, it means that the record on that line is inherited from its
higher-level parent alternative. Inherited records are dynamic. If the record is changed
in the parent, the change is reflected in the child. The records on these rows reflect the
corresponding values in the alternative's parent.
9-715
Alternatives
Note:
Creating Alternatives
New alternatives are created in the Alternative Manager dialog box. A new alternative
can be a Base scenario or a Child scenario. Each alternative type contains a Base alternative in the Alternative Manager tree view.
9-716
2. To create a new Base alternative, select the type of alternative you want to create,
then click the New button.
3. To create a new Child alternative, right-click the Base alternative from which the
child will be derived, then select New > Child Alternative from the menu.
4. Double-click the new alternative to edit its properties.
5. Click Close when finished.
Editing Alternatives
You edit the properties of an alternative in its own alternative editor. The first column
in an alternative editor contains check boxes, which indicate the records that have
been changed in this alternative.
If the box is checked, the record on that line has been modified and the data is
local, or specific, to this alternative.
If the box is not checked, it means that the record on that line is inherited from its
higher-level parent alternative. Inherited records are dynamic. If the record is
changed in the parent, the change is reflected in the child. The records on these
rows reflect the corresponding values in the alternatives parent.
Select the alternative to be edited in the Alternative Manager and click Edit
In either case, the Alternative Editor dialog box for the specified alternative opens,
allowing you to view and define settings as desired.
9-717
Alternatives
For each tab, the same setup appliesthe tables are divided into four columns. The
first column displays whether the data is Base or Inherited, the second column is the
element ID, the third column is the element Label, and the fourth column allows you
to choose whether or not the corresponding element is Active in the current alternative.
To make an element Inactive in the current alternative, clear the check box in the Is
Active? column that corresponds to that elements Label.
Creating an Active Topology Child Alternative
When creating an active topology child alternative, you may notice that the elements
added to the child scenario become available in your model when the base scenario is
the current scenario.
9-718
9-719
Alternatives
Note:
If you add new elements in the base scenario, they will show up
in the child scenario.
Physical Alternative
One of the most common uses of a water distribution model is the design of new or
replacement facilities. During design, it is common to try several physical alternatives
in an effort to find the most cost effective solution. For example, when designing a
replacement pipeline, it would be beneficial to try several sizes and pipe materials to
find the most satisfactory combination.
Each type of network element has a specific set of physical properties that are stored
in a physical properties alternative.To access the Physical Properties Alternative select
Analysis > Alternatives and select Physical Alternative.
9-720
Demand Alternatives
The demand alternative allows you to model the response of the pipe network to
different sets of demands, such as the current demand and the demand of your system
ten years from now.
9-721
Alternatives
9-722
Operational Alternatives
The Operational Alternative is where you can specify controls on pressure pipes,
pumps, as well as valves.
The Operational Controls alternative allows you to create, modify and manage both
logical controls and logical control sets.
9-723
Alternatives
Age Alternatives
The Age Alternative is used when performing a water quality analysis for modeling
the age of the water through the pipe network. This alternative allows you to analyze
different scenarios for varying water ages at the network nodes.
9-724
Constituent Alternatives
The Constituent Alternative contains the water quality data used to model a constituent concentration throughout the network when performing a water quality analysis.
Selecting a constituent from the Constituent drop-down list provides default values for
table entries. This software provides a user-editable library of constituents for maintaining these values, which may be accessed by clicking the Ellipsis (...) next to the
Constituent menu.
The following attributes can be defined in the Constituent alternative:
Concentration (Base) - The concentration of the inflow into the system at the
associated node. If there is no inflow, then this flow does not affect constituent
concentration.
Mass Rate (Base) - The mass per unit time injected at a node when the constituent source type is set to "Mass Rate".
Constituent Source Type - there are four ways in which you can specify a
constituent entering a system:
9-725
Alternatives
A mass booster source adds a fixed mass flow to that entering the node from
other points in the network.
A flow paced booster source adds a fixed concentration to that resulting from
the mixing of all inflow to the node from other points in the network.
A setpoint booster source fixes the concentration of any flow leaving the node
(as long as the concentration resulting from all inflow to the node is below the
setpoint).
9-726
Trace Alternative
The Trace Alternative is used when performing a water quality analysis to determine
the percentage of water at each node coming from a specified node. The Trace Alternative data includes a Trace Node, which is the node from which all tracing is
computed.
9-727
Alternatives
The Fire Flow Alternative window is divided into sections which contain
different fields to create the fire flow.
9-728
Use Velocity
Constraint?
Pipe Set
9-729
Alternatives
9-730
Pressure (Residual
Lower Limit)
Pressure System
Lower Limit
Use Extended
Auxiliary Output by
Node Pressure Less
Than?
Auxiliary Output
Selection Set
9-731
Alternatives
Fire Flow System Data
Each fire flow alternative has a set of default parameters that are applied to each junction in the fire flow set. When a default value is modified, you will be prompted to
decide if the junction records that have been modified from the default should be
updated to reflect the new default value.
9-732
Column
Description
ID
Label
Column
Description
Pressure (Residual
Lower Limit)
Pressure (System
Lower Limit)
OperatorThe operator to use when comparing the filter value against the data
in the specific column (operators include: =, >, >=, <, <=, < >).
Any number of criteria can be added to a filter. Multiple filter criteria are implicitly
joined with a logical AND statement. When multiple filter criteria are defined, only
rows that meet all of the specified criteria will be displayed. A filter will remain active
for the associated table until the filter is reset.
The status pane at the bottom of the Table window always shows the number of rows
displayed and the total number of rows available (e.g., 10 of 20 elements displayed).
When a filter is active, this message will be highlighted.
9-733
Alternatives
9-734
9-735
Alternatives
Transient Alternative
The Transient Alternative allows you to edit and view data that is used for WaterGEMS V8i transient calculations. There is a tab for each element type, each
containing the WaterGEMS V8i specific attributes for that element type.
9-736
Flushing Alternative
The flushing alternative allows you to define flushing events and the conditions of a
flushing analysis.
Target velocity: Pipes with a velocity exceeding this value will be considered
flushed.
Pipe Set: Set of pipes which will be evaluated with regard to whether they
reached target velocity (Default is All Pipes although the user can specify a previously created Selection Set in the drop down menu.)
Compare velocities across prior scenarios?: If checked, each run will set all the
Maximum Achieved Velocity to 0 ft/s at the start of the run (Scenario). If
unchecked, it will base the Maximum Achieved Velocity on all of the existing
scenarios for which results are available since the last time a run was made with
the box checked. If the user is evaluating all pipes at once, it is best to check this
box. If the user is building up a flushing program through a number of scenarios
using different areas, then it is best to uncheck the box.
9-737
Alternatives
Apply Flushing Flow By: Describes whether the flushing discharge is added to or
replaces the normal demand. The default value is Adding to Baseline demand.
Report on Minimum Pressure?: If box is checked, flushing will not allow the
pressure to drop below a predefined value specified by the user. Caution: there
may be some nodes (e.g. suction side of pump) than have habitual low pressure
and will prevent flushing from working).
Include nodes with pressure less than?: If checked, flushing runs will save the
nodes that dropped below some minimum pressure during any flush. These can be
reviewed as a check to see if flushing will adversely affect customer pressure.
Unlike the constraint listed above, flushing will still occur but low pressures will
be noted.
Include pipes with velocity greater than?: If checked, for any event velocity
data on which pipes exceeded some velocity are saved, This need not be the same
velocity as the target velocity specified above. All pipes that are in the Pipe Set
are automatically included in the auxiliary results regardless of their velocity."
The right side of the dialog contains a list of flushing events that have been specified
in the Conventional or Unidirectional tabs. You can exclude an event from the alternative when during a run by unchecking the "Is Active?" box next to that event.
The Conventional and Unidirectional tabs allow you to define flushing events as
follows:
9-738
Conventional flushing events are defined in the Conventional tab of the flushing
alternative. The user can add a flushing event by clicking the New button (leftmost button) on top of the flushing tab. This will create a new flushing event that
the user can label. By clicking on the ellipse which appears when the "Element
ID" is selected, the user can select the element (junction node or hydrant) to be
flowed. If the user also checks the box under the "Is Local?" column, the user can
override the global values for Emitter Coefficient or Hydrant Flow.
Unidirectional flushing events are more complex and therefore additional information is required to describe the event. To create an event, the user selects the
new button (Leftmost button on top row of the Unidirectional dialog). From this
button, the user can either add a flushing event or add elements to an existing
flushing event.
Scenario Comparison
The scenario comparison tool enables you to compare input values between any two
scenarios to identify differences quickly. While WaterGEMS/CAD users have previously had the capability to open a child scenario or alternative and compare it with its
parent, this tool greatly extends that capability in that you can compare any two
scenarios or alternatives (not necessarily parent-child) and very easily detect differences.
The scenario comparison tool can be started by picking Tools > Scenario Comparison
or by selecting the Scenario Comparison button from the toolbar
. If the button is
not visible, it can be added using the "Add or Remove Buttons" drop down from the
Tools toolbar (see Customizing WaterGEMS V8i Toolbars and Buttons).
On first opening the scenario comparison tool, the dialog below opens which gives an
overview of the steps involved in using the tool. Pick the New button (leftmost).
This opens a dialog which allows you to select which two scenarios will be compared.
9-739
Scenario Comparison
The scenario manager button next to each selection gives you the ability to see the tree
view of scenarios. Chose OK to begin the scenario comparison tool. This initially
displays a list of alternatives and calculation options, with the ones with identical
properties displayed with a yellow background and those with different properties
displayed with a pink background. The background color can be changed from pink to
any other color by selecting the sixth button from the left and then selecting the
desired color.
The dialog below shows that the Active Topology, Physical, Demand and Constituent
alternatives are different between the scenarios. There is a second tab for Calculation
Options which shows if the calculation options are different between scenarios.
This display can also be copied to the clipboard using the Copy button.
9-740
9-741
Scenario Comparison
By picking "Differences" in the left pane for the alternative of interest, you can view
the differences. In this display, only the elements and properties that are different are
shown with a pink background. In the example below, only 7 pipes had their diameters
changed and only 3 of those had difference C-factors. There are separate tables for
each element type that had differences.
Using the buttons on top of the right pane, when Differences is selected, you can
create a selection set of the elements with differences or highlight those elements in
the drawing. This is very useful for finding elements with differences in a large model.
To choose another color, click the ellipsis button, select the new color from the palette,
and click OK.
9-742
9-743
Scenario Comparison
9-744
Modeling Capabilities
10
10-745
Hydraulic Analysis
Perform automated fire flow analysis for any set of elements and zones in the
network.
10-746
Check Data/Validate
Calculate Network
Flow Emitters
Parallel VSPs
Modeling Capabilities
Calculation Options
Patterns
Controls
Active Topology
Steady-State Simulation
Steady-state analyses determine the operating behavior of the system at a specific
point in time or under steady-state conditions (flow rates and hydraulic grades remain
constant over time). This type of analysis can be useful for determining pressures and
flow rates under minimum, average, peak, or short term effects on the system due to
fire flows.
For this type of analysis, the network equations are determined and solved with tanks
being treated as fixed grade boundaries. The results that are obtained from this type of
analysis are instantaneous values and may or may not be representative of the values
of the system a few hours, or even a few minutes, later in time.
10-747
Override Reporting Time Step?Set to true if you want the Reporting Time
Step to differ from the Hydraulic Time Step.
Reporting Time StepData will be presented at every reporting time step. The
reporting time step should be a multiple of the hydraulic time step.
Note:
Note:
10-748
Modeling Capabilities
Choose Analysis > EPS Results Browser to open the dialog box.
Time Slider
Go to start
Play backward
Step backward
Pause/Stop
Step
Play
Go to end
Speed Slider
10-749
Options
Help
10-750
Modeling Capabilities
It contains the following controls:
Frame Options
Increment
Looping Options
No Loop
Loop Animation
Rocker Animation
10-751
Rigid-Column Simulation
Rigid-column theory is suitable for simulating changes in hydraulic transient flow or
head that are gradual in terms of the system's characteristic time, T = 2 L/a (Appendix
B). This type of hydraulic transient is often referred to as a mass-oscillation phenomenon, where gradual changes in momentum occur without significant or sharp pressure wave fronts propagating through the system.
For example, mass oscillations can occur when a vacuum-breaker or combination air
valve lets air into the system at a local high point (to limit subatmospheric pressures).
The water columns separate and move away from the high point as air rushes in to fill
the space between them. Eventually, flow reverses towards the high point, where the
air may be compressed as it is expelled. This back-and-forth motion of the water
columns may repeat many times until friction dissipates the transient energy.
From the WaterGEMS V8i Tools > Project Options menu, click the Other Options tab
and set Extended CAV (combination air valve) to True. WaterGEMS V8i will track
the extent of the air pocket and the resulting mass-oscillation and water column accelerations. WaterGEMS V8i still calculates the system-wide solution using MOC and
elastic theory; it uses rigid-column theory only for the pipes nearest the high point.
This results in more accurate solutions, without increasing execution times.
Elastic Simulation
10-752
Modeling Capabilities
Elastic theory is suitable for simulating changes in hydraulic transient flow or head of
all types, whether gradual, rapid, or sudden in terms of the system's characteristic
time. A popular and proven way to implement an elastic theory solver is the Method
of Characteristics (MOC).
The MOC is an algebraic technique to compute fluid pressures and flows in a pressurized pipe system. Two partial differential equations for the conservation of momentum
and mass are transformed to ordinary differential equations that can be solved in
space-time along straight lines, called characteristics. Frictional losses are assumed to
be concentrated at the many solution points.
WaterGEMS V8i's power derives from its advanced implementation of elastic theory
using the MOC, which results in several advantages:
Robust and stable results minimizing numerical artifacts and achieving maximum
accuracy. Convergence is virtually assured for most systems and tolerances.
Research and field-proven method based on numerous laboratory and field experiments, where transient data were measured and used to validate numerical simulation results.
10-753
The pumps' combined pump and motor inertia and controlled ramp times, if any.
The valves' controlled operating times and their stroke to discharge coefficient (or
open area) relationship.
You can use simple methods to estimate each of the above parameters, as described
elsewhere in this documentation and in the WaterGEMS V8i software.
10-754
If pressures and flows change during the transient event, the force vectors will
likewise change in magnitude and direction. This has fundamental implications
for the design of thrust blocks and restraints.
Due to weight, transient forces are always three-dimensional even for horizontal
pipelines. For buried piping, these forces are also resisted in three dimensions at
discrete points (thrust blocks), transversely due to contact with the earth, and
longitudinally due to pipe friction with the soil.
Thrust blocks or restraints designed for the steady-state or "operating case" times
a (constant) safety factor can often be inadequate to resist transient forces, especially for systems with high operating pressures, temperatures or mass.
Modeling Capabilities
Codes such as ASME B31.3 refer to a fluid transient as a "Dynamic" operating case,
which may also include sudden thrust due to relief valves that pop open or rapid
piping accelerations due to an earthquake. It is advisable to investigate fluid-structure
interactions (FSI) that can develop for dynamic cases but the decision to undertake
such analysis is largely up to the designer; except for boilers or nuclear installations.
Prior to the advent of inexpensive computing, transient and pipe stress calculations
were onerous and virtually impossible to perform for large piping systems or plants.
The increased analysis and design involved can be justified in terms of achieving a
greater understanding of the system to ensure safe operations with minimum downtime. Designers are well-advised to follow the following steps:
Transient analysis using WaterGEMS V8i: revisit pipe class and/or add protective
equipment to keep transient pressures as close to steady as possible. Check steady
and transient forces to guide the design of thrust blocks. This may be the last step
in the design of buried pipelines, or specialized pipe/soil models can be used to
check for sufficient support and resistance to overburden and groundwater.
Pipe stress analysis using Bentley AutoPIPE: verify supports, guides and
restraints against steady-state (operating case) and transient (dynamic) plus
thermal pipe stresses, if any. This may be the last step in the design of process
plant piping, or additional time or frequency-domain analysis may be performed
to check for flow-induced vibration or earthquakes.
Reduce wear and tear from pressure cycling due to rapid industrial demand
changes, incorrect control-valve operations, or water-column separation.
10-755
Reduce the risk of pipe breaks, leaks, and unaccounted-for water (UFW) by optimizing normal and emergency procedures to minimize transient pressure shock
waves. This will also minimize transient thrust forces.
Verify thrust block designs using time-dependent load vectors. Transient forces
are a more rigorous design basis than the conventional method, whereby thrust
blocks are sized to resist steady-state forces. Transient thrust can be orders of
magnitude greater than steady state thrust. Transient thrust can also change direction as flows and pressures oscillate and dampen to the new steady-state.
10-756
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i models volumes as occupying the entire cross section
of the pipe. This may not be realistic for small volumes, since they could overlie
the liquid and not create column separation, as in the case of air bubbles, but this
does not result in significant errors.
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i ignores the reduction in pressure-wave speed that can
result from the presence of finely dispersed air or vapor bubbles in the fluid. Air
injection using diffusers or spargers can be difficult to achieve consistently in
practice and the effect of air bubbles (at low pressures) on wave speed is still the
subject of laboratory investigations.
Modeling Capabilities
In each case, the assumptions are made so that Bentley WaterGEMS V8i s results
provide conservative predictions of extreme transient pressures.
10-757
Using very short pipes (in a pump station) and very long
pipes (transmission lines) in the same Bentley WaterGEMS
V8i model could require excessive adjustments to the wave
speed. If this happens, Bentley WaterGEMS V8i prompts you
to subdivide longer pipes to avoid resulting inaccuracies.
A smaller time step may cause Bentley WaterGEMS V8i to track the formation and
collapse of very fine vapor pockets, each of which may result in pressure spikes with
low magnitudes but high frequencies. If your WaterGEMS V8i model includes excessively short pipes (perhaps introduced on import) that result in a small time step, it
may be possible to merge them automatically using Tools > Merge Pipes, enabling
faster solutions without sacrificing accuracy. See Merge Pipes Dialog Box for more
information on the Merge Pipes dialog.
You can also select the time step from the expanded Run dialog. For more information
on selecting a time step, see Project Setup.
Check Run
This feature allows you to validate your model against typical data entry errors, hard
to detect topology problems, and modeling problems. When the Data Check button is
selected, in the Run dialog box, the model is automatically validated before detailed
calculations are begun. The process produces either a dialog box stating No Problems
Found or a status log (see Status Log on page 12-539) with a list of messages. The
data check algorithm performs the following validations:
10-758
Modeling Capabilities
Element ValidationChecks that every element in the network is valid for the
calculation. For example, this validation ensures that all pipes have nonzero
length, nonzero diameter, etc. Each type of element has its own checklist. This
same validation is performed when you edit an element in a dialog box.
The validation process generates two types of messages. A warning message means
that a particular part of the model (e.g., a pipes roughness) does not conform to the
expected value or is not within the expected range of values. This type of warning is
useful but not fatal. Therefore, no corrective action is required to proceed with a
calculation. Warning messages are often generated as a result of a topographical or
data-entry error and should be corrected.
Note:
If your model will not run due to error messages and you do not
know how to proceed, please contact Bentley Systems support
staff (see Contacting Bentley Systems About Haestad Methods
Products).
An error message, on the other hand, is a fatal error and the calculation cannot proceed
before it is corrected. Typically, error messages are related to problems in the network
topology, such as a pump or valves not being connected on both its intake and
discharge sides.
10-759
System Pressure
Positive
Negative
Consumption
Pressure
dependent
No flow
Orifice to
Atmosphere
Pressure
dependent
Air intrusion
Orifice at Branch
End
Pressure
dependent
Water intrusion
10-760
Modeling Capabilities
Cases for which closed-form analytical solutions exist given certain assumptions. If the model can directly reproduce the solution, is considered valid for this
case. The example file (\\HAMR\Samples) hamsam01.hif is a validation case
against the Joukowski equation.
Laboratory experiments with flow and pressure data records. The model is calibrated using one set of data and, without changing parameter values, it is used to
match a different set of results. If successful, it is considered valid for these cases.
Field tests on actual systems with flow and pressure data records. These comparisons require threshold and span calibration of all sensor groups, multiple simultaneous datum and time base checks and careful test planning and interpretation.
Sound calibrations match multiple sensor records and reproduce both peak timing
and secondary signalsall measured every second or fraction of a second.
Precise determination of the pressure-wave speed for the piping system is difficult, if not impossible. This is especially true for buried pipelines, whose wave
speeds are influenced by bedding conditions and the compaction of the
surrounding soil.
Prediction of the presence of free gases in the system liquid is sometimes impossible. These gases can significantly affect the pressure-wave speed. In addition,
the exact timing of vapor-pocket formation and column separation are difficult to
simulate.
Calibrating model parameters based on field data can minimize the first source of
error listed above. Conversations with operators and a careful review of maintenance
records can help obtain accurate operational characteristics of dynamic hydraulic
elements. Unsteady or transient friction coefficients and the effects of free gases are
more challenging to account for.
10-761
Perform what-if analyses to consider many more events and locations than can be
tested, including events that would require destructive testing.
Determine the sensitivity of the results to different operating times, system configurations, and operating- and protective-equipment combinations.
These are facilitated if transient pressure or flow measurements are available for your
system, but valid conclusions and recommendations can usually be obtained using
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i alone.
10-762
Modeling Capabilities
Field measurements can clearly indicate the evolution of the transient. The
pressure-wave speed for a pipe with typical material and bedding can be determined if the period of the transient (4 L/a) and the length (L) between measurement locations is known. If there is air in the system, the measured wave speed
may be much lower than the theoretical speed.
In general, if model peaks arrive at the wrong time, the wave speed must be adjusted.
If model peaks have the wrong shape, the description of the control event (pump shutdown or valve closure) should be adjusted. If the transient dies off too quickly or
slowly in the model, the friction losses must be adjusted. If there are secondary peaks,
important loops and diversions may need to be included in the model.
Steady State OptionsThe parameters that control the steady state hydraulic
computations are similar to those in WaterGEMS V8i. They can be modified
using the Tools > Project Options menu command and clicking the Steady State
tab:
Steady State Accuracy is set for maximum accuracy by default. We recommend you not modify this setting. This is similar to the setting in WaterGEMS
V8i.
10-763
Pump Curves Linear Mode is either True or False. If True, the steady state
solver uses linear interpolation to estimate the curve if the solution lies
between points entered in the pump table. This method is consistent with the
transient solver in WaterGEMS V8i.
Friction Method is either Hazen-Williams (for which the Friction Coefficient is a C factor) or Darcy-Weisbach. Selecting Darcy-Weisbach will
display both the Darcy-Weisbach f (for the Friction Coefficient) and the
Roughness Height in the Drawing Pane. Roughness Height is only used for a
steady state run and typical values are available from the material library.
1. Element Data for Steady StateSome fields in the Drawing Pane are only
required for a steady state run, as described by tooltips. If some information
required by the steady state solver is missing, WaterGEMS V8i will display a
Warning Message dialog prompting for additional data or an Error Message
dialog with instructions on how to proceed. Typically, error messages are related
to problems in the network topology, such as a pump or valves not being
connected on both its intake and discharge sides.
10-764
Modeling Capabilities
adjusted proportionally to become 133 and 267 gpm, for a total baseline of 400 gpm.
In addition, if a junction has an inflow of 100 gpm (or a demand of -100 gpm), and the
adjustment operation Set demand of 200 gpm, then the inflow at that junction will be 200 gpm (equivalent to a demand of 200 gpm).
The Adjustments dialog is divided into three tabs, each containing a table of adjustments and controls to control the data within the table. These controls are as follows:
Shift UpAdjustments are executed in the order they appear in the table. This
button shifts the currently highlighted adjustment up in the table.
Shift DownAdjustments are executed in the order they appear in the table. This
button shifts the currently highlighted adjustment down in the table.
ScopeUse this field to specify the elements that the adjustment will be
applied. Choose <Entire Network> to apply the adjustment to every demand
node, or choose a subset of nodes by selecting one of the previously created
selection sets from the list.
Demand PatternUse this field to specify the demands to which the adjustment will be applied. Choose <All Base Demands> to perform the adjustment
on every base demand in the model. Choose Fixed to perform the adjustment
on only those nodes with a Fixed demand pattern. Choose one of the demand
patterns in the list to apply the adjustment to only the specified pattern.
10-765
10-766
Unit DemandsUse this adjustment tab to temporarily adjust the unit demands
at all junction nodes in the system that have demands for the current scenario, or a
subset of junctions contained within a previously created selection set.
ScopeUse this field to specify the elements that the adjustment will be
applied. Choose <Entire Network> to apply the adjustment to every node with
a unit demand, or choose a subset of nodes by selecting one of the previously
created selection sets from the list.
Unit DemandUse this field to specify the unit demands to which the
adjustment will be applied. Choose <All Unit Demands> to perform the
adjustment on every unit demand in the model. Choose one of the unit
demands in the list to apply the adjustment to only the specified unit demand.
ScopeUse this field to specify the elements that the adjustment will be
applied. Choose <Entire Network> to apply the adjustment to every pipe, or
choose a subset of pipes by selecting one of the previously created selection
sets from the list.
Modeling Capabilities
Check Data/Validate
This feature allows you to validate your model against typical data entry errors, hard
to detect topology problems, and modeling problems. When the Validate box is
checked, the model validation is automatically run prior to calculations. It can also be
run at any time by clicking Validate
. The process will produce either a dialog
box stating No Problems Found or a Status Log with a list of messages.
The validation process will generate two types of messages. A warning message
means that a particular part of the model (i.e., a pipes roughness) does not conform to
the expected value or is not within the expected range of values. This type of warning
is useful but not fatal. Therefore, no corrective action is required to proceed with a
calculation. Warning messages are often generated as a result of a topographical or
data entry error and should be corrected. An error message, on the other hand, is a
fatal error, and the calculation cannot proceed before it is corrected. Typically, error
messages are related to problems in the network topology, such as a pump or valve not
being connected on both its intake and discharge sides.
Note:
Element ValidationChecks that every element in the network is valid for the
calculation. For example, this validation ensures that all pipes have a non-zero
length, a non-zero diameter, a roughness value that is within the expected range,
etc.
10-767
User Notifications
User Notifications
User notifications are messages about your model. These messages can warn you
about potential issues with your model, such as slopes that might be too steep or
elements that slope in the wrong direction. These messages also point you to errors in
your model that prevent Bentley WaterGEMS V8i from solving your model.
The User Notifications dialog box displays warnings and error messages that are
turned up by Bentley WaterGEMS V8i s validation routines. If the notification references a particular element, you can zoom to that element by either double-clicking the
notification, or right-clicking it and selecting the Zoom To command.
Warnings are denoted by an orange icon and do not prevent the model from calculating successfully.
Errors are denoted by a red icon, and the model will not successfully calculate if
errors are found.
The User Notifications dialog box consists of a toolbar and a tabular view containing a
list of warnings and error messages.
10-768
Modeling Capabilities
The toolbar consists of the following buttons:
Details
Save
Saves the user notifications as a commadelimited .csv file. You can open the .csv
file in Microsoft Excel or Notepad.
Report
Copy
Zoom To
Help
User Notifications displays warnings and error messages in a tabular view. The table
includes the following columns:
Message ID
Scenario
Element Type
10-769
User Notifications
Element ID
Label
Message
Time (hours)
Source
10-770
Modeling Capabilities
Calculate Network
The following steps need to be completed before performing hydraulic calculations
for a network.
1. Click the Analysis toolbar and select Calculation Options.
2. In the Calculation Options dialog, double-click Base Calculation Options or
create a new one and double-click it. This will open the Properties viewer.
10-771
8. Click Validate
9. Click Compute
10-772
New
Delete
Modeling Capabilities
Rename
Edit
Refresh
Help
10-773
Display the calculated results for the current flow meter settings.
The Totalizing Flow Meter Summary tab displays the totals for each element type.
The Totalizing Flow Meter Details tab displays results for each individual element.
To define flow meter settings
1. Set Start and Stop times. Once selected, the results are automatically updated.
2. Click the Report button to run a report or click Close.
To remove elements from the Totalizing Flow Meter definition
Highlight the element to be removed in the list and click the Delete button above the
list pane.
To add elements to the Totalizing Flow Meter definition
1. Click the Select From Drawing button above the element list pane.
2. In the Drawing View, click the element or elements to be added.
3. Click the Done button in the Select dialog.
10-774
Modeling Capabilities
Delete
Rename
Edit
Help
10-775
10-776
Modeling Capabilities
To create a new System Head Curve Definition
1. Click Compute. (EPS settings must be on in order to utilize this feature.)
2. From the Analysis Menu click System Head Curves.
3. Click New which will open the System Head Curve editor.
The System Head Curves Editor is where you can specify the settings of System
Head Curve Definition. You can also compute and view the system head curve for
a specific timestep.
4. Choose the pump that will be used for the system head curve from the Pump pulldown menu, or click the ellipsis and click the pump to be used in the drawing
pane.
5. Type a value for Maximum Flow and Number of Intervals.
6. Choose a time step in the Time (hours) column.
7. Click Compute to calculate the results for the specified time step.
8. View the results as a graph or data.
9. Click Report to view the report.
10. Click Close to exit the System Head Curve editor.
Note:
You can select more than one time step for the system head
curve calculation by holding down the <Ctrl> key and clicking
each time step that you want to calculate.
10-777
10-778
Start Time
Stop Time
Statistic Type
Result Property
Output Property
Operation
Remove Element
Modeling Capabilities
Flow Emitters
Flow Emitters are devices associated with junctions that model the flow through a
nozzle or orifice. In these situations, the demand (i.e., the flow rate through the
emitter) varies in proportion to the pressure at the junction raised to some power. The
constant of proportionality is termed the discharge coefficient. For nozzles and sprinkler heads, the exponent on pressure is 0.5 and the manufacturer usually states the
value of the discharge coefficient as the flow rate in gpm through the device at a 1 psi
pressure drop.
Emitters are used to model flow through sprinkler systems and irrigation networks.
They can also be used to simulate leakage in a pipe connected to the junction (if a
discharge coefficient and pressure exponent for the leaking crack or joint can be estimated) and compute a fire flow at the junction (the flow available at some minimum
residual pressure). In the latter case, one would use a very high value of the discharge
coefficient (e.g., 100 times the maximum flow expected) and modify the junctions
elevation to include the equivalent head of the pressure target.
When both an emitter and a normal demand are specified for a junction, the demand
that Bentley WaterGEMS V8i reports in its output results includes both the normal
demand and the flow through the emitter.
The flow through an emitter is calculated as:
Q = kP
Where
Q is flow.
k is the emitter coefficient and is a property of the node.
P is pressure.
n is the emitter exponent and is set globally in the calculation options for the run; it is
dimensionless but affects the units of k. The default value for n is 0.5 which is a
typical value for an orifice.
10-779
Parallel VSPs
Parallel VSPs
Variable speed pumps (VSPs) can be modeled in parallel. This allows you to model
multiple VSPs operated at the same speed at one pump station. To model this, a VSP
is chosen as a lead VSP, which will be the primary pump to deliver the target head.
If the lead VSP cannot deliver the target head while operating at maximum speed, then
the second VSP will be triggered on and the VSP calculation will determine the
common speed for both VSPs. If the target head cannot be delivered while operating
both VSPs at the maximum speed, then another VSP will be triggered on until the
target head is met with all the available VSPs.
All VSPs that are turned on are operated at the same speed. VSPs are to be turned off
if they are not required due to a change in demand. If all standby VSPs are running at
the maximum speed but still cannot deliver the target head, the VSPs are translated
into fixed speed pumps.
To correctly apply the VSP feature to multiple variable speed pumps in parallel, the
following criteria must be met:
1. Parallel VSPs must be controlled by the same target node;
2. Parallel VSPs must be controlled by the same target head;
3. Parallel VSPs must have the same maximum relative speed factors;
4. Parallel VSPs must be identical, namely the same pump curve.
5. Parallel VSPs must share common upstream and downstream junctions within 3
nodes (inclusive) of the pumps in order for them to be recognized as parallel
VSPs.
If there are more than 3 nodes between the pumps and their common node,
upstream and downstream, the software will treat them as separate VSPs. Since
separate VSPs cannot target the same control node, this will result in an error
message.
10-780
Modeling Capabilities
10-781
10-782
Modeling Capabilities
10-783
10-784
Check the Available Fire Flow. If it is lower than the Needed Fire Flow, the fire
flow conditions for that node are not satisfied. Therefore, Satisfies Fire Flow
Constraints is false.
Modeling Capabilities
Check the Calculated Residual Pressure. If it is lower than the Residual Pressure
Constraint, the fire flow condition for that node is not satisfied. Therefore, Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints is false.
Check the Calculated Minimum Zone Pressure. If it is lower than the Minimum
Zone Pressure Constraint, the fire flow condition for that node is not satisfied.
Therefore, Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints is false.
If you checked the box for Minimum System Pressure Constraint in the Fire Flow
Alternative dialog box, check to see if the Calculated Minimum System Pressure
is lower than the set constraint. If it is, Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints is false.
Note:
Age ToleranceIf the difference between two parcels of water is equal to or less
than the value specified in this field, the parcels are considered to be of equal age.
Set Quality Time StepCheck this box if you want to manually set the water
quality time step. By default, this box is not checked and the water quality time
step is computed internally by the numerical engine.
Age Analysis
Constituent Analysis
Trace Analysis
10-785
Age Analysis
An age analysis determines how long the water has been in the system and is more of
a general water quality indicator than a measurement of any specific constituent. To
configure for an age analysis:
Note:
to create a new
10-786
Modeling Capabilities
Constituent Analysis
A constituent is any substance, such as chlorine and fluoride, for which the growth or
decay can be adequately described through the use of a bulk reaction coefficient and a
wall reaction coefficient. A constituent analysis determines the concentration of a
constituent at all nodes and links in the system. Constituent analyses can be used to
determine chlorine residuals throughout the system under present chlorination schedules, or can be used to determine probable behavior of the system under proposed
chlorination schedules. To configure for a constituent analysis:
Note:
to create a new
10-787
Trace Analysis
A trace analysis determines the percentage of the water at all nodes and links in the
system. The source is designated as a specific node in the system and is called the
trace node. In systems with more than one source, it is common to perform multiple
trace analyses using the various trace nodes in successive analyses. The source node
and initial traces are specified in the Trace Alternative dialog box (for more information, see Trace Alternative). To configure for a trace analysis:
Note:
to create a new
10-788
Modeling Capabilities
In general the easiest and most beneficial way to comply with the EPA regulations is
to conduct a system specific study and the most expedient way of doing this is to
construct a calibrated, detailed extended period simulation model which can identify
locations in the system with high water age. The details of the requirements for such a
model are provided in System Specific Study Using a Distribution System Hydraulic
Model available at:
http://www.epa.gov/safewater/disinfection/stage2/compliance.html
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i can be used to comply with these regulations. Special tools
have been added to assist in IDSE (Initial Distribution System Evaluation) studies.
They are described below:
A graph of predicted tank levels versus measured tank levels for the storage
facility with the highest residence time in each pressure zone.
A time series graph of water age results for the storage facility with the highest
residence time in your system showing predictions for the entire EPS simulation
period (i.e. from time zero until the time it takes for the model to reach a consistently repeating pattern of residence time).
The graphing tools for displaying field observations alongside of model results have
been improved for Select Upgrade 1 to make it easier to import field data using copy/
paste commands from data sources such as spreadsheets and data base files.
To prepare graphs of field observations vs. model predictions for tanks level and
system flows:
1. Create an EPS model run for the selected scenario and calculate it
2. Graph the property of interest
3. Click the small drop down arrow to the right of the third button on the graph
options dialog and select Observed Data.
4. Import time series data field observations from SCDA systems, data loggers or
manual data entries in the Observed Data dialog box. For more information on
using the Observed Data dialog box, see Observed Data Dialog Box.
10-789
The utility's model used in an IDSE study must contain at least 50% of
the pipe length in the real system and at least 75% of the pipes volume.
EPA regulations require:
All 8-inch diameter and larger pipes that connect pressure zones, mixing zones
from different sources, storage facilities, major demand areas, pumps, and control
valves, or are known or expected to be significant conveyors of water.
All 6-inch diameter and larger pipes that connect remote areas of a distribution
system to the main portion of the system or are known or expected to be significant conveyors of water.
All storage facilities, with controls or settings applied to govern the open/closed
status of the facility that reflect standard operations.
All active pump stations, with realistic controls or settings applied to govern their
on/off status that reflect standard operations.
All active control valves or other system features that could significantly affect
the flow of water through the distribution system (e.g., interconnections with
other systems, pressure reducing valves between pressure zones).
A table providing information on the total length of pipe and volume of water in the
model is available by clicking the Report menu and selecting Pressure Pipe Inventory. This inventory can be printed using the Print Preview button at the top of the
display or copied to the clipboard for use in other documents by highlighting all
columns and hitting CTRL-C. If the columns are so wide that the wrapping of the
columns does not look attractive, the user can resize the column widths by grabbing
the edges of the column and sliding the border to a desired position.
10-790
Modeling Capabilities
Below is an example of one such table:
10-791
The user also needs the ability to calculate some statistics after an
water age EPS run to include average water age at each element
between hours a and b.
Average water age over the final 24 hours of an EPS run can be calculated using the
Post Calculation Processor which can be found under the Analysis menu.
An example is shown below. To determine the average water age at all junctions for
the last 24 hour of, for instance, a 144 hour run, set the following values:
Operation: Set
Then use the browser above the bottom pane to select all the junctions for which
average age is to be calculated. It's recommended to create a selection set with the
elements desired before entering the Post Calculation Processor.
10-792
Modeling Capabilities
Mean (Time weighted) takes into account the fact that not all time steps are of the
same size.
Result property (field) means that the Age (Calculated) property (attribute) in the
model will be used to determine the average age
Output property (field) means that the resulting average age for each selected element
will be placed in a user defined property (field) called AveAve. . Instructions on establishing a user defined output property (field) can be found under User Data Extensions
Dialog Box.
Once the average age property has been determined for each element, it is possible to
color, annotate, contour or perform other Bentley WaterGEMS V8i operations on that
property as with any other user defined property. The user can sort on this property
(attribute) in FlexTables and determine the median. This helps the user comply with
the portion of the regulation that states:
Average residence time is the average age of water delivered to customers in a distribution system. Average residence time is not simply one-half the maximum residence
time. Ideally, it should be a flow-weighted or population-weighted estimate. The
model results for water age/DBP concentration can be used to determine the average
residence time for your system. One option for doing this is to list the water age/DBP
concentration results in ranked order for the entire system...
A histogram plot sorts the water age results into groups and shows the
percentage of nodes with water ages falling within the given range.
10-793
The fields in this dialog are described below for the case of creating a IDSE histogram.
10-794
Time step: Time step to be imported (value of average age is same for any time
step)
Property (attribute): Average age for this case but any property (attribute) can be
imported
Use selection set: check if user only wants to import a subset of junctions
Modeling Capabilities
The second group of settings refers to the Excel spreadsheet file:
Specify min/max?: If checked, user can override default values of ranges (recommended)
Histogram type: The vertical axis can be labeled by number of points (Junction
elements) in each interval or percentage of point in each interval.
10-795
Here is an example with a large number of intervals and percentage of points as the
axis.
10-796
Modeling Capabilities
Criticality Analysis
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i provides the user with a unique and flexible tool to evaluate
a water distribution system and identify the most critical elements. The user is allowed
to shut down individual segments of the system and the results on system performance
are determined. Rather than having to do this through the scenario manager, the user
will be able to simulate a set of outages in a single run. This set can vary from a single
element to each possible segment in a large system.
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i reports a variety of indicators for each outage during a criticality analysis. Depending on the type of run, criticality analysis can report the flow
shortfall, volume shortfall or pressure shortfall in the distribution system for each
segment outage.
Before being able to conduct a criticality analysis, Bentley WaterGEMS V8i must
identify the segments to be removed from service. Once the options have been set in a
Criticality Studies level of the Segmentation and Criticality manager, the user decided
which scenario is to be used for the analysis and sets the rules for use of valving in the
options tab.
In order to use criticality analysis, the user must make several decisions on the way
that Bentley WaterGEMS V8i performs the analysis. Each of those is described
below.
Segments vs. Individual Pipes
When a distribution system outage occurs, the portion of the system that is taken out
of service is referred to as a segment. A segment or Network segment is the
smallest portion of a distribution system that can be isolated by valving.
The user must decide which elements will be used to identify segments. This is done
under the options tab under criticality studies. See the Segmentation section in the
documentation for details on this procedure.
There are two general approaches to isolating portions of the system. The more correct
way is to place all the isolating valves on pipe elements. In this way Bentley WaterGEMS V8i can accurately identify which system elements are out of service during
an outage. In some cases however, the user does not have sufficient data on the location of isolating valves. In this case, Bentley WaterGEMS V8i assumes that each pipe
element can be isolated and each distribution segment consists of a single pipe (not
including the nodes at each end). The user identifies if isolating valves are to be used
10-797
Criticality Analysis
in the analysis by checking the box next to Consider Valves? Options tab of the Criticality Studies level. (Related to this is the ability of the user to identify if a valve is to
be considered the boundary of a segment all of the time, only when it is closed in the
selected scenario, or never.)
The figure below shows the segments that are identified if Consider valves? is
checked. Note that the various colors assigned to elements by the program are not
representative of any network attribute but are only used to differentiate adjacent
segments.
The figure below shows the segments that are identified when the Consider valves?
box is unchecked.
10-798
Modeling Capabilities
The user then picks the scenario to be used in the analysis by clicking New and
picking the scenario from the list of available scenarios. Depending on the scenario
selected, the criticality analysis will be either a steady state or extended period simulation and will use or not use pressure dependent demands (PDD). (If a fire flow analysis scenario is selected, it is treated as a steady state and if a water quality scenario is
selected, it is treated as an EPS.)
Once the scenario has been selected for segmentation, the user can then decide if
segments should be identified for the entire network or a subset of the network in the
tab called Segmentation scope. If the scope of the segmentation analysis is a Subset
of the system, an ellipse () button becomes available. By clicking this button, the
user can decide on the elements to include using boxes, queries, polygons, or picking
individual elements. When done, the user right clicks and returns to segmentation
scope. With the name of the scenario highlighted, clicking the GO arrow will start the
segmentation.
See the Segmentation topic for the details in running segmentation and viewing the
results.
Outage Segments
When a segment is taken out of service in a looped or multi-source system, virtually
all of the other segments remain in service. However, in tree shaped systems,
removing one segment from service also takes downstream segments out of service.
These downstream segments are referred to as Outage Segments. To determine
outage segments, highlight the Outage Segments level of the left pane and click the
Go arrow. This will identify all outage segments.
Viewing and zooming to outage segments is similar to these operations in regular
network segments. Segments must be identified before outage segments can be identified. In most cases in looped systems, the isolating segments usually contain no
elements. However, there may be some surprises which can provide some insights into
the adequacy of valving in a system.
10-799
Criticality Analysis
The figure below shows the network segment that is being isolated in yellow and the
corresponding outage segment in red. Note that the various colors assigned to
elements by the program are not representative of any network attribute but are only
used to differentiate adjacent segments.
This system which at first looks as if it has adequate valving and parallel piping has a
serious problem because of valving in the yellow segment results in a large outage
segment.
10-800
Modeling Capabilities
Understanding shortfalls
The criticality analysis works by identifying the shortfalls that occur when a segment
is taken out of service. Depending on the type of analysis, different indicators of shortfall (i.e. drop in system performance) are used. The types of indicators of shortfall for
each type of analysis are summarized in the table below.
Run with
Hydraulic
Engine
PDD?
Steady
State/EPS
Flow
Results
Pressure
Results
No
N/A
N/A
No flow if not
connected
N/A
Yes
No
EPS
No flow if not
connected
Max
Pressure
Drop
Yes
No
Steady State
No flow if not
connected
Max
Pressure
Drop
Yes
Yes
EPS
Volume
reduction
Max
Pressure
Drop
Yes
Yes
Steady State
Flow
Reduction
Max
Pressure
Drop
Criticality Results
Criticality results give an indication of the importance of the shutdown of a segment in
terms of the amount of demand met. There are several different indicators depending
on the type of analysis selected.
In some cases, especially when EPS runs are being made, the system that results
during a segment shutdown will be one that can't be solved hydraulically because
large numbers of nodes are disconnected from the system. In that case, the Is Balanced
check box will not be checked. Users should look carefully at those segments to determine the importance of such an outage.
The key indicator of the importance of shutting down a segment is the System
Demand Shortfall (%). When it is large (and the system is balanced), outage of the
segment will have serious impacts. The results will be different depending on the type
of analysis and:
10-801
Criticality Analysis
Whether the results are based on connectivity only (Run hydraulic engine not
checked), a steady state scenario or an EPS scenario.
Connectivity only - In this case, demand will not be met only when the nodes are
isolated from the source. Otherwise it is assumed that demand is met when a node
is connected.
EPS runs - With EPS runs, the effects of tanks draining are also determined. With
EPS runs it is much more likely to have nodes that become disconnected such that
the hydraulic calculations will not balance. While the connectivity only and
steady state runs are snapshots which give shortfall in flow units (e.g. gpm), the
EPS runs give results in volume units (e.g. gallons).
To compare between scenarios, the user should pick the Criticality Studies level of the
left pane and view the bottom half of the right pane. The Average System Shortfall is a
good indicator for comparisons but is based only on segments for which the hydraulic
calculations are balanced.
Individual values in the criticality results are described below:
10-802
Are all demands met? - This is checked (True) only if the percent demand shortfall for this segment is less than the Maximum Allowable Demand Shortfall in %.
This will generally be unchecked because most segments will have a node with a
demand and the default value for Maximum Allowable Demand Shortfall is 0.
This may be unchecked if the demand inside the segment is 0 even if there is a
node or if the Maximum Allowable Demand Shortfall is set greater than 0.
Modeling Capabilities
Is balanced? - This is checked if the hydraulic calculations are solved. For some
segments, removing the segment may affect the network so severely (e.g. disconnecting all the sources) that the calculations cannot be run. These are usually
segments that seriously affect the reliability of the network and the user should
inspect these manually. If "Is balanced?" is not checked, many of the results fields
are N/A (not applicable).
System Supplied Flow/Volume - This is the total water supplied when the
segment is out of service in flow units for steady runs and volume units for EPS
runs.
Node with Largest Percent Demand/Volume Shortfall - This is the node label
for the node with the maximum percent demand shortfall defined below.
Node with Largest Flow/Demand Shortfall - This is the node label for the node
with the maximum demand shortfall (i.e. Demand - Supplied)).
Flow Supplied at Worst Node - Flow supplied at node from previous field. To
determine the, run the corresponding scenario.
Node with Largest Pressure Shortfall - Node with largest value of ("Min Pressure to Supply Demand" - Pressure). This field is only used for non-PDD runs
because pressure is handled differently in PDD.
Pressure Supplied at Worst Node - Actual pressure at Node with Largest Shortfall.
Segmentation
A distribution network segment is defined as the smallest portion of a distribution
system that can be isolated. Segments are used in the Bentley WaterGEMS V8i criticality analysis as the basic element of a system that can be isolated so that the effects
of an outage can be evaluated.
10-803
Criticality Analysis
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i allows a user to set up two types of segments:
1. Using valves - A segment is created when valves are closed to isolate a portion of
a distribution system. If the user has entered isolating valves and these valves are
assigned to pipes, then Bentley WaterGEMS V8i automatically identifies
segments. These segments can consist of a portion of a single pipe or several pipes
and their interconnecting node elements. The user selects this type of segment by
checking the Consider valves? box in the Options tab of the Criticality Studies
manager.
2. Pipe-by-pipe - In some cases a user wants to conduct a criticality analysis but
does not have information on the location of isolating valves. In this case, Bentley
WaterGEMS V8i will create segments such that there is one pipe link in each
segment. The nodes at the end of the pipe links are not part of the segment when
this method is used. The user selects this type of segment by unchecking the
Consider valves? box in the Options tab of the Criticality Studies manager.
The first figure below shows a simple pipe network with valves.
10-804
Modeling Capabilities
If the Consider valves? Option is selected, then the segments (identified by color)
are created based on valves that can be closed. The segments are identified by color in
the figure below. Note that the various colors assigned to elements by the program are
not representative of any network attribute, but are only used to differentiate adjacent
segments.
10-805
Criticality Analysis
If on the other hand, Consider valves? is unchecked, then each segment consists of
one and only one pipe as shown below.
The option where valving is considered is a much more accurate reflection of the
portion of the system that is out of service during a shutdown. Using the pipe-by-pipe
segments can be misleading in come cases. For example if pipe P-8 is removed from
the system, then by considering valving, the user can see that all downstream
customers are out of service. However, in the pipe-by-pipe case, J-1 and J-6 are still in
service and it looks as if downstream customers can be served.
Of course, to consider valves in the system, the isolating valves must be part of the
pipe network. Adding isolating valves is explained in topic Valves - Isolating.
Depending on the approach used by the modeler, elements such as PRVs and General
Purpose Valves may also be used to isolate segments. For each of these types of
elements, the user can indicate whether they should be used to isolate the system. For
each type of element, the user has three options:
10-806
Use when closed - status of closed if assigned in initial conditions for that
scenario
Modeling Capabilities
Segmentation Results
The results of a segmentation analysis are shown in the right panes of the Criticality
manager. The top half contains one line for each segment.
The segmentation results can be used to find segments which will become maintenance problems during a shutdown. To find troublesome segments, it is best to sort the
segmentation results by right clicking on the appropriate column and choosing Sort
Descending.
To find segments that require a large number of valves to be shut in order to isolate the
segment, sort the Isolation Elements column. Then pick the segments that have the
highest number of isolation elements and zoom to them to see where problem
segments might exist.
To find the segments that are most likely to put a large number of customers out of
service or are most likely to break, sort based on the length of pipe in the segment. If
segments have a relatively even break rate, then the longest ones will have the most
breaks and the longest ones are most likely to have the most customers out of service.
Sorting by Fluid Volume in the segment will give an indication of the amount of water
that must be drained from the segment in order to de-water the pipe for repair.
The bottom half of the right pane gives details about the nodes included in each
segment, the pipes involved in each segment and the isolating nodes needed to shut
down each segment. In this portion of the results, there is one line for each element as
opposed to the top half where there is one line for each segment. Usually this is best
used by picking an individual segment from the middle pane and viewing the details
of that segment.
To compare segmentation results between scenarios, the user should pick the Criticality Studies level at the top of the left pane. The top of the associated summary right
pane (Segmentation Results Summary) gives overall statistics for each scenario.
Usually the results are similar between scenarios unless they use different topologies
in terms of valves.
10-807
Calculation Options
By default, the outages segment list is sorted based on Outage Set Length. Large
outage segments usually indicate portions of the system where a single break or shutdown can place large numbers of customers out of service.
Use the zoom button on top of the middle pane to view the details of the individual
outage segment sets and evaluate approaches to improve the system.
Calculation Options
Calculations depend on a variety of parameters that may be configured by you.
Choose Analysis > Calculation Options, Alt+3, or click the
Calculations Options dialog box.
10-808
Modeling Capabilities
The following controls are available from the Calculation Options dialog box.
New
Duplicate
Delete
Rename
Help
10-809
Calculation Options
To view the Steady State/EPS Solver properties of the Base Calculation Options
Select Base Calculation Options under Steady State/EPS Solver and double click to
open the Properties dialog box.
The following calculation option parameters are available for user configuration:
10-810
Output Selection SetSelect whether to generate output for All Elements (the
default setting) or only the elements contained within the chosen selection set.
Modeling Capabilities
Display Status Messages?If set to true, element status messages will be stored
in the output and reported.
Display Calculation Flags?If set to true, calculation flags will be stored in the
output and reported.
Override Reporting Time Step?Specify if you want the Reporting Time Step
to differ from the Hydraulic Time Step.
Reporting Time StepData will be presented at every reporting time step. The
reporting time step should be a multiple of the hydraulic time step.
Use Linear Interpolation for Multipoint Pumps?If set to true the engine will
use linear interpolation to interpret the pump curve as opposed to quadratic interpolation.
AccuracyUnitless number that defines the convergence criteria for the iterative
solution of the network hydraulic equations. When the sum of the absolute flow
changes between successive iterations in all links is divided by the sum of the
absolute flows in all links and is less than the Accuracy, the solution is said to
have converged. The default value is 0.001 and the minimum allowed value for
Accuracy is 1.0e-5.
10-811
Calculation Options
Liquid LabelLabel that describes the type of liquid used in the simulation.
Use Pressure Dependent Demand?If set to true the flows at junctions and
hydrants will be based on pressure constraints.
10-812
Modeling Capabilities
The following calculation option parameters are available for user configuration:
Initial Flow ConsistencyFlow changes that exceed the specified value are
listed in the output log as a location at which water hammer occurs as soon as
simulation begins. The default value is 0.02 cfs.
Initial Head ConsistencyHead changes that exceed the specified value are
listed in the output log as a location at which water hammer occurs as soon as
simulation begins. The default value is 0.1 ft.
Friction Coefficient CriterionFor pipes whose Darcy-Weisbach friction coefficient exceeds this criterion, an asterisk appears beside the coefficient in the pipe
information table in the output log. The default value is 0.02.
Report History AfterSet the time at which reporting begins. The default value
is 0.02.
Show Extreme Heads AfterSets the time to start output of the maximum and
minimum heads for a run. You can set these to show beginning at time = 0 (right
away), after the first maximum or minimum, or after a specified time delay.
Report Points CollectionClicking the ellipsis button in this field opens the
Report Points Collection dialog, allowing you to choose the report points from the
list of available points, or select them in the drawing.
10-813
Calculation Options
10-814
Report PeriodSpecify the equal intervals of time (default) at which reports are
generated. This option is only available when the Report Times property is set to
Periodically.
Time Step Interval This option is only available when the Is User Defined
Time Step? property is set to True.
Pressure Wave SpeedSpeed for the liquid being conveyed, the pipe material
selected and its dimension ratio (DR), bedding, and other factors.
Vapor PressurePressure below which a liquid changes phase and become a gas
(steam for water), at a given temperature and elevation.
Flow ToleranceFlows below this value are assumed to be zero when running
the transient calculations. This option is generally used to filter out insignificant
flows that could otherwise cause numerical problems during the calculation. See
Flow Tolerance for more details.
Initialize Transient Run at TimeIf the Specify Initial Condition field is set
to True, the transient simulation is initialized using results from a steady-state or
extended period simulation. Enter a time here to initialize the transient simulation
using results from the corresponding EPS time step.
Specify Initial Conditions?If set to True, you can manually specify the initial
conditions for a transient simulation.
Modeling Capabilities
To create a new calculation option
1. Choose Analysis > Calculation Options and the Calculation Options dialog box
opens.
2. Choose New.
3. Double-click on the newly created calculation option to open the Calculation
Options Properties dialog box.
4. Set the fields for this calculation.
10-815
Calculation Options
10-816
All of the time steps are reported on and written to the results file.
None of the time steps are reported on and written to the results file.
Time steps that fall within the specificed constant interval are reported on and
written to the results file.
Modeling Capabilities
The first row in this dialog will always be 0.00 hours, which is the beginning of the
first time range. To specify the first range of time, enter the end time step in the second
row, for example 24 hours. Specify the type in the first row, for example <All>. In this
example, all time steps between hour 0 (the start of the simulation) and hour 24 will be
written to the results file. To specify further ranges of time, add new rows with the
New button. Remove rows with the Delete button. The last range in the dialog will
start at the time specified in the last row and end at the end of the simulation.
10-817
Patterns
Flow Tolerance
The transient calculation requires that there is not excessive friction in the pipelines.
In some cases when the initial flow and headloss along a pipe are both very small,
HAMMER will compute large friction factors for these pipes (generally because very
low velocities result in small Reynolds number values, which results in high friction
factors under laminar flow). This prompts an error message which prevents the model
from running. To prevent this, it is possible to specify a Flow Tolerance value below
which any flow is rounded down to zero. This prevents the friction factor error,
because the friction factor for pipes with zero initial flow is based solely on the roughness parameter entered for the pipe. However, if the Flow Tolerance is adjusted, it is
suggested that the 'Round Pipe Head Values?' parameter is set to 'True' and the pipe
heads are rounded to a similar level of accuracy as the flows. This helps ensure that
the head at either end of a pipe with zero initial flow is the same.
Note however, that in the majority of cases it is suggested that the default value is used
for these parameters.
Patterns
The extended period analysis is actually a series of Steady State analyses run against
time-variable loads such as sewer inflows, demands, or chemical constituents.
Patterns allow you to apply automatic time-variable changes within the system. The
most common application of patterns is for residential or industrial loads. Diurnal
curves are patterns that relate to the changes in loads over the course of the day,
reflecting times when people are using more or less water than average. Most patterns
are based on a multiplication factor versus time relationship, whereby a multiplication
factor of one represents the base value (which is often the average value).
Using a representative diurnal curve for a residence as illustrated below, we see that
there is a peak in the diurnal curve in the morning as people take showers and prepare
breakfast, another slight peak around noon, and a third peak in the evening as people
arrive home from work and prepare dinner. Throughout the night, the pattern reflects
the relative inactivity of the system, with very low flows compared to the average.
Typical Diurnal Curve
10-818
Modeling Capabilities
Note:
There are two basic forms for representing a pattern: stepwise and continuous. A stepwise pattern is one that assumes a constant level of usage over a period of time, and
then jumps instantaneously to another level where it remains steady until the next
jump. A continuous pattern is one for which several points in the pattern are known
and sections in between are transitional, resulting in a smoother pattern. For the
continuous pattern in the figure above, the multiplication factor and slope at the start
time and end times are the same. This is a continuity that is recommended for patterns
that repeat.
Because of the finite time steps used for calculations, this software converts continuous patterns into stepwise patterns for use by the algorithms. In other words for a
time step a multiplier is interpolated from the pattern curve. That multiplier is then
used for the duration of the time step, until a new multiplier is selected for the next
time step.
Patterns provide a convenient way to define the time variable aspects of system loads.
Patterns include:
Pattern Manager
10-819
Patterns
Pattern Manager
A pattern is a series of time step values, each having an associated multiplier value.
During an extended period analysis, each time step of the simulation uses the multiplier from the pattern corresponding to that time. If the duration of the simulation is
longer than the pattern, the pattern is repeated. The selected multiplier is applied to
any baseline load that is associated with the pattern. You can also define daily and
monthly multipliers for any pattern.
10-820
ConstituentThis type of pattern can be applied to Reservoirs, Tanks, or Junctions. Use this pattern type to describe changes in Constituent Baseline Loads
over time.
PumpThis type of pattern can be applied to Variable Speed Pumps only. Use
this pattern type to describe changes in the pumps Relative Speed Factor. In the
Property dialog box for the pump, Is Variable Speed Pump needs to be set to True
and the VSP type needs to be Pattern Based.
Modeling Capabilities
The following management controls are located above the pattern list pane:
New
Delete
Rename
Report
Synchronization
Options
10-821
Patterns
Tip:
The right half of the dialog consists of controls that allow you to define the settings for
the pattern that is currently selected in the list of patterns on the left side of the dialog.
Start TimeThe first time step in the pattern. The start time format is a standard
24-hour clock. The format is Hour:Minute:Second AM or PM (e.g., 12:45:30
PM).
Starting MultiplierThe multiplier value of the first time step point in your
pattern. Any real number can be used for this multiplier (it does not have to be
1.0).
Hourly patterns consist of a number of time step points, defined in the table below the
Pattern Format control on the Hourly tab.
Time From StartThe amount of time from the Start Time of the pattern to the
time step point being defined.
Relative ClosureThe percentage of full flow that the valve allows at the associated time step point. This attribute is only available for Operational (Transient,
Valve) pattern types.
Gate Opening Percent The percentage compared to fully open for the turbine
gate opening at the associated time step point. This attribute is only available for
Operational (Transient, Turbine) pattern types.
Daily and Monthly factors are defined in the same way as hourly ones, the difference
being that rather than defining time steps you enter multipliers for each day of the
week (for Daily patterns) or for each month of the year (for monthly patterns).
10-822
Modeling Capabilities
A graph of the currently selected pattern is displayed in the lower right corner of the
dialog.
Note:
Patterns must begin and end with the same multiplier value. This
is because patterns will be repeated if the duration of the
Extended Period Analysis is longer than the pattern duration. In
other words, the last point in the pattern is really the start point
of the patterns next cycle.
An Extended Period Analysis is actually a series of Steady State
analyses for which the boundary conditions of the current time
step are calculated from the conditions at the previous time
step. This software will automatically convert a continuous
pattern format to a stepwise format so that the demands and
source concentrations remain constant during a time step.
An individual node can support multiple hydraulic demands.
Furthermore, each load can be assigned any hydraulic demand
pattern. This powerful functionality makes it easy to combine
two or more types of demand patterns (such as residential and
institutional) at a single loading node.
Controls
Controls give you a way to specify for virtually any element based on almost any
property of the system. Controls are included in a scenario when they are specified in
the Operational Alternative. The controls become part of an Operational Alternative
when you specify the name of a Control Set to use in a given Operational Alternative.
10-823
Controls
The Control Manager is the main work center for controls. The Control Manager
manages all controls, conditions, actions, and control sets in the system. The Control
manager allows you to define controls using advanced IF, AND, and OR condition
logic, which can trigger any number of THEN or optional ELSE actions.
Choose Components > Controls to open the Control Manager.
10-824
Modeling Capabilities
Controls Tab
The Controls tab allows you to manage all controls defined in the system. Controls
can be one of two types: simple or logical. Simple controls are made up of an IF
condition and a THEN action statement. Logical controls are made up of an IF condition, a THEN action, and an optional ELSE action, and can be assigned a priority for
resolving potential conflicts between logical controls.
Controls, Conditions, and Actions are assigned a non-editable application-provided
ID (e.g., LC01).
The Controls tab is divided into sections:
The pane in the center of the dialog box is the Controls List. This list displays a list of
all Logical Controls defined in the system.
Located above the Controls List is a toolbar with the following buttons:
ReportGenerates a summary of the selected control, listing the ID, conditions, actions, and elements incorporated into the control.
10-825
Controls
Below the toolbar is a set of filters that allow you to only display controls that
meet criteria defined by the filter settings. The following filters are available:
TypeWhen a Type filter other than <All> is specified, only controls of that
type will be displayed in the Controls list.
You can edit or create controls consisting of an IF condition, a THEN action, and an
optional ELSE action. The lower pane is split into sections:
10-826
IF ConditionThe drop-down list allows you to choose from a list of conditions that have already been created in the Conditions tab.
ELSE Action (optional)The ELSE action is used when the conditions for
the control are not met. To specify an ELSE action, click the check box to
activate the drop-down list. The drop-down list allows you to choose from a
list of actions that have already been created in the Actions tab.
PriorityThis area of the dialog box is optional. To set a priority for the control
being created, turn on to activate the priority drop-down list. You can set a priority
of 1-5, 5 being the highest priority. If multiple controls meet a certain condition
and they have conflicting actions, the control with the highest priority will be
used.
Modeling Capabilities
Note:
Status PaneWhen one or more filters are active, the lower left corner of the
dialog will show the number of controls currently displayed out of the number of
total controls. Additionally, a FILTERED flag is displayed in the lower right
corner.
Logical, or rule-based controls allow far more flexibility and control over the behavior
of your network elements than is possible with simple controls. This is accomplished
by allowing you to specify one or more conditions and then link these to one or more
Actions by using logical IF, AND, THEN, OR, and ELSE statements.
Note:
Logical controls consist of any combination of simple conditions and simple actions.
Controls are defined as:
IF:
THEN:
10-827
Controls
ELSE (Optional):
Priority (Optional):
ConditionsBecause this control needs to be triggered by multiple conditions, a Composite Condition is chosen. In this instance, the operator OR is
chosen to link the conditions, because the pump should be turned on if either
condition is true.
IF condition{T-1 Level < 5 ft.}
OR condition{System Demand > 5000 gpm}
10-828
Modeling Capabilities
This example illustrates the power of using logical controls. To achieve the same functionality using simple controls, you would need to create four separate controlsone
to turn the pump on if the tank level is below the specified value, one to turn the pump
off if the tank level is above a specified value, one to turn the pump on if the system
demand is greater than the specified value, and one to turn the pump off if the system
demand is less than the specified value.
Tip:
Note:
Conditions Tab
Conditions allow you to define the condition that must be met prior to taking an
action. The Conditions tab provides a list of all conditions defined in the system.
There are two types of conditions: simple conditions and composite conditions.
10-829
Controls
The Conditions tab is divided into sections:
The pane in the middle of the dialog box is the Conditions List. The Conditions
List displays a list of all logical conditions defined in the system. The list contains
four columns: ID (the application defined id, e.g., C01 for simple, CC01 for
composite), Type (simple or composite), description, and references (logical
control references).
Located above the Conditions List is a toolbar with the following buttons:
Below the toolbar is a set of filters that allow you to only display controls that
meet criteria defined by the filter settings. The following filters are available:
10-830
Modeling Capabilities
The controls used to create or edit a condition vary depending on whether the
condition is simple or composite:
Simple Conditions
The input fields for a simple condition change depending on the condition type that is
selected in the condition Type field. The Simple Condition Types and the corresponding input data are as follows:
ElementThis will create a condition based on specified attributes at a selected
element. The fields available when this condition type is selected are as follows:
ElementThe Element field allows you to specify which element the condition
will be based upon, and provides three methods of choosing this element. The
drop-down list displays elements that have been used in other logical controls, the
Ellipsis () button, which opens the Single Element Selection dialog box, and the
Select From Drawing button, which allows you to select the element using the
graphical Drawing view.
AttributeThis field displays the available attributes for the element type currently
specified in the Element field.
Pressure JunctionsThe following attributes are available for use when a Junction is chosen in the Element field:
PumpsThe following attributes are available for use when a Pump is chosen in
the Element field:
10-831
Controls
Note:
10-832
TanksThe following attributes are available for use when a Tank is chosen in
the Element field:
Modeling Capabilities
PipesThe following attributes are available for use when a Pipe is chosen in the
Element field:
ValvesThe following attributes are available for use when a valve is chosen in
the Element field:
Note:
System DemandThis will create a condition based on the demands for the entire
system. The fields available when this condition type is selected are:
10-833
Controls
OperatorThis field allows you to specify the relationship between the Attribute
and the target value for that attribute. The choices include Greater Than (>),
Greater Than Or Equal To (>=), Less Than (<), Less Than Or Equal To (<=),
Equal To (=), or Not Equal To (<>).
Clock TimeThis will create a condition based on the clock time during an extended
period simulation. If the extended period simulation is for a period longer than 24
hours, this condition will be triggered every day at the specified time.
OperatorThis field allows you to specify the relationship between the Attribute
and the target value for that attribute. The choices include Greater Than (>),
Greater Than Or Equal To (>=), Less Than (<), Less Than Or Equal To (<=),
Equal To (=), or Not Equal To (<>).
Time From StartThis will create a condition based on the amount of time that has
passed since the beginning of an extended period simulation. The following fields are
available when this condition type is selected:
OperatorThis field allows you to specify the relationship between the Attribute
and the target value for that attribute. The choices include Greater Than (>),
Greater Than Or Equal To (>=), Less Than (<), Less Than Or Equal To (<=),
Equal To (=), or Not Equal To (<>).
Target ValueThis fields label will change depending on the attribute that is
chosen. The value entered here is used in conjunction with the operator that is chosen
to determine if the condition has been met.
DescriptionThis area of the dialog box is preset with a default description. There is
an option to change the default description. To do so, click the check box to activate
the description field, and enter your description in the text box. Additionally, the
description field supports the following expandable masks:
%#
10-834
ID
%e
Element
%a
Attribute
%o
Operator
%v
Value
%u
Unit
Modeling Capabilities
Note:
Aside from reducing the amount of data input, using these masks provides the additional benefit of automatically updating the corresponding information when changes
are made to the various condition components.
Summary This area of the dialog box displays an automatically updated preview of
the expanded description.
Composite Conditions
When a Composite Condition is being defined or edited, the lower part of the dialog
box is comprised of a two column table and two buttons. The buttons are as follows:
OperatorThis column allows you to choose the way in which the related
Condition logic will be evaluated. The available choices are If, And, and Or.
Note:
The first condition in the list will use the If operator. Any
additional conditions will allow you to choose between AND and
OR.
Any combination of AND and OR clauses can be used in a rule.
When mixing AND and OR clauses, the OR operator has higher
precedence than AND. Therefore, IF A or B and C is equivalent
to IF (A or B) and C. If the interpretation was meant to be IF A
or (B and C), this can be expressed using two Logical Controls:
Logical Control 1: IF A THEN... and Logical Control 2: IF B
AND C THEN...
DescriptionThis area of the dialog box is preset with a default description. There is
an option to change the default description. To do so, click the check box to activate
the description field, and enter your description in the text box. Additionally, the
description field supports the following expandable masks:
%#
ID
%v
Value
10-835
Controls
Aside from reducing the amount of data input, using these masks provides the additional benefit of automatically updating the corresponding information when changes
are made to the various condition components.
Note:
Actions Tab
Actions allow you to define what should be done to an element in the system in
response to an associated control condition. The Actions tab provides a list of all
actions defined in the system. There are two types of actions: simple actions and
composite actions. Actions have an application-provided non-editable ID (e.g., A01
for simple, AA01 for composite).
The Actions tab is divided into sections:
10-836
Modeling Capabilities
The Actions List displays a list of all logical actions defined in the system. The list
contains four columns: ID (the application defined ID, e.g., A01 for simple, AA01
for composite), Type (simple or composite), description, and references (logical
control references).
Located above the Conditions List is a toolbar with the following buttons:
NewOpens the New Logical Action dialog box, where you can create a
new logical action.
FindOpens the Find Logical Action dialog box, which allows you to
find a particular action based on a variety of criteria.
Below the toolbar is a set of filters that allow you to only display controls that
meet criteria defined by the filter settings. The following filters are available:
-
The controls used to create or edit an action vary depending on whether the action
is simple or composite:
Simple Actions
The following controls are used to define or edit Simple Actions:
ElementThe Element field allows you to specify which element the action will
be based upon and provides three methods of choosing this element. The dropdown list displays elements that have been used in other logical controls, the
Ellipsis () button, which opens the Single Element Selection box, and the Select
From Drawing button, which allows you to select the element using the graphical
Drawing view.
AttributeThis field displays the available attributes for the element type specified in the Element field. Not all attributes are available for all element types. The
available attributes include:
10-837
Controls
Status This attribute is used to change the status of a pipe, pump, or valve
when the related conditions are met. The available choices are dependant on
the element type.
Note:
Pipes can only utilize the Status Attribute, Pumps and all Valves
except for the GPV can utilize either the Status or Setting
Attribute. GPVs can only use the Status Attribute.
For all valves except for the GPV, there is no explicit Active
status with which to base a control uponthe status choices are
Inactive or Closed. After a control sets a valve to Inactive or
Closed, to reactivate the valve another control must be created
with a Setting attribute. This is because a valve cannot be set to
Active, but must have specific input data to work with.
For GPVs, there is no Inactive setting. GPVs can only be set to
Active or Closed. If the GPV is not closed, the valve will always
produce the headlosses associated with it through the HeadDischarge Points table.
Attribute ValueThis fields label will change depending on the attribute that is
chosen. Depending on the element type and the attribute that was chosen, the
input field may also change to a drop-down list, which contains the possible
settings for that element. Not all settings are available for all element types.
Note:
Pipes can be set to Open or Closed, Pumps can be set to On, Off,
or have their relative speed factors increase or decrease. GPVs
can be set to Active or Closed. All other valves can be set to
Inactive, Closed, or have their respective settings changed,
depending on the Valve type.
DescriptionThis area of the dialog box is preset with a default description. There is
an option to change the default description. To do so, click the check box to activate
the description field, and enter your description in the text box. Additionally, the
description field supports the following expandable masks:
%#
10-838
ID
Modeling Capabilities
%e
Element
%a
Attribute
%o
Operator
%v
Aside from reducing the amount of data input, using these masks provides the additional benefit of automatically updating the corresponding information when changes
are made to the various control components.
Note:
DescriptionThis area of the dialog box is preset with a default description. There is
an option to change the default description. To do so, click the check box to activate
the description field, and enter your description in the text box. Additionally, the
description field supports the following expandable masks:
%#
ID
%v
Value
Aside from reducing the amount of data input, using these masks provides the additional benefit of automatically updating the corresponding information when changes
are made to the various control components.
10-839
Controls
Note:
10-840
Modeling Capabilities
NewOpens the Logical Control Set editor dialog box. From this window, you
can add previously created logical controls to the new control set.
EditOpens the Logical Control Set editor dialog box, which allows you to edit
the highlighted control set.
DuplicatePrompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set editor to
allow you to add or remove controls from the control set.
DeleteDeletes the highlighted control set. You will be prompted to confirm this
action.
The left pane, labeled Available Items, contains a list of all of the logical controls that
have been created in the current project. To add controls to the Selected Items pane on
the right, highlight the desired controls and click the [>] button under Add. To add all
of the controls to your Logical Control set, click the [>>] button under Add. To
remove a control from the Selected Items pane, highlight it and click the [<] button
under Remove. To remove all controls from the Selected Items pane, click the [<<]
button under Remove.
10-841
Controls
Note:
Priority is based upon the order that the controls appear in this
dialog box. The first control in the control set has the highest
priority, and so on. Any control with a set priority will overrule
any control with no set priority.
Control Wizard
The Control Wizard lets you quickly create pump controls based on tank HGL.
10-842
Pump: Choose the pump to be controlled. You can select it from the menu, click
the ellipsis (...) button to use the Find function, or click the cursor button to select
the pump from the drawing.
Tank: Choose the controlling tank. You can select it from the menu, click the
ellipsis (...) button to use the Find function, or click the cursor button to select the
tank from the drawing.
On Operator: This field allows you to specify the relationship between the HGL
and the target On value for the HGL. The choices include Greater Than (>),
Greater Than Or Equal To (>=), Less Than (<), Less Than Or Equal To (<=),
Equal To (=), or Not Equal To (<>).
Off Operator: This field allows you to specify the relationship between the HGL
and the target Off value for the HGL. The choices include Greater Than (>),
Greater Than Or Equal To (>=), Less Than (<), Less Than Or Equal To (<=),
Equal To (=), or Not Equal To (<>).
Modeling Capabilities
Click the New button above the table to add a new row; click the Delete button to
remove the currently selected row.
Active Topology
The Bentley WaterGEMS V8i Active Topology feature lets you create alternatives in
which selected elements are displayed differently in the drawing view. While these
elements are in the inactive state, they are not evaluated in network calculations. This
ability allows you to easily create before and after scenarios for proposed construction
projects and test the redundancy of existing networks.
While elements are inactive, they are not included in any hydraulic equations. Inactive
elements are also not evaluated when generating contour plots, and are not available
for inclusion while generating profiles. Inactive elements are differentiated visually
from Active ones in the main drawing pane, in the Aerial View window, and in either
of the plan view types. When generating project inventory reports, element details
reports, or element results reports, inactive elements are not included.
Inactive elements will not appear in the corresponding tabular reports, unless the
Include Inactive Topology option is turned on. The default setting does not include
inactive elements. Inactive elements are still available for inclusion in selection sets.
Any changes made to the Active Topology are applied to the Active Topology Alternative associated with the current scenario, and an unlimited number of active
topology alternatives can be created.
10-843
Active Topology
10-844
Modeling Capabilities
The Select tool consists of the following controls:
Done
Add
Remove
Clear
The Done, Add, and Remove commands are also available from the right-click
context menu while the Select tool is active.
10-845
External Tools
Note:
External Tools
Use the External Tool Manager to manage custom menu commands, which are then
located in the Tools menu for quick accessibility.
Click Tools>External Tools to create a custom menu command from any executable
file. Executable file types include:
.exe
.com
.pif
.bat
.cmd
External Tool List PaneThis pane lists the external tools that have been
created. All of the tools listed in this pane will be displayed in the Tools >
External Tools menu.
CommandThis field allows you to enter the full path to the executable file that
the tool will initiate. Click the ellipsis button to open a Windows Open dialog to
allow you to browse to the executable.
ArgumentsThis optional field allows you to enter command line variables that
are passed to the tool or command when it is activated. Click the > button to open
a submenu containing predefined arguments. Arguments containing spaces must
be enclosed in quotes. The available arguments are:
10-846
Modeling Capabilities
Project File NameThis argument passes the current project file name to the
executable upon activation of the tool. The argument string is %(ProjFileName).
Project Store File NameThis argument passes the current project datastore
file name to the executable upon activation of the tool. The argument string is
%(ProjStoreFileName).
TestThis button executes the external tool using the specified settings.
SCADAConnect
SCADAConnect is a tool used for the automatic acquisition of SCADA (Supervisory
Control and Data Acquisition) data.
10-847
SCADAConnect
SCADA information is usually available in two modes: historical and real-time. Information obtained in either of the two modes is then used to populate the initial settings
or calibration field. Once imported into the hydraulic model, the data can be used for
hydraulic model calibration and as the starting point for extended period hydraulic
simulations (EPS).This tool has been designed to eliminate the need to manually
transfer data between the SCADA systems and hydraulic model.
SCADAConnect allows the interaction with any SCADA system that supports open
database connectivity (ODBC) interface or OLE DB interface. Citect's native application program interface (API) is used to allow access to data sampled by the Citect
server. You can also connect to a database with many different types of data sources as
needed.
The SCADAConnect Manager allows you to set up SCADAConnect connections.
Go to Tools>SCADAconnect or click
10-848
File
Tools
Data Source Manager - Specify tables or data sources in each data server.
Modeling Capabilities
Load Field Data Set - Populates a new calibration field data set with SCADA
data which may be historical or real-time.
Load Initial Settings - Populates the initial settings alternative with real-time
SCADA data. The initial settings alternative populated by this process is associated with the active scenario. Data are local to the alternative.
Load Average Values - Populates values of a signal over a full day, calculates
the average value, and writes it to the model.
View SCADA Data - Values are in a tabular grid for a specific time period.
Note:
Units: Specify the units where each of the attribute types are stored within
the SCADA system.
Units must be set to the units of the SCADA data. Units that are
set in the hydraulic model do not matter.
Advanced:
10-849
SCADAConnect
Time tolerance: Specify the time tolerance for retrieval of historical data from the
SCADA database. Time tolerance refers to the intervals centered about the specified
time for the historical data query. The time tolerance should be large enough to cover
the full range of signals to be retrieved. This is defined by the SCADA polling
interval.
Note:
10-850
Modeling Capabilities
In order to map SCADA signals with the SCADA data source
SCADA signal supports real-time data - Check if the SCADA signal contains
10-851
SCADAConnect
real-time data on the SCADA server.
Data Source - The name of the data source from the data source manager. Click
the ellipsis to open the data source manager to specify data sources.
SCADA signal supports historical data - Check if the SCADA signal contains
historical data on the SCADA server.
Data Source - The name of the data source from the data source manager. Click
the ellipsis to open the data source manager to specify data sources.
7. Enter the following information in the Data Destinations tab:
Calibration field data sets - Check if the SCADA signal can be exported.
Initial Settings - Check if the signal can be exported to model initial settings. This
option is not available when historical data are the only supported data source.
8. Click OK to update the signal information.
Note:
If the SCADA signal can not find the associated GEMS element a
small red x is displayed to indicate that the signal cannot find
the mapped model element.
Connection Manager
The Connection Manager is used to create new SCADA connections and edit the
connection settings. The connection can also be tested from this manager.
10-852
Modeling Capabilities
To create a connection
1. Within SCADAConnect, go to Tools>Connection Manager.
2. The Connection Manager opens.
3. Click New
to create a new ODBC based database or Citect Connection.
If Citect API is used to access the data, select Citect.
4. Select the Connection Type.
5. Enter a connection string.
6. Click Test Connection to verify that a successful connection to the database has
succeeded.
7. If needed, click Advanced to open the Advance Options window to enter SQL
information that may be specific to the data source being used. When complete,
click OK to save changes or Cancel to exit.
10-853
SCADAConnect
3. Click New
10-854
Modeling Capabilities
Note:
Table and field names should not have any SQL formatting text.
Custom Queries
Use Custom Queries to create a customized, intermediate data table that SCADAConnect can read. The query can add new fields based on available field values in the data
source, allowing data to be translated from a specific user format to the SCADAConnect format. It can also be used to add validation of the SCADA data.
For example, if the signal data supports a timestamp field, SCADAConnect expects
the data to be presented in a single Date/Time field. However, if the timestamp in the
data source is stored in two separate fields, a custom query can be written to present
the two fields to SCADAConnect as a single DateTime field.
This will generate an intermediate data table with all the fields from the table plus a
new calculated field called timeStamp that contains the Date/Time values. This timeStamp field is the field name that should be entered in the Data Source dialog.
Another example would be to use a query that will add extra data validation to remove
errors. If signal values are known to always be within a certain range, the following
query could be written to mark those signals as Questionable and then allow SCADAConnect to skip those values.
This will generate a field called Questionable that can be used in the Data Source
dialog. When the data is then read by SCADAConnect, data records with values
outside this range, will have the Questionable field set to TRUE, and SCADAConnect
will discard the value.
10-855
Flushing Simulation
Note:
When custom queries are entered, they should have valid SQL
syntax for the data source being used. Custom queries are sent
to the database provider and therefore the Advanced Options
from the Connection do not apply to these queries.
Flushing Simulation
WaterGEMS V8i flushing module can be used to simulate the effect of flushing water
distribution systems.
There are several purposes for flushing distribution systems including increasing
velocity to scour pipes, reducing water age, testing operation of hydrants, etc. The
WaterGEMS V8i implementation of flushing is oriented toward increasing velocity in
mains to flush out solids and stale water. The primary indicator of the success of
flushing in the maximum velocity achieved in any pipe during flushing operation.
Type of Flushing
The basic concept in flushing is an "Event". This corresponds to one snapshot during a
flushing program. Flushing analysis consists of simulating many flushing events.
WaterGEMS V8i can analyze two general types of flushing, Conventional and Unidirectional:
Depending on the target velocities and layout of the system, conventional flushing is
often adequate. Uni-directional flushing will improve velocity although it requires
additional labor. A recommended workflow is to first simulate conventional flushing
and then identify areas which are not adequately flushed and require uni-directional
flushing. If a secondary goal is to test the operation of every hydrant, then conventional flushing is usually adequate while if valve exercising is also a goal, uni-directional flushing becomes more attractive.
10-856
Modeling Capabilities
Starting model
For flushing analysis, it is best to start from an all-pipe model. Small pipes without a
means of flushing (e.g. 2 in. pipes) can be excluded. Ideally, the model will also
contain every hydrant and isolating valve at its exact location. This is especially
important for UDF because the location of a hydrant relative to the closed valves is
very important.
If a model does not contain hydrant elements, junction nodes can be used as flushing
points. The error should be small for conventional flushing although for UDF a valve
may be closed valve between the hydrant and junction. If hydrant elements are used, it
is not necessary in explicitly include the hydrant lateral in the model because the
lateral length and its associated head losses can be accounted for within the hydrant
element.
If isolating valves are not included in the model, the user can simulate valve closing
by closing pipes, although it is up to the user to insure that a valve is actually available
in the field to close the pipe.
10-857
Flushing Simulation
3. Open a flushing alternative (Analysis>Alternatives>Flushing) and complete the
following information. On the flushing criteria tab, the user will identify:
a. Target velocity - pipes with a velocity exceeding this value will be considered
flushed.
b. Set of pipes which will be evaluated with regard to whether they reached
target velocity (Default is All Pipes although the user can specify a previously
created Selection Set in the drop down menu.)
c. Initialize velocity on each run. If checked, each run will set all the Maximum
Achieved Velocity to 0 ft/s at the start of the run (Scenario). If unchecked, it
will base the Maximum Achieved Velocity on all of the existing scenarios for
which results are available since the last time a run was made with the box
checked. If the user is evaluating all pipes at once, it is best to check this box.
If the user is building up a flushing program through a number of scenarios
using different areas, then it is best to uncheck the box.
d. Flowing Emitter Coefficient - emitter coefficient to be used globally for
hydrants. This value can be overridden for individual nodes on the next tab.
10-858
Modeling Capabilities
e. Flowing Demand - instead of specifying an emitter coefficient, the user can
directly specify the flow in flow units. The user should generally not specify
non-zero values for both emitter coefficient and flowing demand as this can
double count the hydrant flow.
f.
Include pipes with velocity greater than? - if checked, for any event velocity
data on which pipes exceeded some velocity are saved, This need not be the
same velocity as the target velocity specified above. All pipes that are in the
Pipe Set are automatically included in the auxiliary results regardless of
their velocity."
j.
List of flushing events that have been specified in the Conventional or Unidirectional tabs. User has the ability to exclude an event from the alternative
when run by unchecking the "Is Active?" box next to that event.
Different methods are used to define Conventional and UDF flushing events.
10-859
Flushing Simulation
node or hydrant) to be flowed. If the user also checks the box under the "Is
Local?" column, the user can override the global values for Emitter Coefficient or Hydrant Flow.
10-860
Modeling Capabilities
When adding a flushing event, the user is first asked to give a name to the event and
pick OK. The default name is "Flushing - number". Once a row is added to the dialog
for that event, the event is further defined by clicking the ellipse button that appears in
the Element ID box when it is selected. At this point, the user can either select a node
element to be flowed or a pipe or isolating valve to be closed. (If the user only selects
a single flowed element and does not close any valves or pipes, then the unidirectional
event is essentially the same as conventional flushing.)
Once a UDF event has been created, the user can pick additional elements to be
flowed (in the case of a multi hydrant flush) or can pick isolating valve or pipe
elements to be closed, by highlighting one of the events and picking New > Add
Elements. The user will then see a Selection dialog from which the user can select one
or more additional elements to be closed or flowed. When done, the user picks the
green check mark to complete event selection.
The dialog below shows two UDF flushing events being set up in the Unidirectional
dialog. The first event, Middle Road flush, involves closing 5 valves while the second,
South St. flush, involves closing three and overriding the default emitter coefficient.
4. Once one or more flushing alternatives have been created, they need to be
assigned to appropriate scenarios. Any flushing scenario needs to have the calculation option Calculation Type set to Flushing as shown below. To run the flushing
analysis, pick Analysis > Computer or hit the green Compute button.
10-861
Flushing Simulation
Note:
5. Once one or more flushing alternatives have been created, they need to be
assigned to appropriate scenarios. Any flushing scenario needs to have the calculation option Calculation Type set to Flushing as shown below. To run the flushing
analysis, pick Analysis > Computer or hit the green Compute button.
6. The flushing results can be viewed several ways. The overall summary can be
viewed by selecting Flex Tables > Flushing Report. It contains the results of all
flushing runs (Scenarios) that have been run since the last time one was run with
the "Initialize Velocity Each Run?" box checked. For each pipe in the selected
Pipe Set specified, the table will give some pipe properties, the maximum velocity
achieved, whether that velocity achieved the target velocity and which flushing
event yielded the maximum velocity in the pipe.
The user may first want to run conventional flushing for a large number of events
and then determine which pipes were not adequately flushed. Then the user can
set up unidirectional flushing for those pipes. It may be impossible to reach a
target velocity for large transmission mains using flushing even with UDF and
multiple hydrants.
10-862
Modeling Capabilities
The Flushing Report flex table can be viewed just like any other flex table. Zoom
button (fifth from left) enables the user to zoom to that in the drawing.
10-863
Flushing Simulation
A good way to get an overview of flushing operations is to color code the drawing
by Maximum Velocity as shown below. This will indicate which pipes reached a
high velocity at a glance.
7. For more in depth viewing of flushing results, the user can open the Flushing
Result Navigator by picking Analysis > Flushing Results Navigator or picking the
red Flushing Results Navigator button (red hydrant shape). This browser behaves
much like the fire Flow Results Navigator.
Picking one of the flushing events will switch the results as shown in color
coding, property grid and flex tables to the results corresponding to that flushing
event. The red lines in the drawing below show the pipes that were flushed using
the magenta hydrant in the UDF run. The green pipes around it are those that were
10-864
Modeling Capabilities
closed to obtain these high velocities. If a pipe does not show up as being color
coded or has an NA for maximum velocity, it is usually the case that it was not
included in the selection set used as the Pipe Set in the Flushing Alternative.
10-865
Flushing Simulation
Red Lines: The pipes that were flushed during the analysis.
Green Lines: Pipes that were closed to obtain the high velocities.
To see the results in tabular format, click the Flushing Event Results button
10-866
Modeling Capabilities
Modeling Tips
The paragraph presents some FAQs related to modeling water distribution networks
with Bentley WaterGEMS V8i . Also, please keep in mind that Bentley Systems offers
workshops in North America and abroad throughout the year. These workshops cover
these modeling topics in depths and many more in a very effective manner. The
following modeling tips are presented:
10-867
Modeling Tips
EXAMPLE:
The pump manufacturer provides the following data in a pump catalog:
Head (ft.)
Discharge (gpm)
1260
1180
8300
1030
12400
Based on field conditions and test results, the following drawdown data is known:
Drawdown (ft.)
10-868
Discharge (gpm)
40
8300
72
12400
Modeling Capabilities
To account for the drawdown, the pump curves should be offset by the difference
between the static and pumped groundwater elevations. Subtract the drawdown
amount from the pump head, and use these new values for your pump curve head data.
The following adjusted pump curve data is based on the drawdown and the manufacturers pump data.
Head (ft.)
Discharge (gpm)
1260
1140
8300
958
12400
10-869
Modeling Tips
Parallel pumps can be modeled by inserting a pump on different pipes that have the
same From and To Nodes. Pumps in series (one pump discharges directly into another
pumps intake) can be modeled by having the pumps located on the same pipe. The
following figure illustrates this concept:
10-870
Modeling Capabilities
10-871
Modeling Tips
Qr = Qf * [(Hr/Hf)^.54]
Where:
Qr
Qf
Hr
Hf
10-872
Modeling Capabilities
Head (ft.)
Discharge
(gpm)
207.9
127.05
558
50.82
800
10-873
Modeling Tips
Q KP n
Where:
The pressure exponent, n, is a variable that can be set in the Hydraulic Analysis
Options section of the Calculation Options dialog box. The default value is 0.5, which
should be used when using flow emitters to model hydrant outlets.
You should be able to model a hydrant as a flow emitter and enter the appropriate
value for K. Not all of the energy available immediately upstream of the hydrant is
lost, however. Instead, some of the energy is converted into increased velocity head,
especially for the smaller (2.5 in, 63 mm) hydrant outlet.
In order to accurately model a hydrant, the model must be given an overall K value,
which includes head loss through a hydrant and conversion of pressure head to
velocity head. AWWA Standards C502 and C503 govern the allowable pressure drop
through a hydrant. For example, the standards state that the 2.5 in. outlet must have a
pressure drop less than 2.0 psi (1.46 m) when passing 500 gpm (31.5 l/s).
The energy equation can be written between a pressure gauge immediately upstream
of the hydrant and the hydrant outlet:
10-874
Modeling Capabilities
1
1
1
1
( 4 4 ) 2
2
k
2 gC F c F DO DP
Where:
CF
cF
Do
diameter of orifice
Dp
diameter of pipe
The difference between K and k is that K includes the terms for conversion of velocity
head to pressure head. k is known, but K is the value needed for modeling.
A typical hydrant lateral in North America is 6 in. (150 mm) and typical outlet sizes
are 2.5 in. (63 mm) and 4.5 in. (115 mm). Values for k vary from minimum values,
which can be back calculated from AWWA standards, to much higher values actually
delivered by hydrants. Values for K for a range of k values for 6 in. (150 mm) pipes
are given below.
Table 10-2: Emitter K Values for Hydrants
K
Outlet
Nominal (in.)
k
gpm, psi
k
l/s, m
gpm/psin,
l/s/mn
K
l/s, m
2.5
250-600
18-45
150-180
11-14
2-2.5
350-700
26-52
167-185
13-15
4.5
447-720
33-54
380-510
30-40
10-875
Modeling Tips
The coefficients given are based on a 5 ft. (1.5 m) burial depth and a 5.5 in. (140 mm)
hydrant barrel. A range of values is given because each manufacturer has a different
configuration for hydrant barrels and valving. The lowest value is the minimum
AWWA standard.
10-876
Modeling Capabilities
To indicate that a pump is behaving as a VSP, first check the box next to Variable
Speed Pump? at the top of the VSP tab. This will change the remaining boxes on the
tab from gray to white.
Pattern Based
If you want to provide the actual pump relative speeds, Pattern Based should be
selected from the VSP Type menu. The default pattern is Fixed, which corresponds to
constant speed performance at a speed from the General tab.
Usually, you will want to specify a series of pump relative speeds. To do this, click the
Ellipsis () button next to Pump Speed Pattern. This will open the Pattern Manager
dialog box. Click the Add button, and the Pattern Editor dialog box will appear. From
this dialog box, you can assign a label (name) to the new Pattern and complete the
series of multipliers (i.e., relative speeds) versus time. Clicking OK twice will return
you to the VSP tab.
A difficulty in using Pattern Based speeds is that the pattern that would work well for
one scenario may not work well for other scenarios. For example, tanks will run dry or
fill and shut off for a slightly different scenario than the one for which the pattern was
created.
Fixed Head
Fixed head control is achieved by selecting Fixed Head from the VSP Type? menu.
Once Fixed Head is selected, you must describe how the control is implemented.
You must identify a node that controls the pump. This is the node where some type of
pressure or water level sensor is located. This can be done by:
Using the menu and picking the node from the list
Clicking the Ellipsis () button and using the Select Element dialog box.
Clicking the Select From Drawing button and picking the node from the drawing.
In selecting the control node, you must choose a node that is actually controlled by the
VSP. For example, the selected node must be in the same pressure zone (i.e., one that
is not separated from the pump by another pump or PRV) and should not have a tank
directly between the node and the pump.
You must then select the head to be maintained at that node. If the node selected for
control is a tank, then the Target Head is set as the initial head in the tank. If a junction
node is selected, the head must be a feasible head. If a physically infeasible head is
given, the problem may not be solved or some unrealistic flow may be forced to meet
this head (e.g., backward flow through pump).
10-877
Modeling Tips
You also have the option of setting the maximum relative speed of the pump, which
would usually correspond to the rated speed of the motor. The default value for this is
1.0. You can have the model ignore this limit by placing a large value in the field for
maximum speed.
When the relative pump speed reaches maximum speed (usually 1.0), the model treats
the pump essentially as a constant speed pump. In the case of pumps controlled by a
junction node, when the conditions warrant, the pump will once again behave as a
VSP.
However, for pumps controlled by tanks, the pump will run at a maximum speed for
the remainder of the EPS run, once they reach maximum speed. To get the pump to
switch back to variable speed operation, you need to insert a control statement that
switches the pump back to variable speed. Consider the example below:
PMP-1 tries to maintain 280 ft. discharge at node T-1 on the discharge side of the
pump, but pump (PMP-1) switches to full speed when the flow is so great that it
cannot maintain 280 ft. In that case, the water level drops below 280 ft. As demand
decreases, the level increases until it reaches 280 ft., at which time variable speed
operation begins again. To make this occur in the model, you must use a logical
control to restore variable speed operation:
IF (HGL T-1 >= 280 ft) THEN (PMP-1 = ON)
Parallel VSPs
Variable speed pumps can also be modeled in parallel. If you use the Fixed Head
pump type, both parallel VSPs must be set to the same target node. The program
will attempt to meet the fixed head requirements you set using only one of the
pumps. If the fixed head cannot be met with only one of the pumps, the second
pump will be turned on, and the relative speed settings of the pumps will be
adjusted to compensate.
Variable speed pumps (VSPs) can be modeled in parallel. This allows you to model
multiple VSPs operated at the same speed at one pump station. To model this, a VSP
is chosen as a lead VSP, which will be the primary pump to deliver the target head.
If the lead VSP cannot deliver the target head while operating at maximum speed, then
10-878
Modeling Capabilities
the second VSP will be triggered on and the VSP calculation will determine the
common speed for both VSPs. If the target head cannot be delivered while operating
both VSPs at the maximum speed, then another VSP will be triggered on until the
target head is met with all the available VSPs.
All VSPs that are turned on are operated at the same speed. VSPs are to be turned off
if they are not required due to a change in demand. If all standby VSPs are running at
the maximum speed, but still cannot deliver the target head, the VSPs are translated
into fixed speed pumps.
To correctly apply the VSP feature to multiple variable speed pumps in parallel, the
following criteria must be met:
1. Parallel VSPs must be controlled by the same target node;
2. Parallel VSPs must be controlled by the same target head;
3. Parallel VSPs must have the same maximum relative speed factors;
4. Parallel VSPs must be identical, namely the same pump curve.
5. Parallel VSPs must share common upstream and downstream junctions within 3
nodes (inclusive) of the pumps in order for them to be recognized as parallel
VSPs.
If there are more than 3 nodes between the pumps and their common node,
upstream and downstream, the software will treat them as separate VSPs. Since
separate VSPs cannot target the same control node, this will result in an error
message.
10-879
Modeling Tips
4. Choose a desired discharge side tank as Control Node
5. Specify the maximum relative speed factor and set Is Suction Side Variable Speed
Pump to False
Note:
When the target level is missed due to either too high demand or
too much inflow into the wet well, the VSP will be operating at
the fixed speed until the target level can be reestablished,
however, the reestablished target level may not be exactly the
same as the initial target head. This is because the VSP is forced
back by using the given time step, the pump is operated as a
fixed speed pump to move the amount of water within one time
step, so that the level cannot be exact unless the time step is
small enough to ensure the exact amount of water is moved out
the tank to maintain the exact target. The smaller the time step,
the closer it will be to returning to the target.
10-880
Modeling Capabilities
Note:
When the target level is missed due to either too high demand or
too much inflow into the wet well, the VSP will be operating at
the fixed speed until the target level can be reestablished,
however, the reestablished target level may not be exactly the
same as the initial target head. This is because the VSP is forced
back by using the given time step, the pump is operated as a
fixed speed pump to move the amount of water within one time
step, so that the level cannot be exact unless the time step is
small enough to ensure the exact amount of water is moved out
the tank to maintain the exact target. The smaller the time step,
the closer it will be to returning to the target.
10-881
Modeling Tips
10-882
11
11-883
The Bentley WaterGEMS V8i Darwin Calibrator provides a history of your calibration attempts, allows you to use a manual approach to calibration, supports multiple
field data sets, brings the speed and efficiency of genetic algorithms to calibrating
your water system, and presents several calibration candidates for you to consider,
rather than just one solution. You can set up a series of Base Calibrations, which can
have numerous Child Calibrations that inherit settings from their parent Base Calibrations.
Use Base and Child Calibrations to establish a history of your calibration trials to help
you derive a list of optimized solutions for your water system. Inheritance is not
persistent. If you change the Base Calibration, the change does not ripple down to the
Child Calibrations.
You can adjust your model to better match the actual behavior of your water distribution system by using the Darwin Calibrator feature. It allows you to make manual
adjustments on the model as well as adjustments using genetic algorithm optimization.
The left pane of the Darwin Calibrator dialog box displays a list of each calibration
study in the current project, along with the manual and optimized runs and calculated
solutions that make up each study.
11-884
New Optimized Run - Creates a new optimized run. Use this command if you want
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i to efficiently process
and evaluate numerous trial calibrations of
your water system. You can set the optimized
calibration to deliver several solutions for you
to review.
Delete
Rename
11-885
Compute
Hierarchy: Computes the highlighted optimized or manual run as well all the optimized
or manual runs branching from it hierarchically.
Export to Scenario
Report
Graph
Help
The right side of the dialog contains controls that are used to define settings and input
data for Calibration Studies and their component Manual and Optimized Runs. The
controls available on the right side of the dialog box will change depending on what is
highlighted in the list pane:
Calibration Studies
Optimized Runs
Manual Runs
Calibration Solutions
11-886
Calibration Studies
A Calibration Study is the starting point for all calibration operations. A Calibration
study consists of the following components:
Adjustment Groups
Roughness Groups
Demand Groups
Status Elements
Calibration Criteria
Notes (Optional).
11-887
Calibration Studies
The following controls, located above the Field Data Snapshots list pane, allow you to
manage your field data snapshots:
11-888
New
Duplicate
Delete
Rename
Representative Scenario
Choose the scenario that will be used as the base data for the calibration study.
Snapshot Data
Date
Time
Override Scenario
Demand Alternative?
Demand Alternative
11-889
Calibration Studies
Demand Multiplier
Notes
Note:
Observed Target
The Observed Target tab allows you to input calibration target values (node pressure
and hydraulic grade line, as well as pipe flows) that the calibration operations will be
attempting to match. Each row in the table represents a single target observation. The
following controls are available in this tab:
11-890
New
Duplicate
Delete
For each target observation, the table contains the following columns:
Field Data Set
Element
Attribute
Value
Boundary Overrides
Observed boundary conditions such as tank level, pump status and speed and valve
settings are entered in the Boundary Overrides tab. Each row in the table represents a
single boundary override. The following controls are available in this tab:
New
11-891
Calibration Studies
Duplicate
Delete
For each boundary observation, the table contains the following columns:
Field Data Set
Element
Attribute
Value
Demand Adjustments
11-892
Duplicate
Delete
For each demand adjustment, the table contains the following columns:
Field Data Set
Element
Additional Demand
11-893
Calibration Studies
Adjustment Groups
Adjustment groups are groups of elements whose attributes are adjusted together
during the calibration process. You must be careful to group similar elements and not
dissimilar ones. You can adjust the properties for a group as a whole but not for individual members of the group.
There are three kinds of adjustment groups, each of which are created and modified in
their respective calibration study settings tab:
Roughness Groups - Add, edit, delete, or rename Roughness adjustment groups in
the Roughness tab. Each roughness group should comprise elements that have similar
attributes, such as pipes in a location of a similar material and age. Adjustments made
to a group are applied to every element in the group. Click the Export Groups button
to export the Calibration Group ID data to an automatically created user defined
attribute. All elements within a calibration group will have an identical Calibration
Group ID. This allows you to color code by calibration roughness group.
Demand Groups - Add, edit, delete, or rename Demand adjustment groups in the
Demand tab. Adding Demand Calibration adjustment groups introduces more
unknowns into a calibration problem. If available, you should enter more accurate
demand data into your Bentley WaterGEMS V8i model, rather than adding Demand
Adjustment Groups. Consider creating Demand Groups based on usage patterns.
Click the Export Groups button to export the Calibration Group ID data to an automatically created user defined attribute. All elements within a calibration group will have
an identical Calibration Group ID. This allows you to color code by calibration
demand group.
You can automatically create demand groups from selection sets using the Group
Generator. To open the Group Generator click the Create Multiple Design Groups
button.
11-894
Label
Element IDs
Notes
11-895
Calibration Studies
Tip:
The dialog consists of a list of elements that will be used to create demand groups (one
element per group) and a menu that allows you to select the elements that are included
in the list. The menu contains a list of all existing selection sets. Click the elipsis
button to select elements from the drawing directly. When the list contains all of the
elements that you want to be included in demand groups, click OK.
Calibration Criteria
Use the Calibration Criteria tab to set up how the calibrations are evaluated.
The options you specify are applied to every calibration trial in the Calibration Study.
The Calibration Criteria tab contains the following controls:
11-896
Fitness Type - Select the Fitness Type you want to use from the drop down list. In
general, regardless of the fitness type you select, a lower fitness indicates better
calibration. Fitness Types include: Minimize Difference Squares, Minimize
Difference Absolute Values, and Minimize Maximum Difference. For more information, see Calibration Criteria Formulae.
Head/Flow per Fitness Point - Head and Flow per Fitness Type provide a way
for you to weigh the importance of head and flow in your calibration. Set these
values such that the head and flow have unit equivalence. You can give higher
importance to Head or Flow by setting a smaller number for its Per Fitness Point
Value.
Flow Weight Type - Select the type of weight used: None, Linear, Square, Square
Root, and Log. The weighting type you use can provide a greater or lesser fitness
penalty.
In general, measurements with larger flow carry more weight in the optimization
calibrations than those with less flow. You can exaggerate or reduce the effect
larger measurements have on your calibration by selecting different weight types.
For example, using no weighting (None) provides no penalty for measurements
with lesser flow versus those with greater flow. Using log and square root reduces
the fitness penalty for measurements with lesser flow, and using linear or square
increases the fitness penalty for measurements with less flow.
Note:
If you change the Calibration Options, any fitness values you get
are not comparable to fitness values obtained using different
Calibration Options settings.
11-897
Calibration Studies
NF
Fsimnf Fobs nf
Hsimnh Hobs nh
w
wnf
nh
Hpnt
Fpnt
np 1
nf 1
NH NF
NH
NH
wnh
np 1
NF
Fsim nf Fobs nf
Hsimnh Hobs nh
wnf
Hpnt
Fpnt
nf 1
NH NF
Figure 11-2: Minimize Difference Absolute Values
NH
Fsimnf Fobs nf
Hsimnh Hobs nh NF
max max wnh
, max wnf
nf 1
Hpnt
Fpnt
nh 1
Wnh
Hobs nh
Hobsnh
Wnf
Fobs nf
Fobs
nf
The weighting factors may also take many other forms, such as no weight (equal to 1),
linear, square, square root and log functions. Other variables include:
11-898
Optimized Runs
A genetic-algorithm Optimized Run consists of categorized data split among the
following tabs:
Roughness Tab
Demand Tab
Status Tab
Options Tab
Notes Tab
Note:
Roughness Tab
The Roughness tab allows you to select the roughness adjustment groups (which were
defined in the Calibration Study) and the parameters to use during the optimized run.
11-899
Optimized Runs
Minimum Value - Enter the minimum value that you want the genetic algorithm
to use as a lower boundary when calculating fitness solutions.
Maximum Value - Enter the maximum value that you want the genetic algorithm
to use as an upper boundary when calculating fitness solutions.
Increment - Set the increment as the intervals at which you want the GA to test.
Try to choose an increment that gives the least number of possible alternatives.
You may need to decrease the range between your upper and lower limits to do
this.
Demand Tab
The Demand tab allows you to select the demand adjustment groups (which were
defined in the Calibration Study) and the parameters to use during the optimized run.
11-900
Minimum Demand Multiplier - Enter the minimum demand multiplier that you
want the genetic algorithm to use as a lower boundary when calculating fitness
solutions. This field will only be editable for Multiply Original Demand Operations.
Maximum Demand Multiplier - Enter the maximum demand multiplier that you
want the genetic algorithm to use as an upper boundary when calculating fitness
solutions. This field will only be editable for Multiply Original Demand Operations.
Minimum Emitter Coefficient - Enter the minimum emitter coefficient that you
want the genetic algorithm to use as a lower boundary when calculating fitness
solutions. This field will only be editable for Set Emitter Coefficient and Detect
Leakage Node Operations.
Maximum Emitter Coefficient - Enter the maximum emitter coefficient that you
want the genetic algorithm to use as an upper boundary when calculating fitness
solutions. This field will only be editable for Set Emitter Coefficient and Detect
Leakage Node Operations.
11-901
Optimized Runs
Status Tab
Use the Status tab to see the initial status of each of the pipes in each of the Status
Element adjustment groups which were defined in the Calibration Study. For each of
the elements, if the Is Active? box is checked, the associated element will be considered during calibration. If the box is cleared, it will be ignored.
Options Tab
Use the Options tab to refine how Bentley WaterGEMS V8i applies the genetic algorithm (GA) to your optimized calibration trials.
Options
11-902
Reset - Click Reset to restore the software default values for the Darwin Calibration Options.
Fitness Tolerance - Set the precision with which you want the optimized calibration to calculate fitness. As with many of these settings, you should determine a
tolerance that balances accuracy and speed for your water models. Fitness Tolerance works in conjunction with Non-Improvement Generations.
Maximum Trials - Set the maximum number of calibration trials you want the
Optimized Calibration to process before stopping.
Non-Improvement Generations - Set the number of maximum number of nonimprovement generations you want the GA to process without calculating an
improved fitness. If the Optimized Calibration makes this number of calculations
without finding an improvement in fitness that is better than the defined Fitness
Tolerance, the calibration will stop. Non-Improvement Generations works in
conjunction with Fitness Tolerance.
Solutions to Keep - Set the number of fitness solutions that you want to keep.
Rather than presenting you with only one solution, Bentley WaterGEMS V8i
presents you with a customizable number of solutions, so you can review them
manually.
Note:
Advanced Options
The Advanced Options let you customize how the genetic algorithm (GA) performs.
Since genetic-algorithm optimization is a randomly guided search algorithm, different
parameter values may yield a slightly different set of solutions, which can be used for
a sensitivity study of your model calibration.
Note that all values must be positive, not negative. Recommended values are based on
maximizing speed and efficiency.
Reset - Click Reset to restore the software default values for the options.
Maximum Era Number - Lets you controls the number of outer loops the genetic
algorithm (GA) uses. Each outer loop runs over the number of generations with
the same population size. A large value for maximum era number will make the
optimization run longer than a smaller number would. You might want to start
with a low number and increase the number in subsequent runs.
The allowable range for values is greater than or equal to 1. If you use 0 or less,
the Optimized The GA uses values based on what is set for Maximum Trials and
Non-Improvement Generations.
11-903
Optimized Runs
Era Generation Number - Sets the number of generations of each inner loop the
GA uses.
The allowable range for values is greater than or equal to 1. If you use 0 or less,
the Optimized The GA uses values based on what is set for Maximum Trials and
Non-improvement Generations.
Cut Probability - Sets the probability that a GA solution will be split into two
pieces. Setting this value closer to 100% increases the number of cuts made and
reduces the average string (chromosome) length. Increasing Cut Probability
causes solutions to vary more widely from one generation to the next, whereas
decreasing this results in more marginal changes.
The allowable range for values is between 0% and 100%, not inclusive. We
recommend you use a value less than 10%.
Setting the Splice probability closer to 100% increases the demand on system
RAM. If you are getting out-of-memory errors when using GA Optimization, try
reducing the Splice Probability closer to 0% and try increasing the Cut Probability
away from 0%.
Splice Probability - Sets the probability that two GA solutions will be joined
together. A Splice Probability set close to 100% results in long solution strings,
which increases the mixing of alleles (genes) and improves the variety of solutions.
The allowable range for values is between 0% and 100%, not inclusive. We
recommend you use a range from 50% to 90%.
Random Seed - Lets you set the random number generator to a new point.
Changing this value and leaving all other parameters as-is will yield a different
solution set.
The allowable range for values is from 0 to 1, inclusive.
11-904
Penalty Factor - In Darwin Designer, use a penalty factor to help find the solution. A high penalty factor causes the GA to focus on feasible solutions, which do
not violate boundaries of pressure and flow. A low penalty factor (50,000 or so)
permits the GA to consider solutions that are on the boundary between feasible
Notes Tab
Type any notes that you want associated with the calibration.
Manual Runs
A Manual calibration run consists of categorized data split among the following tabs:
Roughness Tab
Demand Tab
Status Tab
Notes Tab
Note:
Roughness Tab
The Roughness tab allows you to select the roughness adjustment groups (which were
defined in the Calibration Study) and the operations to perform during the manual run.
11-905
Manual Runs
The Roughness tab consists of a table containing the following columns:
Value - Type the value you want to be used in conjunction with the operation
during the manual calibration run.
Demand Tab
The Demand tab allows you to select the demand adjustment groups (which were
defined in the Calibration Study) and the parameters to use during the optimized run.
11-906
Demand Multiplier- Type the value you want to be used in conjunction with the
operation during the manual calibration run.
Status Tab
Use the Status tab to view and modify the initial status of each of the pipes in each of
the Status Element adjustment groups which were defined in the Calibration Study.
For each of the elements, if the Is Active? box is checked, the associated element will
be considered during calibration. If the box is cleared, it will be ignored.
To change the initial status of a pipe, click the associated Element Status field and
select the new status. When an initial status has been changed, the associated
Changed? check box will be checked.
Notes Tab
Enter any notes that you want associated with the calibration.
11-907
Calibration Solutions
Calibration Solutions
After computing an optimized or manual run, one or more solutions will appear in the
calibration study list pane. Highlighting a solution makes the following tabs available
on the right side of the dialog:
Solution Tab - The Solution tab displays the adjusted values for each adjustment
group along with a comparison of the original and adjusted value for each element
within each adjustment group. The solution results are filtered by Adjustment Group
Type; click the desired type in the Adjustment Group Type pane.
11-908
Additionally, when a solution is highlighted in the calibration study list pane, the
following controls become available:
Export to Scenario - Click the Export to Scenario button to export the currently
selected Calibration solution to the water flow model. This opens the Export Calibration to Scenario dialog box (for more information, see Calibration Export to
Scenario Dialog Box on page 11-911).
Report - Click the Report button to display a print preview of the solutions data
window.
Graph - Click Graph button to see a graph of your observed data sets versus the
HGL correlation between the Simulated and Observed HGL.
11-909
Calibration Solutions
11-910
Copy:
Print Preview:
Options:
Close:
Help:
Export Scenario?
Export Alternatives:
11-911
OK/Cancel:
Import Snapshots
Multiple snapshots can be imported into calibration study in Darwin Calibrator; the
data should be prepared in a format as in the table below:
Snapshot Label
11-912
Time
Owner
18:00
5:00
8:00
Snapshot Label
Time
Owner
18:00
8:00
8:00
18:00
Once the data source is connected within ModelBuilder, make sure that the attribute is
correctly mapped as follows.
1. Highlight the Snapshot table in the left panel
2. Select Field data Snapshot for Table Type under Setting Tab on the right
3. Map the correct attribute for the snapshot data fields.
Example is given as below.
11-913
Element
Label
Junction
Attribute
Pipe
Discharge
(L/s)
Junction
HGL (m)
Element
Type
even leak hr
8test
xx3
Hydraulic
Grade
276.18
Node
even leak hr
8test
xx9
Hydraulic
Grade
288.68
Node
even leak hr
8test
xx8
Hydraulic
Grade
288.68
Node
even leak hr
5test
xx1
Hydraulic
Grade
292.99
Node
even leak hr
5test
xx7
Hydraulic
Grade
297.58
Node
even leak hr
5test
xx9
Hydraulic
Grade
296.77
Node
even leak hr
5test
aa
13464.96
Pipe
even leak hr
18test
xx3
Hydraulic
Grade
259.84
Node
even leak hr
18test
xx4
Hydraulic
Grade
262.17
Node
even leak hr
18test
xx3
Hydraulic
Grade
280.73
Node
highupstream
leak hr 8test
xx7
Hydraulic
Grade
292.13
Node
highupstream
leak hr 8test
aa
26929.89
Pipe
highupstream
leak hr 8test
xx6
Hydraulic
Grade
292.15
Node
highupstream
leak hr 5test
xx7
Hydraulic
Grade
297.91
Node
highupstream
leak hr 5test
xx4
Hydraulic
Grade
295.03
Node
11-914
Clicking Stop.
11-915
11-916
The GA calculates fitness of each trial solution according to the defined objectives
for the optimization problem. GA only uses objective means to decide what
constitutes a fit solution and what constitutes a less fit solution. The GA has no
way of subjectively assessing a solution other than the methods (weightings) built
into the definition of the fitness calculation. The best solution found by a GA
shouldnt be blindly accepted as being correct. To any single optimization
problem there are likely to be many solutions that closely match the required
objectives. Due to the fact that the GA has no concept of what constitutes a fit
solution, other than its performance against the defined objectives, the GA may
produce solutions that are impractical. That is, the GA cannot think for the engineer, it can only search the combination of choices that are presented to it. If the
engineer doesnt provide the GA with high quality data and enough or sufficiently
flexible options to consider, then the GA may not be able to find a satisfactory
solution. Conversely if the GA is presented with too many possibilities to try (e.g.,
in Darwin Calibrator, if you define excessively large adjustment group ranges
combined with small adjustment increments and a large number of adjustment
groups), then the efficiency of the GA search is reduced, and the likelihood that
the GA will find the correct answer is also greatly reduced. GA is a highly sophisticated search technique, but despite all of its great features, GA still must be used
with a degree of engineering judgment and skill. Only then can the engineer
expect the GA to find solutions that are not only fit but are practical and likely to
represent the real life situation as accurately as possible.
Take note of the error message that is provided along with the calibration engine
was unsuccessful message. It may provide a clue as to why your calibration didnt
run and save you from having to go any further through this list!
Ensure that the scenario model upon which the calibration is based will run properly in Bentley WaterGEMS V8i . Select Analysis > Compute, select the steady
state button, and click GO. If the run obtains either a yellow or green light, then
the hydraulic model runs and this is not the problem.
Ensure that all your roughness and demand group settings are valid and reasonable. For example, ensure that roughness adjustments and/or demand adjustments
are not such that your hydraulic model might have difficulty converging. For
example, make sure that you are not allowing demands to be set too high or pipes
too rough, causing excessive amounts of head loss.
If you have a large number of pipes assigned to status groups, review the need to
include all of those pipes as status decisions and try to minimize the number of
pipes in status groups.
Note:
You may be experiencing low system memory. When running Darwin Calibrator,
be sure to close any other unused applications and if adjusting advanced GA
parameters ensure that you are using a cut probability of more than a few percent,
and a splice probability of less than 90 percent. If your system doesnt have much
RAM (<128Mb), you may also wish to increase the amount of allocated virtual
memory that your system is using. Windows 98/ME users should let Windows
manage virtual memory, however, Windows NT4/2000/XP users may wish to
increase the size of their system paging file. Please see your Microsoft Windows
documentation for information on virtual memory settings specific to your operating system.
11-917
11-918
Ensure that the Time field for each of your field data measurement sets corresponds to the time of day that your measurements were taken. The reason being
that the time entered in your field data set is used to determine demand multipliers
(from hydraulic patterns), which are in turn used to calculate the junction
demands that will be simulated within the GA calibration engine. (The demand at
a junction during a GA calibration run is the product of its baseline demands and
the demand factors at the time specified for the field data set.) Pump settings and
control settings, etc., are also determined from the time setting you specify.
Demand multiplier adjustments and additional junction demands (e.g., fire flow
tests) are in addition to, not in lieu of, junction demands already calculated from
pattern multipliers. Also note that a steady state run in Bentley WaterGEMS V8i
will run with only junction baseline demands applied, whereas a GA calibration
run based on a steady state scenario will still use pattern multipliers for the specified time.
Modifying the status of a link can have significant effects on hydraulic results and
your chances of finding good calibration solutions. If you are using a number of
status group adjustments, you should review why you need those adjustment
groups. It may be better to experiment with these kinds of adjustments manually,
or get somebody to find out whether that valve really is closed and remove the
status decision from the GA calibration. In general, try to keep status adjustment
decisions to a minimum.
Make sure that your adjustment groupings are logical. For example, junctions are
grouped by similar pattern or demands for demand groups and pipes are grouped
by similar size, age and location for roughness groups.
Ensure that you do not have too many adjustment groups or the allowable ranges
and increments for those groups do not allow too many choices for each group.
For example, a roughness group allowed to vary between a Hazen-Williams C of
80 and a Hazen-Williams C of 130, with an increment of 0.1 equates to 500
different possible roughness settings for one group. This is far too high! Try to
choose lower and upper bounds, and an increment that will give you no more than
10-12 possible values. If need be, you can start off with course settings (say 80 to
130 with an increment of 5) initially, and gradually refine the allowable range and
increment to refine your calibration solutions. This applies to both roughness
adjustment groups and also to demand adjustment groups.
Make sure that you have sufficient and quality field data and that it has been
entered correctly. In general, it is a good idea to have as many (or more) field data
measurements as adjustment groups for the calibration, or else your calibration
problem is under-specified. This means that there is likely to be multiple calibration solutions that produce the same or very similar hydraulic results (e.g., solutions that exhibit compensating errors). In theory, there is only one correct
solution, however, due to limits observed for many practical model calibrations,
the more quality field data you can provide, the better chance you have of finding
a solution that is close to the real situation. When assessing the number of field
Make sure that you havent entered field data observations that are made impossible to achieve by any observed boundary conditions, such as an observed grade
out for a PRV set to a different grade.
Note:
Make sure you are using the correct boundary conditions. If you have entered
observations for tank levels etc., ensure that you have not made any errors in
entering the data.
11-919
11-920
Optimizing Capital
Improvement Plans
12
12-921
Darwin Designer
Darwin Designer
Darwin Designer allows you to design new pipe layouts or pipe rehabilitation for
existing pipes. A genetic-algorithm based approach avoids a manual trial and error
approach to finding the most efficient design. Solutions and costs calculated using
Darwin Designer can be exported back to any scenario.
To open Darwin Designer
1. Start Bentley WaterGEMS V8i .
2. Go to Analysis > Darwin Designer.
12-922
Design Study
A design study is a top-level grouping of the pipe design and rehabilitation you want
to do for one complete design project. A design study should be used to represent a
real project unit, such as a system expansion, main replacement, system augmentation,
etc. For different or unrelated projectssuch as a main replacement project and a
project to design a new service areayou should use different, new design studies.
To start using Darwin Designer, you must first create a design study. All Darwin
Designer data exists within design studies.
12-923
Design Study
A design study includes the following
1. A description of the events that serve as the basis for design.
12-924
12-925
Design Study
In the design study, create the groups of pipes for design and rehabilitation, define the
design/rehab options (costs and sizes, etc.), and define constraints and parameters for
your designs. These items get used in the design runs and the computations that
produce your design results.
New
12-926
Delete
Rename
Compute
Export to
Scenario
Report
Click to present the data in the Report Viewer.
Graph
Help
12-927
Design Study
In order to create a design using Darwin Designer you need at least one design event,
however, in many cases you will use more than that. A design event represents a
single time step hydraulic analysis that will be analyzed by Darwin Designer.
New
12-928
Duplicate
Delete
Rename
Scenario
Select the scenario that should be used for the design and
calculations. The menu displays scenarios that have
already been defined in your project.
Scenarios
The scenario selected is what Darwin Designer will base its designs. The scenario
must contain any and all data that will be considered for design purposes. It must be
either a Steady State or EPS scenario.
The types of data that this includes
Topological data, such as the locations of existing and possible new facilities.
Pipes that do not currently exist (Designer will be used to size them); it is recommended that you model them as open pipes with small diameters (e.g., 0.01 inches
or 0.01 mm). It is also advisable to adopt a naming convention, such as FP-1, FP2 (Future Pipe) or GA-P-1, GA-P-2. It is also possible to consider the inclusion/
exclusion of other facilities using topological data.
Physical data, such as pipe diameters, lengths, tank diameters, elevations, etc.
Initial Settings data, such as tank levels, control valve statuses, etc.
Demand data, such as loading patterns, nodal demands, fire flows (as nodal
demands).
12-929
Design Study
After you select a scenario, it is possible within Darwin Designer to set up multiple
design events that specify differences over and above the scenario. It is possible to
specify additional demands and also different boundary conditions. In this way, you
can set up a suite of design events that capture the design requirements of the project.
As an example, the scenario might reference peak hour demands. In this case, you
could set up a design event that uses the scenario unchanged to ensure the design
meets peak hour flows, and then you could add in additional design events that specify
fire flows (additional demands) or emergency conditions, such as pipe breaks
(boundary conditions).
The first component of a design study is the design event that is being analyzed. It is in
the design event that you describe the flows that must be delivered and the constraints
that must be met.
There are several different ways to modify or overwrite the demands in the representative scenario.
Adjust demands with a fixed multiplierIn some cases, the demands for the
representative scenario might be for an average day and you would like to adjust
them for a peak hour. To do so, enter a demand multiplier to adjust it. Note that the
multiplier you should enter is the value needed to adjust the demands at the specified time to the desired value. Assuming that the time from start was already 7
hours, which equated to 7 a.m. in a particular model, and you want to adjust
demands up to the 9 p.m. peak. Rather than enter the 9 p.m. peak multiplier, you
should enter the ratio of the 7 a.m. multiplier and the 9 p.m. multiplier. For
example, if the 7 a.m. multiplier is 1.3 and the 9 p.m. multiplier is 1.6, then 1.23
should be used as the demand multiplier. This is illustrated as follows:
1.3 x 1.23 = 1.6
Thus it is true to say that the demand for any single junction is calculated by:
Qc = Qb * DMt * DM
Where:
Qc = calculated flow
Qb = base flow
DMt = demand multiplier at time t (Time from start) determined for
demand patterns
DM = specified demand multiplier (default is 1.0)
12-930
Label
Start Time
Design Time
Scenario start time plus time from start. This is the clock
time that the Time From Start value represents.
Time from
Start (hours)
Override
Scenario
Demand
Alternative?
Demand
Alternative
Demand
Multiplier
Notes
12-931
Design Study
Boundary conditions can be used to override initial settings from the design representative scenario for a design event. For example, if you want to simulate a pipe break,
you can set the status of a pipe to closed for a pipe-outage design event. Similarly,
valve settings can be applied, tank levels, and so on. Without a specified boundary
condition for a design event, Darwin Designer will apply the initial settings from the
representative scenario when evaluating the corresponding design event.
When calculating an EPS model to get boundary conditions, Darwin Designer uses the
sizes, demands, etc., that are present in the representative scenario. If the representative scenario includes lots of unsized pipes, then you will need to override the appropriate boundary conditions (such as, a tank in a new part of the model). If you do not
specify a time step on the Demand Adjustments tab, the initial conditions at time 0
will be used.
You only need to explicitly state a boundary condition if you wish to change it from
the default. Do not try to look at boundary conditions by selecting All Pipes or All
Pumps because this sets all pipes to Closed or all pumps to Off.
12-932
New
Delete
Initialize
Table from
Selection
Set
Click OK to run.
Load from
Model
Click to open the Load from Model box. Load settings and
Click OK to run.
12-933
Design Study
Design
Event
Element
Attribute
Value
12-934
New
Delete
Initialize
Table from
Selection
Set
Click OK to run.
12-935
Design Study
Design
Event
Node
Additional
Demand
12-936
New
Delete
Initialize
Table from
Selection
Set
Click OK to run.
12-937
Design Study
Design
Event
Node
Min.
Pressure
Max.
Pressure
Consider
Pressure
Benefit?
12-938
New
Delete
Initialize
Table from
Selection
Set
Click OK to run.
12-939
Design Study
Design
Event
Pipe
Min. Velocity
Set a minimum velocity that you require for the selected set
of pipes. Violations of this boundary are displayed when
you calculate your network.
Max.
Velocity
Consider
Pressure
Benefit?
2. Click New
3. Select the new event in the Label field and click rename
4. Type a name for the design event and then click OK.
12-940
New
Delete
Label
12-941
Design Study
Rehab Groups tab
New
Delete
Label
1. Click New
12-942
Click Select.
5. Use the Select box to either choose items from the drawing to include in the
group, or click Query to build a query for this group.
Click Done
when finished.
12-943
Design Study
6. Click OK to create the group or Cancel to exit without creating the group.
7. The Element ID field will show the new Collection and the Element IDs <Count>
field will show the number of pipes in the group.
2. In the Selection Set box, you can either remove the pipes and/or junctions you
want to include in your group, or add additional pipes and/or junctions.
3. After you have selected the elements, click OK to apply your changes to the group
or click Cancel to exit without making any changes.
Costs/Properties tab
Costs/Properties are used by Darwin Designer to determine the hydraulic effect and
calculate the capital cost of the solutions it generates. Cost/Properties come in two
types: Design Option Groups (new pipes) and Rehab Option Groups (rehabilitation
actions).
12-944
Rehab Options (rehab actions and associated post action functions) are defined by
adding rehab option groups.
Each option group contains a set of options that Darwin Designer can select from in
order to create its hydraulic solutions. Design Option Groups are used where you are
designing a new system or part of a system and brand new pipes need to be installed.
Rehab Option Groups are used when you are examining the effect of rehabilitating
(cleaning, lining, etc.) existing pipes.
12-945
Design Study
Darwin Designer has the ability to not only size new pipes from a range of possible
available pipe sizes, but it can also determine whether a particular pipe needs to be
constructed at all. To get Designer to determine whether a pipe needs to be constructed
at all, simply add a zero diameter option to the pipe option group. The zero diameter
option should also attract a cost of zero (in this case, roughness is redundant). The
zero size option can be used to size parallel pipes and it can also be used to determine
the optimal design layout, whereby more pipes are being sized than are necessary to
service all demands.
For pipes that are essential for service and that must be sized, define and use a pipeoption group that contains no zero diameter option.
12-946
New
Duplicate
Rename
Delete
New/
Delete
Material
Diameter
Hazen
Williams C
Factor
Unit Cost
12-947
Design Study
For Rehab Option Groups
12-948
New/
Delete
Action
Pre-Rehab
Diameter
vs. Post
Rehab
Diameter
Function
Pre-Rehab
vs. PostRehab
Cost
Function
Pre-Rehab
Diameter
vs. Post
Rehab
Function
12-949
Design Study
Rehabilitation Functions
Use the Rehabilitation Functions manager to create a rehabilitation function.
To create a rehabilitation function from within a table in the Cost/Properties tab
1. Click in one of Pre-Rehab fields and click the ellipsis () to open the Rehab
Functions manager.
2. Click New to open the menu and select one of the options.
3. Type in the necessary information in the corresponding field.
4. Click Close.
12-950
Design
Objectives
Pressure
Benefit
12-951
Design Study
Notes Tab
Use the Notes tab to type comments about your project and read things like log entries
and dates.
In Designer:
Selection Set - This menu contains a list of selection sets. Choose the one that
contains the data you want to load.
Design Event - This menu contains a list of the design events. Choose the destination
for the selection set data initialization.
In Darwin Calibrator:
Selection Set - This menu contains a list of selection sets. Choose the one that
contains the data you want to load.
Owner Element - This menu contains a list of the field data snapshots. Choose the
destination for the selection set data initialization
12-952
or
or
Each time you want to run an optimization, you can create a new run or edit an
existing run.
Design runs can either be GA optimized or manual runs. A GA optimized design run
uses genetic-algorithm optimization to optimize the selected objective (e.g., minimize
cost) for your design. A manual design run allows you to make a single selection of
pipe sizes and/or rehabilitation actions in order to evaluate the specified design against
the same criterion as a GA optimized design. The difference between the two kinds of
run is that a manual run does not use GA optimization, and it executes a single solution evaluation using the pipe sizes and rehabilitation options that you selected.
12-953
Design
Events
Is Active?
12-954
Design
Pipe
Group
Is Active?
Design
Group
Option
For each design group, you must select the design option
group (set of possible pipe sizes) you want to use.
Rehabilitat
ion Group
Is Active?
Design
Option
Group
For each design group, you can select the design option
group you want to use.
12-955
Stopping
Criteria
Top
Solutions
12-956
Notes Tab
Use the Notes tab to type comments about your project and read things like log entries
and dates.
You might use a manual design to test some hand calculations you have made or
to reproduce an optimized design that you want to force manual overrides.
You could create a manual design run in which you force the groups of pipes to
specific sizes.
You might create a rehabilitation design that forces groups to use specific actions.
12-957
Design
Pipe
Group
(Design
Groups
tab)
Rehabilitat
ion Group
(Rehab
Groups
tab)
Is Active?
Design
Option
Group
For each design group, you can select the design option
group you want to use.
Manual
Selection
Note:
You must have at least one active design or rehab group set to a
valid design or rehab option group.
After you have computed your design run, Solutions is added to the project list.
12-958
Solution
Fitness
Total
Benefit
This only has a value for Maximize Benefit and MultiObjective Trade-off calculations. This is a score of the
calculated benefits, with a higher value indicating more
benefit in terms of improved network pressure.
Total Cost
12-959
2. Click the Solution tab to view Pipe Group Type information for Design Groups
and Rehab Groups.
12-960
Pipe label
Hazen-Williams C
Diameter
Cost.
Pipe label
Cost.
The Pressure tab in the Solutions area displays information about junction pressures
12-961
Element
Simulated pressure
Violation - any calculated pressures that fall below the minimum or above the
maximum (as a negative number if below the minimum, as a positive one if above
the maximum).
The Flow tab in the Solutions area displays information about junction pressures
Element
Minimum velocity
Maximum velocity
Simulated Flow
Violation - any calculated velocities that fall below the minimum or above the
maximum (as a negative number if below the minimum, as a positive one if above
the maximum)
Report Viewer
You can view, print, and search reports you create about your optimization.
You can select the following options from within the Report Viewer:
12-962
Copy
Find
Single/Multiple Page
Zoom Out/Zoom In
Previous Page/Next
Page
Backward/Forward
2. Click Report
12-963
12-964
Pareto Optimal PlotShows Benefit versus Cost for your calculations, provided
you have used Maximum Benefit or Multi-Objective Trade-off Design Parameters.
Pipe Size Usage PlotShows the total length of pipe of a certain diameter used
by the solution.
Copy
Print Preview
Options
Close
Help
Copy
Print Preview
12-965
Maximize Benefit
5
4.5
4
3.5
3
5
4
2.5
2
1.5
1
0.5
0
1
2
10
15
20
Minimize Cost
Non-Inferior Solutions vs. Inferior Solutions
When you choose to do cost-benefit trade-off design, Darwin Designer minimizes the
cost and maximizes the benefit. Both objectives conflict, because minimizing the cost
of a design diminishes the benefit instead of improving it. Darwin Designer searches
for non-inferior solutions. Non-inferior, or Pareto optimal (after Pareto, an Italian
economist), solutions are the set of solutions for which no solution can give a better
value of one objective without having a worse value for another objective, as shown in
A Plot of Pareto Optimal Front.
12-966
35
Benefit
(pressure improvement)
30
Non-Inferior
Solutions
25
20
15
10
Inferior Solutions
5
0
50
150
250
350
450
Cost (1000$)
A Plot Of Pareto Optimal Front
For example, one solution may cost $5 million and have a pressure benefit of 2 (high
is good), while another may cost $6 million and have a pressure benefit of 2.2. Neither
is clearly superior but neither is clearly inferior; they are both non-inferior to one
another.
When working with multiple objectives, there is not likely to be a single solution that
is superior for all objectives. Therefore, when multiple objectives are involved, you
must chose between a number of non-inferior solutions.
Darwin eliminates the thousands of inferior solutions and provides two ways to
compare non-inferior solutions:
1. Solution comparison table.
2. Pareto optimal plot.
12-967
2. Click Graph
12-968
Export to Scenario
Use Export to Scenario to pass your results and optimized network for use in Bentley
WaterGEMS V8i .
1. Expand the Solutions folder and select one of the solutions to export.
12-969
4. By default, Bentley WaterGEMS V8i uses the name of the design run as the name
for the scenario and alternatives you export. In order to rename the scenarios and
alternatives using the same name, not the design run name, check the Use
Scenario Name for Alternatives box and type in the Export to Scenario Name
field; the text boxes for the alternatives will match what you type.
12-970
8. To view the exported alternatives, click on the Alternatives tab in the Scenario
manager.
12-971
Schema Augmentation
The Schema Augmentation dialog box opens if the Bentley WaterGEMS V8i file
does not contain the Darwin Designer schema.
A schema is the series of tables and table cells that contain your data. A schema
change typically means a table or table cells have been added, usually by an update to
the software.
When you use Schema Augmentation, Bentley WaterGEMS V8i adds any missing
tables to the schema of the file you are using. Updating a schema should not damage
your data but we do recommend you create a backup. Select the Create backup:
*.bak check box to create a backup of your existing database. It will be saved in its
current directory but will have .BAK appended to the filename.
To restore the backup, delete or move your current .MDB file and then rename your
backup file by deleting the .BAK extension, so the extension becomes only .MDB.
You can set the value, precision, and format for the data:
12-972
Scientific:
Fixed Point:
General:
Number:
Verification Summary
If you try to calculate a network using invalid Darwin Designer settings, the Designer
Data Verification Summary displays. This dialog box means that there are some
invalid settings in your run that prevent Darwin Designer from calculating your solution.
12-973
Do you have active design groups that are assigned to valid design option tables?
You need at least one active design group that corresponds to a design option
table.
Is it possible that elements have been deleted from the model from another client
application? If so, close Darwin Designer and re-open it. Darwin Designer will
update itself based on the latest GEMS model, deleting any references to deleted
elements.
12-974
There must be a unit cost for each diameter that is included in the cost calculation. No
interpolation is done. For example, if a 10 in. (250 mm) pipe is included in the
scenario for which costs are calculated but a unit price for a 10 in. pipe is not included
in the cost function, the cost calculation will fail and an error "Unable to match at least
one scenario derived pipe diameter to the specified cost table" will appear under user
notifications. To correct this, add the unit cost for that diameter.
12-975
Each group should be created so that the individual pipes in the groups will share the
same cost function.
When doing manual cost estimating, there is no need to use the tabs for Design events,
Rehabilitation Groups, Design Type or Notes.
Calculating Costs
To perform the cost calculation, select New > New Manual Cost Estimate Run from
above the left pane.
12-976
12-977
12-978
Cost
Cost of Tank
Where, X is some large diameter sufficient for the expected flows to and from
the tank.
12-979
12-980
Make sure that you have a reasonable number of design and/or rehab
groups. As an extreme example, consider that every pipe to be design was in
the same group. Then the only possible solution that the optimization can
arrive at is to construct all of the pipes the same size. While it may still be
12-981
12-982
12-983
12-984
12-985
12-986
Optimizing Pump
Operations
13
Energy Costs
Energy Costs Manager
Energy Pricing Manager
Energy Cost Analysis Calculations
Energy Cost Results
Energy Cost Alternative
Energy Costs
Energy Costs can be used to calculate the cost of energy and numerous other auxiliary
values for a given extended period scenario (EPS). The calculations are valid for
either constant speed or variable speed pumping.
Energy cost calculations are created in the Energy Cost Manager.
To open the Energy Cost Manager, go to Analysis > Energy Costs or click
Specify the pumps, tanks, and variable speed pump batteries that are to be
included in the energy cost calculations.
13-987
Energy Costs
To access the Energy Costs manager, click the Analysis menu and select the Energy
Costs command, or click the Energy Costs button
The left pane consists of a tree view that contains the name of the base scenario when
it is first opened. Click the scenario icon to activate controls in the right side of the
dialog that will allow you to specify the elements that will be used in the energy cost
calculations.
Use the Compute button
13-988
13-989
Energy Costs
3. Click New
4. Click Delete
5. Click Rename
13-990
13-991
Energy Costs
13-992
Pump Usage
The most important results in the Pump Usage summary are the Total Energy Use
Cost and the Average Efficiency, either pump or wire-to-water.
There are tabs for Pumps and Variable Speed Pump Batteries.
Time Details
The Time Details summary gives the energy usage study summed up over all the
selected elements. These results can also be copied to the clipboard or displayed in a
report using the Copy and Report buttons above the table.
13-993
Energy Costs
Some values in the table are instantaneous values at that time and others are incremental values from that time to the next time. For example:
The value of 1309 for discharge is the instantaneous value at time 0, while the incremental volume pumped is the volume pump from the previous time step until time
equals 0. At time 3, the instantaneous value for flow is 1343 gpm but the value for
Incremental volume pumped is the volume pumped between times 2 and 3, which is
(1341*60/106)=0.08. Incremental values at time t(i) are the value between t(i-1) and
t(i). Attributes such as wire power, efficiency, and cumulative energy used are instantaneous values corresponding to t(i).
You can also view the results in graph form by clicking on the Graph tab.
You can copy the graph to the clipboard for use in other software and you can open the
Graph Editor to change the appearance of the graph. (See Tee Chart editor for more
information.)
If you change the default settings for the Graph Manager, they are applied to all
graphs as long as you remain in the Energy Cost Manager. Once you close the energy
cost manager, the graph manager goes back to the default settings.
13-994
Pump Results
Below Time Details icon is a Pumps folder containing an icon for each individual
pump. Clicking one of these pump icons will display results for that pump. It includes
the information that is in the time details report, except it only includes results for one
pump at a time. An additional column is shown for pump speed.
You can also view the results in graph form by clicking on the Graph tab.
You can copy the graph to the clipboard for use in other software and you can open the
Graph Editor to change the appearance of the graph. (See Tee Chart editor for more
information.)
13-995
Energy Costs
If you change the default settings for the Graph manager, they are applied to all graphs
as long as you remain in the Energy Cost manager. Once you close the Energy Cost
manager, the Graph manager goes back to the default settings.
Storage
The values displayed in the storage table show the value of energy that is used by
draining water from a tank or gained by storing water in a tank.
These results can also be copied to the clipboard or displayed in a report using the
Copy and Report buttons above the table.
13-996
Peak Demands
The results in the Peak Demands table are used to determine the cost for capacity/
demand/peaking charges that are based on peak energy use. These costs are usually
applied to the energy cost as a lump sum each billing period. The table also divides the
cost by the length of the billing period to determine the daily cost so that it can be
added to the energy costs. Peak demand charges are usually set on a peak water use
day or a day with a special event, such as a fire or large main break. Demand charges
are not set on an average day.
These results can also be copied to the clipboard or displayed in a report using the
Copy and Report buttons above the table.
13-997
Energy Costs
The base energy cost alternative is assigned to any scenario by default. If you want to
use another energy cost alternative in a scenario, you must specify that alternative in
the scenario.
13-998
Optimizing Pump
Schedules Using
14
Darwin Scheduler
Darwin Scheduler is a state of the art tool for optimizing pump operation that works
by using genetic algorithm optimization to control nominated pumps during an
extended period simulation (EPS). The genetic algorithm optimization technique
works by evolving near optimal solutions over generations of trial solutions. To reach
an optimal solution it is normally expected to have to evaluate tens of thousands of
solutions, sometimes more. One problem with this fact is that EPS simulations can be
time consuming, especially for larger or more complicated models, and therefore run
times for Darwin Scheduler can be correspondingly long. These best practices and tips
offer suggestions and recommendations for using Darwin Scheduler in order to get the
best performance and results out of the tool.
14-999
14-1000
Speed
Choices
Solution Space
(1 hour time
step)
Solution Space
(2 hour time
step)
Solution Space
(3 hour time
step)
4.7E+18
2.2E+09
1.7E+06
12
7.9E+25
8.9E+12
4.3E+08
18
1.3E+30
1.2E+15
1.1E+10
2.2E+37
4.7E+18
2.8E+12
12
6.3E+51
7.9E+25
1.8E+17
18
1.8E+60
1.3E+30
1.2E+20
1.1E+56
1.0E+28
4.7E+18
12
5.0E+77
7.1E+38
7.9E+25
18
2.4E+90
1.5E+45
1.3E+30
5.0E+74
2.2E+37
8.0E+24
12
4.0E+103
6.3E+51
3.4E+34
18
3.2E+120
1.8E+60
1.5E+40
14-1001
14-1002
14-1003
Darwin Scheduler
characteristic of genetic algorithm optimization is its ability to find solutions that my
be very close in terms of hydraulic performance, but may be themselves quite
different. Engineers are therefore able to discriminate between optimized solutions
based on other perhaps non hydraulic criteria.
Darwin Scheduler
Darwin Scheduler allows you to optimize pump operations. By using genetic algorithm optimization to control nominated pumps during an extended period simulation
(EPS), it avoids a manual trial and error approach to finding the most efficient operating schedule. Solutions and costs calculated using Darwin Scheduler can be
exported back to the selected scenario.
14-1004
New Scheduler Study: Creates a new Scheduler Study in the list pane.
New Optimized Run: Creates a new Optimized Run under the Scheduler
Study that is currently highlighted in the list pane.
Delete: Deletes the item that is currently highlighted in the list pane.
Rename: Allows you to rename the item that is currently highlighted in the
list pane.
Compute: Computes the optimized run that is currently highlighted in the list
pane.
Report: Opens a preformatted report containing the data for the currently
highlighted solution.
Graph: Opens a graph containing the data for the currently highlighted solution.
14-1005
Darwin Scheduler
Scheduler Study
A Scheduler Study is the top-level grouping of the settings and input data related to
the optimization to be performed. This includes picking a scenario to optimize,
defining pump decisions, constraints and objective elements.
To start using Darwin Scheduler, you must create a Scheduler Study. All Darwin
Scheduler data resides within the Scheduler Study.
A Scheduler Study includes the following:
1. The scenario to optimize.
2. The set of pumps being scheduled.
3. Constraints that must be met by the solutions offered after a run.
4. Energy price data and tank definitions to be used during the optimization.
5. The type of objective.
6. Genetic algorithm options and parameters.
7. The results of optimized runs.
It is apparent that one or more of these items will be different between different scheduler studies, hence the ability to create as many scheduler studies as you need.
14-1006
Scenario Tab
The Scenario tab allows you to select the scenario to optimize.
Select the scenario from the menu or click the Scenarios button
to open a dialog
that displays the scenario hierarchy and allows you to select the desired scenario.
Pumps and pump batteries are allowable selections. For pump batteries Scheduler will
also optimize the number of running lag pumps at each control time in addition to
choosing the status of the main (or lead) pump.
14-1007
Darwin Scheduler
This tab consists of a table that lists the pumps you have selected to optimize and a
toolbar that consists of the following buttons:
Initialize Table from Selection Set: Opens the Initialize Table from Selection Set dialog, which allows you to select a predefined selection set that will be
used to automatically fill in the table.
Select from Drawing: Alows you to select one or more elements from the
drawing.
Constraints Tab
This tab is divided into sub-tabs that allow you to define the constraints for pressure,
velocity, number of pump starts, and tank levels.
14-1008
Initialize Table from Selection Set: Opens the Initialize Table from Selection Set dialog, which allows you to select a predefined selection set that will be
used to automatically fill in the table.
Select from Drawing: Alows you to select one or more elements from the
drawing.
Then enter the Minimum and Maximum global constraints. To override the global
constraint at a node, check the corresponding Override Defaults? box and enter the
values for the new minimum and maximum pressure in the corresponding fields.
14-1009
Darwin Scheduler
Velocity Tab
This tab allows you to specify a global maximum velocity constraint, and then to override it locally at specified nodes if desired.
Initialize Table from Selection Set: Opens the Initialize Table from Selection Set dialog, which allows you to select a predefined selection set that will be
used to automatically fill in the table.
Select from Drawing: Alows you to select one or more elements from the
drawing.
Then enter the Maximum global velocity constraint. To override the global constraint
at a node, check the corresponding Override Defaults? box and enter the value for the
new maximum velocity in the corresponding field.
14-1010
Initialize Table from Selection Set: Opens the Initialize Table from Selection Set dialog, which allows you to select a predefined selection set that will be
used to automatically fill in the table.
Select from Drawing: Alows you to select one or more elements from the
drawing.
Then enter the Maximum global pump starts constraint. The maximum pump starts
constraint applies to the number of pump starts for the duration of the optimized
schedule. To override the global constraint at a pump, check the corresponding Override Defaults? box and enter the number of maximum pump starts in the corresponding field.
14-1011
Darwin Scheduler
Tank Tab
This tab allows you to specify the minimum final tank levels.
Initialize Table from Selection Set: Opens the Initialize Table from Selection Set dialog, which allows you to select a predefined selection set that will be
used to automatically fill in the table.
Select from Drawing: Alows you to select one or more elements from the
drawing.
Then enter the minimum final level constraint. For each tank added to the list the
current minimum, maximum and initial levels are shown to assist you in entering a
correct minimum final level value.
14-1012
Initialize Table from Selection Set: Opens the Initialize Table from Selection Set dialog, which allows you to select a predefined selection set that will be
used to automatically fill in the table.
Select from Drawing: Alows you to select one or more elements from the
drawing.
14-1013
Darwin Scheduler
Then select an energy pricing pattern from the menu for each pump in the table. To
create a new energy pricing pattern, click the ellipsis button (...) to open the Energy
Pricing manager (see Energy Pricing Manager for more information).
Variable Speed Pump Batteries Tab
This tab allows you to associate the energy pricing pattern with the variable speed
pump batteries (VSPBs) you select.
14-1014
Initialize Table from Selection Set: Opens the Initialize Table from Selection Set dialog, which allows you to select a predefined selection set that will be
used to automatically fill in the table.
Select from Drawing: Alows you to select one or more elements from the
drawing.
Initialize Table from Selection Set: Opens the Initialize Table from Selection Set dialog, which allows you to select a predefined selection set that will be
used to automatically fill in the table.
Select from Drawing: Alows you to select one or more elements from the
drawing.
For each row, select a tank from the menu or click the ellipsis button (...) to select one
or more tanks from the drawing.
14-1015
Darwin Scheduler
Minimize Energy Use: This type will try to minimize the energy used. The effect
of tariffs making energy cheaper at certain times is neglected in this type of optimization.
Minimize Energy Cost: This type uses energy tariffs and peak demand charges to
calculate the cost of energy used.
Notes Tab
This tab allows you to enter descriptive notes that will be associated with the Scheduler Study.
Optimized Run
A Scheduler Study can contain one or more Optimized Runs. The settings for an optimized Run consist of selecting the pumps to optimize, selecting the objective elements
to use, and the genetic algorithm options and parameters that will be govern the optimization.
14-1016
Include in Optimization?: When this box is checked, the associated pump will be
included in the optimization.
Decision Type: This field allows you to select whether the associated pump is
Fixed Speed or Variable Speed.
Speed (Minimum): The minimum speed for a variable speed pump. This field is
only editable when the associated pump is a Variable Speed Decision Type.
Speed (Maximum): The maximum speed for a variable speed pump.This field is
only editable when the associated pump is a Variable Speed Decision Type.
Speed (Increment): Set the increment as the lowest value that a variable speed
pumps speed can be increased or decreased by. This field is only editable when
the associated pump is a Variable Speed Decision Type.
Allow Off Setting?:When tis box is checked, 0 speed is included in the options
for variable speed pumps, in addition to the allowable choices between the
minimum and maximum speed. This field is only editable when the associated
pump is a Variable Speed Decision Type.
Time From Start: This value, in conjunction with the Duration value, allows you
to limit the scheduling period in which the associated pump may run. For instance,
if the user wants to schedule one pump group only from 6am to 6pm for an EPS
staring at 12am, they would enter a time from start as 6 hours, and duration as 12
hours. The scheduler engine will ensure the pumps are not running at all other
times.
Duration: This value, in conjunction with the Time From Start value, allows you
to limit the scheduling period in which the associated pump may run. For instance,
if the user wants to schedule one pump group only from 6am to 6pm for an EPS
staring at 12am, they would enter a time from start as 6 hours, and duration as 12
hours. The scheduler engine will ensure the pumps are not running at all other
times.
14-1017
Darwin Scheduler
To include a variable speed pump battery, check the associated Include in Energy
Calculation? box.
14-1018
Options Tab
This tab allows you to define the genetic algorithm options and parameters that will be
govern the optimization.
14-1019
Darwin Scheduler
Genetic Algorithm Options Tab
This tab allows you to define the genetic algorithm options.
Random Seed: Lets you set the random number generator to a new point.
Changing this value and leaving all other parameters as-is will yield a different
solution set.
Top Solutions to Keep: Set the number of solutions that you want to keep. Rather
than presenting you with only one solution, Scheduler presents you with a
customizable number of solutions, so you can review them manually.
Click the Reset button to rest all of the options on this tab to the factory defaults.
14-1020
Elite Population Size: Size of an elite population of chromosomes that is maintained in parallel to the main generic algorithm population.
Number of Crossover Points: Defines the number of locations along each parent
chromosome where the chromosome is cut in order to be crossed over with the
other parent. This field is only editable when the Algorithm is set to Simple
Genetic Algorithm.
14-1021
Darwin Scheduler
Probability of Creeping Down: The probability that a gene in a child chromosome will mutate to a smaller value (e.g., lower pump speed) versus a higher
value (e.g., higher pump speed). This field is only editable when the Algorithm is
set to Simple Genetic Algorithm.
Probability of Cut: Sets the probability that a GA solution will be split into two
pieces. Setting this value closer to 100% increases the number of cuts made and
reduces the average string (chromosome) length. Increasing Cut Probability
causes solutions to vary more widely from one generation to the next, whereas
decreasing this results in more marginal changes.
The allowable range for values is between 0% and 100%, not inclusive. We
recommend you use a value less than 10%.
Setting the Splice probability closer to 100% increases the demand on system
RAM. If you are getting out-of-memory errors when using GA Optimization, try
reducing the Splice Probability closer to 0% and try increasing the Cut Probability
away from 0%.
This field is only editable when the Algorithm is set to Fast Messy Genetic Algorithm.
Probability of Splice: Sets the probability that two GA solutions will be joined
together. A Splice Probability set close to 100% results in long solution strings,
which increases the mixing of alleles (genes) and improves the variety of solutions.
The allowable range for values is between 0% and 100%, not inclusive. We
recommend you use a range from 50% to 90%.
This field is only editable when the Algorithm is set to Fast Messy Genetic Algorithm.
Probability of Elite Mate: The probability that a chromosome from the elite
population is selected as a parent for the next generation at the point in the genetic
algorithm where parent selection is conducted.
Click the Reset button to rest all of the parameters on this tab to the factory defaults.
14-1022
Maximum Eras: The maximum number of eras to run the genetic algorithm optimization. This field is only editable when the Algorithm is set to Fast Messy
Genetic Algorithm.
Maximum Trials: Set the maximum number of trials you want the Optimized
Run to process before stopping.
Click the Reset button to rest all of the criteria on this tab to the factory defaults.
14-1023
Darwin Scheduler
Penalty Factors Tab
This tab allows you to define the penalty factors that help narrow down the results.
Define penalty factors to help find the solution. A high penalty factor causes the GA to
focus on feasible solutions, which do not violate boundaries of pressure, velocity,
pump starts, or tank levels. A low penalty factor (50,000 or so) permits the GA to
consider solutions that are on the boundary between feasible and infeasible solutions,
possibly violating your defined boundaries by a small amount. Because the optimal
solution often resides in the boundary between feasible and infeasible solutions, a high
penalty factor causes the GA to find a feasible solution quickly but is less likely to
find the optimal solution.
From a practical standpoint, you might consider starting with a high penalty factor and
working towards a lower penalty factor as you pursue an optimal solution.
By defining penalty factors for Pressure, Velocity, Pump Starts, and Tank Final Level,
you can weight these various considerations according to which is most important to
you.
Click the Reset button to rest all of the factors on this tab to the factory defaults.
Notes Tab
This tab allows you to enter descriptive notes that will be associated with the Optimized Run.
14-1024
Solutions
After an Optimized Run has been computed, a number of solutions will appear in the
list pane.
Highlighting the top-level Solutions folder will display a Solution Summary for each
of the solutions generated by Scheduler.
When you highlight one of the Solutions, the tabbed area will display three tabs
containing all of the solution data.
14-1025
Darwin Scheduler
The table on the top of the tabbed pane displays a summary of the results for each of
the pump decisions. Click on a pump in the summary table to see the details for that
pump in the Pump Decision Details table at the bottom.
Constraints Tab
This tab displays the constraints summary and details.
14-1026
14-1027
Darwin Scheduler
The toolbar along the top of the dialog consists of the following buttons:
14-1028
Print Preview: Opens a print preview window, allowing you to see how the
plot will look when it is printed.
Options: Opens the TeeChart Options dialog, allowing you to customize the
plot settings.
Check the Export Scenario? box to export the solution to a new scenario. You can
change the default name of the new scenario by typing a different one in the Name
field.
You can also change the names of the Physical, Active Topology, and Operational
Alternatives that will be created by entering the new name in the approriate field.
g. Specify the objective type (either minimize energy use or minimize energy
cost).
h. Create a new Optimized Run.
14-1029
Select whether pumps will be optimized as fixed speed or variable speed, their
allowable speed settings (if variable speed), whether pumps are allowed to be
turned off (if variable speed) and also whether the pumps are optimized for
the entire EPS or a portion of it. Note that if optimizing only a portion of the
EPS (for any one pump decision) Scheduler turns off pumps outside of the
portion of the schedule being optimized. For example, for a 24 hour EPS run a
pump decision that is set for a time from start of 12 hours and duration of 12
hours will be off from time 0 to time <12, and optimized for time 12 to time
<24. The pump will be off at time 24 to ensure a repeatable schedule).
j.
Select which objective elements to include in the optimization objective function (by default all included in the study are selected).
k. Choose which genetic algorithm you wish to use and adjust any required
parameters (see a later FAQ for information on these settings).
l.
m. Optionally stop the optimized run mid flight and review results and resume
the run if results are favorable.
n. When the optimized run is complete, review summary results in Darwin
Scheduler and choose solutions to export.
o. Export the chosen solutions to a new scenario.
p. Run the exported scenarios.
q. Run an energy costs analysis.
r.
s.
It should be noted that the steps from the point of setting up the Scheduler study to
exporting solutions and reviewing results can be performed in an iterative loop with
adjustments made to the Darwin Scheduler input based on the results of the first set of
optimization runs, aimed at improving or re-directing the next set of optimized run
results. This is in fact the recommended work flow for using Darwin Scheduler.
2) What is the control interval used by Darwin Scheduler for my EPS optimization?
Darwin Scheduler uses a control interval defined by the hydraulic time-step of the
EPS being optimized. This is done since to apply a change in pump setting/status a
new steady state simulation is required and so it makes the most sense to align this
with the hydraulic time step. To this end, you can reduce the number of pump decisions the optimization needs to make by increasing the hydraulic time step say from 1
hour to 2 hours or 2 hours to 3 hours. Any intermediate time steps that need to be
simulated (such as for tanks filling or controls triggering) will still be simulated as per
normal EPS protocol.
14-1030
3) Can Darwin Scheduler be used to optimize very large models and very large
numbers of pumps in a single run? If so, what is the best way to use Scheduler for
such problems?
We've built no hard limits into Scheduler to prevent it from being used with very large
hydraulic models, with very fine control intervals or with lots of pump decisions,
however, the performance of Darwin Scheduler in terms of both run time and also
optimization results is dependent on the user applying reasonable engineering judgment to minimize the complexity of the problem to be solved and also ensuring the
model upon which the optimization is based runs as fast as possible.
Consider an EPS mode that takes 10 seconds to solve and factor in that for a reasonable sized solution space it may take 100,000 trial solutions to achieve a near global
optimum. The computer time needed to evaluate 100,000 trial solutions is 1,000,000
seconds or 278 hours, or 11.5 days. Most people will probably not want to run optimization runs that last 11.5 days so there needs to be an appreciation that the time needed
for the optimization is a function of the time to solve the model. There are a number of
ways that the run time for a model can be reduced, but the main one is skeletonization,
which if done correctly (such as using hydraulic equivalent skeletonization) can
reduce run time significantly whilst having little or no effect on system hydraulics nor
upon the results of an energy optimization.
The other side of the equation in terms of optimization performance is the number of
trials required to reach a near global optimum. We've used 100,000 trials above as a
reasonable number of trials, but depending on the size of the solution space (the
complexity of the optimization problem) it may be more than this figure and it could
also be less. The solution space is defined as the total number of combinations of
possible solutions. So for the case of pump optimization it is the total possible combination of pump speed settings over the course of the optimization. See the Darwin
Scheduler Best Practices and Tips topic for more information about keeping the solution space to a minimum.
4) When a Variable Speed pump is included in the pumps to optimize, Darwin
Scheduler allows it to be optimized as a fixed speed pump and vice versa for
regular pumps. Why?
14-1031
14-1032
14-1033
14-1034
14-1035
Violation =
Where Pi is the average absolute pressure violation at constraint Node i, and PFp is
the pressure penalty factor.
Velocity Constraints:
Violation =
Where Vi is the average absolute velocity violation at constraint Pipe i, and PFv is the
velocity penalty factor.
Pump Start Constraints:
Violation =
Where Pi is the average absolute pump start violation at constraint Pump i, and PFps
is the pump start penalty factor. Note that violation for pump starts is calculated in a
cumulative sense so that the rolling number of pump starts is used to calculate the
violation at each time. This makes solutions that exceed their maximum pump starts
early in the optimized schedule less desirable compared to ones that may only fail
their constraint near the end of the schedule.
Tank Final Level Constraints:
Violation =
Where LV is the final level violation, and PFt is the tank final level penalty factor.
20) What values are acceptable to use for Genetic Algorithm Parameters, Stopping Criteria and Penalty Factors?
14-1036
Stopping Criteria
Maximum Generations: Typically 500 - 2000
Maximum Eras: Typically 6-12
Maximum Trials: Typically 50000 - 200000 or higher
Maximum Non Improvement Generations: 100-300
Penalty Factors
14-1037
14-1038
14-1039
14-1040
4) The situation after exporting and re-positioning the elements for a better understanding:
The VSPB and its connecting pipes are made inactive in the new scenario created
by Scheduler.
Standard pumps are created for both the lead and each needed lag pump for the
exported solution.
Two nodes are also introduced (one upstream and one downstream of these
pumps).
Pipes connecting to the original VSPB (P-24 and P-25 in the screenshot) are
duplicated and connected to those two new nodes.
New short & large pipes (i.e. 1 ft. long, 99 in. in diameter) are setup for every
standard pump in the solution, connecting them to the new upstream/downstream
nodes.
14-1041
14-1042
All of these new elements are only active in the exported scenario. They are left
inactive in other active-topology alternatives.
14-1043
14-1044
Presenting Your
Results
15
Profiles Tab
15-1045
Profiles Tab
This tab allows you to view profile results from transient simulations.
15-1046
Count: Length:
Maximum Volume
Maximum Head
Initial Head
Minimum Head
Elevation
You can also animate the profile using the time controls along the top of the dialog (if
you have set the Generate Animation Data? Calculation Option to True; see Calculation Options for more information).
The dialog consists of the following controls:
Profile Options: Clicking this button opens the Transient Profile Viewer
Options Dialog Box, allowing you to specify the transient profile options.
Clicking on the arrow on the right side of the button opens a submenu containing
the following commands:
Save As Default Profile Settings: Choose this command to set the current
profile options as your new defaults.
Restore Factory Defaults: Choose this command to reset the default profile
settings back to the factory defaults.
15-1047
Print Preview: Opens a print preview window containing the current view
of the profile. You can use the Print Preview dialog box to select a printer and
preview the output before you print it. Clicking on the arrow on the right side of
the button opens a submenu containing the following commands:
Fit to Page: Resizes the profile view so that it fits on a single page.
Scaled: Displays the profile at the scale defined in the Transient Profile
Viewer Options Dialog Box.
Export to DXF: Opens an Export to DXF dialog, allowing you to export the
current profile as a .dxf file.
Zoom Extents: Zooms out so that the entire profile is displayed.
Zoom Window: Zooms in on a section of the profile. When the tool is
toggled on, you can zoom in on any area of the profile by clicking on the chart to
the left of the area to be zoomed, holding the mouse button, then dragging the
mouse to the right (or the opposite extent of the area to be magnified) and
releasing the mouse button when the area to be zoomed has been defined.
To zoom back out, click and hold the mouse button, drag the mouse in the opposite direction (right to left), and release the mouse button.
Zoom In: Increases the magnification of the area that is clicked when this
tool is active.
Zoom Out: Decreases the magnificatyion of the profile view.
Go to Start: Sets the currently displayed time step to the beginning of the
simulation.
Time Display: Shows the current time step that is displayed in the profile.
Time Slider: Manually moves the slider representing the currently displayed
time step along the bar, which represents the full length of time that the transient
run encompasses.
Click the Data tab to see the profile data in tabular format.
15-1048
Animation Frequency: Enter the number of frames per second at which the
profile should be animated.
Line Width Multiplier: Increases the width of the lines in the profile.
Show Title: When this box is checked, the title will be displayed on the
profile.
Vertical Print Scale 1 in =: Enter the vertical scale that is applied during
scaled print operations. This field is only editable when the Use Automatic
Scaling box is unchecked.
Use Automatic Scaling: Uncheck this box to enable the print scale fields.
When the box is checked, the scale is automatically assigned.
15-1049
Color Tab: This tab contains a table that is comprised of rows for each attribute
layer. For each layer, click the Is Visible checkbox to display that attribute. You
can also select a color for each layer in the Color column.
Text Tab: This tab contains a table that is comprised of rows for each text layer.
For each layer you can seelct a font, font size, and font color.
15-1050
Chart Settings: Clicking this button opens the Chart Options Dialog Box,
allowing you to specify the graph display options. Clicking on the arrow on the
right side of the button opens a submenu containing the following commands:
Save As Default Profile Settings: Choose this command to set the current
graph options as your new defaults.
Restore Factory Defaults: Choose this command to reset the default graph
settings back to the factory defaults.
Print: Prints the current graph.
Print Preview: Opens a print preview window containing the current view
of the profile. You can use the Print Preview dialog box to select a printer and
preview the output before you print it.
Zoom : Zooms in on a section of the profile. When the tool is toggled on, you
can zoom in on any area of the profile by clicking on the chart to the left of the
area to be zoomed, holding the mouse button, then dragging the mouse to the right
(or the opposite extent of the area to be magnified) and releasing the mouse button
when the area to be zoomed has been defined.
To zoom back out, click and hold the mouse button, drag the mouse in the opposite direction (right to left), and release the mouse button.
Go to Start: Sets the currently displayed time step to the beginning of the
simulation.
Time Display: Shows the current time step that is displayed in the profile.
Time Slider: Manually moves the slider representing the currently displayed
time step along the bar, which represents the full length of time that the transient
run encompasses.
Click the Data tab to see the profile data in tabular format.
15-1051
Use the Element Symbology manager to control the way that elements and their associated labels are displayed.
15-1052
Delete
Rename
Edit
15-1053
Annotate
Shift Up
15-1054
Shift
Down
Drawing
Style
Help
15-1055
15-1056
5. Select the initial X- and Y- offset for the annotation. Offset is measured from the
center of the node or polygon or midpoint of the polyline.
6. If needed, set an initial height multiplier. Use a number greater than 1 to make the
annotation larger and a number between 0 and 1 to make the annotation smaller. If
you use a negative number, the annotation is flipped (rotated 180 degrees).
7. If you have created selection sets, you can apply your annotation only to a particular selection set by selecting that set from the Selection Set menu. If you have not
created any selection sets, then the annotation is applied to all elements of the type
you are using.
8. After you finish defining your annotation, click Apply and then OK to close the
Annotation Properties dialog box and create your annotation. In order to close the
dialog box without creating an annotation click Cancel.
To delete an annotation
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology manager, right-click
an annotation you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the annotation you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
To edit an annotation
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology manager, right-click
the annotation you want to edit, then select Edit.
Or, select the annotation you want to edit, then click the Edit button and the Annotation Properties dialog box will open where you can make changes.
Rename an annotation
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology manager, right-click
the annotation you want to rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the annotation you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
15-1057
Annotation Properties
Use the Annotation Properties dialog box to define annotation settings for each
element type.
Field Name
Free Form
Prefix
Suffix
15-1058
Selection Set
Initial X Offset
Initial Y Offset
Initial Multiplier
Checkbox
15-1059
15-1060
Field Name
Selection Set
Calculate Range
Minimum
Maximum
Steps
Color Map
Options
DeleteDeletes the currently highlighted row from the Color Maps table.
15-1061
15-1062
15-1063
Contours
To rename a color coding definition
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology manager, right-click
the color coding you want to rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the color coding you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Contours
Using WaterGEMS V8i you can visually display calculated results for many attributes
using contour plots.
15-1064
The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the contours currently contained
within the project, along with a toolbar.
New
Delete
Rename
Edit
Export
15-1065
Contours
View
Contour
Browser
Refresh
Shift Up
Shift
Down
Help
Contour Definition
The Contour Definition dialog box contains the information required to generate
contours for a calculated network.
15-1066
Contour
Field
Selection Set
Minimum
Maximum
Increment
Index Increment
Smooth Contours
Line Weight
15-1067
Contours
Label Height
Multiplier
Color by Range
Initialization can be
accomplished by clicking the
Initialize button to automatically
generate values for the
minimum, maximum,
increment, and index increment
to create an evenly spaced
contour set.
Color by Index
Contour Plot
The Contour Plot window displays the results of a contour map specification as accurate, straight-line contours.
View the changes in the mapped attribute over time by using the animation feature.
Choose Analysis > EPS Results Browser and click the Play button to automatically
advance through the time step increments selected in the Increment bar.
15-1068
The plot can be printed or exported as a .DXF file. Choose File > Export > DXF to
export the plot.
Tip:
Note:
15-1069
Using Profiles
Using Profiles
A profile is a graph that plots a particular attribute across a distance, such as ground
elevation along a section of piping. As well as these side or sectional views of the
ground elevation, profiles can be used to show other characteristics, such as hydraulic
grade, pressure, and constituent concentration.
You define profiles by selecting a series of adjacent elements. To create or use a
profile, you must first open the Profiles manager. The Profiles manager is a dockable
window where you can add, delete, rename, edit, and view profiles.
The Profiles dialog box is where you can create, view, and edit profile views of
elements in the network.
The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the profiles currently contained
within the project, along with a toolbar.
15-1070
New
Delete
Rename
Edit
View
Profile
Help
By default, all profiles are created as Transient Report Paths. A Transient Report Path
is denoted by a small hammer icon.
When a transient analysis is completed in HAMMER, profile results will only be
stored for those elements along a previously defined Transient Report Path.
You can right-click a profile in the Profile Manager and uncheck the Transient Report
Path toggle command in the context menu. When unchecked, transient analysis results
will not be saved for that profile. Reducing the number of Transient Report Paths can
reduce output file sizes and improve calculation times.
Transient Report Paths are not used directly in WaterGEMS/WaterCAD - in those
products results from all profiles are always available. However the Transient Report
Path toggle and hammer icon are included in WaterGEMS/WaterCAD so that projects
created within any of the three programs will be compatible.
15-1071
Using Profiles
Profile Setup
Setting up a profile is a matter of selecting the adjacent elements on which the profile
is based. When you click on New in the Profiles dialog box the following dialog box
opens.
15-1072
Label
Reverse
Remove All
Open Profile
In AutoCAD mode, you cannot use the shortcut menu, you must
re-open the Profile Setup dialog box.
The Series Label Format field allows you to define how the series will be labeled in
the legend of the profile view. Clicking the [>] button allows you to choose from
predefined variables such as Field name and Element label.
The Scenarios pane lists all of the available scenarios. Check the box next to a
scenario to display the data for that scenario in the profile view. The Expand All
button opens all of the folders so that all scenarios are visible; the Collapse button
closes the folders.
The Elements pane lists all of the elements that will be displayed in the profile view.
The Expand All button expands the list tree so that all elements are visible; the
Collapse button collapses the tree.
15-1073
Using Profiles
The Fields pane lists all of the available input and output fields. Check the box next to
a field to display the data for that field type in the profile view. The Expand All button
opens all of the folders so that all fields are visible; the Collapse button closes the
folders. The Filter by Field Type button allows you to display only Input or Output
fields in the list. Clicking the [>] button opens a submenu that contains all of the available fields grouped categorically.
Note that profiles don't show any results for the intermediate points along a pipe. To
see the results of transient calculations for these intermediate points, you will need to
use the Transient Results Viewer.
The Show this dialog on profile creation check box is enabled by default; uncheck this
box to skip this dialog when a new profile is created.
Profile Viewer
When you complete setting up your profile a Profile viewer will open which contains
the profile in graph or data format.
15-1074
Chart Settings
Print Preview
Copy
Zoom Extents
15-1075
Using Profiles
Zoom
Animation Controls
Time SliderManually move the slider representing the currently displayed time step along
the bar, which represents the full length of
time that the scenario encompasses.
15-1076
To create a profile, the user can select the beginning and ending element of the
profile and then pick the green check. The shortest path between those
elements will be used to draw the profile. If the user wants to create a profile
along a path other than the shortest path, the user should initially draw the
path through the first element that the profile will be forced through and then
add elements as described below. The profile will display in the drawing in
red and the node elements that the user selected along the profile will be in
purple.
b. To add elements to the profile, click elements in the drawing pane. (By
default, the Add button
is active in the Select dialog box.) You can only
add elements to either end of your selection.
15-1077
Using Profiles
When the Add button is toggled on, you can select elements to add to the
profile; elements that you successfully select are highlighted in red.
c. To remove elements from the profile, click the Remove button
in the
Select dialog box. Thereafter, elements you select in the drawing pane are
removed from the profile. You can only remove elements from either end of
your selection.
When the Remove button is toggled on, you can remove elements from the
profile; unselected elements are not highlighted.
d. When you are finished adding elements to your profile, click the Done
button
5. The Profile Setup dialog box opens and displays a list of the elements you
selected.
6. Click Open Profile to close the Profile Setup dialog box and open the Profile
Series Options box.
15-1078
If you want to close the Profile Setup box without saving your
changes, click Cancel or close the dialog.
7. Select the Scenarios, Elements, and Fields to be included in the Profile. Then
click OK. By default the Elevation and Hydraulic Grade fields are selected for the
current scenario.
15-1079
Using Profiles
Click View > Profiles to open the Profiles manager. In the Profiles manager, rightclick the profile you want to delete, then select Delete
Or, select the profile you want to delete, then click Delete.
To rename a profile
Click View > Profiles to open the Profiles manager. In the Profiles manager, rightclick the profile you want to rename, then select Rename
Or, select the profile you want to rename, then click Rename.
To highlight the profile path in the drawing
Click View > Profile to open the Profiles Manager, the click the Highlight button
.
Or, select the profile, then right click the Highlight command.
There is an additional right click option, "Transient Report Path". This is used when a
WaterGEMS/CAD model is imported into HAMMER for transient analysis. A report
on transients is prepared for any path for which this option is checked.
To view a profile
1. Click Compute
to calculate flows.
15-1080
You can edit your list of profile elements at any time and
compute your network with the Profile Viewer dialog box open,
but you must click Refresh to update the display of that dialog
box if you do make changes.
6. If you want to print you can use Print Preview to see what it will look like and
then Print.
To animate a profile
1. Click Compute
to calculate flows.
15-1081
Filtered
Globally edited
Sorted.
If you need to edit a set of properties for all elements of a certain type in your network,
you might consider creating a FlexTable and making your changes there rather than
editing each element one at a time in sequence.
FlexTables can also be used to create results reports that you can print, save as a file,
or copy to the Windows clipboard for copying into word processing or spreadsheet
software.
To work with FlexTables, select the FlexTables manager or go to View > FlexTables
<Ctrl+7> to open the FlexTables manager if it is closed.
FlexTables
Using the FlexTables manager you can create, manage, and delete custom tabular
reports. The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the custom FlexTables
currently contained within the project, along with a toolbar.
15-1082
Delete
Rename
Edit
Open
Help
15-1083
2. In the FlexTable manager, select either Tables - Project or Tables - Shared, then
click the New button.
If you are creating a new folder within an existing folder, select the folder,
then click the New button.
You can also right-click a folder to delete, then select Delete from the shortcut
menu.
You can also right-click a folder to rename, then select Rename from the
shortcut menu.
15-1084
You can also rename a FlexTable folder by selecting the folder, then modifying its label in the Properties Editor.
Copy
Paste
Export
15-1085
Report
Edit
Selection
Set
Zoom To
Opening FlexTables
You open FlexTables from within the FlexTable manager.
To open FlexTables
1. Click View > FlexTables or click the FlexTables button on the View toolbar to
open the FlexTables manager.
2. Perform one of the following steps:
15-1086
Select the FlexTable you want to open, then click the Open button.
Project-level FlexTables are available only for the project in which you create
them.
Deleting FlexTables
Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables manager. In the FlexTables manager,
right-click the FlexTable you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the FlexTable you want to delete, then click the Delete button. You cannot
delete predefined FlexTables.
Note:
15-1087
Select the FlexTable you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Click the FlexTable you want to rename, to select it, then click the name of
the FlexTable.
Note:
Editing FlexTables
You can edit a FlexTable to change the columns of data it contains or the values in
some of those columns.
Editable columns:
Non-editable columns:
15-1088
Click the FlexTable to select it, then click the Edit button.
15-1089
Operation
Value
Where
15-1090
Edit the FlexTable; open the Table dialog box and change the order of the selected
tables using the up and down arrow buttons.
The top-most item in the Selected Columns pane appears furthest to the left in the
resulting FlexTable.
Open the FlexTable, click the heading of the column you want to move, then click
again and drag the column to the new position. You can only move one column at
a time.
15-1091
15-1092
Click
OK.
Double-click the
desired field to add it
to the preview pane
Double-click the
desired unique
value to add it to
the SQL
expression in the
preview pane
Check to
Validate
Preview pane
Apply
button
The FlexTable displays columns of data for all elements returned by the query and
the word FILTERED is displayed in the FlexTable status bar.
The status pane at the bottom of the Table window always shows the number of rows
displayed and the total number of rows available (for example, 10 of 20 elements
displayed).
If you change the values for an attribute that is being sorted or filtered, the sort or filter
operation needs to be reapplied. To do this, use the Apply Sort/Filter command accessible from the right-click context menu.
To reset a filter
1. Right-click the column heading you want to filter.
2. Select Filter.
15-1093
15-1094
Discharge
(cfs)
Slope (ft./
ft.)
Depth
(ft.)
0.001
4.11
0.002
5.81
0.003
7.12
0.001
13.43
0.002
19.00
0.003
23.27
Slope (ft./
ft.)
Depth
(ft.)
0.001
Discharge
(cfs)
4.11
0.001
13.43
0.002
5.81
0.002
19.00
0.003
7.12
0.003
23.27
Changing the Report TitleWhen you print a table, the table name is used as
the title for the printed report. You can change the title that appears on your
printed report by renaming the table.
Resizing ColumnsWith the Table open, click the vertical separator line
between column headings. Notice that the cursor changes shape to indicate that
you can resize the column. Drag the column separator to the left or right to stretch
the column to its new size.
15-1095
The element relabeling tool allows you to perform three types of operations on a set of
element labels: Replace, Renumber, and Append. The active relabel operation is
chosen from the list box in the Relabel Operations section of the Relabel Elements
dialog box. The entry fields for entering the information appropriate for the active
relabel operation appear below the Relabel Operations section. The following list
presents a description of the available element relabel operations.
15-1096
The Preview field displays an example of the new label using the currently defined
settings.
Table Type
15-1097
Available Columns
Selected Columns
[ > ] Adds the selected items from the Available Columns list to the Selected Columns list.
15-1098
15-1099
Make sure you paste the data you copied before you copy
anything else to the Windows clipboard. If you copy
something else to the clipboard before you paste your
FlexTable data, your FlexTable data will be lost from the
clipboard.
4. Paste <Ctrl+v> the data into other Windows software, such as your wordprocessing application.
To export FlexTable data as a text file
You can export the data in a FlexTable as tab- or comma-delimited ASCII text for use
in other applications, such as Notepad, spreadsheet, or word processing software.
1. Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables manager.
2. In the FlexTables manager, open the FlexTable you want to use.
3. Click Export to File
Instead of Print Preview, you can click Print to print the report
without previewing it.
3. Click Report
and select one of the options. A print preview
of the report displays to show what your report will look like.
15-1100
Reporting
Use reporting to create printable content based on some aspect of your model, such as
element properties or results.
You need to compute your model before you can create reports about results, such as
the movement of water in your network. You can also create reports about input data
without computing your model, such as conduit diameters. (To compute your model,
after you set up your elements and their properties, click Compute.)
You can access reports by:
15-1101
Reporting
Report Options
The Report Options dialog box offers control over how a report is displayed.
15-1102
The header and footer can be fully customized and you can edit text to be displayed in
the cells or select a pre-defined dynamic variable from the cells menu.
%(Image) - Allows you to browse to and attach an image to the report header.
You can also select fonts, text sizes, and customize spacing, as well as change the
default margins in the Default Margins tab.
Graphs
Use graphs to visualize your model or parts of your model, such as element properties
or results. The model needs to be computed before you can create graphs. After you
set up your elements and their properties, click the Compute button.
After the model has been calculated, you can graph elements directly from the
drawing view.
To graph a single element
15-1103
Graphs
Right-click an element in the drawing view and select the Graph command.
To graph a group of elements
1. Select a group of elements by drawing a selection box around them or by holding
down the Ctrl key and then clicking a series of elements.
2. Right-click one of the selected elements and select the Graph command.
To Graph the elements contained in a selection set
1. Click the View menu and choose the Selection Sets command.
2. In the Selection Sets dialog, highlight the selection set to be graphed and click the
Select In Drawing button.
3. Right-click one of the selected elements and select the Graph command.
Graph Manager
The Graph manager contains any graph you have created and saved in the current
session or in a previous session. Graphs listed in the Graph manager retain any
customizations you have applied. You can graph computed values, such as flow and
velocity.
To use the Graph Manager
1. Compute your model and resolve any errors.
2. Open the Graph manager, click View > Graphs.
3. To Create a Graph select the elements that you want included from the drawing.
Once you have selected the element you can either Right-click an element and
select Graph or select the type of graph from the New button menu.
15-1104
Delete
Rename
View
Add to
Graph
Help
5. Bentley WaterGEMS V8i assumes initial flowflow at time 0in all networks
to be 0; thus, graphs of flow begin at 0 for time 0.
6. If needed, click Chart Settings to change the display of the graph.
Tip:
If you want your graph to display over more time (for example, it
displays a 24-hour time period and you want to display a 72-hour
period), click Analysis > Calculation Options and change Total
Simulation Time in the Property Editor.
7. After you create a graph, it is available in the Graph manager. You can select it by
double-clicking it. Also, you can right-click a graph listed in Graph manager to:
Delete it
15-1105
Graphs
Note:
Graphs are not saved in Graph manager after you close the
program.
Printing a Graph
15-1106
15-1107
Graphs
The following controls are available:
Graph Tab
15-1108
Add to
Graph
Manager
Add to
Graph
Graph
Series
Options
Chart
Settings
Print
Preview
Copy
Zoom
Extents
Zoom
15-1109
Graphs
Time (VCR)
Controls
Graph
Display
Pane
Data Tab
Data Table
15-1110
15-1111
Graphs
The Series Label Format field allows you to define how the series will be labeled in
the legend of the graph. Clicking the [>] button allows you to choose from predefined
variables such as Field name and Element label.
The Scenarios pane lists all of the available scenarios. Check the box next to a
scenario to display the data for that scenario in the graph. The Expand All button
opens all of the folders so that all scenarios are visible; the Collapse button closes the
folders.
The Elements pane lists all of the elements that will be displayed in the graph. The
Expand All button expands the list tree so that all elements are visible; the Collapse
button collapses the tree.
The Fields pane lists all of the available input and output fields. Check the box next to
a field to display the data for that field type in the graph. The Expand All button opens
all of the folders so that all fields are visible; the Collapse button closes the folders.
The Filter by Field Type button allows you to display only Input or Output fields in
the list. Clicking the [>] button opens a submenu that contains all of the available
fields grouped categorically.
15-1112
Get familiar with your data - If you obtained your observed data from an outside
source, you should take the time to get acquainted with it. Be sure to identify units
of time and measurement for the data. Be sure to identify what the data points
represent in the model; this helps in naming your line or bar series as it will appear
in the graph.
Time from Start - An offset of the start time for an EPS scenario.
Y Unit - A preview of the current displayed unit for the selected format.
Note:
Caution:
1. Click New
).
15-1113
Graphs
4. Click Graph
5. Click Close.
Sample Observed Data Source
Below is an example of an Observed Data source for import and graph comparison.
The following table contains a flow meter data collection retreived in the field for a
given pipe. We will bring this observed data into the model for a quick visual inspection against our model's calculated pipe flows.
Table 15-1: Observed Flow Meter Data (Time in Hours)
Time (hrs)
Flow (gpm)
0.00
125
0.60
120
3.00
110
9.00
130
13.75
100
18.20
125
21.85
110
With data tabulated as in the table above, we could simply copy and paste these rows
directly into the table in the Observed Data dialog. However if we had too many
points to manage, natively exporting our data to a comma delimited text file may be a
better import option. Text file import is also a better option when our time values are
not formatted in units of time such as hours, as in the table below.
Table 15-2: Observed Flow Meter Data (24-Hr Clock)
15-1114
Time (24-hr
clock)
Flow (gpm)
00:00
125
00:36
120
03:00
110
Flow (gpm)
09:00
130
13:45
100
18:12
125
21:51
110
15-1115
Changes you make to graph settings are not retained for use
with other graphs.
15-1116
Series Tab
Panel Tab
Axes Tab
General Tab
Titles Tab
Walls Tab
Paging Tab
Legend Tab
3D Tab
Series Tab
Use the Series tab to display the series that are associated with the current graph. To
show a series, select the check box next to the series name. To hide a series, clear its
check box. The Series tab contains the following controls:
Up/Down arrows
Add
Delete
Title
Clone
Change
Panel Tab
Use the Panel tab to set how your graph appears in the Graph dialog box. The Panel
tab includes the following sub-tabs:
Borders Tab
Use the Borders tab to set up a border around your graph. The Borders tab contains the
following controls:
Border
Bevel Outer
15-1117
Color
Lets you set the color for the bevel effect that you
use; inner and outer bevels can use different color
values.
Bevel Inner
Size
Background Tab
Use the Background tab to set a color or image background for your graph. The Background tab contains the following controls:
Color
Pattern
Transparent
Background Image
Gradient Tab
15-1118
Visible
Direction
Angle
Colors Tab
Start
Middle
End
Gamma Correction
Transparency
Options Tab
Sigma
15-1119
Sigma Focus
Sigma Scale
Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for your graph. The Shadow tab contains the
following controls:
Visible
Size
Color
Pattern
Transparency
Axes Tab
Use the Axes tab set how your axes display. It includes the following controls and
subtabs:
15-1120
Visible
Behind
Axes
Caution:
Scales Tab
Use the Scales tab to define your axes scales. The Scales tab contains the following
controls:
Automatic
Visible
Inverted
Change
Increment
Logarithmic
Log Base
Minimum Tab
Auto
Change
15-1121
Offset
Maximum Tab
Auto
Change
Offset
Labels Tab
Use the Labels tab to define your axes text. The Labels tab contains the following
subtabs and controls:
Style Tab
15-1122
Visible
Multi-line
Round first
Label on axis
Size
Angle
Min. Separation %
Style
Format Tab
Exponential
Values Format
Default Alignment
Text Tab
Font
Color
Lets you select the color for the axis label font.
Double-click the colored square between Font and
Fill to open the Color Editor dialog box (see Color
Editor Dialog Box).
Fill
15-1123
Shadow
Ticks Tab
Use the Ticks tab to define the major ticks and their grid lines. The Ticks tab contains
the following controls:
15-1124
Axis
Grid
Ticks
Len
Inner
Centered
At Labels Only
Title
Angle
Size
Visible
Text Tab
Font
Lets you set the font properties for axis title. This
opens the Windows Font dialog box.
Color
Lets you select the color for the axis title font.
Double-click the colored square between Font and
Fill to open the Color Editor dialog box (see Color
Editor Dialog Box).
Fill
Lets you set a pattern the axis title font. The Hatch
Brush Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor
Dialog Box
15-1125
Shadow
Minor Tab
Use the Minor tab to define those graph ticks that are neither major ticks. The Minor
tab contains the following controls and tabs:
Ticks
Length
Grid
Count
Position Tab
Use the Position tab to set the axes position for your graph. The Position tab contains
the following controls:
Position %
15-1126
Start %
End %
Units
Z%
General Tab
Use the General tab to preview a graph before you print it and set up scrolling and
zooming for a graph. It includes the following controls:
Print Preview
Margins
Units
Cursor
Zoom Tab
15-1127
Animated
Steps
Pen
Pattern
Minimum pixels
Direction
Mouse Button
Lets you set the mouse button that you use to click
and drag when activating the zoom feature.
Scroll Tab
Use the Scroll tab to set up scrolling and panning across a graph. The Scroll tab
contains the following controls:
Allow Scroll
Lets you scroll and pan over the graph. Select this
check box to turn on scrolling, clear the check box
to turn it off.
Mouse Button
Lets you set the mouse button that you click to use
the scroll feature.
Titles Tab
The Titles tab lets you define titles to use for your graph. It includes the following
controls and tabs:
15-1128
Title
Style Tab
Use the Style tab to display and create a selected title. Type the text of the title in the
text box on the Style tab. The Style tab contains the following controls:
Visible
Adjust Frame
Alignment
Position Tab
Use the Position tab to set the placement of the selected title. The Position tab contains
the following controls:
Custom
Left/Top
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set and format a background shape behind the selected title. The
Format tab contains the following controls:
15-1129
Color
Lets you set a color for the fill of the shape you
create behind the selected title. The Color Editor
opens, see Color Editor Dialog Box.
Frame
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the shape you
create behind the selected title. The Hatch Brush
Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box.
Round Frame
Transparent
Lets you set the fill of the shape you create behind
the selected title as transparent. If the shape is
completely transparent, you cannot see it, so clear
this check box if you cannot see a shape that you
expect to see.
Transparency
Text Tab
Use the Text tab to format the text used in the selected title. The Text tab contains the
following controls:
15-1130
Font
Lets you set the font properties for the text. This
opens the Windows Font dialog box.
Color
Fill
Shadow
Gradient Tab
Note:
To use the Gradient tab, clear the Transparent check box in the
Chart > Titles > Format tab.
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your axis title. The
Gradient tab contains the following controls:
Format Tab
Visible
Direction
Angle
Colors Tab
Start
15-1131
Middle
End
Gamma Correction
Transparency
Options Tab
Sigma
Sigma Focus
Sigma Scale
Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for the background for the selected title. The
Shadow tab contains the following controls:
15-1132
Visible
Size
Color
Lets you set a color for the shadow. You might set
this to gray but can set it to any other color. The
Color Editor opens, see Color Editor Dialog Box.
Pattern
Transparency
Bevels Tab
Note:
To use the Gradient tab, clear the Transparent check box in the
Chart > Titles > Format tab.
Use the Bevels tab to create rounded effects for the background for the selected title.
The Bevels tab contains the following controls:
Bevel Outer
Color
Lets you set the color for the bevel effect that you
use; inner and outer bevels can use different color
values.
Bevel Inner
Size
Walls Tab
Use the Walls tab to set and format the edges of your graph. The Walls tab contains the
following subtabs:
Left/Right/Back/Bottom Tabs
Use the Left, Right, Back, and Bottom tabs to select the walls that you want to edit.
You might have to turn off the axes lines to see the effects (see Axes Tab on page 151120) for the back wall and turn on 3D display to see the effects for the left, right, and
bottom walls (see 3D Tab on page 15-1141).
The Left, Right, Back, and Bottom tabs contain the following controls:
15-1133
Color
Border
Pattern
Gradient
Visible
Dark 3D
Size 3D
Transparent
Paging Tab
Use the Paging tab to display your graph over several pages. The Paging tab contains
the following controls:
15-1134
Arrows
Legend Tab
Use the Legend tab to display and format a legend for your graph. The Legend tab
includes the following controls:
Style Tab
Use the Style tab to set up and display a legend for your graph. The Style tab contains
the following controls:
Visible
Inverted
Check boxes
Legend Style
Text Style
Vert. Spacing
Dividing Lines
Position Tab
Use the Position tab to control the placement of the legend. The Position tab contains
the following controls:
15-1135
Position
Resize Chart
Margin
Position Offset %
Custom
Left/Top
Symbols Tab
Use the Symbols tab to add to the legend symbols that represent the series in the
graph. The Symbols tab contains the following controls:
15-1136
Visible
Width
Width Units
Lets you set the units that are used to size the
width of the symbol.
Default border
Border
Position
Continuous
Squared
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set and format the box that contains the legend. The Format tab
contains the following controls:
Color
Lets you set a color for the fill of the legends box.
The Color Editor opens, see Color Editor Dialog
Box.
Frame
Pattern
Round Frame
Transparent
Transparency
Text Tab
15-1137
Lets you set the font properties for the text. This
opens the Windows Font dialog box.
Color
Fill
Shadow
Gradient Tab
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your legend. The
Gradient tab contains the following controls:
Format Tab
Visible
15-1138
Direction
Angle
Colors Tab
Start
Middle
End
Gamma Correction
Transparency
Options Tab
Sigma
Sigma Focus
Sigma Scale
Shadow Tab
15-1139
Size
Color
Lets you set a color for the shadow. You might set
this to gray but can set it to any other color. The
Color Editor opens, see Color Editor Dialog Box.
Pattern
Transparency
Bevels Tab
Use the Bevels tab to create a rounded effects for the legend. The Bevels tab contains
the following controls:
15-1140
Bevel Outer
Color
Lets you set the color for the bevel effect that you
use; inner and outer bevels can use different color
values.
Bevel Inner
Size
3D Tab
Use the 3D tab to add a three-dimensional effect to your graph. The 3D tab contains
the following controls:
3 Dimensions
3D %
Lets you increase or decrease the threedimensional effect. Set a larger percentage for
more three-dimensional effect, or a smaller
percentage for less effect.
Orthogonal
Zoom Text
Quality
Clip Points
Zoom
Rotation
Elevation
Horiz. Offset
Vert. Offset
15-1141
Perspective
Format Tab
Point Tab
General Tab
Marks Tab
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set up how the selected series appears. The Format tab contains
the following controls:
15-1142
Border
Color
Pattern
Dark 3D
Color Each
Clickable
Height 3D
Stack
Transparency
Stairs
Inverted
Outline
Point Tab
Use the Point tab to set up how the points that make up the selected series appear. The
Point tab contains the following controls:
Visible
3D
Dark 3D
15-1143
Inflate Margins
Pattern
Default
Color Each
Style
Width/Height
Border
Transparency
General Tab
Use the General tab to modify basic formatting and relationships with axes for series
in a graph. The General tab contains the following controls:
15-1144
Show in Legend
Cursor
Depth
Auto
Values
Percents
Horizontal Axis
Vertical Axis
Date Time
Sort
15-1145
Marks Tab
Use the Marks tab to display labels for points in the selected series. Series-point labels
are called marks. The Marks tab contains the following tabs and controls:
Style Tab
Use the Style tab to set how the marks display. The Style tab contains the following
controls:
Visible
Clipped
Multi-line
Style
Draw every
Angle
Arrow Tab
Use the Arrow tab to display a leader line on the series graph to indicate where the
mark applies. The Arrow tab contains the following controls:
15-1146
Border
Pointer
Lets you set up the arrow head (if any) used by the
leader line. The Pointer dialog box opens, see
Pointer Dialog Box.
Arrow head
Size
Length
Lets you set the size of the leader line and arrow
head, or just the leader line if there is no arrow
head.
Distance
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set and format the boxes that contains the marks. The Format
tab contains the following controls:
Color
Lets you set a color for the fill of the boxes. The
Color Editor opens, see Color Editor Dialog Box.
Frame
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the boxes. The
Hatch Brush Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor
Dialog Box.
Round Frame
Transparent
Transparency
Text Tab
Use the Text tab to format the text used in the marks. The Text tab contains the
following controls:
Font
Lets you set the font properties for the text. This
opens the Windows Font dialog box.
15-1147
Color
Fill
Shadow
Gradient Tab
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your marks. The
Gradient tab contains the following subtabs and controls:
Format Tab
15-1148
Visible
Direction
Angle
Colors Tab
Start
Middle
End
Gamma Correction
Transparency
Options Tab
Sigma
Sigma Focus
Sigma Scale
Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for the marks. The Shadow tab contains the
following controls:
Visible
Size
15-1149
Color
Lets you set a color for the shadow. You might set
this to gray but can set it to any other color. The
Color Editor opens, see Color Editor Dialog Box.
Pattern
Transparency
Bevels Tab
Use the Bevels tab to create a rounded effects for your marks. The Bevels tab contains
the following controls:
Bevel Outer
Color
Lets you set the color for the bevel effect that you
use; inner and outer bevels can use different color
values.
Bevel Inner
Size
15-1150
Delete
Active
Up/Down arrow
Note:
Each tool has its own parameters, see Chart Tools Gallery Dialog
Box.
Save
Picture Tab
Use the Picture tab to save your graph as a raster image or to copy the graph as an
image to the clipboard. The Picture tab contains the following controls and subtabs:
Format
15-1151
Options Tab
Colors
Size Tab
Width/Height
Note:
Native Tab
The Native tab contains the following controls:
Include Series Data
File Size
Data Tab
The Data tab contains the following controls:
15-1152
Series
Format
Include
Text separator
Setup
Page Tab
Orientation
Zoom
Margins
Margin Units
Format Tab
Print Background
15-1153
Quality
Proportional
Grayscale
Detail Resolution
Preview Pane
15-1154
Visible
Color
Ending
Dash
Width
Style
Transparency
Visible
Direction
Angle
Colors Tab
Start
Middle
End
Gamma Correction
Transparency
Options Tab
Sigma
15-1155
Sigma Focus
Sigma Scale
To access the Gradient Editor dialog box, click Chart Settings in the Graph dialog box,
then click the Tools tab. Select the Axis tab and Color Band tool, then click the
Gradient button.
Custom
OK/Cancel
To access the Color Editor dialog box, click a Color button in the Chart Options dialog
box.
15-1156
Basic colors
Custom colors
Color matrix
Color|Solid
Hue/Sat/Lum
Red/Green/Blue
To access the Color dialog box, click the Custom button in the Color Editor dialog
box.
Custom
OK/Cancel
15-1157
Background/
Foreground
Visible
Direction
Angle
Colors Tab
15-1158
Start
Middle
End
Gamma Correction
Transparency
Options Tab
Sigma
Sigma Focus
Sigma Scale
Style
15-1159
3D
Dark 3D
Inflate Margins
Pattern
Default
Color Each
Style
Width/Height
Border
Transparency
To access the Pointer dialog box, click Chart Settings in the Graph dialog box, then
click Series > Marks > Arrow.
15-1160
Style
Snap
Follow Mouse
15-1161
Pen
Drag Marks
Lets you drag series marks. To use this tool, you must display the marks for a selected
series, see Marks Tab. After you have added the Drag Marks tool to your graph, you
can modify the following settings:
Series
Reset Positions
Drag Point
Lets you drag a series point. After you have added the Drag Point tool to your graph,
you can modify the following settings:
Series
Style
Mouse Button
Cursor
Draw Line
Lets you draw a line on the graph by dragging. After you have added the Draw Line
tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:
15-1162
Series
Pen
Button
Enable Draw
Enable Select
Remove All
Gantt Drag
Lets you move and resize Gantt bars by dragging. This is unused by Bentley WaterGEMS V8i .
Image
Displays a picture using the selected series axes as boundaries. After you have added
the Image tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:
Series
Browse
Clear
Mode
15-1163
Style
Action
Delay
Nearest Point
Lets you define and display an indicator when you are near a point in the selected
series. After you have added the Nearest Point tool to your graph, you can modify the
following settings:
Series
Fill
Border
Draw Line
Style
Size
Pie Slices
Outlines or expands slices of pie charts when you move the cursor or click them. This
is unused by Bentley WaterGEMS V8i .
15-1164
Steps
Start value
Execute!
Border
Fill
Lets you set the fill for the arrows. The Hatch
Brush Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor
Dialog Box.
Length
Inverted Scroll
15-1165
Scroll
Position
Color Band
Lets you apply a color band to your graph for a range of values you select from an
axis. After you have added the Color Band tool to your graph, you can modify the
following settings:
15-1166
Axis
Border
Pattern
Lets you set the fill of the color band. The Hatch
Brush Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor
Dialog Box.
Gradient
Color
Lets you set a solid color for the color band. The
Color Editor opens, see Color Editor Dialog Box.
Start Value
End Value
Transparency
Draw Behind
Color Line
Lets you apply a color line, or plane in three dimensions, at a point you set at a value
on an axis. After you have added the Color Line tool to your graph, you can modify
the following settings:
Axis
Border
Value
Allow Drag
Drag Repaint
No Limit Drag
Draw Behind
Draw 3D
15-1167
Text
Text alignment
Cursor
Lets you set the style of the cursor when you move
it over the annotation.
Position Tab
Auto
Custom
Left/Top
Callout Tab
15-1168
Border
Pointer
Lets you set up the arrow head (if any) used by the
leader line. The Pointer dialog box opens, see
Pointer Dialog Box.
Position
Distance
Arrow head
Size
Format Tab
Color
Lets you set a color for the fill of the boxes. The
Color Editor opens, see Color Editor Dialog Box.
Frame
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the boxes. The
Hatch Brush Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor
Dialog Box.
Round Frame
Transparent
Transparency
Text Tab
Font
Color
Lets you select the color for the text font. Doubleclick the colored square between Font and Fill to
open the Color Editor dialog box.
Fill
Lets you set a pattern for the text font. The Hatch
Brush Editor opens.
15-1169
Shadow
Gradient Tab
Format
15-1170
Colors
Options
Shadow Tab
Visible
Size
15-1171
Color
Lets you set a color for the shadow. You might set
this to gray but can set it to any other color. The
Color Editor opens.
Pattern
Transparency
Bevels Tab
Bevel Outer
Color
Lets you set the color for the bevel effect that you
use; inner and outer bevels can use different color
values.
Bevel Inner
Size
Page Number
Lets you add a page number annotation. For more information, see Annotation.
Rotate
Lets you rotate the chart by dragging. After you have added the Rotate tool to your
graph, you can modify the following settings:
15-1172
Inverted
Style
Outline
Series
The available series chart designs include:
Standard
Stats
Financial
Extended
3D
Other
View 3DLets you view the chart design in two or three dimensions. Select this
check box to view the charts in 3D, clear it to view them in 2D.
SmoothSmooths the display of the charts. Select this check box to smooth the
display, clear it to turn off smoothing.
15-1173
Functions
The available function chart designs include:
Standard
Financial
Stats
Extended
View 3DLets you view the chart design in two or three dimensions. Select this
check box to view the charts in 3D, clear it to view them in 2D.
SmoothSmooths the display of the charts. Select this check box to smooth the
display, clear it to turn off smoothing.
Customizing a Graph
To customize a graph
1. If you do not have your own model, open one of the example files.
2. Create a graph.
a. Click Compute.
b. Close the Calculation Summary.
c. Save your model.
15-1174
15-1175
15-1176
Click Outline to open the Border Editor to change the thickness of a line.
g. Select Visible.
h. Change the Width.
i.
Make sure the Transparency is set to 0 if you want the line to appear opaque.
j.
Click OK after you define the line width and attributes. The series that are
changed are those that you highlighted in the Chart > Series tab.
b. Select the Axis you want to change from the list of axes in the Axes area.
c. In the Increment dialog box, type the new value and click OK. This also
changes the distance between major and minor ticks.
15-1177
Use the Maximum tab to change the maximum value for an axis. Clear the
Auto check box.
g. Click Change.
h. Set the maximum value for the axis.
9. Change the background colors.
a. Click Chart > Panel > and select Background.
b. Use the Color and Pattern buttons to set a background color and/or pattern
for the graph.
10. Change the number of decimal places used in axis labels.
a. Click Chart > Axes > Labels > Format.
b. Select the axis you want to change.
c. Change the number of decimal places by making a selection from the Values
Format menu.
15-1178
15-1179
15-1180
Get familiar with your data - If you obtained your observed data from an outside
source, you should take the time to get acquainted with it. Be sure to identify units
of time and measurement for the data. Be sure to identify what the data points
represent in the model; this helps in naming your line or bar series as it will appear
in the graph. Each property should be in a separate column in your data source
file.
Starting time series data entry - To create a time series data set, click the
Component menu and select Time Series Field Data. Pick the element type (e.g.
Pipe, Junction) and select the New button on the top row of the dialog. (You may
also right click on the Element Type Name and click the Add button) You will
then see the Select Associated Modeling Attribute dialog where you select the
property (attribute) to be imported. Choose the attribute and click OK. You may
import any number of data sets for any Property and Element. The data set will
have the default name of Property-N (e.g. Flow - 1). To change the name, click
the Rename button (third button along the top of the table).
Start Date Time - Specify the date and time the field data was collected. It is
important to ensure that your data shows correctly on the plot compared to the
simulated data. For example, if the calculation Base Date and Start Time
differ from the field data, they will not overlay properly on any graphs of the
corresponding data.
Element - Choose the element that represents the field data measurement
location. Click the ellipsis button to select the element from the drawing.
Time From Start - Specify an offset of the start time and date for an EPS
scenario.
Attribute Value - Enter the value for the specified attribute at the specified
Time from Start.
You can perform a quick graphical check on the data import by clicking the Graph
button at the top of the data table.
If the number of observations is large, it is best to use the Copy/Paste commands.
Copy the data from the original source to the clipboard, then go to the top of the Time
from Start or Property (e.g. Flow) column and hit CTRL-V to paste the values into the
appropriate column.
Click the Close button when done.
The data is saved with the model file. If you modify the source data file, the changes
will not appear until time series data is imported again.
To add the time series field data to a graph, first create the graph of the property from
an EPS model run (e.g. right click on element and pick Graph). In the Graph options
dialog, select Time Series Field Data and then the name of the time series (in the Field
pane (right pane). The field data will appear in the graph as points (by default) while
the model results will appear as a continuous line. This can be changed using the Chart
Settings button at the top of the graph (third from left).
15-1181
Calculation Summary
Calculation Summary
The calculation summary gathers useful information related to the state of the calculation (e.g. success/failure), status messages for elements (e.g. pump on/off, tank full/
empty), and the system flow results (e.g. flow demanded, flow stored).
The following controls are available in the Calculation Summary dialog box:
The tabs below the time step table contain the following information:
15-1182
Run Statistics Tab: This tab displays calculation statistics such as the time the
calculation was completed, how long the calculation took to load and run, and the
number of time steps, links, and nodes that were calculated.
Information Tab: This tab displays any element messages for the currently
selected time step.
Status Messages Tab: This tab displays any status messages for the currently
selected time step.
Trials Tab: This tab displays the relative flow change for each of the trials for the
currently selected time step.
The Scenarios pane lists all of the available scenarios. Check the box next to a
scenario to display the data for that scenario in the graph. The Expand All button
opens all of the folders so that all scenarios are visible; the Collapse button closes the
folders.
The Fields pane lists all of the available output fields. Check the box next to a field to
display the data for that field type in the graph. The Expand All button opens all of the
folders so that all fields are visible; the Collapse button closes the folders.
15-1183
Search
Open
Save
Quick Print
Page Setup
Scale
Hand Tool
Magnifier
Zoom Out
Zoom
Zoom In
First Page
15-1184
Previous Page
Next Page
Last Page
Multiple Pages
Color
Watermark
Export
Document
PDF (.pdf)
HTML (.html)
MHT (.mht)
RTF (.rtf)
Excel (.xls)
CSV (.csv)
Text (.txt)
15-1185
PDF (.pdf)
HTML (.html)
MHT (.mht)
RTF (.rtf)
Excel (.xls)
CSV (.csv)
Text (.txt)
Exit
15-1186
Importing and
Exporting Data
16
16-1187
16-1188
16-1189
16-1190
To import a submodel
1. Click the File menu and select ImportSubmodel.
2. In the Select Submodel File to Import dialog box, select the submodel file to be
imported. Click the Open button.
Exporting a Submodel
You can export any portion of a model as a submodel for import into other projects.
Input data is also stored in the file that is created in the process of Exporting a
Submodel. This input data will be imported following a label-matching strategy for
any element, alternative, scenario, calculation option or supporting data in the
submodel. For more information about input data transfer, see Importing and
Exporting Submodel Files.
To export a submodel
1. In the drawing view, highlight the elements to be exported as a submodel. To
highlight multiple elements, hold down the Shift key while clicking elements.
2. Click the File menu and select ExportSubmodel.
3. In the Select Submodel File to Export dialog box, specify the directory to which
the file should be saved, enter a name for the submodel and click the Save button.
Note:
16-1191
The Save button allows you to save the statistics to a Rich Text file (*.rtf). The
Copy button copies the statistics to the Windows clipboard.
7. Close the Import Summary.
8. When prompted with Do you wish to synchronize the drawing now?, click
Yes to synchronize immediately or No to synchronize later.
16-1192
Oracle Login
This dialog appears when you choose an Oracle Spatial Data source.
Enter the oracle User ID, Password, and Data Source, then click OK.
If you have v3 installed, installing v8 will add a new command to your v3 File>Export
menu. Open the model to be upgraded in v3 and perform the File>Export>Bentley
WaterGEMS Presentation Settings command to obtain a presentation settings file
that can be used when upgrading the model file.
16-1193
Export to Shapefile
Export to Shapefile
It is possible to export model elements and data to create a shapefile. Unlike the other
export features in Bentley WaterGEMS V8i , the export to shapefile operation occurs
in a FlexTable as opposed to the File > Export menu. Shapefiles must be created one
element type at a time. That means there will be a separate shapefile to junctions,
pipes, tanks, etc.
To create a shapefile, open the FlexTable for the type of element. Use selection sets or
filtering to reduce the size of the FlexTable to what is desired in the shapefile. Use the
table edit feature to eliminate any columns that are not desired.
When FlexTable is in correct form, pick the first button at the top left of the table
which is the Export button. A drop down list will appear, pick Export to Shapefile.
The user is asked for the name of shapefile and path. When the user names the file and
hits Save, the dialog below appears.
It is important to insure that any shapefile field names are less than or equal to 10
characters. The default name for shapefile field is the name of the column in the
FlexTable. (If the user changes the name to something different from the FlexTable
column name, the editor remembers it when other shapefiles are created from this
table.) Once the names are acceptable, hit OK to create the shapefile. A shapefile
consisting of .dbf, .shx and .shp files are created.
16-1194
Menus
17
File Menu
Edit Menu
Analysis Menu
Components Menu
View Menu
Tools Menu
Report Menu
Help Menu
File Menu
The File menu contains the following commands:
17-1195
File Menu
17-1196
New
Open
Close
Close All
Save
Save As
Save All
ProjectWise
Menus
Import
Export
Page Setup
Print Preview
17-1197
Edit Menu
Project Properties
Recent Files
Exit
Edit Menu
The Edit menu contains the following commands:
17-1198
Undo
Redo
Delete
Select by Polygon
Menus
Select All
Invert Selection
Select by Element
Select by Attribute
Clear Selection
Clear Highlight
Find Element
17-1199
Analysis Menu
Analysis Menu
The Analysis menu contains the following commands:
17-1200
Scenarios
Alternatives
Calculation Options
Totalizing Flow
Meters
Menus
Post Calculation
Processor
Energy Costs
Darwin Calibrator
Darwin Designer
Darwin Scheduler
Criticality
Pressure Zone
Flushing Results
Browser
Calculation Summary
Transient Calculation
Summary
17-1201
Components Menu
User Notifications
Validate
Compute
Components Menu
The Components menu contains the following commands:
Controls
17-1202
Menus
Zones
Patterns
Pressure Dependent
Demand Functions
Unit Demands
Pump Definitions
Minor Loss
Coefficients
Constituents
Valve Characteristics
Engineering Libraries
17-1203
View Menu
View Menu
The View menu contains the following commands:
17-1204
Element Symbology
Background Layers
Network Navigator
Selection Sets
Queries
Prototypes
Menus
FlexTables
Graphs
Profiles
Contours
Named Views
Aerial View
Properties
Customizations
Auto-Refresh
Refresh Drawing
17-1205
View Menu
Zoom
17-1206
Pan
Toolbars
Reset Workspace
Menus
Tools Menu
The Tools menu contains the following commands:
Active Topology
Selection
ModelBuilder
TRex
SCADAConnect
Skelebrator
Skeletonizer
LoadBuilder
Thiessen Polygon
17-1207
Tools Menu
17-1208
Demand Control
Center
Scenario Comparison
Hyperlinks
Menus
Database Utilities
17-1209
Report Menu
Layout
External Tools
Options
Report Menu
The Report menu contains the following commands:
17-1210
Element Tables
Scenario Summary
Project Inventory
Report Options
Menus
Help Menu
The Help menu contains the following commands:
Bentley WaterGEMS
V8i Help
Welcome Dialog
Bentley Institute
Training
Bentley Professional
Services
Bentley SELECT
Support
Bentley Communities
Bentley.com
About Bentley
WaterGEMS V8i
17-1211
Help Menu
17-1212
Technical Reference
18
18-1213
An event or condition at one point in the system can affect all other parts of the
system. While this complicates the approach that the engineer must take to find a solution, there are some governing principles that drive the behavior of the network,
including the Conservation of Mass and Energy Principle, and the Energy Principle.
The two modes of analysis are Steady-State Network Hydraulics and Extended Period
Simulation. This program solves for the distributions of flows and hydraulic grades
using the Gradient Algorithm.
18-1214
Technical Reference
In hydraulic applications, energy is often represented as energy per unit weight,
resulting in units of length. Using these length equivalents gives engineers a better feel
for the resulting behavior of the system. When using these length equivalents, the state
of the system is expressed in terms of head. The energy at any point within a hydraulic
system is often represented in three parts:
Pressure Head:
p/
Elevation Head:
Velocity Head:
V2/2g
Where:
These quantities can be used to express the headloss or head gain between two locations using the energy equation.
p
V
V
p
-----1 + z 1 + -----1- + h p = -----2 + z 2 + -----2- + h L
2g
2g
Where:
18-1215
hp
hL
The components of the energy equation can be combined to express two useful quantities, which are the hydraulic grade and the energy grade.
18-1216
Technical Reference
QIN t Q OUT t VS
Where:
QIN
QOUT
VS
Conservation of Energy
The conservation of energy principle states that the headlosses through the system
must balance at each point. For pressure networks, this means that the total headloss
between any two nodes in the system must be the same regardless of what path is
taken between the two points. The headloss must be sign consistent with the assumed
flow direction (i.e., gain head when proceeding opposite the flow direction and lose
head when proceeding in the flow direction).
Conservation of Energy
18-1217
The method can directly solve both looped and partly branched networks. This
gives it a computational advantage over some loop-based algorithms, such as
Simultaneous Path, which require the reformulation of the network into equivalent looped networks or pseudo-loops.
Using the method avoids the post-computation step of loop and path definition,
which adds significantly to the overhead of system computation.
The structure of the generated system of equations allows the use of extremely
fast and reliable sparse matrix solvers.
The derivation of the Gradient Algorithm starts with two matrices and ends as a
working system of equations.
A12 = A21T
and
18-1218
Technical Reference
A10 = A01T
A12(i,j) = 1, 0, or -1
fi fi (Qi )
These matrix elements that define known or iterative network state can be used to
compute the final steady-state network represented by the matrix quantities for
unknown flow and unknown nodal head.
Unknown link flow quantities are defined by:
QT = [Q1,Q2, Qp]
HT = [H1, H2 , HN]
18-1219
A second diagonal matrix that implements the vectorized head change coefficients is
introduced. It is generalized for Hazen-Williams friction losses in this case:
R Q n1 1
1 1
n
R2 Q2 2
A 11
...
...
n 1
R P QP P
This yields the full expression of the network response in matrix form:
A 11 A 12 Q A 10H f
0 H
q
A 21
0 dH dq
A 21
with
n1
n2
...
nP
The final recursive form of the Newton-Raphson algorithm can now be derived after
matrix inversion and various algebraic manipulations and substitutions (not presented
here). The working system of equations for each solution iteration, k, is given by:
1
H k 1 (A 21 N 1 A 11 A 12 ) 1 A 21 N 1 (Q k A 11 A 10 H f ) (q A 21Q k )
1
Q k 1 (1 N 1 )Q k N 1 A 11 (A 12 H k 1 A 10 H f )
18-1220
Technical Reference
The solution for each unknown nodal head for each time iteration is computationally
intensive. This high-speed solution utilizes a highly optimized sparse matrix solver
that is specifically tailored to the structure of this matrix system of equations.
Sources:
Todini, E. and S. Pilati, A gradient Algorithm for the Analysis of Pipe Networks,
Computer Applications in Water Supply, Vol. 1Systems Analysis and Simulation,
ed. By Bryan Callback and Chin-Hour Or, Research Studies Press LTD, Watchword,
Hertfordshire, England.
where:
x Hk 1
b A 21 N 1 (Q k A 11 A 10 H f ) (q A 21Q k )
and it can be seen that the nature of the topological matrix components yield a total
working matrix A that is:
Symmetric
Positive definite
Stieltjes type.
18-1221
A LLT
where L is lower triangular with positive diagonal elements. Making the Cholesky
factorization allows the system to be solved in two steps:
y L1b
x (LT ) 1 y
The use of this approach over more general sparse matrix solvers that implement
traditional Gaussian elimination methods without consideration to matrix symmetry is
preferred since performance gains are considerable. The algorithm utilized in this software solves the system of equations using a variant of Choleskys method which has
been optimized to reduce fill-in of the factorization matrix, thus minimizing storage
and reducing overall computational effort.
Pump Theory
Pumps are an integral part of many pressure systems. Pumps add energy, or head
gains, to the flow to counteract headlosses and hydraulic grade differences within the
system.
A pump is defined by its characteristic curve, which relates the pump head, or the
head added to the system, to the flow rate. This curve is indicative of the ability of the
pump to add head at different flow rates. To model behavior of the pump system, additional information is needed to ascertain the actual point at which the pump will be
operating.
The system operating point is based on the point at which the pump curve crosses the
system curve representing the static lift and headlosses due to friction and minor
losses. When these curves are superimposed, the operating point can easily be found.
This is shown in the figure below.
18-1222
Technical Reference
and
h 1 n1
h 2 n 2
Where:
18-1223
18-1224
Constant PowerThese pumps may be useful for preliminary designs and estimating pump size, but should not be used for any analysis for which more accurate results are desired.
Design Point (One-Point)A pump can be defined by a single design point (Hd
@ Qd). From this point, the curves interception with the head and discharge axes
is computed as Ho = 1.33Hd and Qo = 2.00Qd. This type of pump is useful for
preliminary designs but should not be used for final analysis.
Technical Reference
Multiple PointThis option allows you to define a custom rating curve for a
pump. The pump curve is defined by entering points for discharge rates at various
heads. Since the general pump equation, shown below, is used to simulate the
pump during the network computations, the user-defined pump curve points are
used to solve for coefficients in the general pump equation:
Y A (B Q C )
Where:
A,B,C
The Levenberg-Marquardt Method is used to solve for A, B and C based on the given
multiple-point rating curve.
18-1225
Valve Theory
There are several types of valves that may be present in a pressurized system. These
valves have different behaviors and different responsibilities, but all valves are used
for automatically controlling parts of the system. They can be opened, closed, or throttled to achieve the desired result.
Partially opened (i.e., active) to maintain its pressure setting on its upstream side
when the downstream pressure is below this value.
Closed if the pressure on the downstream side exceeds that on the upstream side
(i.e., reverse flow is not allowed).
18-1226
Technical Reference
Chezys Equation
Chezys equation is rarely used directly, but it is the basis for several other methods,
including Mannings equation. Chezys equation is:
Q CA RS
Where:
18-1227
Colebrook-White Equation
The Colebrook-White equation is used to iteratively calculate for the Darcy-Weisbach
friction factor:
Free Surface:
1
k
2.51
= - 2 log
+
f
12.0 R Re f
Full Flow (Closed Conduit):
1
k
2.51
= - 2 log
+
3
7
D
.
f
Re f
Where:
Re
Hazen-Williams Equation
The Hazen-Williams Formula is frequently used in the analysis of pressure pipe
systems (such as water distribution networks and sewer force mains). The formula is
as follows:
Q k C A R0.63 S0.54
Where:
18-1228
Technical Reference
Darcy-Weisbach Equation
Because of non-empirical origins, the Darcy-Weisbach equation is viewed by many
engineers as the most accurate method for modeling friction losses. It most commonly
takes the following form:
hL = f
L V2
D 2g
Where:
hL
For section geometries that are not circular, this equation is adapted by relating a
circular sections full-flow hydraulic radius to its diameter:
D = 4R
Where:
RS
f
18-1229
Where:
The Swamee and Jain equation can then be used to calculate the friction factor.
f =
1.325
2
ln e
+ 5.74 0.9
3.7 D
Re
Where:
Re
The friction factor is dependent on the Reynolds number of the flow, which is dependent on the flow velocity, which is dependent on the discharge. As you can see, this
process requires the iterative selection of a friction factor until the calculated
discharge agrees with the chosen friction factor.
18-1230
Technical Reference
Mannings Equation
Note:
Mannings equation, which is based on Chezys equation, is one of the most popular
methods in use today for free surface flow. For Mannings equation, the roughness
coefficient in Chezys equation is calculated as:
Ck
R1/ 6
n
Where:
Substituting this roughness into Chezys equation, you obtain the well-known
Mannings equation:
Q
k
A R2 / 3 S1/ 2
n
Where:
18-1231
Minor Losses
Minor losses in pressure pipes are caused by localized areas of increased turbulence
that create a drop in the energy and hydraulic grades at that point in the system. The
magnitude of these losses is dependent primarily upon the shape of the fitting, which
directly affects the flow lines in the pipe.
hm K
V2
2g
Where:
hm
Typical values for fitting loss coefficients are included in the Fittings Table.
Generally speaking, more gradual transitions create smoother flow lines and smaller
headlosses. For example, the figure below shows the effects of entrance configuration
on typical pipe entrance flow lines.
18-1232
Technical Reference
C
C
--------i = u i --------i + r C i
t
x
Where:
Ci
ui
Ci x = 0 =
jI k Q j C j x = L + Q k ext C k ext
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- jI k Qj + Qk ext
18-1233
Where:
Ik
Lj
Length of link j
Qj
Qk,ext
Ck,ext
Ci|x=0
Ci|x=L
Vs Cs
------------------- =
t
Where:
18-1234
i I s Q i C i x = L i
j O s Qj Cs + r Cs
Vs
Cs
Is
Os
Technical Reference
r = kC
Where:
Reaction constant
Reaction order
When a limiting concentration exists on the ultimate growth or loss of a substance, the
rate expression becomes:
For n > 0, Kb > 0:
R = K b C L C C
n 1
R = K b C C L C
Where:
n 1
CL
Limiting concentration
R = Kb C
The decay of many substances, such as chlorine, can be modeled adequately as a
simple first-order reaction.
First-Order Saturation Growth
(CL > 0, Kb > 0, n = 1)
R = Kb CL C
18-1235
R = Kb C CL C
This model assumes that substance A reacts with substance B in some unknown ratio
to produce a product P. The rate of disappearance of A is proportional to the product of
A and B remaining. CL can be either positive or negative, depending on whether either
component A or B is in excess, respectively. Clark (1998) has had success in applying
this model to chlorine decay data that did not conform to the simple first-order model.
Michaelis-Menton Decay Kinetics
(CL > 0, Kb < 0, n < 0)
Note:
Kb C
R = ----------------CL C
As a special case, when a negative reaction order n is specified, Bentley WaterGEMS
V8i will utilize the Michaelis-Menton rate equation, shown above for a decay reaction. (For growth reactions the denominator becomes CL + C.) This rate equation is
often used to describe enzyme-catalyzed reactions and microbial growth. It produces
first-order behavior at low concentrations and zero-order behavior at higher concentrations. Note that for decay reactions, CL must be set higher than the initial concentration present.
Koechling (1998) has applied Michaelis-Menton kinetics to model chlorine decay in a
number of different waters and found that both Kb and CL could be related to the
waters organic content and its ultraviolet absorbance as follows:
K b = 0.32 UVA
1.365 100UVA
-------------------------DOC
C L = 4.98UVA 1.91DOC
18-1236
Technical Reference
Where:
UVA
DOC
Zero-Order Growth
(CL = 0, Kb = 1, n = 0)
R = 1.0
This special case can be used to model water age, where with each unit of time the
concentration (i.e., age) increases by one unit.
The relationship between the bulk rate constant seen at one temperature (T1) to that at
another temperature (T2) is often expressed using a vant Hoff-Arrehnius equation of
the form:
Kb2 = Kb 1
Where:
T2 T1
Constant
In one investigation for chlorine, q was estimated to be 1.1 when T1 was 20 deg. C
(Koechling, 1998).
2k w k f C
r = ------------------------R kw + kf
18-1237
Where:
kw
kf
Pipe radius
For zero-order kinetics, the reaction rate cannot be any higher than the rate of mass
transfer, so:
r = MIN k w k C 2 R
f
Where:
kw
Mass/area/time
D
k f = Sh ---d
Where:
Pipe diameter
In fully developed laminar flow, the average Sherwood number along the length of a
pipe can be expressed as:
0.0668 d L ReSc
Sh = 3.65 + -------------------------------------------------------------23
1 + 0.04 d L ReSc
Where:
Re
Reynolds number
Sc
For turbulent flow, the empirical correlation of Notter and Sleicher (1971) can be
used:
Sh = 0.0149Re
18-1238
0.88
Sc
13
Technical Reference
System of Equations
When applied to a network as a whole, Equations 1-3 represent a coupled set of differential/algebraic equations with time-varying coefficients that must be solved for Ci in
each pipe i and Cs in each storage facility s. This solution is subject to the following
set of externally imposed conditions:
Initial conditions that specify Ci for all x in each pipe i and Cs in each storage
facility s at time 0
Boundary conditions that specify values for Ck,ext and Qk,ext for all time t at
each node k which has external mass inputs
Hydraulic conditions which specify the volume Vs in each storage facility s and
the flow Qi in each link i at all times t.
18-1239
Time t
2
1
3
Time t + t
1
3
18-1240
Technical Reference
Engineers Reference
This section provides you with tables of commonly used roughness values and fitting
loss coefficients.
Minimum
Normal
Maximum
a. Brass, smooth
0.009
0.010
0.013
0.010
0.012
0.014
0.013
0.016
0.017
1. Coated
0.010
0.013
0.014
2. Uncoated
0.011
0.014
0.016
1. Black
0.012
0.014
0.015
2. Galvanized
0.013
0.016
0.017
1. Subdrain
0.017
0.019
0.021
2. Storm drain
0.021
0.024
0.030
b. Steel
c. Cast iron
d. Wrought iron
e. Corrugated metal
18-1241
Engineers Reference
(mm)
(ft.)
0.0015
0.000005
0.004
0.000013
0.0048
0.000016
0.045
0.00015
0.045
0.00015
0.12
0.0004
Galvanized iron
0.15
0.0005
0.26
0.00085
0.18
0.0006
0.36
0.0012
0.60
0.002
0.9 ~ 9.0
0.003 - 0.03
Corrugated metal
45
0.15
Asbestos Cement
140
Brass
130-140
Brick sewer
100
Cast-iron
18-1242
Technical Reference
Hazen-Williams Roughness Coefficients (C)
Pipe Material
New, unlined
130
10 yr. Old
107-113
20 yr. Old
89-100
30 yr. Old
75-90
40 yr. Old
64-83
140
Wooden forms
120
Centrifugally spun
135
Copper
130-140
Galvanized iron
120
Glass
140
Lead
130-140
Plastic
140-150
Steel
Coal-tar enamel, lined
145-150
New unlined
140-150
Riveted
110
Tin
130
110-140
120
18-1243
Engineers Reference
Darcy-Weisbach
Roughness Height
k (mm)
k (0.001 ft.)
Asbestos cement
0.011
140
0.0015
0.005
Brass
0.011
135
0.0015
0.005
Brick
0.015
100
0.6
Cast-iron, new
0.012
130
0.26
0.85
Steel forms
0.011
140
0.18
0.6
Wooden forms
0.015
120
0.6
Centrifugally spun
0.013
135
0.36
1.2
Copper
0.011
135
0.0015
0.005
Corrugated metal
0.022
45
150
Galvanized iron
0.016
120
0.15
0.5
Glass
0.011
140
0.0015
0.005
Lead
0.011
135
0.0015
0.005
Plastic
0.009
150
0.0015
0.005
Coal-tar enamel
0.010
148
0.0048
0.016
New unlined
0.011
145
0.045
0.15
Riveted
0.019
110
0.9
Wood stave
0.012
120
0.18
0.6
Concrete:
Steel
18-1244
Technical Reference
K Value
Pipe Entrance
Fitting
K Value
90 Smooth Bend
Bellmouth
0.03-0.05
Bend Radius / D = 4
0.16-0.18
Rounded
0.12-0.25
Bend Radius / D = 2
0.19-0.25
Sharp-Edged
0.50
Bend Radius / D = 1
0.35-0.40
Projecting
0.80
ContractionSudden
Mitered Bend
= 15
0.05
D2/D1 = 0.80
0.18
= 30
0.10
D2/D1 = 0.50
0.37
= 45
0.20
D2/D1 = 0.20
0.49
= 60
0.35
= 90
0.80
ContractionConical
D2/D1 = 0.80
0.05
D2/D1 = 0.50
0.07
Line Flow
0.30-0.40
D2/D1 = 0.20
0.08
Branch Flow
0.75-1.80
ExpansionSudden
Tee
Cross
D2/D1 = 0.80
0.16
Line Flow
0.50
D2/D1 = 0.50
0.57
Branch Flow
0.75
D2/D1 = 0.20
0.92
45 Wye
ExpansionConical
D2/D1 = 0.80
0.03
D2/D1 = 0.50
0.08
D2/D1 = 0.20
0.13
Line Flow
0.30
Branch Flow
0.50
18-1245
Ensure adequate quantity and quality service of the potable water resource to the
community
Perform vulnerability studies to assess risks that may be presented and affect the
water supply.
For these purposes, a model is constructed in which data describing network elements
of pipes, junctions, valves, pumps, tanks, and reservoirs are assembled in a systematic
manner to predict pipe flow and junction hydraulic grade lines (HGL) or pressures
within a water distribution system.
Computer models are significant investments for water companies. To ensure a good
investment return and correct use of the models, the model must be capable of
correctly simulating flow conditions encountered at the site. This is achieved by calibrating the models. A calibration involves the process of adjusting model characteristics and parameters so that the models predicted flows and pressures match actual
observed field data to some desirable or acceptable level. This is described in more
detail in Walski, Chase and Savic (2001).
Calibration of a water distribution model is a complicated task. There are many uncertain parameters that need to be adjusted to reduce the discrepancy between the model
predictions and field observations of junction HGL and pipe discharges. Pipe roughness coefficients are often considered for calibration. However, there are many other
parameters that are uncertain and affect junction HGL and pipe flow rate. To minimize
errors in model parameters and eliminate the compensation error of calibration parameters (Walski 2001), you should consider calibrating all the model parameters, such as
junction demand, operation status of pipes and valves, and pipe roughness coefficients.
18-1246
Technical Reference
Calibrating water distribution network models relies upon field measurement data,
such as junction pressures, pipe flows, water levels in storage facilities, valve settings,
pump operating status (on/off), and pump speeds. Among all the possible field observation data, junction HGL and pipe flows are most often used to evaluate the goodness-of-fit of the model calibration. Other parameters, such as tank levels, valve
settings, and pump operating status/speed are used as boundary conditions that are
recorded when collecting a set of calibration observations of junction pressures and
pipe flow rates.
Field observation data are measured and collected at different times of the day and at
various locations on site, which may correspond to various demand loadings and
boundary conditions. In order for the model simulation results to more closely represent observed data, simulation results must use the same demand loading and
boundary conditions as observed data. Thus, the calibration process must be
conducted under multiple demand loading and operating boundary conditions.
Traditional calibration of a water distribution model is based on a trial-and-error
procedure by which an engineer or modeler first estimates the values of model parameters, runs the model to obtain a predicted pressure and flow, and finally compares the
simulated values to the observed data. If the predicted data does not compare closely
with the observed data, the engineer returns to the model, makes some adjustments to
the model parameters, and calculates it again to produce a new set of simulation
results. This may have to be repeated many times to make sure that the model
produces a calibrated prediction of the water distribution network in the real world.
The traditional calibration technique is, among other things, quite time consuming.
In addition, a typical network representation of a water network may include hundreds
or thousands of links and nodes. Ideally, during the water distribution model calibration process, the roughness coefficient is adjusted for each link and demand is
adjusted for each node. However, only a small percentage of representative sample
measurements can be made available for the use of model calibration due to the
limited financial and labor requirements for data collection. Therefore, it is of utmost
importance to have a comprehensive methodology and efficient tool that can assist the
engineer in achieving a highly accurate model under practical conditions, including
various model parameters such as pipe roughness, junction demand, and link status,
and also multiple demand and boundary conditions.
Calibration Formulation
An optimized calibrator is formulated and developed for facilitating the calibration
process of a water distribution model. The parameters are obtained by minimizing the
discrepancy between the model-predicted and the field-observed values of junction
pressures (hydraulic grades) and pipe flows for given boundary conditions. The optimized calibration is then defined as a nonlinear optimization problem with three
different calibration objectives.
18-1247
Calibration Objectives
The goodness-of-fit of model calibration is evaluated by the discrepancy between the
model simulated and field measured junction HGL and pipe flow. The goodness-of-fit
score is calculated by using a user-specified fitness-point-per-hydraulic head for junctions and fitness-point-per-flow for pipes. This allows a modeler to flexibly weight the
evaluation of both pipe flow and junction hydraulic head. Three fitness functions are
defined as follows:
Objective Type One: Minimize the Sum of Difference Squares
2
NF
Fsimnf Fobsnf
Hsimnh Hobsnh
w
wnf
nh
Hpnt
Fpnt
np 1
nf 1
NH NF
NH
minimize
nh
minimize
np 1
Fsimnf Fobsnf
Hsimnh Hobsnh NF
wnf
Hpnt
Fpnt
nf 1
NH NF
minimize
Where:
NH
Fsimnf Fobsnf
Hsimnh Hobsnh NF
max max wnh
, max wnf
nf 1
Hpnt
Fpnt
nh 1
18-1248
Technical Reference
Where:
Calibration Constraints
Optimized calibration is conducted by satisfying two type constraints, the hydraulic
system constraints and calibration parameter bound constraints. The system
constraints are a set of implicit equations that ensure the conservation of flow continuity at nodes and energy for the loops within a water distribution system. Each trial
solution generated by the GA is analyzed using Bentley WaterGEMS V8i hydraulic
network solver.
The calibration bound constraints are used to set the minimum and maximum limits
for the pipe roughness coefficients and junction demand multiplier. They are given as
follows.
i 1,2,3,..., nPipeGroup
i 1,2,3,..., nDemandGroup
Pipes that have the same physical and hydraulic characteristics are allowed to be
grouped as one calibration link, and one new roughness coefficient or one roughness
coefficient multiplier is assigned to all the pipes in the same group. Junctions that have
the same demand patterns and within a same topological area can also be aggregated
as one calibration junction to which a same demand multiplier is calculated and
assigned. Calibration parameters are bounded by prescribed upper and lower limits
and adjusted with a user-prescribed incremental value. For example, a Hazen-Williams C value for a pipe or a group of pipes will be computed within a range of 40 to
18-1249
18-1250
Technical Reference
maximum benefit. The cost effective design and/or rehabilitation solution is determined by the least cost, the maximum benefit, or the trade-off between the cost and
benefit. You can select any one of three optimization models to best suit your project
needs.
18-1251
0
i d i D = d m m = 1 DC
Design Action:
0
k e k E = e m m = 1 EC
18-1252
Technical Reference
DP
C cnew =
Ck dk Lk
k=1
Where:
Lk
RP
C rehab =
ck (dk,ek)Lk
k=1
Where:
Lk
RP
For the pipes that are grouped into one design link, the same pipe size or rehabilitation
action will be applied to the pipes.
Benefit Functions
The goal of a water system design is to maximize the value, or benefit, of the system
while reducing the cost of the system. Minimizing cost alone may result in the
smallest pipe sizes, which leads to the minimum-capacity design. The least capacity is
not the preferable solution for long term system planning; some extra pipe capacity is
beneficial to allow the supply to grow into its full capacity within a planning horizon
to account for uncertainty in demands and to meet the need for reliability in case of
outages.
The true benefit of water system design is to reliably supply service of adequate water
quantity and quality. Provision of sufficient water supply must be ensured for a
community not only at the present time but also in a reasonable planning horizon.
During this planning period, the amount of water required for a system, or the
18-1253
18-1254
Technical Reference
Dimensionless Pressure Benefit: The pressure improvement for dimensionless benefit
is proposed as a ratio of pressure difference between
the actual pressure and a user-defined reference
pressure. The benefit is normalized by the junction
demand (JQ). The factors are also introduced to
enable a modeler to convert and customize the
hydraulic benefit function.
ND
HYbenefit =
k=1
( P - P ref )
i ,k
i ,k
a
P ref
JQtotal
k
i= 1
i ,k
NJ
JQi ,k
a and b
NJ
ND
JQi,k
JQtotalk
Pi,k
Pref
Where:
18-1255
NJ
ND
Pavg =
Pi ,k - Pi ,ref
k
i= 1
NJ
k=1
min
Di
max
di Di
d i D i = {d i1 , d i2 d i n}
Junction-Pressure Constraint:
min
max
H i j H i j H i j
18-1256
t i = 1 NJ ;
j = 1 NDM
Technical Reference
Where:
Hi,j
NJ
Hmin
Hmax
NDM
max
V i j H i j
t i = 1 NP ;
,
max
HG i j HG i j
Where:
j = 1 NDM
t i = 1 NP ; j = 1 NDM
Vi,j
Vmax
NP
HGi,j
HGmax
min
V i j V i j ,
t i = 1 NP ; j = 1 NDM
18-1257
C total Fund
max
18-1258
Technical Reference
factors or constraint limits. The more combinations of weighting factors or constraint
limits, the more optimization runs are required, the greater the computational cost. In
contrast, multi-objective genetic algorithm concurrently optimizes all the objective
functions in one run without any fix-up on objective functions. It provides an effective
method for handling multi-objective optimization.
The goal of single-objective optimization is to search for an optimal solution. Multiobjective optimization has two goals during the search process. One goal is to find a
set of Pareto-optimal solutions as close as possible to Pareto-optimal front. The
second goal is to maintain a set of Pareto-optimal solutions as diverse as possible.
Searching for Pareto-optimal solutions is certainly the primary task for multi-objective optimization. A solution of single-objective optimization problem is evaluated by
the objective value, which directly contributes to the fitness of the corresponding
genotype solution. However, the fitness of a solution for multi-objective optimization
problem is determined by the solution dominance that can be defined as the number of
solutions dominated among the current population of solutions. The stronger the
dominance, the greater the fitness is assigned to a solution. While identifying Paretooptimal solutions is important, maintaining the diversity of Pareto-optimal solutions is
also essential. Dealing with multi-objective optimization, such as minimizing cost and
maximizing benefit for a water distribution system, it is anticipated that optimal tradeoff solutions are found and uniformly distributed for the entire range of cost budget.
This is normally achieved by using a method of fitness sharing or solution clustering.
To effectively solve the problem of cost-benefit trade-off optimal design, as formulated in the early section, fast messy genetic algorithm (Goldberg et al. 1993) has been
extended to handle the multi-objective functions. The multi-objective fast messy GA
has been integrated with Bentley WaterGEMS V8i hydraulic network solver. The
integrated approach (Wu et al. 2002) provides a powerful design optimization tool to
assist hydraulic engineers to practically and efficiently design a water distribution
system. It offers capability of three levels of optimization design analysis, including
minimum cost design, maximum benefit design and cost-benefit trade-off design optimization.
18-1259
f x 1 x 2 x 3 = x 1 + x 2 + 10
x3
Where, x1, x2 and x3 directly take a bit value as an integer from left to right. In
general, a short similarity template that contributes an above-average fitness is called
a building block. Building blocks are often contained in short strings that represent
partial solutions to a specific problem. Thus, searching for good solutions uncovers
and juxtaposes the good short strings, which essentially designate a good solution
region, and finally leads a search to the best solution.
Goldberg et al. (1989) developed the messy genetic algorithm as one of the competent
genetic algorithm paradigms by focusing on improving GAs capability of identifying
and exchanging building blocks. The first-generation of the messy GA explicitly
initializes all the short strings of a desired length k, where k is referred as to the order
of a building block defined by a short string. For a binary string representation, all the
combinations of order-k building blocks require a number of initial short strings of
length k for an l-bit problem:
k l
n = 2 --
k
For example, the initial population size of short strings, by completely enumerating
the building blocks of order 4 for a 40-bit problem, is more than one million. This
made the application of the first-generation messy GA to a large-scale optimization
problem impossible. This bottleneck has been overcome by introducing a building
block filter procedure (Goldberg et al. 1993) into the messy GA. The filter procedure
speeds up the search process and is called a fast messy GA.
The fast messy GA emulates the powerful genetic-evolutionary process in two nested
loops, an outer loop and an inner loop. Each cycle of the outer loop, denoted as an era,
invokes an initialization phase and an inner loop that consists of a building block
filtering phase and a juxtapositional phase. Like a simple genetic algorithm, the messy
GA initialization creates a population of random individuals. The population size has
to be large enough to ensure the presence of all possible building blocks. Then a
building block filtering procedure is applied to select better-fit short strings and reduce
the string length. It works like a filter so that bad genes not belonging to building
blocks are deleted, so that the population contains a high proportion of short strings of
good genes. The filtering procedure continues until the overall string length is reduced
to a desired length k. Finally, a juxtapositional phase follows to produce new strings.
During this phase, the processed building blocks are combined and exchanged to form
offspring by applying the selection and reproduction operators. The juxtapositional
18-1260
Technical Reference
phase terminates when the maximum number of generations is reached, and the cycle
of one era iteration completes. The length of short strings that contains desired
building blocks is often specified as the same as an era, starting with one to a
maximum number of era. Because of this, preferred short strings increase in length
over outer iterations. In other words, a messy GA evolves solutions from short strings
starting from length one to a maximum desired length. This enables the messy GA to
mimic the natural and biological evolution process that a simple or one cell organism
evolves into a more sophisticated and intelligent organism. Goldberg et al. (1989,
1993) has given the detail analysis and computation procedure of the messy GA.
18-1261
For each time step, the water horsepower added by each pump is
determined based on the flow and head at the start of the time step using
WP = k Q h
where WP = water power, = specific weight of fluid,
Q = flow, h = pump head, k = unit conversion factor.
The pump efficiency is determined from the pump efficiency
curve based on the flow rate (and speed for variable speed pump) and the pum
efficiency is used to determine the brake power (motor output power) using
BP = WP/ep
where BP = brake power, ep = pump efficiency (as decimal).
The motor and pump efficiency are combined to give the wire
to water efficiency as
eww = ep em
where eww = wire to water (overall) efficiency, em = motor efficiency.
The motor efficiency includes an inefficiency caused by the variable
speed drive which is a function of relative speed of the motor.
The wire (input) power is given as
IP = BP/em
where IP = input (wire) power.
The duration of the time step is used to determine the energy used as
Eng = IP t.
18-1262
Technical Reference
Where Eng = energy used during time step, t = time step duration.
The cumulative energy used is determined as
CumEng(i) = CumEng(i-1) + Eng(i)
where CumEng(i) = cumulative energy used at end of i-th time step.
The energy cost during a time step is calculated as
EngCost = Eng * p
where EngCost = energy cost, p = unit price of energy.
The cumulative energy cost is determined as
CumEngCost(i) = CumEngCost(i-1) + EngCost(i)
where CumEngCost(i) = cumulative energy cost to end of i-th time step.
The unit cost for energy per volume pumped is determined as
UnitCost = Engcost/(Q )
where Unit cost = energy cost per volume pumped.
18-1263
Water Power
Water power is the power associated with the water itself and is a function of the fluid
characteristics, the gain in head, and the rate of discharge.
PW = g H Q
18-1264
Technical Reference
Where:
PW
Water power
Fluid density
Gravitational acceleration
Change in head
Discharge rate
PW
Water power
PB
Brake power
ep
Pump efficiency
In other words, the pump efficiency represents the ability of the pump to transfer
power from the pump itself to the water. The pump efficiency varies over the operating range of the pump, so it is important to model pump efficiency as closely as
possible to ensure an accurate representation of your system.
PB
Brake power
PM
Motor power
em
Motor efficiency
In other words, the motor efficiency represents that ability of the motor to transfer
power from the electrical lines to the pump itself. For most pumps, the motor efficiency can be considered to be constant over the whole operating range of the pump.
18-1265
For example, if a motor has an efficiency of 90% (0.90) and the variable speed drive
has an efficiency of 85% (0.85) at the speeds being used, then the motor efficiency
should be entered as 76.5% (0.765).
Note:
You are encouraged to find the drive efficiency data for the specific drive that is being
used. See Variable Speed Drive Efficiencyon page 18-1266 for some typical data
for variable speed drive efficiency found in the report, Operations and Training
Manual on Energy Efficiency in Water and Wastewater Treatment Plants, TREEO
Center, University of Florida, 1986.
Variable Speed Drive Efficiency
Percent of Full
Speed
Variable
Frequency Drive
Eddy Current
Coupling
Hydraulic
Coupling
100
83
85
83
90
82
78
75
70
81
59
56
50
76
43
33
These corrections should not be made to alternatives with constant speed pumps. If
you are performing an analysis to compare constant and variable speed pumps, you
should set up two alternatives: one for the constant speed pump and a second for the
variable speed pump.
Energy
Energy is a representation of the ability to do work and is related to power by:
E=Pt
18-1266
Technical Reference
Where:
Energy (kW-hours)
Power (kW)
Time (hours)
Although water energy and pump energy could be calculated, the motor energy is the
primary consideration for water distribution systems because this is the energy that the
utility is billed for.
Cost
There are several different methods that an electrical provider may use to bill for their
energy. The most common bases of billing are:
Storage Considerations
Tank storage can have a considerable effect on the estimated energy costs for a
system. As tanks fill or drain, they also act as an energy (and therefore cost) storage
element. If a tank is full when a simulation begins and empty when it ends, there is an
energy deficitat some point the pumps will need to operate again in order to
replenish the tank. Likewise, if a tank begins empty and fills over the course of a
simulation, that represents an energy credit when the total daily cost is calculated.
18-1267
Improved system performance during emergency water usage events such as fires
and main breaks,
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i variable speed pumping feature will allow designers to
make better decisions by empowering them to fully evaluate the advantages and
disadvantages associated with VSPs for their unique application.
Within Bentley WaterGEMS V8i there are two different ways to model VSPs
depending on the data available to describe pump operations. The relative speed factor
is a unitless number that quantifies the rotational speed of the pump drive shaft. 1) If
the relative speed factor (or for EPS simulations a series of factors) is known, a pattern
based VSP can be used. 2) If the relative speed factor is unknown, it can be estimated
using the VSP with Bentley WaterGEMS V8i new Automatic Parameter Estimation
eXtension (APEX).
18-1268
Technical Reference
Pattern Based VSPsThe variable speed pumping model lets you adjust pump
performance using the relative speed factor. A single relative speed setting or a
pattern of time varying relative speed factors can be applied to the pump. This is
especially useful when modeling the operation of existing VSPs in your system.
The Affinity Laws are used to adjust pump performance according to the relative
speed factor setting.
See Pump Theory for more information about pump curves.
VSPs with APEXAPEX can be used in conjunction with the VSP model to
estimate an unknown relative speed setting sufficient to maintain an operating
objective. APEX uses an explicit algorithm to solve for unknown parameters
directly (Boulos and Wood, 1990). This technique has proven to be powerful,
robust, and computationally efficient for estimation of network parameters and
has been improved to allow use for steady state and extended period simulations.
To use APEX for estimating relative speed factors, the control node and control
level setting for the pump must be selected and the pump curve and operating
range for the pump must be defined. The following paragraphs provide guidelines
for performing these tasks.
Setting the Target HeadThe control node target head is the constant elevation
of the hydraulic grade line (HGL) that the VSP will attempt to maintain. The
target head at the control node must be within the physical limitations of the VSP
as it has been defined (pump curve and maximum speed setting). If the target head
is greater then the maximum head, the pump can generate at the demanded flow
rate the pump will automatically revert to fixed speed operation at the maximum
relative speed setting, and the target head will not be maintained.
18-1269
Setting the Maximum Relative Speed FactorFor flexible operation, a variable speed drive and pump should be configured such that it can efficiently
operate over a range of speeds to satisfy the pressure and flow requirements it will
be subject. The value selected for the maximum relative speed factor depends on
the normal operating range of the drive motor. To set the proper maximum value,
you must determine the drive motors normal operating speed and maximum
operating speed (the maximum speed at which the drive motor normally operates,
not the speed at which the drive catastrophically fails). The relative speed factor is
defined as the quotient of the current operating speed and the normal operating
speed. Thus the maximum relative speed factor is the maximum operating speed
of the drive divided by the normal operating speed. For example, a maximum relative speed factor of 2.0 means that the maximum speed is two times the normal
operating speed, and a maximum relative speed factor of 1.0 means that the
maximum operating speed is equal to the normal operating speed.
Defining the Pump CurveIn order to determine the relative speed factor using
APEX, the pump curve must be smooth and continuously differentiable; thus a
one point or three point power function curve definition must be used. For best
results, the curve should be defined for the normal operating speed of the pump
(corresponding to a relative speed factor equal to 1.0, regardless of the maximum
speed setting).
18-1270
Technical Reference
fore, the interactions between VSPs and controls can be rather complex. We have tried
to the extent possible to simplify these interactions while maintaining the power and
flexibility to model real world behaviors. The paragraphs that follow describe guidelines for defining simple and logical controls with VSPs.
Pattern based VSPsThe pattern of relative speed factors specified for a VSP
takes precedence over all simple and logical control commands. Therefore, the
use of controls with pattern based VSPs is not recommended. Rather, the pattern
of relative speed factors should be defined such that control objectives are implicitly met.
VSPs with APEXA VSP can be switched into any one of three different states.
When the VSP is On, the APEX will estimate the relative speed sufficient to
maintain a constant pressure head at the control node. When the VSP is Off, the
relative speed factor and flow through the pump are set to zero, and the pressure
head at the control node is a function of the prevailing network boundary and
demand conditions. When the control state of a VSP is Fixed Speed Override, the
pump will operate at the maximum speed setting and the target head will no
longer be maintained. The Temporarily Closed state for a VSP indicates that the
check valve (CV) within the pump has closed in response to prevailing hydraulic
conditions, and that the target head cannot be maintained. The VSP control node
can be specified at any junction node or tank in a network model. As described
below, however, the behavior of simple and logical controls depends on the type
of control node selected.
Junction NodesWhen the VSP control node type selected is a junction node,
the VSP will behave according to some automatic behaviors in addition to the
controls defined for the pump. If the head at the control node is above the target
head, the pump state will automatically switch to Off. If the head at the control
node is less then the target head, the pump state will automatically switch to On.
The VSP will automatically switch into and out of the Fixed Speed Override and
Temporarily Closed states in order to maintain the fixed head at the control node
and prevent reverse flow through the pump. Additional controls can be added to
model more complex use cases.
TanksWhen the VSP control node is a tank, you must manage the state of the
pump through control definitions, allowing for flexible modeling of the complex
control behaviors that may be desired for tanks. If a VSP has a state of On, the
pump will maintain the current level of the tank. For example, at the beginning of
a simulation, if a VSP has status of on it will maintain the initial level of the tank.
As the simulation progresses and the pump happens to turn off, temporarily close,
or go into fixed speed override, the level in the tank will be determined in
response to the hydraulic conditions prevailing in the network. When the VSP
turns on again, it will maintain the current level of the tank, not the initial level.
Thus control statements must be written that dictate what state the pump should
switch to depending on the level in the tank. A pump station with a VSP and a
fixed-speed pump operating in a coordinated fashion can be used to model tank
drain and fill operations.
18-1271
Principles
The equations derived below are based on the following principles. The equations
below are for two pipes but can be extended to n pipes.
18-1272
Technical Reference
For pipes in series:
Qr = Q1 = Q2
where Q = flow, r refers to the resulting pipe, and 1 and 2 refer to the pipes being
removed.
hr = h1 + h2
For pipes in parallel:
Qr = Q1 + Q2
and
hr = h1 = h2
As long as the units are consistent, then any appropriate units can be used. For
example, if the diameters are in feet, then the resulting diameter will be in feet.
Hazen-Williams Equation
KL Q 1.85
------------ ---h =
4.87 C
D
K depends on the units but cancels out in equivalent pipe calculations.
Series Pipes
For series pipes, the length is based on the sum of the lengths.
Solved for C:
0.54
Lr
-----------2.63
Dr
C r = ------------------------------------------------------Li
0.54
----------------------------
4.87 1.85
Di Ci
Solved for D:
18-1273
0.205
Lr
--------------0.38
Cr
D r = ----------------------------------------------------------Li
0.205
------------------------------
4.87 1.85
Di Ci
Parallel Pipes
Solved for C:
0.54
Lr
C r = ------------2.63
Dr
2.63
Ci Di
-----------------0.54
Li
Solved for D:
L 0.54
r
D r = ----------- C
r
2.63 0.38
C i D i
------------------0.54
Li
Mannings Equation
KL n Q
h = ----------------------5.33
D
Series Pipes
Solved for n:
2 0.5
2.66
Dr
n r = -------------
0.5
Lr
Li n
i
-----------5.33
Di
Solved for D:
18-1274
Technical Reference
0.188
L n2
r r
D r = ------------------------
2
Li n
r
------------
5.33
Di
Parallel Pipes
Solved for n:
2.66
Dr
------------0.5
Lr
n r = -----------------------2.66
Di
------------0.5
Li n
Solved for D:
0.5
Dr = Lr n
2.66 0.376
D i
------------0.5
L i n
Darcy-Weisbach Equation
KLfQ
h = ----------------5
D
It is the roughness knot fthat is a property of the pipe. While f behaves well, the
roughness can take on negative values in the parallel pipe case. Therefore, only solutions for D will be developed.
18-1275
1.325
f = --------------------------------------------------k
5.74 2
ln ------------ + -------------
3.7D
0.9
Re
where
VD
Re = -------
must be selected so that the units cancel. Typical values are 1.00e-6 m2/s or 1.088e5 ft.2/sec.
Series Pipes
0.2
Lr ff
D r = --------------------
L i f i
---------
Di
Parallel Pipes
18-1276
Technical Reference
D r = Lr f r
Di
--------------------
0.5
Li f i
2.5
2 0.2
Check Valves
For series pipes, if any pipe has a check valve, then the resulting pipe will have a
check valve. For parallel pipes, if both pipes have check valves, then the resulting pipe
will have a check valve.
The degenerative case is when one of the parallel pipes has a check valve. This should
not happen in terms of good engineering. If it does, the parallel pipes should not be
combined and a warning message should be issued.
Minor Losses
For pipes in series, the minor loss coefficients should be added. The differences in
diameter between the original pipe and the resulting pipe should be negligible. You
should be given the option to ignore minor losses in series pipes.
For pipes in parallel, you should be given the option to ignore minor losses, not skeletonize pipes with significant minor losses (e.g., if total Km > 100) or account for them
as a change in diameter.
One possible short heuristic for handling minor losses in parallel pipes is to realize
that you are splitting the minor loss over two pipes. If the pipes are roughly the same
length, roughness, and diameter, then the minor loss coefficient will be cut approximately in half. I worked through the math for coming up with an equivalent minor loss
coefficient and its a mess. Using half the minor loss coefficient isnt exactly correct,
but it pretty much accounts for things.
Numerical Check
To check the equations, run through examples of each. Solve for head loss in each pipe
individually and then combine to see how the head loss in the equivalent pipe
compares for series pipes and for parallel, see how the flow compares. Stick with the
SI units (i.e., flow in m3/s, D, L and h in m).
Series
Use Q = 1 m3/s and solve for head loss. Pipe 1 is the dominant pipe.
18-1277
Pipe 1
Pipe 2
Resulting,
solve for D
Resulting,
solve for
C,n
Length
100
80
180
180
Diameter
0.75
0.88
0.75k,
0.855n
100
120
100
71
0.002
0.0015
0.002
0.013
0.012
0.013
0.0197
h (Hazen)
0.21
0.49
0.72
0.72
h (Manning)
0.17
0.55
0.72
0.72
h (Darcy)
0.20
0.58
0.77
Parallel
Use head loss = 1 m and solve for Q.
Comparison between the Sum of the Flows from the Two Pipes and
the Flow from the Equivalent Pipe
18-1278
Pipe 1
Pipe 2
Resulting,
solve for D
Resulting,
solve for
C,n
Length
100
80
100
100
Diameter
0.75
0.88
1.18n, 1.21k
100
120
100
163
0.002
0.0015
0.002
Technical Reference
Comparison between the Sum of the Flows from the Two Pipes and
the Flow from the Equivalent Pipe (Contd)
Pipe 1
Pipe 2
Resulting,
solve for D
Resulting,
solve for
C,n
0.013
0.012
0.013
0.0083
Q (Hazen)
2.31
1.47
3.74
3.77
Q (Manning)
2.40
1.35
3.72
3.75
Q (Darcy)
2.26
1.31
3.55
Nave Method
A Thiessen polygon of a site, also called a Voronoi region, is the set of points that are
closer to the site than to any of the other sites.
Let P = {p1, p2,pn} be the set of sites and V = {v(p1), v(p2),v(pn)} represent the
Voronoi regions or Thiessen polygons for Pi, which is the intersection of all of the half
planes defined by the perpendicular bisectors of pi and the other sites. Thus, a nave
method for constructing Thiessen Polygons can be formulated as follows:
18-1279
18-1280
Technical Reference
c. Add to Q any intersection of h with its immediate upper half hyperbola and its
immediate lower half parabola on L.
d. Mark (qt) as a Voronai vertex incident to h(pi, pj), h(pi, pk), and h.
7. Repeat all half hyperbolas ever listed on L, all the Voronai vertices marked in the
preceding step, and the incidence relations among them.
The sweepline algorithm is an efficient technique for constructing a Thiessen polygon.
The computation time required for the worst case is O(nlog n). It produces a far more
competent method than the nave method and provides satisfactory performance for
generating Thiessen polygons for a large number of points.
18-1281
Use Cases
In 1994, the Dutch water authority posted the guideline for water companies to evaluate the level of water supply while coping with calamity events. A tentative guideline
requirement is that a water system must meet 75% of the original demand for the
majority of customers and no large group of customers (2000 resident addresses)
should receive less than 75% of their original demand.
The guideline is applicable to all the elements between the source and tap in a water
system and is required to find the effect of every element. In order to calculate the
water supply level under a calamity event, a hydraulic modeling approach is proposed:
1. Take one element at a time out of a model, copying the calamity event of element
outage
2. Run the model for peak hours of all demand types and also the peak hours of tank
filling. The actual demand needs to be modeled as a function of pressure; the
supply is considered unaffected if the pressure is above the required pressure
threshold
3. Evaluate the water supply level for each demand node. If there is less than 2000
resident customers receiving less than 75% of the normal demand, then the
requirement is met. Repeat Step 1 to simulate another calamity event. If the
requirement is not met, continue with step 4.
4. Perform 24 hours pressure dependent demand simulation for the maximum
demand day under the calamity even
5. Sum up the actual demand for each node over 24 hours
6. Check if there is any node where the totalized demand over 24 hours is less than
75% of the maximum day demand; if not, the guideline is met. Otherwise an
appropriate system improvement needs to be identified in order to meet the guideline.
UK water companies are required by law to provide water at a pressure that will,
under normal circumstances, enable it to reach the top floor of a house. In order to
assess if this requirement is satisfied, companies are required to report against a
service level corresponding to a pressure head of 10 meters at a flow of 9 liters per
minute. In addition, water companies are also required to report the supply reference
for unplanned and planned service interruptions.
Both use cases provide some generality for water utilities world wide to evaluate the
performance of water systems under emergency and low pressure conditions. An
emergency event can be specified as one set of element outages. In order to quantify
the water supply level under such an event, the demand must be modeled as a function
of nodal pressure. Hydraulic model needs to be enhanced to perform pressure dependent demand simulation and to compute the level of certainty/supply level.
18-1282
Technical Reference
Si , j
Qis, j
Qi
100%
This gives the percentage of the demand that a system supplies to node i under
calamity event j. The key is to calculate the actual supply demand Qis under the outage
that may cause lower than required junction pressure. The less the demand, the greater
the impact the calamity is on the system supplied capacity and the more critical the
element is to the system.
Qis H i
Qri H ri
H t
H ri
Hi 0
0 Hi Ht
Hi Ht
Where:
18-1283
A typical PDD power function is illustrated below. The actual demand increases to the
full requested demand (100%) as pressure increases but remains constant after the
pressure is greater than the pressure threshold, namely the percent of pressure
threshold is greater than 100%.
Demand Deficit
When a calamity event is modeled, the total supplied demand may be less than the
normal required demand. The difference between the calculated demand and the
normal required demand is a demand deficit that is evaluated under a prescribed
supply level threshold. The total system demand deficit under one possible calamity
event j:
18-1284
Technical Reference
Q j (Qi Qis, j )
i 1
when Si , j St
Q j
Where
is the deficit demand at event j and St is the threshold of supply level.
This formula provides the method for evaluating water supply level, element criticality, and modeling pressure dependent demand.
Solution Methodology
The key solution methodology is how to solve for the pressure dependent demand.
Conventionally, nodal demand is a known value. Applying the mass conservation law
to each node and energy conservation law to each loop, the network hydraulics solution can be obtained by iteratively solving a set of linear and non-linear equations. A
unified formulation for solving network hydraulics is given as a global gradient algorithm (GGA).
A21 ... 0 H q
Where Q is the unknown pipe discharge and H is the unknown nodal head. q is the set
of nodal demand that is not dependent on the nodal head H.
For pressure dependent demand, the demand is no longer a known value but a function
of nodal pressure. The solution matrix becomes:
18-1285
D11 ... A 12 dQ dE
... ... ... ... ...
A21 ... D22 dH dq
The difference from the original GGA is the new diagonal matrix D22, which is the
deviation of A22 of pressure head H.
1
Hi
D22 (i, i )
Qi
Pt
0
Pi s 0
0 Pi s Pt
Pi s Pt
The modified GGA is to calculate D22 for each pressure dependent demand node and
add at A(i, i) as follows:
where j denotes the pipe j that is connected with node i. This notation is the same as
the EPANET2 engine code.
18-1286
Technical Reference
...
References
Babovic V., Wu Z. Y. & Larsen L. C., Calibrating Hydrodynamic Models by Means
of Simulated Evolution, in Proceeding of Hydroinformatics, Delft, Netherlands,
pp193-200, 1994.
Benedict, R. P., Fundamentals of Pipe Flow, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York,
1980.
Brater, Ernest F. and Horace W. King, Handbook of Hydraulics, McGraw-Hill Book
Company, New York, 1976.
Boulos, P. F. and D. J. Wood, Explicit Calculation of Pipe-Network Parameters,
Journal of Hydraulic Engineering, ASCE, 116(11) 1329-1344, 1987.
Cesario, A. Lee, Modeling, Analysis, and Design of Water Distribution Systems,
AWWA, 1995.
Clark, R.M., Chlorine demand and Trihalomethane formation kinetics: a secondorder model, Journal of Environmental Engineering, Vol. 124, No. 1, pp. 16-24,
1998.
Clark, R. M., W. M. Grayman, R. M. Males, and A. F. Hess, Modeling Contaminant
propagation in Drinking Water Distribution Systems, Journal of Environmental
Engineering, ASCE, New York, 1993.
Cohon, J.L., Multi-objective Programming and Planning. Academic Press, New York,
1978.
Computer Applications in Hydraulic Engineering, Fifth Edition, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Press, 2002.
CulvertMaster Users Guide, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Methods, 2000.
18-1287
References
Dunlop, E.J., WADI Users Manual, Local Government Computer Services Board,
Dublin, Ireland, 1991.
Essential Hydraulics and Hydrology, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Press, 1998.
FlowMaster PE Version 6.1 Users Guide, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Methods,
2000.
George, A. & Liu, J. W-H., Computer Solution of Large Sparse Positive Definite
Systems, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1981.
Goldberg, D.E., Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning.
Addison Wesley, Reading, MA, 1989.
Goldberg, D. E., Korb, B., & Deb, K., Messy genetic algorithms: Motivation, analysis, and first results, Complex Systems, 3, 493-530, 1989.
Goldberg, D. E., Deb, K., Kargupta, H., & Harik G., Rapid, Accurate Optimization of
Difficult Problems Using Fast Messy Genetic Algorithms, IlliGAL Report No.
93004, Illinois Genetic Algorithms Laboratory, University of Illinois at UrbanaChampaign, Urbana, IL 61801, 1993.
Hamam, Y.M., & Brameller, A., Hybrid method for the solution of piping networks,
Proc. IEE, Vol. 113, No. 11, pp. 1607-1612, 1971.
International Conference on Computer Applications for Water Supply and Distribution, Leicester Polytechnic, UK, September 8-10.
Koechling, M.T., Assessment and Modeling of Chlorine Reactions with Natural
Organic Matter: Impact of Source Water Quality and Reaction Conditions, Ph.D.
Thesis, Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering, University of Cincinnati, Cincinnati, Ohio, 1998.
Lingireddy, S. and D.J. Wood, Improved Operation of Water Distribution Systems
Using Variable Speed Pumps, Journal of Energy Engineering, ASCE, 124(3) 90-103,
1998.
Liou, C.P. and Kroon, J.R., Modeling the propagation of waterborne substances in
distribution networks, J. AWWA, 79(11), 54-58, 1987.
Males R. M., W. M. Grayman and R. M. Clark, Modeling Water Quality in Distribution System, Journal of Water Resources Planning and Management, ASCE, New
York, 1988.
Notter, R.H. and Sleicher, C.A., The eddy diffusivity in the turbulent boundary layer
near a wall, Chem. Eng. Sci., Vol. 26, pp. 161-171, 1971.
18-1288
Technical Reference
Osiadacz, A.J., Simulation and Analysis of Gas Networks, E. & F.N. Spon, London,
1987.
Practical Guide to Hydraulics and Hydrology, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Press,
1997.
Roberson, John A., John J. Cassidy, and Hanif M. Chaudhry, Hydraulic Engineering,
Houghton Mifflin Company, Massachusetts, 1988.
Roberson, John A. and Clayton T. Crowe, Engineering Fluid Mechanics 4th Edition,
Houghton Mifflin Company, Massachusetts, 1990.
Rossman, Lewis A., EPANet Users Manual (AWWA Workshop Edition), Risk Reduction Engineering Laboratory, Office of Research and Development, USEPA, Ohio,
1993.
Rossman, Lewis A. et al., Numerical Methods for Modeling Water Quality in Distribution Systems: A Comparison, Journal of Water Resources Planning and Management, ASCE, New York, 1996.
Rossman, Lewis A., R. M. Clark, and W. M. Grayman, Modeling Chlorine Residuals
in Drinking-water Distribution Systems, Journal of Environmental Engineering,
ASCE, New York, 1994.
Rossman, L.A., Boulos, P.F., and Altman, T., Discrete volume-element method for
network water-quality models, Journal of Water Resource Planning and Management, Vol. 119, No. 5, 505-517, 1993.
Rossman, L.A., Clark, R.M., and Grayman, W.M., Modeling chlorine residuals in
drinking-water distribution systems, Journal of Environmental Engineering, Vol.
120, No. 4, 803-820, 1994.
Rossman, L.A. and Boulos, P.F., Numerical methods for modeling water quality in
distribution systems: A comparison, Journal of Water Resource Planning and
Management, Vol. 122, No. 2, 137-146, 1996.
Rossman, L.A. and Grayman, W.M., Scale-model studies of mixing in drinking water
storage tanks, Journal of Environmental Engineering, Vol. 125, No. 8, pp. 755-761,
1999.
Salgado, R., Todini, E., & OConnell, P.E., Extending the gradient method to include
pressure regulating valves in pipe networks, Proc. Inter. Symposium on Computer
Modeling of Water Distribution Systems, University of Kentucky, May 12-13, 1988.
Sanks, Robert L., Pumping Station Design, Butterworth-Heinemann, Inc., Stoneham,
Massachusetts, 1989.
18-1289
References
Streeter, Victor L. and Wylie, E. Benjamin, Fluid Mechanics, McGraw-Hill Book
Company, New York, 1985.
Todini, E. and S. Pilati, A Gradient Algorithm for the Analysis of Pipe Networks,
Computer Applications in Water Supply, Volume 1 - Systems Analysis and Simulation,
ed. Bryan Coulbeck and Chun-Hou Orr, Research Studies Press Ltd., Letchworth,
Hertfordshire, England.
Todini, E. & Pilati, S., A gradient method for the analysis of pipe networks, 1987.
Walski, T.M., Model Calibration Data: The Good, The Bad and The Useless, J.
AWWA, 92(1), p. 94, 2000.
Walski, T. M., Understanding the adjustments for water distribution system model
calibration, Journal of Indian Water Works Association, April-June, 2001, pp151157, 2001.
Walski, T.M., Chase, D.V. and Savic, D.A., Water Distribution Modeling, Haestad
Press, Waterbury, CT, 2001.
Walski, Thomas M., Water System Modeling Using CYBERNET, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Methods, 1993.
Wang Q.J., The Genetic Algorithm and its Application to Conceptual RainfallRunoff Models, Water Resources Research, Vol.27, No.9, pp2467-2482, 1991.
Wu Z.Y., Automatic Model Calibration by Simulating Evolution, M.Sc. Thesis,
H.H. 191, International Institute for Infrastructure, Hydraulic and Environmental
Engineering, Delft, Netherlands, 1994.
Wu, Z. Y., Boulos, P.F., Orr, C.H., and Ro, J.J., An Efficient Genetic Algorithms
Approach to an Intelligent Decision Support System for Water Distribution
Networks, in Proceedings of the Hydroinformatics 2000 Conference, Iowa, IW, July
26-29, 2000.
Wu, Z. Y., Boulos P. F., Orr C.-H. and Ro J. J., Rehabilitation of water distribution
system using genetic algorithm, Journal of AWWA, Vol. 93, No. 11, pp74-85, 2001.
Wu Z.Y. & Larsen C.L., Verification of hydrological and hydrodynamic models calibrated by genetic algorithms, Proc. of the 2nd International Conference on Water
Resources & Environmental Research, Vol. 2, Kyoto, Japan, pp175-182, 1996.
Wu, Z. Y. and Simpson A. R., An Efficient Genetic Algorithm Paradigm for Discrete
Optimization of Pipeline Networks, International Congress on Modeling and Simulation, Hobart, Tasmania, Australia, 8-11 December, 1997b.
18-1290
Technical Reference
Wu, Z. Y. and Simpson A. R., Competent Genetic Algorithm Optimization of Water
Distribution Systems, Journal of Computing in Civil Engineering, ASCE, Vol 15,
No. 2, pp89-101, 2001.
Wu, Z. Y. and Simpson A. R., Messy Genetic Algorithm for Optimal Design of Water
Distribution Systems, Research Report, No. 140, Department of Civil & Environmental Engineering, University of Adelaide, South Australia., 1996
Wu, Z. Y and Simpson A. R., Optimal Rehabilitation of Water Distribution Systems
Using a Messy Genetic Algorithm, AWWA 17th Federal Convention Water in the
Balance, Melbourne, Australia, 16-21 March 1997a.
Wu, Z. Y, Walski, T., Mankowski, R., Cook, J. Tryby, M. and Herrin G., Optimal
Capacity of Water Distribution Systems, in Proceeding of 1st Annual Environmental
and Water Resources Systems Analysis (EWRSA) Symposium, Roanoke, VA, May 1922, 2002.
Zipparro, Vincent J. and Hasen Hans, Davis Handbook of Applied Hydraulics,
McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, 1993.
18-1291
References
18-1292
Technical Information
Resources
19
docs.bentley.com
Bentley Services
Bentley Discussion Groups
Bentley on the Web
TechNotes/Frequently Asked Questions
BE Magazine
BE Newsletter
Client Server
BE Careers Network
Contact Bentley Systems
docs.bentley.com
Bentley ServicesBentley Discussion Groups
Bentley on the Web
TechNotes/Frequently Asked Questions
BE Magazine
BE NewsletterClient Server
BE Careers Network
19-1293
docs.bentley.com
docs.bentley.com
docs.bentley.com is your repository of product help files and books. You can browse
through online help for specific information or download it to ensure you have the
most recent help available on your computer. Also through this site, many product
books are available as free, downloadable PDFs, or can be purchased pre-bound with
a credit card.
19-1294
Bentley Services
There are a variety of Bentley Services, including Bentley SELECTR priority services,
one-on-one consulting, training programs, MicroStation resellers, as well as your local
technical support provider.
U.S./Canada/Latin
America
support@bentley.com
Europe/Middle East/
Africa
support@bentley.nl
Asia/Pacific
support@bentley.com.au
Bentley SELECTR
Bentley SELECTR is the comprehensive delivery and support subscription program
that features product updates and upgrades via Web downloads and MySELECT CD,
around-the-clock technical support, exclusive licensing options, discounts on training
and consulting services, as well as technical information and support channels. For
more detailed information go online at http://www.bentley.com and click the Support
link.
Bentley Professional Services
Bentley Professional Services is a team of project managers, technical managers,
application specialists, and developers organized regionally and assigned by skill sets.
By adding their extensive knowledge to your project, they provide customized
services on a one-to-one basis to help you maximize your investment in Bentley technology. For more information visit http://www.bentley.com/Services/ and click the
Bentley Professional Services link.
Bentley Institute
The Bentley Institute manages professional training programs to ensure consistent,
high quality, user training for a variety of Bentley products and for varying levels of
application experience.
Bentley Institute training is developed to maximize your productivity by using examples relevant to your day-to-day project efforts. Training is developed concurrently
with software applications to provide knowledge of the latest tools and features. Additionally, all Bentley Institute faculty meet rigorous certification requirements.
19-1295
BE Magazine
The BE Magazine is a quarterly e-magazine focused on the Bentley community of
users. It serves as a showcase for Bentley users and their work improving the world's
infrastructure.
Each issue is an open forum for the world community of architecture, engineering,
and construction professionals and owner-operators. Visit http://www.be.org and click
the BE Magazine link to subscribe or to view the magazine online.
BE Newsletter
The BE Newsletter is an email newsletter covering industry news, Bentley updates and
events, technical tips, and more. Visit http://www.be.org and click the BE Magazine
link to subscribe or to view the newsletter online.
19-1296
Client Server
Client Server is an online newsletter for Bentley SELECT subscribers. This online
resource is filled with the latest technical news and information.
Archives of Client Server provide an abundant resource of technical information in the form of book excerpts, case studies, commentary and analysis, and
productivity tips. For more detailed information go online to http://
www.bentley.com and click the Support link.
BE Careers Network
The BE (Bentley Empowered) Careers Network is a program dedicated to supporting
accredited academic institutions by providing the latest releases of Bentley products,
as well as world-renowned support, online communities, and the latest engineering
news and information. For details about the BE Careers Network go online at http://
www.becareers.org/.
Sales
Bentley Systems professional staff is ready to answer your questions. Please contact
your sales representative for any questions regarding Bentley Systems latest products
and prices.
Toll-free U.S. Phone:
800-727-6555
Worldwide Phone:
+1-203-755-1666
Fax:
+1-203-597-1488
Email:
sales@bentley.com
Technical Support
19-1297
Name and build number of the Bentley Systems software you are calling about.
The build number can be determined by clicking Help > About Bentley WaterGEMS V8i . The build number is the number in brackets located in the lower-left
corner of the dialog box that opens.
A note of exactly what you were doing when you encountered the problem.
When emailing us for support, please provide the following details, in addition to the
above, to enable us to provide a more timely and accurate response:
If you are emailing us, the Bentley WaterGEMS V8i .log files located in the
product directory (e.g., C:\Documents and Settings\<User Name>\Local
Settings\Application Data\Bentley\<Product Name>\8 (under Windows 2003
Server/XP) or C:\Users\<User Directory>\AppData\Local\Bentley\<Product
Name>\8 (under Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Server 2008).
:Available 24 hours a day, seven days a week. You can contact our technical support
team at: http://selectservices.bentley.com
Addresses
Internet:
http://selectservices.bentley.com
Email:
sales@bentley.com
Mail:
19-1298
Glossary
20
Glossary
ABCDEFGHILMNOPRSTVWX
A
Age:
ArcObjects:
.bak:
Boundary Node:
20-1299
Glossary
Bulk Reaction Coefficient: Coefficient used to define how rapidly a constituent
grows or decays over time. It is expressed in units of 1/
time, for first-order reactions.
C
Calc. Min. System Pressure: Minimum calculated pressure of all junctions in the
system during fire flow withdrawal at a node.
Calc. Min. Zone Pressure: Minimum calculated pressure of all junctions in the same
zone as the node where fire flow withdrawal occurs.
20-1300
Calculation Unready:
C-Coefficient:
Check Valve:
Closed/Inactive Status:
Constituent:
Context Menu:
Control Status:
Conveyance Element:
Glossary
Coordinates:
Coverage:
Crosshair:
CV:
Check valve.
.dgn:
.dwg:
.dwh:
Database Connections:
Dataset:
DBMS:
DEM:
Demand:
Design Point:
20-1301
Glossary
Diameter:
Discharge:
DLG:
Double-Click:
Drag:
Element:
Elevation:
Energy Grade Line (EGL): Sum of datum (base elevation), elevation, velocity head,
and pressure head at a section.
20-1302
EPS:
Extended Edit:
External Files:
Extrapolate:
Glossary
F
Feature Class:
Feature Dataset:
Field Links:
File Extension:
Flow:
From Node:
From Pipe:
20-1303
Glossary
G
GA:
GEMS Datastore:
Genetic algorithm.
The relational database that Bentley WaterGEMS
V8i uses to store model data. Each Bentley
WaterGEMS V8i project uses two main files for data
storage, the datastore (.MDB) and the Bentley
WaterGEMS V8i Modeler-specific data (.wtg).
Although the Bentley WaterGEMS V8i datastore is
an .mdb file, cannot be a geodatabase.
Generations:
Geocode:
Geodatabase:
Headloss:
Headloss Gradient:
Hydraulic Grade:
20-1304
Glossary
Hydraulic Grade Setting:
:Inactive Volume:
Inheritance:
Initial Settings:
Interpolate:
Invert:
Label:
20-1305
Glossary
Layer:
Length:
LIDAR:
.mdb:
.mdk:
Backup of mdb.
Mannings Coefficient:
Material:
Maximum Elevation:
20-1306
Menu:
Messages:
Messages Light:
Glossary
Metadata:
Minimum Elevation:
Minimum System Junction: The junction where the calculated minimum system
pressure occurs.
Minimum System Pressure: The minimum pressure allowed at any junction in the
entire system as result of fire flow withdrawal. If the
pressure at a node anywhere in the system falls below
this constraint while withdrawing fire flow, fire flow will
not be satisfied. A fire flow analysis may be configured
to ignore this constraint.
Minimum Zone Junction:
Minor Loss:
The field that presents the total minor loss K value for a
pipe or valve. If an element has more than one minor
loss, each can be entered individually by clicking the
Ellipsis () button.
Modeler/Stand-Alone:
Mouse Buttons:
.nrg:
20-1307
Glossary
Needed Fire Flow:
Network Element:
Number:
Notes:
.out:
ODBC:
On/Off Status:
Open/Closed Status:
.pv8:
PBV:
Percent Full:
Pipe Status:
20-1308
Glossary
Polyline:
Power:
Pressure:
The field that displays the pressure for the current time
period.
Pressure Setting:
PRV:
PSV:
Pump Status:
.rpc:
RDBMS:
Relate:
Relational Database:
Relational Join:
20-1309
Glossary
Residual Pressure:
Reynolds Number:
Roughness:
Roughness Coefficient:
Schema:
Select:
Selection Set:
Shape:
Shapefile:
A file format that stores spatial and attribute data for the
spatial features within the dataset. A shapefile consists of
a main file, an index file, and a dBASE table. Shapefiles
were the standard file storage format for ArcView 3.x and
earlier.
Shutoff Point:
Size:
20-1310
Glossary
Spatial Reference:
Stand-Alone/Modeler:
Starting Elevation:
Status Pane:
Storage Node:
Table Links:
TCV:
To Node:
To Pipe:
20-1311
Glossary
Total Needed Fire Flow:
Trials:
Valve Status:
Velocity:
Vertex:
.wtg:
wtg.mdb:
Wall Reaction Coefficient: Defines the rate at which a substance reacts with the wall
of a pipe, and is expressed in units of length/time.
20-1312
Glossary
Bentley WaterGEMS V8i
Datastore:
WaterGEMS V8i File Types:The following lists different types of files that can be
used with WaterGEMS V8i.
.bak backup of most files
GEMS Data Store modeling data
Geodatabase topology (in ArcGIS version)
.dwh, .dgn, .dwg drawing information in stand-alone,
Microstation, AutoCAD
.mdk backup of mdb
.out complete results by scenario
.rpc scenario messages
.nrg energy cost results
.pv8 previous version for files upgraded to new
.xml used for libraries
WaterObjects:
Water Quality:
The field that displays the water quality for the current
time period.
.xml:
20-1313
Glossary
20-1314
Symbols
Symbols
%u 1057
.BAK 972
.MDB 972
A
About Bentley System 1293
About Bentley Systems 1293
about dialog box 9
accelerated redraw 362
accuracy 595
action
rehabilitation 948
actions tab 836
Active Topology 843
active topology 718, 843
Active Topology Alternative 718
active topology alternative 718
active topology child alternative 718
add a background layer 306
add a background layer folder 305
add a FlexTable folder 1084
add a help topic 7
add or remove a button 31
Add To Selection Set dialog box 479
Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons 30
Adding Annotations 1056
adding annotations 1056
adding color coding 1062
Adding Color-Coding 1062
adding design option groups 945
adding elements 456
Adding Folders 1056
address
See contacting Bentley Systems. 1298
Addresses 1298
Adjustment groups 894
Advantages of Automated Scenario Management 693
advective transport 1233
advective transport in pipes 1233
affinity laws 1223
After One Branch Collapsing 658
After Two Branch Collapsing 659
1-1315
A
Age 1299
age
alternative 724
analysis 786
Age Alternatives 724
air valve 436
alarm 401
Allocation strategies 608
alternative 697
Alternative Editor Dialog Box 715
Alternative Editor dialog box 715
Alternative Manager 713, 718
Alternatives 712
alternatives 66, 693, 713
base 716
child 716
creating 716
editing 717
hydrology 723
initial conditions 722
merge 713
overview 693, 712
analysis
constituent 787
fire flow 781, 782
hydraulic 746, 747, 748, 1214
trace 788
water age 786
water quality 786, 787, 788
Analysis Menu 1200
Analysis menu 1200
Analysis Toolbar 13
Analysis toolbar 13
analyzing improvement suggestions 705
Animating Profiles 1081
animating profiles 1081
Animation Control Manager 748
Animation Controls 1076
animation options 750
Animation Options Dialog Box 750
Animation Options dialog box 750
Annotating Your Model 1051
annotation 87, 88
annotation properties 1058
Annotation Properties dialog box 1058
annotations 1051, 1052, 1058
%u 1057
1-1316
A
adding 1056
deleting 1057
displaying units 1057
editing 1057
renaming 1057
Application Window Layout 9
Apply Demand and Pattern to Selection Dialog Box 638
apply minor losses 682
applying a zone to a junction 395
applying a zone to a pump 402
applying a zone to a reservoir 401
applying a zone to a tank 400
applying a zone to a valve 416
applying an HGL pattern to a reservoir 402
Applying Elevation Data 593
applying minor losses to a valve 417
applying zone to hydrant 396
ArcCatalog 336
ArcCatalog Geodatabase Components 336
ArcEdit 334
ArcGIS 334, 335
integration 334
ArcGIS Applications 336
ArcGIS applications 336
ArcGIS Integration 334
ArcGIS Integration with WaterGEMS 335
ArcInfo 334
ArcMap 336
ArcMap client 337
ArcObjects 1299
ArcSDE 592
ArcView 334
assigning demands to a junction 394
Attribute 697
Attribute Inheritance 700
attributes
editing 466
scenario 697
AutoCAD 312, 313, 323, 324
commands 321, 330
drawing synchronization 328
entities 321, 330
integrating with SewerGEMS 324
undo/redo 332
AutoCAD Mode 312
AutoCAD mode 312, 313, 323, 324
graphical layout 316
1-1317
B
menus 325
project files 327
toolbars 326
Autodesk 312, 323
automated scenario management 693
automated skeletonization 652
Automated Skeletonization Techniques 655
Available Fire Flow 1299
Average Day Conditions 702
B
backflow preventer 779
background layer 306, 307
background layer files
using with ProjectWise 380
background layer folder 305, 306
Background Layer manager 302
Background Layers 302
background layers 302
deleting 307
dxf files 311
editing 307
image compression 309
shapefiles 310
supported image types 302
backing up your model 689
base alternative 713
Base alternatives 716
base alternatives 716
Base and Child Scenarios 708
base elevation 1300
Base Elevation & Level 1299
Base Scenarios 708
Batch Assign Isolation Valves dialog box 461
batch pipe split 464
batch run 669, 710, 711
Batch Run Editor Dialog Box 712
Batch Run Editor dialog box 712
Batch Runs 710
batch runs 710
Batch Split Pipe dialog box 463
BE Careers Network 1297
BE Magazine 1296
BE Newsletter 1296
Before Branch Collapsing 658
1-1318
B
Bend command 460
benefit 950, 966
cost versus benefit 966
design objectives 951
maximize 956
Pareto 964, 966
total 959
versus cost 964
benefit function 1251, 1253, 1254, 1255
dimensionless pressure benefit 1255
unitized 1255
benefit type 951
benefits
pressure 1254
Bentley discussion groups 1296
Bentley Institute 1295
Bentley Professional Services 1295
Bentley SELECT 8, 1295
Bentley services 1295
Bentley Systems 1293
addresses 1297
contacting 1297
email addresses 1298
program update 8
Web site 1298
Bentley Water 1191
Bernoulli equation 1215
Billing Meter aggregation 610
Border Editor dialog box 1154
border properties for graphs 1154
Border tool 453
border tool 452
Boundary Node 1299
boundary node 1300
Boundary Overrides 891
Boundary Overrides tab 891, 931
boundary polygon feature classes 634
brake power 1265
Branch Collapsing 658
branch collapsing
See Skelebrator. 655
Branch Trimming 655
branch trimming 655, 658, 676
browse topics 6
buffering point area percentage 633, 634
build number 9
building cost function 975
1-1319
C
bulk flow reactions 1235
bulk reaction
coefficient 1300
Bulk Reaction Coefficient 1300
C
C coefficient 1228, 1300
CAD 300
Calc. Min. System Pressure 1300
Calc. Min. Zone Pressure 1300
Calc. Residual Pressure 1300
calculating cost 976
calculation
unready 1300
Calculation Summary 1182
calculation summary 1182
Calculation Summary Graph Series Options dialog box 1183
Calculation Unready 1300
calculator 413
calibration 760, 764, 884
calibration constraints 1249
Calibration Criteria tab 896
Calibration export to scenario dialog 911
calibration formulation 1247
calibration manager 884
Calibration Nodes 598
calibration nodes 598
calibration objectives 1248
calibration options 897
calibration options formulae 897
Calibration Solutions 908
Calibration Studies 886
Calibration Study 887
C-Coefficient 1300
Change Series Title dialog box 1161
change the position of a background layer 307
changing the drawing view 293
Changing Units, Format, and Precision in FlexTables 1089
characteristic curve
pump 1223
pumps 1222, 1223
Chart Options 1115
Chart Options Dialog Box 1115
Chart Options dialog box 1115
Chart Tab 1116
1-1320
C
Export tab 1151
Print tab 1153
Series Tab 1142
Tools tab 1150
Chart Tools Gallery dialog box 1161
check data 767
check run 758, 763
Check Valve 1300
check valve 1226
check valves 1226
chemical analysis 787
Chezys Equation 1227
Chezys equation 1227, 1231
child alternative
creating active topology 718
Child Scenarios 709
child scenarios 709
Cholesky 1221
clearing element selection 459
Client Server 1297
Closed/Inactive Status 1300
closed-form analytical solutions 761
coefficient 1310
roughness 1310
coefficients
engineers reference 1241
Colebrook-White
equation 1228
typical values 1242
collapse a subtopic 6
collapsing branch
See Skelebrator. 655
collections
minor loss 387
color coding 76, 88, 89, 1060
adding 1062
deleting 1063
editing 1063
renaming 1064
color coding legend 1064
Color Coding Your Model 1060
Color dialog box 1156
Color Editor dialog box 1156
Color-Coding Properties dialog box 1064
column headings
editing for FlexTables 1089
commands (AutoCAD mode) 321, 330
1-1321
C
Compact Database Enabled option 362
comparing cost results 997
competent genetic algorithms 1259
Components Menu 1202
Components menu 1202
Composite Action 839
Composite Condition 835
Composite Logical Action 837
Compress Database command 1209
compressing large database files 362, 1209
Compute Toolbar 16
concentration 787
Concentration (Base) 725
Concentration (Initial) 725
Conditions List 837
Conditions tab 829
conditions tab 829
conjugate gradient method 1221
connection
synchronization 328, 329
Connection Manager 852
Connections manager 543
connectivity
explicit 566
implicit 566
conservation
of mass & energy 1217
consider pressure benefit 938
Constant Area Approximation 439
constant horsepower pump 1224
constant power pump 1224
Constituent 1300
constituent 1300
alternative 725
analysis 787
Constituent Source Type 725
constituents
reactions 1235
Constituents manager 726
constructing a query 520, 1093
consumption node 760
contacting Bentley Systems
email 1298
fax 1298
hours 1298
mail 1298
technical support 1298
1-1322
C
telephone 1298
Context Menu 1300
context menu 1300
contour 1066, 1067, 1068
smoothing 1067, 1068
Contour Browser 1066, 1069
contour labels 332
Contour Manager 1065
contour maps 595
Contour Plot 1068
Contours 1064
control
status 1300
valve 1226
Control Manager 824
Control Sets tab 840
Control Status 1300
Controlling Toolbars 30
controls tab 825
Conveyanc Element 1300
Coordinates 1301
copy FlexTable data 1100
copy graph data 1106
copying
FlexTables 1100
Copying, Exporting, and Printing FlexTable Data 1099
Correct Data Format 568
correcting an error 704
Correlation Graph Dialog Box 910
Correlation Graph dialog box 886
cost 1261, 1267, 1268
design 959
rehabilitation 959
total 959
cost objective functions 1252
cost-benefit trade-off 1251
cost-benefit trade-off optimization 1251
Costs/Properties tab 944
Coverage 1301
create a FlexTable report 1100
create a new Alternative 717
create a new FlexTable 1087
create a new profile 1076
create a new scenario 709
create a new System Head Curve 777
create a new Totalizing Flow Meter 773
create an active topology alternative 719
1-1323
C
create Observed Data 1113
Create Selection Set dialog box 477
creating
graph 1104
Creating a New FlexTable 1087
Creating a Project Inventory Report 1102
creating a query 519
Creating a Scenario Summary Report 1102
Creating Alternatives 716
creating alternatives 716
Creating an Active Topology Child Alternative 718
creating dynamic 477
creating queries 520, 1093
creating reports 1101
Creating Scenarios 709
creating selection sets 477
criticality analysis 797
cross section of a variable area tank 400
Cross Section Type 1301
Crosshair 1301
Current Storage Volume 1301
curve
pump 1222, 1223, 1224
curved pipes 460
custom AutoCAD entities 321, 330
custom extended
pump 1225
Custom Queries 855
custom results path 3
custom sort 1094
Customization Editor 537
customize
drawing 326
customize a graph 1174
customizing
FlexTables 1095
Customizing a Graph 1174
customizing graphs 1174
Customizing Managers 34
Customizing the Toolbars 30
customizing toolbars and buttons 30
Customizing WaterGEMS Toolbars and Buttons 30
Customizing Your FlexTable 1095
cut probability 904
CV 1301
1-1324
D
Darcy Weisbach
Colebrook-White equation 1228
equation 1229, 1230
roughness values 1242
Darcy-Weisbach equation 1229, 1275
Darwin 884
Darwin calibration 902
Darwin Calibrator dialog box 884
Darwin Calibrator methodology 1246
Darwin Calibrator troubleshooting tips 917
Darwin Designer 922
cost-benefit trade-off 1251
least cost 1251
maximum benefit 1251
Darwin Designer genetic algorithm 1250
Darwin Designer methodology 1250
Darwin Designer theory 1250
Darwin manager 884
dashed line 462
data
check 767
entry 37
organization 712
validation 767
data check 758, 763
Data Format Needs Editing 568
data logging 762
Data Scrubbing 655
data scrubbing 655, 657
data source tables 568
data types for user data extensions 532
Database Connections 1301
Database Utilities 1209
Dataset 1301
DBMS 1301
DDF 601
DE Geodatabase 566
dead-end pipes 655
decay
second order 1236
simple first order 1235
decimal point 469
default units 370
default workspace 34
1-1325
D
defining pump settings 402
defining user data extensions 527
delete a background layer 307
delete a background layer folder 306
delete a FlexTable folder 1084
deleting
FlexTables 1087
Deleting Annotations 1057
deleting annotations 1057
Deleting Background Layers 307
deleting background layers 307
deleting color coding 1063
deleting elements 459
Deleting FlexTables 1087
Deleting Folders 1056
deleting groups of elements in a selection set 479
Deleting Profiles 1080
deleting profiles 1080
DEM 597, 601, 1301
Demand 1301
demand
multipliers 822
Demand Adjustments 892
Demand Adjustments tab 893, 934
demand allocation 607
Demand Alternatives 721
Demand Collection dialog box 395
Demand Control Center 635
demand deficit 1284
Demand Groups 894
demand multiplier 931
demand projection 613
Demand tab 894
design constraints 1256
design costs 944
design event editor 927
design events 954
Design Events tab 927
design group
adding 942
editing 944
design groups 961
Design Groups tab 940, 954
Design Point 1301
design point 1224
design run 953
computing 958
1-1326
D
design study 923
design type tab 950
design variables
Darwin Designer 1252
designer data verification summary 973
Diameter 1302
Digital Elevation Models 598
digital elevation models (DEMs) 595
level one 597
level three 597
level two 597
type A 597
type B 597
type C 597
digital ortho-rectified photogrammetry 595
dimensionless benefit 951, 1255
dimensionless pressure benefit 1255
direct GGA solution 1286
Discharge 1302
discharge 779
discharge coefficient 416
dispersion 1233
display a topic 7
display format 470
Display Precision 469
display precision 469
display topics 6
displaying multiple projects 359
dissolved substance in pipes 1233
Distributed Scenarios 694, 695
DLG 1302
docked dynamic manager 35
docked static manager 35
dominant pipe criteria 679, 681
Double Acting 437
Double Click 1302
Drag 1302
drag 1302
drawing
setup (AutoCAD mode) 326
synchronization (AutoCAD mode) 328
drawing scale 368
drawing style 300
duplicate labels 486
DWG 327
DXF 601
DXF Properties 311
1-1327
E
DXF Properties dialog box 311, 477, 479
Dynamic Inheritance 699
dynamic inheritance 699
E
edit a FlexTable 1089
edit a profile 1079
edit a scenario 710
Edit Hyperlink dialog box 510
Edit Menu 1198
Edit menu 1198
edit the properties of a background layer 307
Edit Toolbar 12
Edit toolbar 12
editable 732
editing
FlexTables 1088
numerous elements at once 1090
Editing Alternatives 717
editing alternatives 717
editing annotations 1057
editing color coding 1063
editing column headings
FlexTables 1089
Editing Column-Heading Text 1089
editing design options groups 945
editing element attributes 466
Editing FlexTables 1088
Editing Scenarios 710
editing scenarios 710
editing units
FlexTables 1089
efficiency
pump 1265
EGL 1216
Element 1302
element
deleting 320
modify 320
moving 321, 331
element label project files 373
element labeling settings 373
element relabeling 1096
Element Symbology Manager 1052
using folders in 1055
1-1328
E
Element Symbology manager 1051
element symbols 300
elements 385
adding in the middle of a pipe 459
adding to your model 456
clearing selection of 459
deleting 457
editing attributes 466
globally editing data in numerous elements 1090
moving 457
overview 385
reporting on 1103
selecting 457
selecting all 458
selecting all of the same type 458
selecting by polygon 457
validation 759, 764
viewing in selection sets 476
elevated tanks 832
Elevation 1302
elevation 1300, 1307
base 1300
calibration nodes 598
determining pressure 593
maximum 1307
obtaining data 595
value 594
Elevation Data 593
elevation data 593
elevation data source 601
email 1298
email address 1298
energy 1261, 1264, 1266, 1267, 1268
conservation 1217
equation 1216
grade line 1216, 1302
principle 1214
Energy Cost Alternative 734, 998
energy cost alternative 734, 735, 998
Energy Cost Analysis Calculations 992
Energy Cost Results 992
energy cost theory 1261
Energy Costs 987
energy costs 987
energy equation 1215
Energy Grade Line (EGL) 1302
Energy Pricing manager 990
1-1329
E
engineering libraries 505, 507
overview 504
sharing on a network 507
working with 505
engineering libraries dialog box 507
Enhanced Pressure Contours 1070
enhanced pressure contours 1070
entering data 466
entities
in AutoCAD 321, 330
enumerated user data extensions 535
Enumeration Editor dialog box 535
EPS 747, 1302
analysis 747, 748
equally distributed 659, 681
equivalent pipe method 679, 681
era generations number 903
error messages 561, 767
errors 768
ESRI ArcGIS Geodatabase functionality 564
estimate 1303, 1307
exclamation point in circle 137
existing loads 659
existing projects 359
exit WaterGEMS 4
expand a subtopic 5
explicit connectivity 566
explode elements (AutoCAD mode) 331
export 1191
export FlexTable data 1100
export to scenario 969
Export to Scenario dialog box 886
exporting
FlexTables 1100
exporting a DXF file 1193
exporting FlexTables 1099
Extended Edit Button 1302
extended edit button 1303
Extended Period Analysis 823
extended period analysis 747
lesson 2 56
External Files 1302
external files 1303
External Tool Manager 846
Extrapolate 1302
extrapolate 1303
1-1330
F
fax 1298
FCV 423
Feature Class 1303
Feature Dataset 1303
field
links 1303
Field Data Snapshots tab 888
Field Links 1303
field measurements 762
File Extension 1303
file format update 972
File Menu 1195
File menu 1195
File Upgrade Wizard 1193
filter
resetting 1093
filter a FlexTable 1092
Filter dialog box 733
filtering a FlexTable 1092
finalizing the project 705
Find 467
Find Logical Action dialog box 837
finding elements 467
fire flow
alternative 728, 729, 732
analysis 781, 782
results 782
theory 781
fire flow checks 784
Fire Flow Results Browser 783, 865
Fire Flow System Data 732
Fire Flow Upper Limit 1303
fire flow upper limit 1307
fire hydrants 871
fire hydrants as flow emitters 874
first order
saturation growth 1236
simple decay 1235
fitness 959
fitness tolerance 903
fitness type 897
fitting loss coefficients 1232, 1245
Fixed Point 470
FlexTable Dialog Box 1085
1-1331
F
FlexTable dialog box 1085
FlexTable Setup Dialog Box 1097
FlexTable Setup dialog box 1097
FlexTables 1082
copying 1099
copying data 1100
creating 1087
customizing 1095
deleting 1087
editing 1088
editing column headings 1089
editing globally 1090
editing units 1089
exporting 1099
exporting data 1100
filtering 1092
global editing 1090
navigating in 1089
opening 1086
ordering columns 1091
printing 1099, 1100
renaming 1088
reports 1100
saving as text 1100
shortcut keys 1089
sorting column order 1091
FlexTables Manager 1082
folders in 1084
FlexTables manager 1082
floating manager 34
Flow 1303
flow 1307
flow arrows 312, 342
flow constraints 938, 962
flow control valve 1226
flow control valves 1226
flow distribution 611
flow emitters 759, 779, 874
flow per fitness point 897
Flow Tolerance 818
folders
in Element Symbology Manager 1055
in FlexTables Manager 1084
format
unit 469
formulas 1241
Francis 427
1-1332
G
Free Form 1059
friction and minor loss methods 1227
From Node 1303
from node 1307
From Pipe 1303
from pipe 1307
G
GA 884, 1249, 1250, 1260, 1261, 1304
Gas Law Model 439
Gaussian elimination method 1222
GEMS Datastore 1304
General 470
general purpose valves 1227
general settings 361
Generations 1304
genetic algorithm
Darwin Designer 1250
genetic algorithms 884, 1250, 1259, 1288, 1290
calibration tips 915
methodology 1246
optimized calibration 899, 1250
optimized calibration advanced options 903
genetic algorithms methodology 1246
Geocode 1304
Geodatabase 1304
Geodatabase feature 564
geodatabase support 564
Geometric data source 540
Geometric Networks 565
GeoTable 340
Getting Started in Bentley WaterGEMS 1
Getting Started with the ArcMap Client 337
GIS
demand allocation 607
GIS Basics 333
GIS style 300
GIS-ID 569, 570
global edit 1091
global edit FlexTable column 1090
global editing
FlexTables 1090
global settings 360
Global tab 361
globally editing data 1090
1-1333
H
GO button 771
GPV 423
grade line
energy 1216
hydraulic 1216
gradient algorithm 1218
derivation 1218
Gradient Editor dialog box 1155
graph
copying and pasting data 1110
data 1110
new 1104
Graph Dialog Box 1106
Graph dialog box 964, 1107
graph dialog box
Darwin Designer 964
Graph Manager 1104
Graph Series Options dialog box 1112
graphical layout
AutoCAD 316
graphing 1104
changing total time period 1105
Graphs 1103
graphs 1103
customizing 1174
printing 1106
grid 601
groundwater well 868
H
Haestad Methods
program update 8
Haestad.log 1298
HAMMER elements 455
Hatch Brush Editor dialog box 1157
Hazen-Williams
typical values 1242
Hazen-Williams equation 1228, 1273
coefficients 1244
roughness values 1242
Hazen-Williams Formula 1228
head 779
head loss 423
head per fitness point 897
Headloss 1304
1-1334
I
headloss 1307
headloss curves for GPVs 418
Headloss Gradient 1304
headloss gradient 1307
Help 20
help files and books 1294
Help Menu 1211
Help menu 1211
Help Toolbar 20
HGL 1216, 1307
HGL setting 1307
high alarm 401
high-speed sensors 762
history of what-if analyses 694
Hydrant Flow Curve editor 397
Hydrant Flow Curve manager 396
hydrant flow curves 396
hydrants 396, 871
hydrants as flow emitters 874
hydraulic analysis 747
hydraulic equivalency 660
Hydraulic Equivalency Theory 1272
Hydraulic Grade 1304
hydraulic grade 1307
hydraulic grade line 1217
Hydraulic Grade Setting 1305
hydraulic grade setting 1307
hydraulically close tanks 871
hydrology alternatives 723
hydropneumatic tank 439, 867
Hydropower Plants 429
hyperlinks 507
I
identifying elements for costing 976
image compression 309
Image Filter 308
Image Properties Dialog Box 308
Image Properties dialog box 308
impeller 1223
implicit connectivity 566
import 572, 577, 581, 1190
import Bentley Water Model 1192
import database 1189
Import dialog box 536
1-1335
J
import observed target 913
import snapshots 912
importing and exporting Epanet files 1190
importing field data 912
importing/exporting skelebrator settings 690
impulse turbine 426
In 1215
Inactive elements 843
inactive pipes 973
Inactive Volume 1305
inactive volume 1307
individual elements
adding to your model 456
inflow 1307
Inflow & Outflow 1305
Inheritance 698, 1305
inheritance 698, 700, 1307
dynamic 699
overriding 699
initial conditions alternative 722
initial conditions of networks 1105
initial flow equals zero 1105
Initial Settings 1305
initial settings 1307
alternative 722
Initial Water Quality 1305
initial water quality 1307
Initialize From Selection set dialog 891
Initialize Table from Selection Set dialog box 952
installation 2
instant load rejection 431
integrating AutoCAD with SewerGEMS 324
integration 335
intermediate node removal 656
Interpolate 1305
interpolate 1307
Invert 1305
invert 1307
Is Constituent Source? 726
isolation valve 462
J
junction conditions and tolerances 687
junction-pressure constraint 1256
junctions 394
1-1336
K
K coefficients 1245
Kaplan 427
KnowledgeBase 8
L
Label 1305
label 1307
labeling elements 469
Lagrangian transport algorithm 1239
LandXML 601
lateral loss 399
laws
affinity 1223
conservation of mass and energy 1217
Layer 1306
layout 41, 42, 43
AutoCAD 316
layout settings 363
layout tool 456
Layout Toolbar 21
Layout toolbar 21
least cost 1251
least cost optimization 1251
legend 1064
Length 1306
length 1307
level 1300
Levenberg-Marquardt method 1225
library types 505
license 1
LIDAR 596, 1306
light 1307
messages 1307
Like operator 524
Line tool 454
line tool 452
linear system equation solver 1221
linear theory method 1218
load acceptance 431
load distribution strategy 676, 681
Load from Model dialog box 952
Load rejection 429
1-1337
M
LoadBuilder 614
manager 614
run summary 627
wizard 615
Local and Inherited Values 700
local and inherited values 700
logical control 828
dialog box 826
manager 824
set editor 841
logical control:
See operational controls alternative.
Logical controls 827
logical controls
overview 823
loop retaining sensitivity 685
loop-based algorithms 1218
losses
friction 1220, 1229
minor 1222, 1227, 1232
low alarm 401
M
mail 1298
Management controls 821
Mannings Coefficient 1306
Mannings coefficient 1307
Mannings equation 1231, 1274
roughness values 1241
typical values 1244
manual cost estimating 974
Manual Design Run 957
Manual Scenarios 696
manual selection 957
manual skeletonization 663, 674
mass conservation 1217
Mass Rate (Base) 725
material 1307
maximize benefit 951
maximum
era number 903
extended operating point 1307
increment 899
number of removal levels 679
number of trimming levels 676
1-1338
M
operating point 1307
trials 903
maximum benefit 1251
maximum benefit optimization 1251
Maximum Day Conditions 703
maximum trials 956
measurements 762
menu
context 1300
Menus 1195
merge
merge
alternatives 713
merging pipes by 682
1-1339
N
modeling pressure dependent demand 1281
modeling tips 867, 876
modeling variable speed pumps 876
modified GGA solution 1286
moment of inertia 433
motor
pump 1264, 1265, 1270
motor and pump inertia 413
move
elements 321, 331
labels 322, 331
move a toolbar 31
moving elements 459
moving toolbars 31
multi-objective genetic algorithms 1258
multi-objective trade-off 951
multiple 780, 878
pump curve 1224, 1225
multiple elements
selecting 457
multiple point pump 1225
multiple projects
maximum number of 358
Multipliers 822
Municipal License Administrator 1
mutation probability 903
N
naive method 1279
named views 470
Naming and Renaming FlexTables 1087
navigating in a FlexTables 1089
Navigating in Tables 1089
network connectivity 566
network hydraulics theory 1213
network navigator 464
network review 464
network topology 759
network walking algorithm 663
New Logical Action dialog box 837
new pipe cost
Darwin Designer 1252
nodal demand vector 1219
node 1300, 1307
boundary 1300
1-1340
O
from 1307
nodes
consumption 760
non-convergence 747
non-improvement generations 903, 956
Notes tab 952, 957
Number 470
number
Reynolds 1310
numerical calibration 760
numerical check 1277
Numerical Value of Elevation 594
O
Observed Data 1113
Observed Target 890
Observed Target tab 890
Obtaining Elevation Data 595
Obtaining elevation data 595
open a manager 34
open Darwin Designer 922
open FlexTables 1086
open Help 5
open the registration dialog box 9
Opening FlexTables 1086
Opening Managers 34
opening managers 34
operation 1091
Operational Alternative 823
operational alternative 723
operational controls alternative 723
optimized calibration 902, 903
options 360
calculation 808
design run 955
Options Dialog Box
ProjectWise settings 374
Options dialog box 361, 366
options groups tab 944
Oracle 591, 592
ordering
FlexTable columns 1091
organize data 712
orifice at branch end 760
orifice demand 759
1-1341
P
orifice to atmosphere 760
orphaning of pipes 657
Outage Segments 799
outflow 1307
output
tables 1082
output data 816
override scenario demand alternative 931
Overriding Inheritance 699
overriding inheritance 699
overview 884
P
Pan tool 293
panning 293
using a mousewheel to 294
parallel 780, 878
Parallel Pipe Merging 661
parallel pipes 869
modeling 869
removal 661, 678
parallel pumps 870
parent scenario 709
Pareto optimal defined 966
pareto plot 964
pattern 818, 820
demand multipliers 820
extended period analysis 748, 823
pattern editor 820
time steps 820
Pattern (Constituent) 726
Pattern Manager 820
patterns 581
PBV 423
peak demands 997
Peak Hour Conditions 704
Pelton 426
physical alternative 720, 721
physical properties 720
pipe 1307
advective transport 1233
diameter 682
dissolved substance 1233
from 1307
length 1307
1-1342
P
material 1307
merging 656
merging same diameters 682
parallel 869
pipe conditions and tolerances 687
pipe elevations
adjustment 757
pipe inventory 1102
pipe material 386
pipe option group
adding 949
pipe size usage plot 964
pipe wall reactions 1237
Pipe-by-pipe 804
pipes 386
modeling with curves 460
splitting 459
pipe-size constraint 1256
plane sweep 1280
point demand assignment 613
Pointer dialog box 1160
polygons
used to select elements 457
Polyline Vertices dialog box 461
PondPack
build number 9
installation 2
upgrade 8
upgrades and updates 2
version number 9
population size 904
power
brake 1265
water 1264
predefined queries 515
Presenting Your Results 1045
preserve network integrity 685
pressure
head 1215, 1216
pressure benefits
Darwin Designer 1254
pressure breaker valve 1226
pressure breaker valves 1226
pressure constraints 936, 961
pressure dependent demand 1283
Pressure Dependent Demands 645
pressure engine 455
1-1343
P
pressure improvement 1255
pressure pipes
adding a minor loss collection to 387
typical values 1244
pressure reducing valves 1226
pressure sustaining valve 1226
pressure sustaining valves 1226
Pressure Threshold 650
pressure vessel 439
pressurized tank 867
principles 1272
print preview
FlexTables 1100
Print Preview Window 1184
printing
FlexTables 1100
Printing a Graph 1106
printing FlexTables 1099
printing graphs 1106
proejct queries 515
profile
editing 1079
profile setup 1072
Profile Viewer 1074
Profile Viewer dialog box 1080
profiles 1070
animating 1081
creating 1076
deleting 1080
renaming 1080
viewing 1080
Profiles manager 1070
Profiles Series Options dialog box 1073
Program Maintenance Dialog Box 8
project
files 317, 327
project inventory 1102
Project Properties dialog box 359
Project tab 366
projection 613
projects 358
ProjectWise 375
closing projects 376
general guidelines for using 375
using background layer files with 380
viewing status 377
ProjectWise options 374
1-1344
Q
properties
editing 466
Property Editor 466
using Find Element 467
proportional to coalesced pipe attributes 659
proportional to dominant criteria 681
proportional to existing load 682
protected elements manager 671
prototypes 498
pump 870
affinity laws 1222
constant horsepower 1224
curve 1222, 1223, 1225
custom extended 1225
efficiency 1265
groundwater well 868
impeller 1223
motor 1264, 1265, 1270
multiple point 1225
operating point 1222, 1223, 1224
parallel 870
series 870
static head 1223
static lift 1222
theory 1222
three point 1224, 1270
type 1224
variable speed 1223
Pump Curve Definitions dialog box 403
Pump Curve dialog box 411, 412
pump curves 577
pump definitions 572
pump results 995
pump settings 402
pump types 411, 412
Pump Usage summary 993
pumps 402, 780, 878
1222
Q
queries 515, 520, 1093
creating 519
in FlexTables 1092
predefined 515
1-1345
R
project 515
shared 515
using Like operator in 524
Queries Manager 515
Query Builder dialog box 521
Query Parameters 518
R
random seed 903
ranking
FlexTable columns 1091
Rasters 601
reaction turbine 427
reactions
bulk flow 1235
read-only 732
reconnect 460
Record Types 597
red circle 137
redo 332
reference
engineers 1241
Reference Pressure 650
References 1287
rehab groups 961
Rehab Groups tab 940, 955
rehabilitation action 948
rehabilitation cost
adding 949
editing 949
rehabilitation function manager
Darwin Designer 950
rehabilitation group
adding 942
editing 944
rehabilitation option group
defining 949
rehabilitation pipe cost
Darwin Designer 1253
relabeling elements 469
relative speed factor 1310
remove orphaned nodes 685
removing elements from selection sets 479
rename a background layer 307
rename a background layer folder 306
1-1346
R
rename a FlexTable folder 1084
rename FlexTables 1088
renaming
FlexTables 1088
renaming annotations 1057
Renaming Folders 1056
Report Menu 1210
Report menu 1210
report options 1102
Report Viewer 886
report viewer 962
Reporting 1101
reporting
on a group of elements in a selection set 479
Reporting Time Step 816
reports 76, 77, 81, 1101
creating for elements 1103
FlexTables 1100
scenario 1102
standard 1101
Representative Scenario 889
re-register 335
reserviors 401
reset
FlexTable filter 1093
reset a filter 1093
Reset Workspace 34
residual pressure 1310
results
Darwin Designer 958
getting results from Darwin Designer 958
Reynolds number 1310
roughness
Chezys equation 1227
coefficient 1241
Colebrook-White equation 1228
Darcy-Weisbach equation 1229
Hazen-Williams equation 1228
Mannings equation 1231
Roughness Groups 894
roughness height 1228, 1230, 1242
Roughness tab 894
roughness values 1241
Colebrook-White 1242
Darcy-Weisbach 1242
Hazen-Williams 1242
Mannings 1241
1-1347
S
typical 1244
rounding of numbers 469
rule based 824
Running Criticality Analysis 800
Running Multiple Scenarios at Once 710
running the model 771
S
saturation growth
first order 1236
SAV 442
SAV Closure Trigger 442
save
as drawing *.DWG 329
saving FlexTables as text 1100
SCADA 762
SCADAConnect 847
Scenario 697
scenario
alternatives 66, 67, 70, 71, 72, 74
child 66, 67, 69, 71, 72
lesson 3 66
Scenario Attributes and Alternatives 697
scenario example 702
Scenario Inheritance 701
Scenario Management 706
Example 702
scenario management 66
Scenario Manager 707, 712
scenario summary 1102
Scenarios 707
scenarios 693, 929
advantages of using 693
attribute inheritance 700
attributes 697
base 708
batch run 710
creating new 709
editing 710
inheritance 698
local and inherited values in 700
overview 693, 696, 707
Scenarios Toolbar 15
Scenarios toolbar 15
schema
1-1348
S
Darwin Designer 972
format 972
Schema Augmentation 972
schema definition 1310
Scientific 470
scrubbing
See Skelebrator. 655
SDTS 596, 601
search for text 7
second order
decay 1236
second-order decay 1236
segmentation 803
select boundary polygon feature class 633
Select dialog box 891
select the point 633
selecting all elements 458
selecting an element 457
selecting elements
all of the same type 458
by polygon 457
selecting multiple elements 457
Selection Set Element Removal dialog box 479
selection sets 472, 473, 477, 479
adding a group of elements to 479
adding elements to 478
creating 477
creating from queries 477
group-level operations 479
in FlexTables 1086
removing elements from 479
viewing elements in 476
Selection Sets Manager 473
Selection tool 22
Self-Contained Scenarios 695
Self-Contained scenarios 695
Series Pipe Merging 659
series pipe merging
See Skelebrator. 657
Series Pipe Removal 656
series pipe removal 656, 659, 680
series pumps 870
set field options 972
Set Field Options dialog box 469
setting options 360
setup 326
Shapefile Properties 310
1-1349
S
Shapefile Properties dialog box 310
Shared Field Specification dialog box 534
shared queries 515
sharing engineering libraries on a network 507
shortcut keys
FlexTables 1089
Show Flow Arrows 312, 342
SHP 601
SI 469
simple first-order decay 1235
Simple Logical Action 837
simultaneous path adjustment method 1218
Skelebrator 657
batch run 669
branch trimming 658, 676
conditions and tolerances 686
data scrubbing 657
parallel pipes removal 661, 678
protected elements manager 671
series pipe removal 659, 680
skeletonization manager 665
skeletonization preview 662
troubleshooting 689
using 664
what it does 663
Skelebrator features 662
Skelebrator Progress Summary dialog box 688
Skelebrator-specific selection sets 671
skeletonization 652
branch trimming 655
data scrubbing 655
example 653
manager 665
network walking algorithm 663
series pipe removal 656
Skelebrator 657
techniques 655
See also Skelebrator.
skeletonization and active topology 692
skeletonization and scenarios 689
Skeletonization Using Skelebrator, Skelebrator, Using Skelebrator 657
Slow Closing 437
Smart Pipe Removal 657, 685
smoothing contours 1067
snap menu (AutoCAD mode) 322, 331
Snapshot Data 889
Software 1294
1-1350
S
software
upgrades 8
Software Updates via the Web and Bentley SELECT 8
solution methodology 1285
solutions 909
solutions to keep 956
solutions to modeling problems 867
sort columns in FlexTable 1091
sort contents of FlexTable 1091
sorting
FlexTable columns 1091
Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data 1091
source
tracing 788
sparse matrix 1218, 1221, 1222
spatial data 566
spatial reference 601
Spatial Reference System 382
speed 780, 878
splice probability 904
split 459
splitting pipes 459
spot elevations 423
SRS 382
stand-alone definition 1311
Stand-Alone Editor 293
standard extended pump 1225
standard reports 1101
Standard toolbar 10
start WaterGEMS 2
Starting Bentley WaterGEMS 2
starting Bentley WaterGEMS 2
starting projects 358
static head
pump 1223
static lift
pump 1222
station 780, 878
statistics 1101
Status Elements 895
Status Elements tab 895
statuses
initial settings 1307
steady state analysis 747
steady-state analyses 747
Stieltjes 1221
stopping criteria 956
1-1351
T
storage 996
storage volume 1307
active 1311
inactive 1307
Stored Prompt Responses dialog box 365
submodel 1190, 1191
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 847
supply level evaluation 1283
support 1298
addresses 1298
hours 1298
surge-anticipator valve 442
Swamee and Jain equation 1230
SWG file 327
symbol
visibility (AutoCAD mode) 326
synchronize (AutoCAD mode) 328
System Head Curve editor 776
System Head Curves 775, 777
System Head Curves manager 775
system of equations 1239
system operating point 1222
T
Table
Properties 1097
Type 1097
table
setup 1097
tables
column headings 1089
editing FlexTables 1088
units 1089
tabular report 1082
tank
hydraulically close 871
hydropneumatic 867
pressurized 867
tanks 399
TCV 423
Technical Support 1297
technical support 1296, 1298
TeeChart Gallery dialog box 1173
text 322, 331
Text tool 453
1-1352
T
text tool 452
the energy principle 1214
The Importance of Accurate Elevation Data 593
The Scenario Cycle 696
The WaterGEMS ArcMap Client 337
theme folders
renaming 1056
theme groups
deleting 1056
theory 1268
network hydraulics 1214
valve 1226
Thiessen polygon generation 629
Thiessen Polygon Generation Theory 1279
three point pump 1224, 1270
Threshold Pressure (SAV) 442
throttle control valve 1226
throttle control valves 1227
Time Details summary 993
Time for SAV to Close 442
Time for SAV to Open 442
time of simulation 1105
Time SAV Stays Fully Open 442
Time Series Field Data 1179
time step 816
selection 758
TIN 601
Toolbars 1212
Tools Menu 1207
Tools menu 1207
Tools Toolbar 25
Tools toolbar 25
top feed/bottom gravity discharge tank 873
top solutions 956
topology 767, 1218
total active volume 1311
total benefit 960
total cost 959
Totalizing Flow Meter Editor 773
Totalizing Flow Meter editor 773
Totalizing Flow Meter manager 772
Totalizing Flow Meter Manager Dialog 772
trace
alternative 727
trace alternative 727
trace analysis 788
transient pressure pulses 763
1-1353
U
transition pressure 438
transport algorithm 1239
transport in pipes 1233
TRex Terrain Extractor 598
TRex terrain extractor 598
TRex Wizard 600
TRex wizard 600
trimming
See Skelebrator. 655
Triple Acting 437
Troubleshooting 8
troubleshooting 768
Darwin Designer 973
knowledge database 8
turbine 433
inertia 433
turbine element reference 433
turn toolbars off 31
turn toolbars on 31
turning toolbars off 31
turning toolbars on 30
two-component second-order decay 1236
U
U.S. customary 469
Understanding Scenarios and Alternatives 693
Understanding shortfalls 801
Unit 469
Unit Demand Collection dialog box 395
Unit Demand Control Center 643
Unit Line Flow Method 627
unit of measurement 469
unitized average pressure 1255
unitized benefit 951
unitized pressure benefit 1255
units 370
displaying in annotations 1057
editing for FlexTables 1089
units and formatting 469
unregister 335
update file format 972
updates 2
updating PondPack via the Web 8
upgrade
PondPack 8
1-1354
V
upgrades 2
upstream node demand proportion 682
use 50/50 split 679
use cases 1282
use equivalent pipes 679, 681
use ignore minor losses 679
use skip pipe if minor loss > max 679
use the Graph Manager 1104
use the index 6
user data
alternative 739
User Data Extensions 739
user data extensions 526
data types 532
enumerated 535
User Data Extensions dialog box 529
User Notification Details dialog box 771
User Notifications 768
user notifications 768, 770
User Notifications Manager 768, 770
user-defined ratio 659, 682
USGS 601
USGS DEM 597
USGS topological maps 595
Using ArcCatalog with a WaterGEMS Database 336
Using Folders in the Element Symbology Manager 1055
Using Profiles 1070
using Skelebrator 664
Using Standard Reports 1101
Using the Totalizing Flow Meter 772
using with SewerGEMS 375
V
vacuum 756
Vacuum Breaker 438
validation 759, 760, 764, 767
valve 423, 1300
check 1300
theory 1226
valve characteristic 421
valve characteristics 419
valve types 415
valves 804
vapor 756
vapor pockets 756
1-1355
W
vapor pressure
adjustment 757
Variable 780, 878
variable elevation curve 441
variable frequency drive 876, 1268
variable frequency drives 1261
variable speed pump 1268
curve equations 1223
efficiency 1266
theory 1268
See also VSP.
Variable Speed Pump Battery 414
variable speed pump theory 1268
variable speed pumps 1223, 1266
vector 601
velocity
head 1217
verification report 973
verification summary 973
version number 9
VFD 876, 1261, 1268
view
tabular 1082
View Menu 1204
View menu 1204
View Toolbar 18
Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables 1082
viewing elements in a selection set 476
Viewing Profiles 1080
viewing profiles 1080
visibility of symbols 326
VLA 423
volume 1307
inactive 1307
total active 1311
VSP 780, 876, 877, 878, 1261, 1269, 1270, 1271, 1272
VSPs 780, 878
W
warning
Darwin Designer 137
warning messages 561
warnings 768
water column separation 756
water main 871
1-1356
Y
water power 1264
water quality
analysis options 785
Water Quality Analysis 785
water quality theory 1233
WaterCAD
custom AutoCAD entities 321, 330
WaterCAD in AutoCAD 312, 323
WaterCAD Managers 34
WaterGEMS Toolbar 338
wave speed 392
adjustments 757
WCD file 317
Web updates 8
Website 1298
Welcome dialog 357
Welcome dialog box 357
well 868
groundwater 868
well groundwater 869
What-If 694
white 732
table columns 1088
window color settings 363
Working in ArcGIS 333
Working with FlexTable Folders 1084
Working with Graph Data
Viewing and Copying 1106
Working with WTG Files 2
World Wide Web
See Web. 8
Y
yellow 732
table cells 1088
Z
zero flow at time 0 1105
zones 386
Zones manager 502
Zoom 297
Zoom Center dialog box 296
Zoom Dependent Visibility 298
1-1357
Z
Zoom Extents 294
Zoom Factor 297
Zoom In 296
Zoom Out 296
Zoom Previous
Zoom Next 297
Zoom Realtime 296
Zoom Toolbar 28
Zoom Window 296
zooming 293
1-1358